This is a modern-English version of An English Grammar, originally written by Baskervill, William Malone, Sewell, James Witt. It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling, and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.

Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.

AN ENGLISH GRAMMAR

FOR THE USE OF

FOR USE OF

HIGH SCHOOL, ACADEMY, AND COLLEGE CLASSES

HIGH SCHOOL, ACADEMY, AND COLLEGE CLASSES

BY

W.M. BASKERVILL

PROFESSOR OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE IN VANDERBILT UNIVERSITY NASHVILLE, TENN.

PROFESSOR OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE AT VANDERBILT UNIVERSITY NASHVILLE, TN

AND

J.W. SEWELL

OF THE FOGG HIGH SCHOOL, NASHVILLE, TENN.

OF THE FOGG HIGH SCHOOL, NASHVILLE, TENN.

1895

1895

PREFACE.

Of making many English grammars there is no end; nor should there be till theoretical scholarship and actual practice are more happily wedded. In this field much valuable work has already been accomplished; but it has been done largely by workers accustomed to take the scholar's point of view, and their writings are addressed rather to trained minds than to immature learners. To find an advanced grammar unencumbered with hard words, abstruse thoughts, and difficult principles, is not altogether an easy matter. These things enhance the difficulty which an ordinary youth experiences in grasping and assimilating the facts of grammar, and create a distaste for the study. It is therefore the leading object of this book to be both as scholarly and as practical as possible. In it there is an attempt to present grammatical facts as simply, and to lead the student to assimilate them as thoroughly, as possible, and at the same time to do away with confusing difficulties as far as may be.

There’s no limit to how many English grammars can be created, nor should there be, until theoretical knowledge and practical use come together more effectively. A lot of valuable work has already been done in this area, but it has mostly been carried out by those who tend to view things from a scholar's perspective, and their writings often target trained individuals rather than inexperienced learners. Finding an advanced grammar that doesn't use complicated words, obscure ideas, or challenging concepts is not easy. These elements make it harder for an average student to understand and absorb grammar facts, leading to a dislike of the subject. Therefore, the main goal of this book is to be both scholarly and practical. It attempts to present grammatical facts in a straightforward way and help students grasp them thoroughly, while also eliminating confusing obstacles as much as possible.

To attain these ends it is necessary to keep ever in the foreground the real basis of grammar; that is, good literature. Abundant quotations from standard authors have been given to show the student that he is dealing with the facts of the language, and not with the theories of grammarians. It is also suggested that in preparing written exercises the student use English classics instead of "making up" sentences. But it is not intended that the use of literary masterpieces for grammatical purposes should supplant or even interfere with their proper use and real value as works of art. It will, however, doubtless be found helpful to alternate the regular reading and æsthetic study of literature with a grammatical study, so that, while the mind is being enriched and the artistic sense quickened, there may also be the useful acquisition of arousing a keen observation of all grammatical forms and usages. Now and then it has been deemed best to omit explanations, and to withhold personal preferences, in order that the student may, by actual contact with the sources of grammatical laws, discover for himself the better way in regarding given data. It is not the grammarian's business to "correct:" it is simply to record and to arrange the usages of language, and to point the way to the arbiters of usage in all disputed cases. Free expression within the lines of good usage should have widest range.

To achieve these goals, it’s important to always keep in mind the real basis of grammar; which is good literature. We've included plenty of quotes from respected authors to show students that they are working with the realities of the language, rather than just the theories of grammarians. It's also suggested that when preparing written exercises, students should use classic English literature instead of “making up” sentences. However, we don’t intend for the use of literary masterpieces for grammatical study to replace or detract from their true value and purpose as works of art. It will likely be beneficial to alternate regular reading and appreciation of literature with studying grammar, so that while students enrich their minds and sharpen their artistic sense, they also develop a keen awareness of all grammatical forms and usages. Occasionally, it has been considered best to leave out explanations and not share personal preferences, allowing students to discover the better approach to understanding certain data through direct engagement with the sources of grammatical rules. It’s not the job of the grammarian to "correct"; rather, it’s to document and organize the usages of language and guide those who navigate any points of contention. Free expression within the framework of good usage should have the greatest possible freedom.

It has been our aim to make a grammar of as wide a scope as is consistent with the proper definition of the word. Therefore, in addition to recording and classifying the facts of language, we have endeavored to attain two other objects,—to cultivate mental skill and power, and to induce the student to prosecute further studies in this field. It is not supposable that in so delicate and difficult an undertaking there should be an entire freedom from errors and oversights. We shall gratefully accept any assistance in helping to correct mistakes.

Our goal has been to create a grammar that covers as much ground as possible while still properly defining the term. So, in addition to documenting and organizing the facts of language, we’ve also aimed to foster mental skills and encourage students to delve deeper into this subject. It's unrealistic to expect complete immunity from errors and oversights in such a complex task. We will gladly welcome any help in correcting mistakes.

Though endeavoring to get our material as much as possible at first hand, and to make an independent use of it, we desire to express our obligation to the following books and articles:—

Though we aim to gather our information directly and use it independently, we want to acknowledge our reliance on the following books and articles:—

Meiklejohn's "English Language," Longmans' "School Grammar," West's "English Grammar," Bain's "Higher English Grammar" and "Composition Grammar," Sweet's "Primer of Spoken English" and "New English Grammar," etc., Hodgson's "Errors in the Use of English," Morris's "Elementary Lessons in Historical English Grammar," Lounsbury's "English Language," Champney's "History of English," Emerson's "History of the English Language," Kellner's "Historical Outlines of English Syntax," Earle's "English Prose," and Matzner's "Englische Grammatik." Allen's "Subjunctive Mood in English," Battler's articles on "Prepositions" in the "Anglia," and many other valuable papers, have also been helpful and suggestive.

Meiklejohn's "English Language," Longmans' "School Grammar," West's "English Grammar," Bain's "Higher English Grammar" and "Composition Grammar," Sweet's "Primer of Spoken English" and "New English Grammar," Hodgson's "Errors in the Use of English," Morris's "Elementary Lessons in Historical English Grammar," Lounsbury's "English Language," Champney's "History of English," Emerson's "History of the English Language," Kellner's "Historical Outlines of English Syntax," Earle's "English Prose," and Matzner's "Englische Grammatik." Allen's "Subjunctive Mood in English," Battler's articles on "Prepositions" in the "Anglia," and many other valuable papers have also been helpful and suggestive.

We desire to express special thanks to Professor W.D. Mooney of Wall & Mooney's Battle-Ground Academy, Franklin, Tenn., for a critical examination of the first draft of the manuscript, and to Professor Jno. M. Webb of Webb Bros. School, Bell Buckle, Tenn., and Professor W.R. Garrett of the University of Nashville, for many valuable suggestions and helpful criticism.

We want to extend our heartfelt thanks to Professor W.D. Mooney of Wall & Mooney's Battle-Ground Academy in Franklin, TN, for his thorough review of the first draft of the manuscript, and to Professor Jno. M. Webb of Webb Bros. School in Bell Buckle, TN, and Professor W.R. Garrett of the University of Nashville for their valuable suggestions and constructive feedback.

W.M. BASKERVILL.

W.M. Baskervill.

J.W. SEWELL.

J.W. Sewell.

NASHVILLE, TENN., January, 1896.

Nashville, TN, January 1896.


CONTENTS.


INTRODUCTION.

So many slighting remarks have been made of late on the use of teaching grammar as compared with teaching science, that it is plain the fact has been lost sight of that grammar is itself a science. The object we have, or should have, in teaching science, is not to fill a child's mind with a vast number of facts that may or may not prove useful to him hereafter, but to draw out and exercise his powers of observation, and to show him how to make use of what he observes.... And here the teacher of grammar has a great advantage over the teacher of other sciences, in that the facts he has to call attention to lie ready at hand for every pupil to observe without the use of apparatus of any kind while the use of them also lies within the personal experience of every one.—Dr Richard Morris.

Recently, there have been many negative comments about teaching grammar compared to teaching science, which shows that people have forgotten that grammar is actually a science. The goal we should have in teaching science isn't just to stuff a child's mind with a bunch of facts that may or may not be useful in the future, but to develop and exercise their observational skills and to teach them how to utilize what they observe. In this regard, the grammar teacher has a significant advantage over teachers of other sciences, as the facts they need to highlight are readily available for every student to observe without the need for any special equipment, and these facts are also based on everyone's personal experiences.—Dr. Richard Morris.

The proper study of a language is an intellectual discipline of the highest order. If I except discussions on the comparative merits of Popery and Protestantism, English grammar was the most important discipline of my boyhood.—John Tyndall.

The proper study of a language is an intellectual discipline of the highest order. If I exclude discussions on the comparative merits of Catholicism and Protestantism, English grammar was the most important subject of my childhood.—John Tyndall.

INTRODUCTION.

INTRODUCTION.

What various opinions writers on English grammar have given in answer to the question, What is grammar? may be shown by the following—

What different opinions writers on English grammar have provided in response to the question, What is grammar? can be illustrated by the following—

Definitions of grammar.

English grammar is a description of the usages of the English language by good speakers and writers of the present day.—Whitney

English grammar describes how skilled speakers and writers use the English language today.—Whitney

A description of account of the nature, build, constitution, or make of a language is called its grammar—Meiklejohn

A description of the nature, structure, or makeup of a language is called its grammar—Meiklejohn

Grammar teaches the laws of language, and the right method of using it in speaking and writing.—Patterson

Grammar teaches the rules of language and the correct way to use it when speaking and writing.—Patterson

Grammar is the science of letter; hence the science of using words correctly.—Abbott

Grammar is the study of letters; therefore, it's about using words correctly.—Abbott

The English word grammar relates only to the laws which govern the significant forms of words, and the construction of the sentence.—Richard Grant White

The English word grammar refers only to the rules that control the meaningful forms of words and how sentences are built.—Richard Grant White

These are sufficient to suggest several distinct notions about English grammar—

These are enough to suggest several different ideas about English grammar—

Synopsis of the above.

(1) It makes rules to tell us how to use words.

(1) It creates rules to guide us on how to use words.

(2) It is a record of usage which we ought to follow.

(2) It's a record of use that we should follow.

(3) It is concerned with the forms of the language.

(3) It is focused on the forms of the language.

(4) English has no grammar in the sense of forms, or inflections, but takes account merely of the nature and the uses of words in sentences.

(4) English does not have grammar in terms of forms or inflections, but simply considers the nature and uses of words in sentences.

The older idea and its origin.

Fierce discussions have raged over these opinions, and numerous works have been written to uphold the theories. The first of them remained popular for a very long time. It originated from the etymology of the word grammar (Greek gramma, writing, a letter), and from an effort to build up a treatise on English grammar by using classical grammar as a model.

Fierce debates have taken place over these opinions, and many works have been written to support the theories. The first of these remained popular for a long time. It originated from the etymology of the word grammar (Greek gramma, writing, a letter), and from an effort to create a treatise on English grammar by using classical grammar as a model.

Perhaps a combination of (1) and (3) has been still more popular, though there has been vastly more classification than there are forms.

Perhaps a mix of (1) and (3) has been even more popular, although there has been a lot more classification than there are actual forms.

The opposite view.

During recent years, (2) and (4) have been gaining ground, but they have had hard work to displace the older and more popular theories. It is insisted by many that the student's time should be used in studying general literature, and thus learning the fluent and correct use of his mother tongue. It is also insisted that the study and discussion of forms and inflections is an inexcusable imitation of classical treatises.

In recent years, (2) and (4) have been gaining popularity, but they’ve struggled to replace the older, more established theories. Many argue that students should spend their time studying general literature to become fluent and proficient in their native language. Others insist that focusing on forms and inflections is an unnecessary mimicry of classical texts.

The difficulty.

Which view shall the student of English accept? Before this is answered, we should decide whether some one of the above theories must be taken as the right one, and the rest disregarded.

Which perspective should the English student embrace? Before we answer this, we need to determine if one of the theories mentioned above should be considered the correct one while dismissing the others.

The real reason for the diversity of views is a confusion of two distinct things,—what the definition of grammar should be, and what the purpose of grammar should be.

The real reason for the variety of opinions is a mix-up of two separate things—what the definition of grammar should be and what the purpose of grammar should be.

The material of grammar.

The province of English grammar is, rightly considered, wider than is indicated by any one of the above definitions; and the student ought to have a clear idea of the ground to be covered.

The field of English grammar is, rightly understood, broader than what any of the definitions above suggest; and the student should have a clear understanding of the area they need to explore.

Few inflections.

It must be admitted that the language has very few inflections at present, as compared with Latin or Greek; so that a small grammar will hold them all.

It must be acknowledged that the language has very few inflections now, compared to Latin or Greek; so a small grammar can cover them all.

Making rules is risky.

It is also evident, to those who have studied the language historically, that it is very hazardous to make rules in grammar: what is at present regarded as correct may not be so twenty years from now, even if our rules are founded on the keenest scrutiny of the "standard" writers of our time. Usage is varied as our way of thinking changes. In Chaucer's time two or three negatives were used to strengthen a negation; as, "Ther nas no man nowher so vertuous" (There never was no man nowhere so virtuous). And Shakespeare used good English when he said more elder ("Merchant of Venice") and most unkindest ("Julius Cæsar"); but this is bad English now.

It’s also clear to those who have historically studied the language that creating grammar rules can be quite risky: what’s seen as correct today might not be in twenty years, even if our rules are based on a careful analysis of the “standard” writers of our time. Language usage changes alongside our thinking. In Chaucer's time, it was common to use two or three negatives to emphasize a negation, as in, "Ther nas no man nowher so vertuous" (There never was no man nowhere so virtuous). Shakespeare also used what was considered good English when he said more elder ("Merchant of Venice") and most unkindest ("Julius Cæsar"), but that is considered bad English now.

If, however, we have tabulated the inflections of the language, and stated what syntax is the most used in certain troublesome places, there is still much for the grammarian to do.

If we've listed the language's inflections and explained which syntax is most commonly used in some tricky areas, there's still a lot for the grammarian to work on.

A broader view.

Surely our noble language, with its enormous vocabulary, its peculiar and abundant idioms, its numerous periphrastic forms to express every possible shade of meaning, is worthy of serious study, apart from the mere memorizing of inflections and formulation of rules.

Surely our great language, with its vast vocabulary, unique and plentiful idioms, and many ways to express every possible nuance of meaning, deserves serious study, beyond just memorizing inflections and following rules.

Mental training. An æsthetic benefit.

Grammar is eminently a means of mental training; and while it will train the student in subtle and acute reasoning, it will at the same time, if rightly presented, lay the foundation of a keen observation and a correct literary taste. The continued contact with the highest thoughts of the best minds will create a thirst for the "well of English undefiled."

Grammar is definitely a way to train the mind; and while it will teach the student to think critically and clearly, it will also, if taught well, help develop sharp observation skills and a good sense of literature. Ongoing exposure to the greatest ideas from the best thinkers will spark a desire for pure, unspoiled English.

What grammar is.

Coming back, then, from the question, What ground should grammar cover? we come to answer the question, What should grammar teach? and we give as an answer the definition,—

Coming back, then, from the question, What ground should grammar cover? we arrive at the answer to the question, What should grammar teach? and we define it as,—

English grammar is the science which treats of the nature of words, their forms, and their uses and relations in the sentence.

English grammar is the study of the nature of words, their forms, and how they are used and related in a sentence.

The work it will cover.

This will take in the usual divisions, "The Parts of Speech" (with their inflections), "Analysis," and "Syntax." It will also require a discussion of any points that will clear up difficulties, assist the classification of kindred expressions, or draw the attention of the student to everyday idioms and phrases, and thus incite his observation.

This will cover the usual sections: "The Parts of Speech" (with their variations), "Analysis," and "Syntax." It will also need to address any issues that help clarify difficulties, support the classification of related expressions, or draw the student’s attention to common idioms and phrases, encouraging his observation.

Authority as a basis.

A few words here as to the authority upon which grammar rests.

A few words here about the authority on which grammar is based.

Literary English.

The statements given will be substantiated by quotations from the leading or "standard" literature of modern times; that is, from the eighteenth century on. This literary English is considered the foundation on which grammar must rest.

The statements provided will be backed up by quotes from the main or "standard" literature of modern times, specifically from the eighteenth century onward. This literary English is seen as the basis upon which grammar should be built.

Spoken English.

Here and there also will be quoted words and phrases from spoken or colloquial English, by which is meant the free, unstudied expressions of ordinary conversation and communication among intelligent people.

Here and there, there will also be quotes of words and phrases from spoken or colloquial English, referring to the natural, unforced expressions found in everyday conversations and interactions among smart individuals.

These quotations will often throw light on obscure constructions, since they preserve turns of expressions that have long since perished from the literary or standard English.

These quotes will often clarify unclear constructions, as they maintain expressions that have long disappeared from literary or standard English.

Vulgar English.

Occasionally, too, reference will be made to vulgar English,—the speech of the uneducated and ignorant,—which will serve to illustrate points of syntax once correct, or standard, but now undoubtedly bad grammar.

Occasionally, references will be made to vulgar English,—the language of the uneducated and uninformed,—which will help illustrate points of syntax that were once correct or standard, but are now definitely considered bad grammar.

The following pages will cover, then, three divisions:—

The following pages will cover three divisions:—

Part I. The Parts of Speech, and Inflections.

Part I. The Parts of Speech and Inflections.

Part II. Analysis of Sentences.

Part II. Sentence Analysis.

Part III. The Uses of Words, or Syntax.

Part III. The Uses of Words, or Syntax.


PART I.

THE PARTS OF SPEECH.

NOUNS.

1. In the more simple state of the Arabs, the nation is free, because each of her sons disdains a base submission to the will of a master.—Gibbon.

1. In the simpler state of the Arabs, the nation is free, because each of her sons rejects a servile submission to the will of a master.—Gibbon.

Name words

By examining this sentence we notice several words used as names. The plainest name is Arabs, which belongs to a people; but, besides this one, the words sons and master name objects, and may belong to any of those objects. The words state, submission, and will are evidently names of a different kind, as they stand for ideas, not objects; and the word nation stands for a whole group.

By looking at this sentence, we see several words employed as names. The most straightforward name is Arabs, referring to a specific group of people; however, in addition to this one, the words sons and master refer to things and can apply to any of those things. The words state, submission, and will are clearly names of a different type, representing ideas rather than objects; and the word nation represents an entire group.

When the meaning of each of these words has once been understood, the word naming it will always call up the thing or idea itself. Such words are called nouns.

Once you understand the meaning of each of these words, the word that represents it will always bring to mind the thing or idea itself. These words are called nouns.

Definition.

2. A noun is a name word, representing directly to the mind an object, substance, or idea.

2. A noun is a word that names something, directly representing an object, substance, or idea in our minds.

Classes of nouns.

3. Nouns are classified as follows:—

Nouns are classified as follows:—

(1) Proper.

(2) Common. (a) CLASS NAMES: i. Individual.
ii. Collective.
(b) MATERIAL.

(3) Abstract. (a) ATTRIBUTE.
(b) VERBAL

(1) Proper.

(2) Common. (a) CLASS NAMES: i. Individual.
ii. Community.
(b) Material.

(3) Abstract. (a) ATTRIBUTE.
(b) VERBAL

Names for special objects.

4. A proper noun is a name applied to a particular object, whether person, place, or thing.

4. A proper noun is a name given to a specific object, whether it's a person, place, or thing.

It specializes or limits the thing to which it is applied, reducing it to a narrow application. Thus, city is a word applied to any one of its kind; but Chicago names one city, and fixes the attention upon that particular city. King may be applied to any ruler of a kingdom, but Alfred the Great is the name of one king only.

It focuses or restricts the element it refers to, narrowing it down to a specific use. So, city is a term that can refer to any city, but Chicago identifies one specific city and draws attention to that particular place. King can be used for any monarch, but Alfred the Great refers to just one king.

The word proper is from a Latin word meaning limited, belonging to one. This does not imply, however, that a proper name can be applied to only one object, but that each time such a name is applied it is fixed or proper to that object. Even if there are several Bostons or Manchesters, the name of each is an individual or proper name.

The word proper comes from a Latin term meaning limited, belonging to one. This doesn’t mean that a proper name can only refer to one object, but rather that whenever such a name is used, it is specific or proper to that object. Even if there are multiple Bostons or Manchesters, the name of each is an individual or proper name.

Name for any individual of a class.

5. A common noun is a name possessed by any one of a class of persons, animals, or things.

5. A common noun is a name held by any member of a group of people, animals, or objects.

Common, as here used, is from a Latin word which means general, possessed by all.

Common, as used here, comes from a Latin word that means general, shared by everyone.

For instance, road is a word that names any highway outside of cities; wagon is a term that names any vehicle of a certain kind used for hauling: the words are of the widest application. We may say, the man here, or the man in front of you, but the word man is here hedged in by other words or word groups: the name itself is of general application.

For example, road is a word that refers to any highway outside of cities; wagon is used to describe any type of vehicle designed for hauling: these words have the broadest meaning. We can say, the man here, or the man in front of you, but the word man is restricted by other words or phrases: the term itself is generally applicable.

Name for a group or collection of objects.

Besides considering persons, animals, and things separately, we may think of them in groups, and appropriate names to the groups.

Besides thinking about people, animals, and things individually, we can think of them in groups and give names to those groups.

Thus, men in groups may be called a crowd, or a mob, a committee, or a council, or a congress, etc.

So, groups of men can be referred to as a crowd, a mob, a committee, a council, or a congress, and so on.

These are called COLLECTIVE NOUNS. They properly belong under common nouns, because each group is considered as a unit, and the name applied to it belongs to any group of its class.

These are called COLLECTIVE NOUNS. They properly belong under common nouns because each group is viewed as a unit, and the name given to it applies to any group of that type.

Names for things thought of in mass.

6. The definition given for common nouns applies more strictly to class nouns. It may, however, be correctly used for another group of nouns detailed below; for they are common nouns in the sense that the names apply to every particle of similar substance, instead of to each individual or separate object.

6. The definition provided for common nouns is more accurately applicable to class nouns. However, it can also correctly apply to another group of nouns described below; these are common nouns in that their names refer to every instance of similar substance, rather than to each individual or separate object.

They are called MATERIAL NOUNS. Such are glass, iron, clay, frost, rain, snow, wheat, wine, tea, sugar, etc.

They are called MATERIAL NOUNS. These include glass, iron, clay, frost, rain, snow, wheat, wine, tea, sugar, and so on.

They may be placed in groups as follows:—

They can be arranged in groups like this:—

(1) The metals: iron, gold, platinum, etc.

The metals: iron, gold, platinum, etc.

(2) Products spoken of in bulk: tea, sugar, rice, wheat, etc.

(2) Products referred to in bulk: tea, sugar, rice, wheat, etc.

(3) Geological bodies: mud, sand, granite, rock, stone, etc.

Geological materials: mud, sand, granite, rock, stone, etc.

(4) Natural phenomena: rain, dew, cloud, frost, mist, etc.

(4) Natural phenomena: rain, dew, clouds, frost, mist, etc.

(5) Various manufactures: cloth (and the different kinds of cloth), potash, soap, rubber, paint, celluloid, etc.

(5) Various products: fabric (and the different types of fabric), potash, soap, rubber, paint, celluloid, etc.

7. NOTE.—There are some nouns, such as sun, moon, earth, which seem to be the names of particular individual objects, but which are not called proper names.

7. NOTE.—There are some nouns, like sun, moon, and earth, that appear to be the names of specific individual objects, yet they are not considered proper names.

Words naturally of limited application not proper.

The reason is, that in proper names the intention is to exclude all other individuals of the same class, and fasten a special name to the object considered, as in calling a city Cincinnati; but in the words sun, earth, etc., there is no such intention. If several bodies like the center of our solar system are known, they also are called suns by a natural extension of the term: so with the words earth, world, etc. They remain common class names.

The reason is that in proper names, the goal is to exclude all other individuals in the same category and assign a specific name to the subject being considered, like when we call a city "Cincinnati." However, in the terms "sun," "earth," and so on, that intention isn’t present. If several objects like the center of our solar system are identified, they are also referred to as "suns" through a natural extension of the term; the same goes for "earth," "world," etc. They stay as common class names.

Names of ideas, not things.

8. Abstract nouns are names of qualities, conditions, or actions, considered abstractly, or apart from their natural connection.

8. Abstract nouns are names for qualities, conditions, or actions, viewed in an abstract way, or separate from their natural connections.

When we speak of a wise man, we recognize in him an attribute or quality. If we wish to think simply of that quality without describing the person, we speak of the wisdom of the man. The quality is still there as much as before, but it is taken merely as a name. So poverty would express the condition of a poor person; proof means the act of proving, or that which shows a thing has been proved; and so on.

When we talk about a wise man, we see a certain trait or quality in him. If we just want to focus on that quality without describing the person, we refer to the man's wisdom. The quality is still present just as it was before, but now it's treated only as a label. Similarly, poverty represents the state of being poor; proof refers to the act of proving something or what demonstrates that something has been proven; and so forth.

Again, we may say, "Painting is a fine art," "Learning is hard to acquire," "a man of understanding."

Again, we can say, "Painting is a beautiful art," "Learning is difficult to master," "a man of insight."

9. There are two chief divisions of abstract nouns:—

9. There are two main categories of abstract nouns:—

(1) ATTRIBUTE NOUNS, expressing attributes or qualities.

(1) ATTRIBUTE NOUNS, describing attributes or qualities.

(2) VERBAL NOUNS, expressing state, condition, or action.

(2) VERBAL NOUNS, representing state, condition, or action.

Attribute abstract nouns.

10. The ATTRIBUTE ABSTRACT NOUNS are derived from adjectives and from common nouns. Thus, (1) prudence from prudent, height from high, redness from red, stupidity from stupid, etc.; (2) peerage from peer, childhood from child, mastery from master, kingship from king, etc.

10. The ATTRIBUTE ABSTRACT NOUNS are created from adjectives and common nouns. So, (1) prudence comes from prudent, height comes from high, redness comes from red, stupidity comes from stupid, and so on; (2) peerage comes from peer, childhood comes from child, mastery comes from master, kingship comes from king, and so forth.

Verbal abstract nouns.

II. The VERBAL ABSTRACT NOUNS Originate in verbs, as their name implies. They may be—

II. The VERBAL ABSTRACT NOUNS come from verbs, as their name suggests. They may be—

(1) Of the same form as the simple verb. The verb, by altering its function, is used as a noun; as in the expressions, "a long run" "a bold move," "a brisk walk."

(1) Similar to the simple verb. The verb changes its function and is used as a noun; for example, in expressions like "a long run," "a bold move," and "a brisk walk."

(2) Derived from verbs by changing the ending or adding a suffix: motion from move, speech from speak, theft from thieve, action from act, service from serve.

(2) Created from verbs by changing the ending or adding a suffix: motion from move, speech from speak, theft from thieve, action from act, service from serve.

Caution.

(3) Derived from verbs by adding -ing to the simple verb. It must be remembered that these words are free from any verbal function. They cannot govern a word, and they cannot express action, but are merely names of actions. They are only the husks of verbs, and are to be rigidly distinguished from gerunds (Secs. 272, 273).

(3) Formed from verbs by adding -ing to the base form of the verb. It's important to keep in mind that these words are not used as verbs. They can't govern a word, and they can't show action; they're just names for actions. They are merely the shells of verbs and must be clearly separated from gerunds (Secs. 272, 273).

To avoid difficulty, study carefully these examples:

To make things easier, take a close look at these examples:

The best thoughts and sayings of the Greeks; the moon caused fearful forebodings; in the beginning of his life; he spread his blessings over the land; the great Puritan awakening; our birth is but a sleep and a forgetting; a wedding or a festival; the rude drawings of the book; masterpieces of the Socratic reasoning; the teachings of the High Spirit; those opinions and feelings; there is time for such reasonings; the well-being of her subjects; her longing for their favor; feelings which their original meaning will by no means justify; the main bearings of this matter.

The best ideas and sayings of the Greeks; the moon triggered intense forebodings; at the beginning of his life; he shared his blessings across the land; the great Puritan awakening; our birth is just a sleep and a forgetting; a wedding or a celebration; the rough drawings of the book; masterpieces of Socratic reasoning; the teachings of the High Spirit; those opinions and feelings; there’s time for such reasonings; the well-being of her subjects; her longing for their approval; feelings that their original meaning will definitely not justify; the main bearings of this matter.

Underived abstract nouns.

12. Some abstract nouns were not derived from any other part of speech, but were framed directly for the expression of certain ideas or phenomena. Such are beauty, joy, hope, ease, energy; day, night, summer, winter; shadow, lightning, thunder, etc.

12. Some abstract nouns didn't come from any other part of speech but were created directly to express specific ideas or phenomena. Examples include beauty, joy, hope, ease, energy; day, night, summer, winter; shadow, lightning, thunder, etc.

The adjectives or verbs corresponding to these are either themselves derived from the nouns or are totally different words; as gladjoy, hopefulhope, etc.

The adjectives or verbs related to these are either derived from the nouns themselves or are completely different words; such as gladjoy, hopefulhope, etc.

Exercises.

1. From your reading bring up sentences containing ten common nouns, five proper, five abstract.

1. From your reading, pick out sentences that include ten common nouns, five proper nouns, and five abstract nouns.

NOTE.—Remember that all sentences are to be selected from standard literature.

NOTE.—Remember that all sentences are to be selected from standard literature.

2. Under what class of nouns would you place (a) the names of diseases, as pneumonia, pleurisy, catarrh, typhus, diphtheria; (b) branches of knowledge, as physics, algebra, geology, mathematics?

2. Under what category of nouns would you classify (a) the names of diseases, like pneumonia, pleurisy, catarrh, typhus, diphtheria; and (b) fields of study, such as physics, algebra, geology, mathematics?

3. Mention collective nouns that will embrace groups of each of the following individual nouns:—

3. List collective nouns that will include groups for each of the following individual nouns:—

  • man
  • horse
  • bird
  • fish
  • partridge
  • pupil
  • bee
  • soldier
  • book
  • sailor
  • child
  • sheep
  • ship
  • ruffian

4. Using a dictionary, tell from what word each of these abstract nouns is derived:—

4. Using a dictionary, identify the word from which each of these abstract nouns is derived:—

  • sight
  • speech
  • motion
  • pleasure
  • patience
  • friendship
  • deceit
  • bravery
  • height
  • width
  • wisdom
  • regularity
  • advice
  • seizure
  • nobility
  • relief
  • death
  • raid
  • honesty
  • judgment
  • belief
  • occupation
  • justice
  • service
  • trail
  • feeling
  • choice
  • simplicity

SPECIAL USES OF NOUNS.

SPECIAL USES OF NOUNS.

Nouns change by use.

13. By being used so as to vary their usual meaning, nouns of one class may be made to approach another class, or to go over to it entirely. Since words alter their meaning so rapidly by a widening or narrowing of their application, we shall find numerous examples of this shifting from class to class; but most of them are in the following groups. For further discussion see the remarks on articles (p. 119).

13. When used in ways that change their usual meanings, nouns of one category can start to resemble or even completely shift to another category. Because words can quickly change their meanings by either expanding or restricting their use, we'll find many examples of this transition between categories; however, most of them fall into the following groups. For more details, see the comments on articles (p. 119).

Proper names transferred to common use.

14. Proper nouns are used as common in either of two ways:—

14. Proper nouns are used as common in one of two ways:—

(1) The origin of a thing is used for the thing itself: that is, the name of the inventor may be applied to the thing invented, as a davy, meaning the miner's lamp invented by Sir Humphry Davy; the guillotine, from the name of Dr. Guillotin, who was its inventor. Or the name of the country or city from which an article is derived is used for the article: as china, from China; arras, from a town in France; port (wine), from Oporto, in Portugal; levant and morocco (leather).

(1) The origin of something is used for that thing: in other words, the name of the inventor can be used for the invention itself, like davy, which refers to the miner's lamp created by Sir Humphry Davy; or guillotine, named after Dr. Guillotin, its inventor. Alternatively, the name of the country or city where an item comes from can represent the item: like china, from China; arras, from a town in France; port (wine), from Oporto, in Portugal; levant and morocco (leather).

Some of this class have become worn by use so that at present we can scarcely discover the derivation from the form of the word; for example, the word port, above. Others of similar character are calico, from Calicut; damask, from Damascus; currants, from Corinth; etc.

Some of these words have become so worn out from use that we can barely trace their origins anymore; for instance, the word port, mentioned earlier. Other similar examples are calico, which comes from Calicut; damask, which originates from Damascus; and currants, from Corinth, etc.

(2) The name of a person or place noted for certain qualities is transferred to any person or place possessing those qualities; thus,—

(2) The name of a person or place recognized for specific qualities is applied to any person or place that has those qualities; thus,—

Hercules and Samson were noted for their strength, and we call a very strong man a Hercules or a Samson. Sodom was famous for wickedness, and a similar place is called a Sodom of sin.

Hercules and Samson were famous for their strength, and we refer to a very strong man as a Hercules or a Samson. Sodom was known for its wickedness, and a similar place is referred to as a Sodom of sin.

A Daniel come to judgment!—Shakespeare.

A Daniel has come to judgment!—Shakespeare.

If it prove a mind of uncommon activity and power, a Locke, a Lavoisier, a Hutton, a Bentham, a Fourier, it imposes its classification on other men, and lo! a new system.—Emerson.

If it shows a mind of exceptional energy and strength, a Locke, a Lavoisier, a Hutton, a Bentham, a Fourier, it imposes its classification on others, and there you have it—a new system.—Emerson.

Names for things in bulk altered for separate portions.

15. Material nouns may be used as class names. Instead of considering the whole body of material of which certain uses are made, one can speak of particular uses or phases of the substance; as—

15. Material nouns can be used as class names. Instead of thinking about the entire body of material that certain uses come from, you can refer to specific uses or aspects of the substance; for example—

(1) Of individual objects made from metals or other substances capable of being wrought into various shapes. We know a number of objects made of iron. The material iron embraces the metal contained in them all; but we may say, "The cook made the irons hot," referring to flat-irons; or, "The sailor was put in irons" meaning chains of iron. So also we may speak of a glass to drink from or to look into; a steel to whet a knife on; a rubber for erasing marks; and so on.

(1) Of individual objects made from metals or other materials that can be shaped in different ways. We know about several items made of iron. The material iron includes all the metal found in them; but we can say, "The cook heated the irons," talking about flat-irons; or, "The sailor was put in irons," meaning iron chains. We can also mention a glass to drink from or look into; a steel to sharpen a knife on; a rubber for erasing marks; and so on.

(2) Of classes or kinds of the same substance. These are the same in material, but differ in strength, purity, etc. Hence it shortens speech to make the nouns plural, and say teas, tobaccos, paints, oils, candies, clays, coals.

(2) Of classes or kinds of the same substance. These are the same in material but vary in strength, purity, etc. So, it saves time to make the nouns plural and say teas, tobaccos, paints, oils, candies, clays, coals.

(3) By poetical use, of certain words necessarily singular in idea, which are made plural, or used as class nouns, as in the following:—

(3) In poetic usage, certain words that are inherently singular in concept are made plural or used as general terms, as seen in the following:—

The solitary and flat sands extend far away.
From everywhere—
Earth and her waters, and the vastness of air—
A quiet voice appears.
—Bryant.
Their light ears The winds are settled on the mountain peaks.
—Percival.

(4) Of detached portions of matter used as class names; as stones, slates, papers, tins, clouds, mists, etc.

(4) Of detached portions of matter used as class names; as stones, slates, papers, tins, clouds, mists, etc.

Personification of abstract ideas.

16. Abstract nouns are frequently used as proper names by being personified; that is, the ideas are spoken of as residing in living beings. This is a poetic usage, though not confined to verse.

16. Abstract nouns are often used as proper names by giving them human characteristics; that is, ideas are described as if they exist within living beings. This is a poetic technique, but it's not limited to poetry.

Next Anger rushed; his eyes ablaze,
Lightning revealed his hidden pain. —Collins.

Freedom's fame finds wings on every wind.—Byron.

Freedom's reputation spreads with every breeze.—Byron.

Death, his mask melting like a nightmare dream, smiled.—Hayne.

Death, his mask dripping away like a bad dream, smiled.—Hayne.

Traffic has lain down to rest; and only Vice and Misery, to prowl or to moan like night birds, are abroad.—Carlyle.

Traffic has settled down for the night; only Vice and Misery, wandering or lamenting like nocturnal creatures, are out and about.—Carlyle.

A halfway class of words. Class nouns in use, abstract in meaning.

17. Abstract nouns are made half abstract by being spoken of in the plural.

17. Abstract nouns become partially concrete when they are referred to in the plural.

They are not then pure abstract nouns, nor are they common class nouns. For example, examine this:—

They aren't just abstract nouns, nor are they common class nouns. For example, take a look at this:—

The arts differ from the sciences in this, that their power is founded not merely on facts which can be communicated, but on dispositions which require to be created.—Ruskin.

The arts are different from the sciences in that their strength comes not just from facts that can be shared, but from dispositions that need to be developed.—Ruskin.

When it is said that art differs from science, that the power of art is founded on fact, that disposition is the thing to be created, the words italicized are pure abstract nouns; but in case an art or a science, or the arts and sciences, be spoken of, the abstract idea is partly lost. The words preceded by the article a, or made plural, are still names of abstract ideas, not material things; but they widen the application to separate kinds of art or different branches of science. They are neither class nouns nor pure abstract nouns: they are more properly called half abstract.

When we say that art is different from science, that the strength of art is based on fact, and that disposition is what needs to be created, the italicized words are purely abstract nouns. However, when we refer to an art or a science, or to the arts and sciences, the abstract idea is somewhat diminished. The words that come after the article a, or that are made plural, are still names of abstract concepts, not physical things; but they expand the meaning to include different types of art or various branches of science. They are neither class nouns nor pure abstract nouns: they are more accurately described as half abstract.

Test this in the following sentences:—

Test this in the following sentences:—

Let us, if we must have great actions, make our own so.—Emerson.

Let’s create our own great actions, if we have to. —Emerson.

And still, as each repeated pleasure tired, Succeeding sports the mirthful band inspired.—Goldsmith.

And still, as each repeated pleasure wore off, the joyful group was uplifted by the next games.—Jeweler.

But ah! those pleasures, loves, and joys Which I taste too keenly,
The Lonely can despise.
—Burns.

All these, however, were mere terrors of the night.—Irving.

All of these, though, were just fears of the night.—Irving.

By ellipses, nouns used to modify.

18. Nouns used as descriptive terms. Sometimes a noun is attached to another noun to add to its meaning, or describe it; for example, "a family quarrel," "a New York bank," "the State Bank Tax bill," "a morning walk."

18. Nouns used as descriptive terms. Sometimes a noun is added to another noun to enhance its meaning or describe it; for example, "a family quarrel," "a New York bank," "the State Bank Tax bill," "a morning walk."

It is evident that these approach very near to the function of adjectives. But it is better to consider them as nouns, for these reasons: they do not give up their identity as nouns; they do not express quality; they cannot be compared, as descriptive adjectives are.

It’s clear that these come very close to the role of adjectives. However, it's more accurate to view them as nouns for the following reasons: they maintain their identity as nouns; they don’t express quality; and they cannot be compared like descriptive adjectives can.

They are more like the possessive noun, which belongs to another word, but is still a noun. They may be regarded as elliptical expressions, meaning a walk in the morning, a bank in New York, a bill as to tax on the banks, etc.

They are more like possessive nouns that belong to another word but are still nouns. They can be seen as shortened expressions, like a walk in the morning, a bank in New York, a bill related to tax on the banks, etc.

NOTE.—If the descriptive word be a material noun, it may be regarded as changed to an adjective. The term "gold pen" conveys the same idea as "golden pen," which contains a pure adjective.

NOTE.—If the descriptive word is a material noun, it can be seen as transformed into an adjective. The phrase "gold pen" conveys the same meaning as "golden pen," which includes a pure adjective.

WORDS AND WORD GROUPS USED AS NOUNS.

WORDS AND WORD GROUPS USED AS NOUNS.

The noun may borrow from any part of speech, or from any expression.

19. Owing to the scarcity of distinctive forms, and to the consequent flexibility of English speech, words which are usually other parts of speech are often used as nouns; and various word groups may take the place of nouns by being used as nouns.

19. Due to the lack of unique forms and the resulting flexibility of English, words that are typically other parts of speech are often used as nouns; and different groups of words can function as nouns by being used in that way.

Adjectives, Conjunctions, Adverbs.

(1) Other parts of speech used as nouns:—

(1) Other parts of speech used as nouns:—

The great, the wealthy, fear thy blow.—Burns.

The powerful, the rich, fear your strike.—Burns.

Every why hath a wherefore.—Shakespeare.

Every "why" has a "wherefore."

When I was young? Oh, how sad When!
Ah! for the change between Now and Then!
—Coleridge.

(2) Certain word groups used like single nouns:—

(2) Certain word groups used as single nouns:—

Too swift arrives as tardy as too slow.—Shakespeare.

Being too fast is just as late as being too slow.—Shakespeare.

Then comes the "Why, sir!" and the "What then, sir?" and the "No, sir!" and the "You don't see your way through the question, sir!"—Macaulay

Then comes the "Why, sir!" and the "What then, sir?" and the "No, sir!" and the "You don't see your way through the question, sir!"—Macaulay

(3) Any part of speech may be considered merely as a word, without reference to its function in the sentence; also titles of books are treated as simple nouns.

(3) Any part of speech can be thought of just as a word, without considering its role in the sentence; also, book titles are treated as simple nouns.

The it, at the beginning, is ambiguous, whether it mean the sun or the cold.—Dr BLAIR

The it at the start is unclear, whether it refers to the sun or the cold.—Dr BLAIR

In this definition, is the word "just," or "legal," finally to stand?—Ruskin.

In this definition, does the word "just," or "legal," finally hold its ground?—Ruskin.

There was also a book of Defoe's called an "Essay on Projects," and another of Dr. Mather's called "Essays to do Good."—B. FRANKLIN.

There was also a book by Defoe called an "Essay on Projects," and another by Dr. Mather called "Essays to do Good."—B. FRANKLIN.

Caution.

20. It is to be remembered, however, that the above cases are shiftings of the use, of words rather than of their meaning. We seldom find instances of complete conversion of one part of speech into another.

20. It’s important to remember, though, that the cases mentioned above are changes in the use of words rather than their meaning. We rarely encounter examples of one part of speech completely transforming into another.

When, in a sentence above, the terms the great, the wealthy, are used, they are not names only: we have in mind the idea of persons and the quality of being great or wealthy. The words are used in the sentence where nouns are used, but have an adjectival meaning.

When the terms the great and the wealthy are used in the sentence above, they aren't just names: we are thinking about the idea of individuals and the qualities of being great or wealthy. These words function as nouns in the sentence but carry an adjectival meaning.

In the other sentences, why and wherefore, When, Now, and Then, are spoken of as if pure nouns; but still the reader considers this not a natural application of them as name words, but as a figure of speech.

In the other sentences, why and wherefore, When, Now, and Then, are referred to as if they are just nouns; however, the reader views this as an unnatural use of them as naming words, seeing it instead as a figure of speech.

NOTE.—These remarks do not apply, of course, to such words as become pure nouns by use. There are many of these. The adjective good has no claim on the noun goods; so, too, in speaking of the principal of a school, or a state secret, or a faithful domestic, or a criminal, etc., the words are entirely independent of any adjective force.

NOTE.—These comments don’t apply, of course, to words that become pure nouns through usage. There are many of these. The adjective good has no connection to the noun goods; similarly, when referring to the principal of a school, or a state secret, or a loyal domestic, or a criminal, etc., these words are completely independent of any adjectival meaning.

Exercise.

Pick out the nouns in the following sentences, and tell to which class each belongs. Notice if any have shifted from one class to another.

Pick out the nouns in the following sentences and identify which class each noun belongs to. Notice if any have changed from one class to another.

1. Hope springs eternal in the human breast.

1. Hope always lives on in the human heart.

2. Heaven from all creatures hides the book of Fate.

2. Heaven hides the book of Fate from all creatures.

3.

3.

Stone walls don't create a prison.
Nor iron bars a cage.

4. Truth-teller was our England's Alfred named.

4. Our England's truth-teller was named Alfred.

5. A great deal of talent is lost to the world for want of a little courage.

5. A lot of talent is wasted in the world because of a lack of courage.

6.

6.

Power set down his rod, And Ceremony lowered her pride.

7. She sweeps it through the court with troops of ladies.

7. She moves through the court with groups of ladies.

8. Learning, that cobweb of the brain.

8. Learning, that intricate web of the brain.

9.

9.

A little crying would soothe my heart; But in their salty bed
My tears need to stop, because every drop
Blocks needle and thread.

10. A fool speaks all his mind, but a wise man reserves something for hereafter.

10. A fool says everything he thinks, but a wise person holds back some thoughts for later.

11. Knowledge is proud that he has learned so much; Wisdom is humble that he knows no more.

11. Knowledge is proud of how much he has learned; Wisdom is humble because he knows there’s still so much more to learn.

12. Music hath charms to soothe the savage breast.

12. Music has the power to calm even the wildest heart.

13.

13.

And look, he shouted, the welcome,
Good guests, who are waiting for you here.

14. The fleet, shattered and disabled, returned to Spain.

14. The fleet, broken and out of commission, came back to Spain.

15. One To-day is worth two To-morrows.

15. One today is worth two tomorrows.

16. Vessels carrying coal are constantly moving.

16. Ships transporting coal are always in motion.

17.

17.

Some unknown but great poet like Milton may rest here,
Some Cromwell innocent of his country's blood.

18. And oft we trod a waste of pearly sands.

18. And often we walked along a stretch of pearly sands.

19.

19.

He appears to be a man of happy pasts.
And confident tomorrows.

20. The hours glide by; the silver moon is gone.

20. The hours go by quickly; the silver moon is gone.

21. Her robes of silk and velvet came from over the sea.

21. Her silk and velvet robes came from overseas.

22. My soldier cousin was once only a drummer boy.

22. My soldier cousin was once just a drummer boy.

23.

23.

But pleasures are like spread poppies,
You grab the flower, and its petals fall.

24. All that thou canst call thine own Lies in thy To-day.

24. Everything you can truly call your own is contained in your Today.

INFLECTIONS OF NOUNS.

GENDER.

What gender means in English. It is founded on sex.

21. In Latin, Greek, German, and many other languages, some general rules are given that names of male beings are usually masculine, and names of females are usually feminine. There are exceptions even to this general statement, but not so in English. Male beings are, in English grammar, always masculine; female, always feminine.

21. In Latin, Greek, German, and many other languages, there are some basic rules stating that names for males are usually masculine and names for females are usually feminine. There are exceptions to this general rule, but not in English. In English grammar, male beings are always masculine, and female beings are always feminine.

When, however, inanimate things are spoken of, these languages are totally unlike our own in determining the gender of words. For instance: in Latin, hortus (garden) is masculine, mensa (table) is feminine, corpus (body) is neuter; in German, das Messer (knife) is neuter, der Tisch (table) is masculine, die Gabel (fork) is feminine.

When talking about inanimate objects, these languages are completely different from ours in how they assign gender to words. For example, in Latin, hortus (garden) is masculine, mensa (table) is feminine, and corpus (body) is neuter; in German, das Messer (knife) is neuter, der Tisch (table) is masculine, and die Gabel (fork) is feminine.

The great difference is, that in English the gender follows the meaning of the word, in other languages gender follows the form; that is, in English, gender depends on sex: if a thing spoken of is of the male sex, the name of it is masculine; if of the female sex, the name of it is feminine. Hence:

The big difference is that in English, gender is based on the meaning of the word, while in other languages, gender is based on the form. In English, gender depends on sex: if the thing being talked about is male, the name for it is masculine; if it’s female, the name is feminine. So:

Definition.

22. Gender is the mode of distinguishing sex by words, or additions to words.

22. Gender is the way we use words or modify words to identify different sexes.

23. It is evident from this that English can have but two genders,—masculine and feminine.

23. It's clear from this that English has only two genders—masculine and feminine.

Gender nouns. Neuter nouns.

All nouns, then, must be divided into two principal classes,—gender nouns, those distinguishing the sex of the object; and neuter nouns, those which do not distinguish sex, or names of things without life, and consequently without sex.

All nouns must be divided into two main categories: gender nouns, which indicate the sex of the object, and neuter nouns, which do not specify sex or refer to inanimate objects, and therefore do not have a sex.

Gender nouns include names of persons and some names of animals; neuter nouns include some animals and all inanimate objects.

Gender nouns refer to names of people and certain names of animals; neuter nouns include some animals and all non-living things.

Some words either gender or neuter nouns, according to use.

24. Some words may be either gender nouns or neuter nouns, according to their use. Thus, the word child is neuter in the sentence, "A little child shall lead them," but is masculine in the sentence from Wordsworth,—

24. Some words can be gendered or neutral nouns depending on how they are used. For example, the word child is neutral in the sentence, "A little child shall lead them," but is masculine in the sentence from Wordsworth,—

I've seen A curious child ... applying to his ear The twists and turns of a smooth, shiny shell.

Of animals, those with which man comes in contact often, or which arouse his interest most, are named by gender nouns, as in these sentences:—

Of the animals that people frequently interact with or find most interesting, they are referred to using gender-specific terms, as shown in these sentences:—

Before the barn door strutted the gallant cock, that pattern of a husband, ... clapping his burnished wings.—Irving.

Before the barn door stood the proud rooster, that ideal of a husband, ... flapping his shiny wings.—Irving.

Gunpowder ... came to a stand just by the bridge, with a suddenness that had nearly sent his rider sprawling over his head—Id.

Gunpowder ... came to a stop right by the bridge, so suddenly that it almost tossed his rider over his head—Id.

Other animals are not distinguished as to sex, but are spoken of as neuter, the sex being of no consequence.

Other animals aren’t classified by sex and are referred to as neuter, since the sex doesn’t matter.

Not a turkey but he [Ichabod] beheld daintily trussed up, with its gizzard under its wing.—Irving.

Not a turkey but he [Ichabod] saw it neatly tied up, with its gizzard tucked under its wing.—Irving.

He next stooped down to feel the pig, if there were any signs of life in it.—Lamb.

He then bent down to check the pig for any signs of life.—Lamb.

No "common gender."

25. According to the definition, there can be no such thing as "common gender:" words either distinguish sex (or the sex is distinguished by the context) or else they do not distinguish sex.

25. According to the definition, there can't be a "common gender": words either indicate sex (or the sex is made clear by the context) or they don't indicate sex at all.

If such words as parent, servant, teacher, ruler, relative, cousin, domestic, etc., do not show the sex to which the persons belong, they are neuter words.

If words like parent, servant, teacher, ruler, relative, cousin, domestic, etc., don't indicate the gender of the individuals, they are considered gender-neutral words.

26. Put in convenient form, the division of words according to sex, or the lack of it, is,—

26. In simple terms, the classification of words by gender, or the absence of it, is,—

(MASCULINE: Male beings.
Gender nouns {
(FEMININE: Female beings.

(MASCULINE: Males.)
Gender nouns {
(FEMININE: Women.

Neuter nouns: Names of inanimate things, or of living beings whose sex cannot be determined.

Neuter nouns: Names of inanimate objects or living beings whose gender can't be identified.

27. The inflections for gender belong, of course, only to masculine and feminine nouns. Forms would be a more accurate word than inflections, since inflection applies only to the case of nouns.

27. Gender changes apply only to masculine and feminine nouns. Forms would be a better term than inflections, since inflection refers specifically to the case of nouns.

There are three ways to distinguish the genders:—

There are three ways to tell the genders:—

(1) By prefixing a gender word to another word.

(1) By adding a gender word in front of another word.

(2) By adding a suffix, generally to a masculine word.

(2) By adding a suffix, usually to a masculine word.

(3) By using a different word for each gender.

(3) By using a different word for each gender.

I. Gender shown by Prefixes.

Very few of class I.

28. Usually the gender words he and she are prefixed to neuter words; as he-goatshe-goat, cock sparrowhen sparrow, he-bearshe-bear.

28. Typically, the gender words he and she are added to neutral words; like he-goatshe-goat, cock sparrowhen sparrow, he-bearshe-bear.

One feminine, woman, puts a prefix before the masculine man. Woman is a short way of writing wifeman.

One feminine, woman, puts a prefix before the masculine man. Woman is a short way of writing wifeman.

II. Gender shown by Suffixes.

29. By far the largest number of gender words are those marked by suffixes. In this particular the native endings have been largely supplanted by foreign suffixes.

29. The majority of gender words are those that have suffixes. In this case, the original native endings have mostly been replaced with foreign suffixes.

Native suffixes.

The native suffixes to indicate the feminine were -en and -ster. These remain in vixen and spinster, though both words have lost their original meanings.

The native suffixes used to indicate the feminine were -en and -ster. These are still present in vixen and spinster, although both words have lost their original meanings.

The word vixen was once used as the feminine of fox by the Southern-English. For fox they said vox; for from they said vram; and for the older word fat they said vat, as in wine vat. Hence vixen is for fyxen, from the masculine fox.

The word vixen used to be the feminine form of fox in Southern England. They referred to fox as vox; for from they said vram; and for the older term fat they used vat, like in wine vat. So, vixen comes from fyxen, which is derived from the masculine fox.

Spinster is a relic of a large class of words that existed in Old and Middle English,[1] but have now lost their original force as feminines. The old masculine answering to spinster was spinner; but spinster has now no connection with it.

Spinster is an outdated term from a large group of words that were used in Old and Middle English,[1] but have since lost their original meaning related to women. The old masculine counterpart to spinster was spinner, but now spinster has no connection to it.

The foreign suffixes are of two kinds:—

The foreign suffixes come in two types:—

Foreign suffixes. Unaltered and little used.

(1) Those belonging to borrowed words, as czarina, señorita, executrix, donna. These are attached to foreign words, and are never used for words recognized as English.

(1) These are borrowed words like czarina, señorita, executrix, and donna. They are linked to foreign words and are never used for words that are considered English.

Slightly changed and widely used.

(2) That regarded as the standard or regular termination of the feminine, -ess (French esse, Low Latin issa), the one most used. The corresponding masculine may have the ending -er (-or), but in most cases it has not. Whenever we adopt a new masculine word, the feminine is formed by adding this termination -ess.

(2) This is considered the standard or regular ending for feminine words, -ess (from French esse, Low Latin issa), the one that's most commonly used. The corresponding masculine form might end in -er (-or), but in many cases, it doesn’t. Whenever we adopt a new masculine word, the feminine version is created by adding the -ess ending.

Sometimes the -ess has been added to a word already feminine by the ending -ster; as seam-str-ess, song-str-ess. The ending -ster had then lost its force as a feminine suffix; it has none now in the words huckster, gamester, trickster, punster.

Sometimes the -ess has been added to a word that is already feminine due to the ending -ster; for example, seamstr-ess, songstr-ess. The ending -ster had then lost its power as a feminine suffix; it has no significance now in the words huckster, gamester, trickster, punster.

Ending of masculine not changed.

30. The ending -ess is added to many words without changing the ending of the masculine; as,—

30. The ending -ess is added to many words without changing the ending of the masculine; as,—

  • baron—baroness
  • count—countess
  • lion—lioness
  • Jew—Jewess
  • heir—heiress
  • host—hostess
  • priest—priestess
  • giant—giantess
Masculine ending dropped.

The masculine ending may be dropped before the feminine -ess is added; as,—

The masculine ending can be dropped before adding the feminine -ess; as,—

  • abbot—abbess
  • black—negress
  • murderer—murderess
  • sorcerer—sorceress
Vowel dropped before adding -ess.

The feminine may discard a vowel which appears in the masculine; as in—

The feminine form can drop a vowel that appears in the masculine; for example—

  • actor—actress
  • master—mistress
  • benefactor—benefactress
  • emperor—empress
  • tiger—tigress
  • enchanter—enchantress

Empress has been cut down from emperice (twelfth century) and emperesse (thirteenth century), from Latin imperatricem.

Empress has been shortened from emperice (twelfth century) and emperesse (thirteenth century), from Latin imperatricem.

Master and mistress were in Middle English maistermaistresse, from the Old French maistremaistresse.

Master and mistress were in Middle English maistermaistresse, from the Old French maistremaistresse.

31. When the older -en and -ster went out of use as the distinctive mark of the feminine, the ending -ess, from the French -esse, sprang into a popularity much greater than at present.

31. When the older -en and -ster fell out of use as the distinctive markers of the feminine, the ending -ess, derived from the French -esse, gained much greater popularity than it has today.

Ending -ess less used now than formerly.

Instead of saying doctress, fosteress, wagoness, as was said in the sixteenth century, or servauntesse, teacheresse, neighboresse, frendesse, as in the fourteenth century, we have dispensed with the ending in many cases, and either use a prefix word or leave the masculine to do work for the feminine also.

Instead of saying doctress, fosteress, wagoness like they did in the sixteenth century, or servauntesse, teacheresse, neighboresse, frendesse as they did in the fourteenth century, we have dropped the ending in many cases and either use a prefix or let the masculine terms serve for the feminine as well.

Thus, we say doctor (masculine and feminine) or woman doctor, teacher or lady teacher, neighbor (masculine and feminine), etc. We frequently use such words as author, editor, chairman, to represent persons of either sex.

Thus, we say doctor (for both males and females) or woman doctor, teacher or female teacher, neighbor (for both males and females), etc. We often use terms like author, editor, and chairperson to refer to individuals of any gender.

NOTE.—There is perhaps this distinction observed: when we speak of a female as an active agent merely, we use the masculine termination, as, "George Eliot is the author of 'Adam Bede;'" but when we speak purposely to denote a distinction from a male, we use the feminine, as, "George Eliot is an eminent authoress."

NOTE.—There seems to be a distinction made: when we refer to a female as an active agent only, we use the masculine ending, as in, "George Eliot is the author of 'Adam Bede;'" but when we intentionally differentiate from a male, we use the feminine, as in, "George Eliot is an eminent authoress."

III. Gender shown by Different Words.

32. In some of these pairs, the feminine and the masculine are entirely different words; others have in their origin the same root. Some of them have an interesting history, and will be noted below:—

32. In some of these pairs, the feminine and masculine forms are completely different words; others share the same root. Some of them have an interesting history, which will be discussed below:—

  • bachelor—maid
  • boy—girl
  • brother—sister
  • drake—duck
  • earl—countess
  • father—mother
  • gander—goose
  • hart—roe
  • horse—mare
  • husband—wife
  • king—queen
  • lord—lady
  • wizard—witch
  • nephew—niece
  • ram—ewe
  • sir—madam
  • son—daughter
  • uncle—aunt
  • bull—cow
  • boar—sow

Girl originally meant a child of either sex, and was used for male or female until about the fifteenth century.

Girl originally referred to a child of either gender and was used for both boys and girls until around the fifteenth century.

Drake is peculiar in that it is formed from a corresponding feminine which is no longer used. It is not connected historically with our word duck, but is derived from ened (duck) and an obsolete suffix rake (king). Three letters of ened have fallen away, leaving our word drake.

Drake is unique because it comes from a corresponding feminine form that is no longer in use. It isn’t historically related to our word duck, but is derived from ened (duck) and an outdated suffix rake (king). Three letters from ened have dropped off, resulting in our word drake.

Gander and goose were originally from the same root word. Goose has various cognate forms in the languages akin to English (German Gans, Icelandic gás, Danish gaas, etc.). The masculine was formed by adding -a, the old sign of the masculine. This gansa was modified into gan-ra, gand-ra, finally gander; the d being inserted to make pronunciation easy, as in many other words.

Gander and goose originally came from the same root word. Goose has different related forms in languages similar to English (German Gans, Icelandic gás, Danish gaas, etc.). The masculine form was created by adding -a, the old marker for masculine. This gansa evolved into gan-ra, gand-ra, and finally gander; the d was added to make it easier to pronounce, like in many other words.

Mare, in Old English mere, had the masculine mearh (horse), but this has long been obsolete.

Mare, in Old English mere, had the masculine mearh (horse), but this has long been outdated.

Husband and wife are not connected in origin. Husband is a Scandinavian word (Anglo-Saxon hūsbonda from Icelandic hús-bóndi, probably meaning house dweller); wife was used in Old and Middle English to mean woman in general.

Husband and wife don't have the same origin. Husband comes from a Scandinavian word (Anglo-Saxon hūsbonda from Icelandic hús-bóndi, likely meaning house dweller); wife was used in Old and Middle English to refer to a woman in general.

King and queen are said by some (Skeat, among others) to be from the same root word, but the German etymologist Kluge says they are not.

King and queen are thought by some (Skeat, among others) to have the same root word, but the German etymologist Kluge argues that they do not.

Lord is said to be a worn-down form of the Old English hlāf-weard (loaf keeper), written loverd, lhauerd, or lauerd in Middle English. Lady is from hlœ̄̄fdige (hlœ̄̄f meaning loaf, and dige being of uncertain origin and meaning).

Lord is believed to be a simplified version of the Old English hlāf-weard (loaf keeper), which was written as loverd, lhauerd, or lauerd in Middle English. Lady comes from hlœ̄̄fdige (hlœ̄̄f meaning loaf, and dige having an uncertain origin and meaning).

Witch is the Old English wicce, but wizard is from the Old French guiscart (prudent), not immediately connected with witch, though both are ultimately from the same root.

Witch comes from the Old English wicce, while wizard originates from the Old French guiscart (prudent). They aren't directly related, but both trace back to the same root.

Sir is worn down from the Old French sire (Latin senior). Madam is the French ma dame, from Latin mea domina.

Sir comes from the Old French sire (Latin senior). Madam is derived from the French ma dame, which comes from Latin mea domina.

Two masculines from feminines.

33. Besides gander and drake, there are two other masculine words that were formed from the feminine:—

33. Besides gander and drake, there are two other masculine words that were created from the feminine:—

Bridegroom, from Old English brȳd-guma (bride's man). The r in groom has crept in from confusion with the word groom.

Bridegroom, from Old English brȳd-guma (bride's man). The r in groom has entered from mixing it up with the word groom.

Widower, from the weakening of the ending -a in Old English to -e in Middle English. The older forms, widuwawiduwe, became identical, and a new masculine ending was therefore added to distinguish the masculine from the feminine (compare Middle English widuerwidewe).

Widower, evolved from the fading ending -a in Old English to -e in Middle English. The older forms, widuwawiduwe, became the same, so a new masculine ending was added to differentiate the masculine from the feminine (compare Middle English widuerwidewe).

Personification.

34. Just as abstract ideas are personified (Sec. 16), material objects may be spoken of like gender nouns; for example,—

34. Just like we give abstract ideas human traits (Sec. 16), we can talk about physical objects using gendered terms; for example,—

"Now, where the swift Rhone carves its way." —Byron.
The Sun now rose on the right:
Out of the sea came him. —Coleridge.
And maybe the Queen Moon is on her throne,
Surrounded by all her starry Fays.
—Keats.
Britannia needs no defenses, No towers on the steep; Her march is across the mountain waves,
Her home is on the ocean.
—Campbell.

This is not exclusively a poetic use. In ordinary speech personification is very frequent: the pilot speaks of his boat as feminine; the engineer speaks so of his engine; etc.

This isn’t just a poetic way of speaking. In everyday conversation, personification is quite common: a pilot refers to his boat in the feminine; an engineer does the same with his engine; etc.

Effect of personification.

In such cases the gender is marked by the pronoun, and not by the form of the noun. But the fact that in English the distinction of gender is confined to difference of sex makes these departures more effective.

In these situations, gender is indicated by the pronoun rather than the noun's form. However, the fact that in English, the distinction of gender is limited to differences in sex makes these deviations more impactful.

NUMBER.

Definition.

35. In nouns, number means the mode of indicating whether we are speaking of one thing or of more than one.

35. In nouns, number refers to how we indicate whether we are talking about one item or multiple items.

36. Our language has two numbers,—singular and plural. The singular number denotes that one thing is spoken of; the plural, more than one.

36. Our language has two numbers—singular and plural. The singular form refers to one thing, while the plural form refers to more than one.

37. There are three ways of changing the singular form to the plural:—

37. There are three ways to change a singular form to a plural:—

(1) By adding -en.

By adding -en.

(2) By changing the root vowel.

(2) By changing the root vowel.

(3) By adding -s (or -es).

By adding -s (or -es).

The first two methods prevailed, together with the third, in Old English, but in modern English -s or -es has come to be the "standard" ending; that is, whenever we adopt a new word, we make its plural by adding -s or -es.

The first two methods were common, along with the third, in Old English, but in modern English, -s or -es has become the "standard" ending; that is, whenever we take on a new word, we make its plural by adding -s or -es.

I. Plurals formed by the Suffix -en.

The -en inflection.

38. This inflection remains only in the word oxen, though it was quite common in Old and Middle English; for instance, eyen (eyes), treen (trees), shoon (shoes), which last is still used in Lowland Scotch. Hosen is found in the King James version of the Bible, and housen is still common in the provincial speech in England.

38. This form only exists in the word oxen, even though it was quite common in Old and Middle English; for example, eyen (eyes), treen (trees), shoon (shoes), which is still used in Lowland Scotch. Hosen appears in the King James version of the Bible, and housen is still commonly used in regional speech in England.

39. But other words were inflected afterwards, in imitation of the old words in -en by making a double plural.

39. But later, other words were changed to mimic the old words ending in -en by creating a double plural.

-En inflection imitated by other words.

Brethren has passed through three stages. The old plural was brothru, then brothre or brethre, finally brethren. The weakening of inflections led to this addition.

Brethren has gone through three stages. The old plural was brothru, then brothre or brethre, and finally brethren. The decline of inflections resulted in this addition.

Children has passed through the same history, though the intermediate form childer lasted till the seventeenth century in literary English, and is still found in dialects; as,—

Children has gone through the same history, although the earlier form childer was used in literary English until the seventeenth century and can still be seen in some dialects; as,—

"God bless me! so then, after all, you'll have a chance to see your childer get up like, and get settled."—Quoted By De Quincey.

"God help me! So then, after all, you'll get a chance to see your children get up and get settled."—Quoted by De Quincey.

Kine is another double plural, but has now no singular.

Kine is another example of a double plural, but it no longer has a singular form.

In spite of wandering kine and other adverse circumstance.—Thoreau.

In spite of roaming cattle and other tough situations. —Thoreau.

II. Plurals formed by Vowel Change.

40. Examples of this inflection are,—

40. Examples of this inflection are,—

  • man—men
  • foot—feet
  • goose—geese
  • louse—lice
  • mouse—mice
  • tooth—teeth

Some other words—as book, turf, wight, borough—formerly had the same inflection, but they now add the ending -s.

Some other words—like book, turf, wight, borough—used to have the same inflection, but now they just have the ending -s.

41. Akin to this class are some words, originally neuter, that have the singular and plural alike; such as deer, sheep, swine, etc.

41. Similar to this group are some words, originally neuter, that are the same in both singular and plural; like deer, sheep, swine, etc.

Other words following the same usage are, pair, brace, dozen, after numerals (if not after numerals, or if preceded by the prepositions in, by, etc, they add -s): also trout, salmon; head, sail; cannon; heathen, folk, people.

Other words that follow the same usage are, pair, brace, dozen, when used after numbers (if not following numbers, or if preceded by the prepositions in, by, etc., they add -s): also trout, salmon; head, sail; cannon; heathen, folk, people.

The words horse and foot, when they mean soldiery, retain the same form for plural meaning; as,—

The words horse and foot, when referring to soldiers, keep the same form in the plural; for example,—

The foot are 80,000,
The horses are thousands ten.
—Macaulay.
Lee marched over the mountain wall,—
Over the winding mountains down,
Horse and foot into Frederick town. —Whittier.

III. Plurals formed by Adding -s or -es.

42. Instead of -s, the ending -es is added—

Instead of -s, add -es

(1) If a word ends in a letter which cannot add -s and be pronounced. Such are box, cross, ditch, glass, lens, quartz, etc.

(1) If a word ends with a letter that can't take -s and still be pronounced. Examples include box, cross, ditch, glass, lens, quartz, etc.

-Es added in certain cases.

If the word ends in a sound which cannot add -s, a new syllable is made; as, niche—niches, race—races, house—houses, prize—prizes, chaise—chaises, etc.

If the word ends in a sound that can't take -s, a new syllable forms; for example, niche—niches, race—races, house—houses, prize—prizes, chaise—chaises, etc.

-Es is also added to a few words ending in -o, though this sound combines readily with -s, and does not make an extra syllable: cargo—cargoes, negro—negroes, hero—heroes, volcano—volcanoes, etc.

-Es is also added to some words ending in -o, though this sound combines easily with -s and doesn't create an extra syllable: cargo—cargoes, black—blacks, hero—heroes, volcano—volcanoes, etc.

Usage differs somewhat in other words of this class, some adding -s, and some -es.

Usage varies a bit with other words in this category, with some taking -s and others taking -es.

(2) If a word ends in -y preceded by a consonant (the y being then changed to i); e.g., fancies, allies, daisies, fairies.

(2) If a word ends in -y and is preceded by a consonant (the y is then changed to i); for example, fancies, allies, daisies, fairies.

Words in -ies.

Formerly, however, these words ended in -ie, and the real ending is therefore -s. Notice these from Chaucer (fourteenth century):—

Formerly, however, these words ended in -ie, and the real ending is therefore -s. Notice these from Chaucer (fourteenth century):—

Their old form.
The lily on her stalk green. Of the illness he had endured.

And these from Spenser (sixteenth century):—

And these are from Spenser (sixteenth century):—

Be fully aware, said that gentle lady. Finally, beautiful Hesperus in the highest sky Had spent his lamp.

(3) In the case of some words ending in -f or -fe, which have the plural in -ves: calfcalves, halfhalves, knifeknives, shelfshelves, etc.

(3) For some words that end in -f or -fe, the plural form changes to -ves: calfcalves, halfhalves, knifeknives, shelfshelves, etc.

Special Lists.

43. Material nouns and abstract nouns are always singular. When such words take a plural ending, they lose their identity, and go over to other classes (Secs. 15 and 17).

43. Material nouns and abstract nouns are always singular. When these words take on a plural ending, they lose their identity and shift to different categories (Secs. 15 and 17).

44. Proper nouns are regularly singular, but may be made plural when we wish to speak of several persons or things bearing the same name; e.g., the Washingtons, the Americas.

44. Proper nouns are usually singular, but can be made plural when we want to refer to several people or things that share the same name; for example, the Washingtons, the Americas.

45. Some words are usually singular, though they are plural in form. Examples of these are, optics, economics, physics, mathematics, politics, and many branches of learning; also news, pains (care), molasses, summons, means: as,—

45. Some words are typically singular, even though they look plural. Examples include optics, economics, physics, mathematics, politics, and many fields of study; also news, pains (in the sense of care), molasses, summons, means: such as,—

Politics, in its widest extent, is both the science and the art of government.—Century Dictionary.

Politics, in its broadest sense, is both the science and the art of governing.—Century Dictionary.

So live, that when thy summons comes, etc.—Bryant.

So live that when your summons comes, etc.—Bryant.

It served simply as a means of sight.—Prof. Dana.

It just acted as a way to see.—Prof. Dana.

Means plural.

Two words, means and politics, may be plural in their construction with verbs and adjectives:—

Two words, means and politics, may be plural in their construction with verbs and adjectives:—

Words, by strongly conveying the passions, by those means which we have already mentioned, fully compensate for their weakness in other respects.—Burke.

Words, by effectively expressing emotions through the means we've already discussed, make up for their shortcomings in other areas.—Burke.

With great dexterity these means were now applied.—Motley.

With incredible skill these methods were now used.—Diverse.

By these means, I say, riches will accumulate.—Goldsmith.

By these means, I say, wealth will accumulate.—Goldsmith.

Politics plural.

Cultivating a feeling that politics are tiresome.—G. W. Curtis.

Cultivating a sense that politics are boring.—G.W. Curtis.

The politics in which he took the keenest interest were politics scarcely deserving of the name.—Macaulay.

The politics he was most interested in barely qualified as politics at all.—Macaulay.

Now I read all the politics that come out.—Goldsmith.

Now I read all the politics that come out. —Goldsmith.

46. Some words have no corresponding singular.

Some words have no singular.

  • aborigines
  • amends
  • annals
  • assets
  • antipodes
  • scissors
  • thanks
  • spectacles
  • vespers
  • victuals
  • matins
  • nuptials
  • oats
  • obsequies
  • premises
  • bellows
  • billiards
  • dregs
  • gallows
  • tongs
Occasionally singular words.

Sometimes, however, a few of these words have the construction of singular nouns. Notice the following:—

Sometimes, however, some of these words are structured like singular nouns. Take note of the following:—

They cannot get on without each other any more than one blade of a scissors can cut without the other.—J. L. Laughlin.

They can't get by without each other any more than one blade of a scissors can cut without the other.—J.L. Laughlin.

A relic which, if I recollect right, he pronounced to have been a tongs.—Irving.

A relic that, if I remember correctly, he said was a pair of tongs.—Irving.

Besides this, it is furnished with a forceps.—Goldsmith.

Besides this, it comes with a forceps.—Goldsmith.

The air,—was it subdued when...the wind was trained only to turn a windmill, carry off chaff, or work in a bellows?—Prof. Dana.

The air—was it quiet when...the wind was just meant to spin a windmill, blow away chaff, or work in a bellows?—Prof. Dana.

In Early Modern English thank is found.

In Early Modern English, "thank" is used.

What thank have ye?—Bible

What do you thank?—Bible

47. Three words were originally singular, the present ending -s not being really a plural inflection, but they are regularly construed as plural: alms, eaves, riches.

47. Three words were originally singular, and the current ending -s isn't truly a plural form, but they are commonly understood as plural: alms, eaves, riches.

two plurals.

48. A few nouns have two plurals differing in meaning.

48. Some nouns have two plurals that have different meanings.

  • brother—brothers (by blood), brethren (of a society or church).
  • cloth—cloths (kinds of cloth), clothes (garments).
  • die—dies (stamps for coins, etc.), dice (for gaming).
  • fish—fish (collectively), fishes (individuals or kinds).
  • genius—geniuses (men of genius), genii (spirits).
  • index—indexes (to books), indices (signs in algebra).
  • pea—peas (separately), pease (collectively).
  • penny—pennies (separately), pence (collectively).
  • shot—shot (collective balls), shots (number of times fired).

In speaking of coins, twopence, sixpence, etc., may add -s, making a double plural, as two sixpences.

In talking about coins, twopence, sixpence, etc., you can add -s, creating a double plural, like two sixpences.

One plural, two meanings.

49. Other words have one plural form with two meanings,—one corresponding to the singular, the other unlike it.

49. Some words have one plural form with two meanings—one that matches the singular, and the other that is different from it.

  • custom—customs: (1) habits, ways; (2) revenue duties.
  • letter—letters: (1) the alphabet, or epistles; (2) literature.
  • number—numbers: (1) figures; (2) poetry, as in the lines,—
I lisped in numbers, because the numbers arrived.
—Pope.
Tell me not, in sad numbers.
Longfellow.

Numbers also means issues, or copies, of a periodical.

Numbers also refers to issues, or editions, of a magazine.

  • pain—pains: (1) suffering; (2) care, trouble,
  • part—parts: (1) divisions; (2) abilities, faculties.
Two classes of compound words.

50. Compound words may be divided into two classes:—

50. Compound words can be divided into two categories:—

(1) Those whose parts are so closely joined as to constitute one word. These make the last part plural.

(1) Those whose parts are so closely connected that they form one word. These make the last part plural.

  • courtyard
  • dormouse
  • Englishman
  • fellow-servant
  • fisherman
  • Frenchman
  • forget-me-not
  • goosequill
  • handful
  • mouthful
  • cupful
  • maidservant
  • pianoforte
  • stepson
  • spoonful
  • titmouse

(2) Those groups in which the first part is the principal one, followed by a word or phrase making a modifier. The chief member adds -s in the plural.

(2) Those groups where the first part is the main one, followed by a word or phrase that acts as a modifier. The main member adds -s in the plural.

  • aid-de-camp
  • attorney at law
  • billet-doux
  • commander in chief
  • court-martial
  • cousin-german
  • father-in-law
  • knight-errant
  • hanger-on

NOTE.—Some words ending in -man are not compounds of the English word man, but add -s; such as talisman, firman, Brahman, German, Norman, Mussulman, Ottoman.

NOTE.—Some words ending in -man are not compounds of the English word man, but instead add -s; examples include talisman, firman, Brahman, German, Norman, Mussulman, Ottoman.

51. Some groups pluralize both parts of the group; as man singer, manservant, woman servant, woman singer.

51. Some groups make both parts of the group plural; like men singers, menservants, women servants, women singers.

Two methods in use for names with titles.

52. As to plurals of names with titles, there is some disagreement among English writers. The title may be plural, as the Messrs. Allen, the Drs. Brown, the Misses Rich; or the name may be pluralized.

52. When it comes to plurals of names with titles, English writers have different opinions. The title can be made plural, like the Messrs. Allen, the Drs. Brown, the Misses Rich; or the name itself can be pluralized.

The former is perhaps more common in present-day use, though the latter is often found; for example,—

The former is probably more commonly used today, although the latter is often seen; for example,—

Then came Mr. and Mrs. Briggs, and then the three Miss Spinneys, then Silas Peckham.—Dr. Holmes.

Then came Mr. and Mrs. Briggs, followed by the three Miss Spinneys, and then Silas Peckham.—Dr. Holmes.

Our immortal Fielding was of the younger branch of the Earls of Denbigh, who drew their origin from the Counts of Hapsburgh.—Gibbon.

Our timeless Fielding came from the younger line of the Earls of Denbigh, who trace their roots back to the Counts of Hapsburgh.—Gibbon.

The Miss Flamboroughs were reckoned the best dancers in the parish.—Goldsmith.

The Miss Flamboroughs were considered the best dancers in the parish.—Goldsmith.

The Misses Nettengall's young ladies come to the Cathedral too.—Dickens.

The Misses Nettengall's young ladies go to the Cathedral too.—Dickens.

The Messrs. Harper have done the more than generous thing by Mr. Du Maurier.—The Critic.

The Messrs. Harper have been more than generous to Mr. Du Maurier.—The Reviewer.

53. A number of foreign words have been adopted into English without change of form. These are said to be domesticated, and retain their foreign plurals.

53. Several foreign words have been adopted into English without altering their form. These are known as domesticated words and keep their foreign plurals.

Others have been adopted, and by long use have altered their power so as to conform to English words. They are then said to be naturalized, or Anglicized, or Englished.

Others have been adopted, and over time have changed their power to fit English words. They are then referred to as naturalized, or Anglicized, or Englished.

Domesticated words.

The domesticated words may retain the original plural. Some of them have a secondary English plural in -s or -es.

The domesticated words may keep the original plural. Some of them have an additional English plural in -s or -es.

Exercise.

Find in the dictionary the plurals of these words:—

Find the plurals of these words in the dictionary:—

I. FROM THE LATIN.

I. FROM THE LATIN.

  • apparatus
  • appendix
  • axis
  • datum
  • erratum
  • focus
  • formula
  • genus
  • larva
  • medium
  • memorandum
  • nebula
  • radius
  • series
  • species
  • stratum
  • terminus
  • vertex

II. FROM THE GREEK.

II. FROM GREECE.

  • analysis
  • antithesis
  • automaton
  • basis
  • crisis
  • ellipsis
  • hypothesis
  • parenthesis
  • phenomenon
  • thesis
Anglicized words.

When the foreign words are fully naturalized, they form their plurals in the regular way; as,—

When foreign words are fully adopted into the language, they form their plurals in the usual manner; as,—

  • bandits
  • cherubs
  • dogmas
  • encomiums
  • enigmas
  • focuses
  • formulas
  • geniuses
  • herbariums
  • indexes
  • seraphs
  • apexes
Usage varies in plurals of letters, figures, etc.

54. Letters, figures, etc., form their plurals by adding -s or 's. Words quoted merely as words, without reference to their meaning, also add -s or 's; as, "His 9's (or 9s) look like 7's (or 7s)," "Avoid using too many and's (or ands)," "Change the +'s (or +s) to -'s (or -s)."

54. Letters, numbers, etc., form their plurals by adding -s or 's. Words mentioned just as words, without regard to their meaning, also add -s or 's; for example, "His 9's (or 9s) look like 7's (or 7s)," "Avoid using too many and's (or ands)," "Change the +'s (or +s) to -'s (or -s)."

CASE.

Definition.

55. Case is an inflection or use of a noun (or pronoun) to show its relation to other words in the sentence.

55. Case is a modification or usage of a noun (or pronoun) to indicate its relationship to other words in the sentence.

In the sentence, "He sleeps in a felon's cell," the word felon's modifies cell, and expresses a relation akin to possession; cell has another relation, helping to express the idea of place with the word in.

In the sentence, "He sleeps in a felon's cell," the word felon's describes the cell, indicating a relationship similar to possession; cell has another relationship, contributing to the idea of location with the word in.

56. In the general wearing-away of inflections, the number of case forms has been greatly reduced.

56. As inflections have generally diminished, the number of case forms has significantly decreased.

Only two case forms.

There are now only two case forms of English nouns,—one for the nominative and objective, one for the possessive: consequently the matter of inflection is a very easy thing to handle in learning about cases.

There are now only two forms of English nouns—one for the nominative and objective, and one for the possessive: therefore, dealing with inflection is quite simple when it comes to learning about cases.

Reasons for speaking of three cases of nouns.

But there are reasons why grammars treat of three cases of nouns when there are only two forms:—

But there are reasons why grammars discuss three cases of nouns when there are only two forms:—

(1) Because the relations of all words, whether inflected or not, must be understood for purposes of analysis.

(1) Because the relationships between all words, whether they are changed in form or not, need to be understood for analysis purposes.

(2) Because pronouns still have three case forms as well as three case relations.

(2) Because pronouns still have three case forms and three case relations.

57. Nouns, then, may be said to have three cases,—the nominative, the objective, and the possessive.

57. Nouns, then, can be classified into three cases: the nominative, the objective, and the possessive.

I. Uses of the Nominative.

58. The nominative case is used as follows:—

58. The nominative case is used like this:—

(1) As the subject of a verb: "Water seeks its level."

(1) As the subject of a verb: "Water finds its own level."

(2) As a predicate noun, completing a verb, and referring to or explaining the subject: "A bent twig makes a crooked tree."

(2) As a predicate noun, completing a verb, and referring to or explaining the subject: "A bent twig makes a crooked tree."

(3) In apposition with some other nominative word, adding to the meaning of that word: "The reaper Death with his sickle keen."

(3) In apposition with another nominative word, enhancing the meaning of that word: "The reaper Death with his sharp sickle."

(4) In direct address: "Lord Angus, thou hast lied!"

(4) In direct address: "Lord Angus, you have lied!"

(5) With a participle in an absolute or independent phrase (there is some discussion whether this is a true nominative): "The work done, they returned to their homes."

(5) With a participle in an absolute or independent phrase (there's some debate about whether this is a true nominative): "The work done, they returned to their homes."

(6) With an infinitive in exclamations: "David to die!"

(6) With an infinitive in exclamations: "David dying!"

Exercise.

Pick out the nouns in the nominative case, and tell which use of the nominative each one has.

Pick out the nouns in the subject case, and explain how each one is used in that case.

1. Moderate lamentation is the right of the dead; excessive grief, the enemy of the living.

1. A reasonable amount of sorrow is the right of the dead; overwhelming sadness is a burden to the living.

2.

2.

Excuses are like clothes that, when caught off guard, Good manners are reserved for essential needs.

3. Human experience is the great test of truth.

3. Human experience is the ultimate test of what’s true.

4. Cheerfulness and content are great beautifiers.

4. Happiness and satisfaction are amazing things that make you look better.

5. Three properties belong to wisdom,—nature, learning, and experience; three things characterize man,—person, fate, and merit.

5. Wisdom has three qualities—nature, learning, and experience; three things define a person—identity, circumstances, and achievements.

6.

6.

But of all the disasters, good Heaven, your wrath can bring, Save, save, oh save me from the honest friend!

7. Conscience, her first law broken, wounded lies.

7. Conscience, her first law broken, wounded lies.

8. They charged, sword in hand and visor down.

8. They charged, sword drawn and visor down.

9.

9.

O sleep! O sweet sleep! Nature's gentle caretaker, how have I scared you?

II. Uses of the Objective.

59. The objective case is used as follows:—

59. The objective case is used like this:—

(1) As the direct object of a verb, naming the person or thing directly receiving the action of the verb: "Woodman, spare that tree!"

(1) As the direct object of a verb, referring to the person or thing that directly receives the action of the verb: "Woodman, spare that tree!"

(2) As the indirect object of a verb, naming the person or thing indirectly affected by the action of the verb: "Give the devil his due."

(2) As the indirect object of a verb, naming the person or thing indirectly affected by the action of the verb: "Give the devil what he deserves."

(3) Adverbially, defining the action of a verb by denoting time, measure, distance, etc. (in the older stages of the language, this took the regular accusative inflection): "Full fathom five thy father lies;" "Cowards die many times before their deaths."

(3) Adverbially, defining the action of a verb by indicating time, measure, distance, etc. (in earlier stages of the language, this had the regular accusative ending): "Full fathom five your father lies;" "Cowards die many times before their deaths."

(4) As the second object, completing the verb, and thus becoming part of the predicate in acting upon an object: "Time makes the worst enemies friends;" "Thou makest the storm a calm." In these sentences the real predicates are makes friends, taking the object enemies, and being equivalent to one verb, reconciles; and makest a calm, taking the object storm, and meaning calmest. This is also called the predicate objective or the factitive object.

(4) As the second object, completing the verb, and thus becoming part of the predicate when acting on an object: "Time turns the worst enemies into friends;" "You turn the storm into a calm." In these sentences, the real predicates are turns enemies into friends, taking the object enemies, and are equivalent to the single verb, reconciles; and turns a storm into calm, taking the object storm, meaning calms it down. This is also referred to as the predicate objective or the factitive object.

(5) As the object of a preposition, the word toward which the preposition points, and which it joins to another word: "He must have a long spoon that would eat with the devil."

(5) As the object of a preposition, it refers to the word that the preposition indicates and connects to another word: "He must have a long spoon to eat with the devil."

The preposition sometimes takes the possessive case of a noun, as will be seen in Sec. 68.

The preposition can sometimes take the possessive form of a noun, as will be shown in Sec. 68.

(6) In apposition with another objective: "The opinions of this junto were completely controlled by Nicholas Vedder, a patriarch of the village, and landlord of the inn."

(6) In apposition with another objective: "The opinions of this group were completely controlled by Nicholas Vedder, a patriarch of the village, and landlord of the inn."

Exercise.

Point out the nouns in the objective case in these sentences, and tell which use each has:—

Point out the nouns in the objective case in these sentences, and explain the function of each one:—

1. Tender men sometimes have strong wills.

1. Sensitive men can sometimes have strong wills.

2. Necessity is the certain connection between cause and effect.

2. Necessity is the definite link between cause and effect.

3. Set a high price on your leisure moments; they are sands of precious gold.

3. Value your leisure time highly; it's as precious as gold.

4. But the flood came howling one day.

4. But one day, the flood rushed in with a roar.

5. I found the urchin Cupid sleeping.

5. I found Cupid, the little sea urchin, sleeping.

6. Five times every year he was to be exposed in the pillory.

6. He was to be put in the pillory five times each year.

7. The noblest mind the best contentment has.

7. The most noble mind finds the greatest contentment.

8. Multitudes came every summer to visit that famous natural curiosity, the Great Stone Face.

8. Every summer, crowds came to see the famous natural wonder, the Great Stone Face.

9.

9.

And spinning plate, and penalties paid,
His winter task became a hobby.

10.

10.

He broke the ice at the edge of the streamlet,
And gave the leper food and drink.

III. Uses of the Possessive.

60. The possessive case always modifies another word, expressed or understood. There are three forms of possessive showing how a word is related in sense to the modified word:—

60. The possessive case always modifies another word, whether it's stated or implied. There are three forms of possessive that show how a word connects meaning-wise to the modified word:—

(1) Appositional possessive, as in these expressions,—

(1) Appositional possessive, as in these expressions,—

The blind old man of Scio's rocky isle.—Byron.

The blind old man of Scio's rocky island.—Byron.

Beside a pumice isle in Baiæ's bay.—Shelley.

Beside a pumice island in Baiæ's bay.—Shelley.

In these sentences the phrases are equivalent to of the rocky isle [of] Scio, and in the bay [of] Baiæ, the possessive being really equivalent here to an appositional objective. It is a poetic expression, the equivalent phrase being used in prose.

In these sentences, the phrases translate to of the rocky isle [of] Scio and in the bay [of] Baiæ, where the possessive essentially functions like an appositional objective. It's a poetic expression, with the equivalent phrase used in prose.

(2) Objective possessive, as shown in the sentences,—

(2) Objective possessive, as demonstrated in the sentences,—

Ann Turner had taught her the secret before this last good lady had been hanged for Sir Thomas Overbury's murder.—Hawthorne.

Ann Turner had taught her the secret before this last good lady had been hanged for Sir Thomas Overbury's murder.—Hawthorne.

He passes to-day in building an air castle for to-morrow, or in writing yesterday's elegy.—Thackeray

He spends today creating a daydream for tomorrow, or writing yesterday's tribute.—Thackeray

In these the possessives are equivalent to an objective after a verbal expression: as, for murdering Sir Thomas Overbury; an elegy to commemorate yesterday. For this reason the use of the possessive here is called objective.

In these cases, the possessives work like an object following a verb: for example, for murdering Sir Thomas Overbury; an elegy to commemorate yesterday. That's why the use of the possessive here is referred to as objective.

(3) Subjective possessive, the most common of all; as,—

(3) Subjective possessive, the most common of all; as,—

The tireless sun, day after day,
Does his Creator's power show.
—Addison.

If this were expanded into the power which his Creator possesses, the word Creator would be the subject of the verb: hence it is called a subjective possessive.

If this were expanded into the power that his Creator has, the word Creator would be the subject of the verb: hence it is called a subjective possessive.

61. This last-named possessive expresses a variety of relations. Possession in some sense is the most common. The kind of relation may usually be found by expanding the possessive into an equivalent phrase: for example, "Winter's rude tempests are gathering now" (i.e., tempests that winter is likely to have); "His beard was of several days' growth" (i.e., growth which several days had developed); "The forest's leaping panther shall yield his spotted hide" (i.e., the panther which the forest hides); "Whoso sheddeth man's blood" (blood that man possesses).

61. This last possessive indicates various relationships. Possession in some form is the most common. The type of relationship can usually be clarified by rephrasing the possessive into a different phrase: for instance, "Winter's harsh storms are gathering now" (i.e., storms that winter might have); "His beard was of several days' growth" (i.e., growth that several days had produced); "The forest's leaping panther will yield his spotted hide" (i.e., the panther that the forest conceals); "Whoever sheds man's blood" (blood that belongs to man).

How the possessive is formed.

62. As said before (Sec. 56), there are only two case forms. One is the simple form of a word, expressing the relations of nominative and objective; the other is formed by adding 's to the simple form, making the possessive singular. To form the possessive plural, only the apostrophe is added if the plural nominative ends in -s; the 's is added if the plural nominative does not end in -s.

62. As mentioned earlier (Sec. 56), there are just two case forms. One is the simple form of a word, which shows the relationships of nominative and objective; the other is created by adding 's to the simple form to make the possessive singular. To create the possessive plural, just add an apostrophe if the plural nominative ends in -s; add 's if the plural nominative does not end in -s.

Case Inflection.

Declension or inflection of nouns.

63. The full declension of nouns is as follows:—

63. The complete declension of nouns is as follows:—

SINGULAR. PLURAL.
1. Nom. and Obj. lady ladies
Poss. lady's ladies'
2. Nom. and Obj. child children
Poss. child's children's
A suggestion.

NOTE.—The difficulty that some students have in writing the possessive plural would be lessened if they would remember there are two steps to be taken:—

NOTE.—The difficulty that some students have in writing the possessive plural would be reduced if they remember there are two steps to take:—

(1) Form the nominative plural according to Secs 39-53

(1) Create the nominative plural following Sections 39-53

(2) Follow the rule given in Sec. 62.

(2) Follow the guideline mentioned in Sec. 62.

Special Remarks on the Possessive Case.

Origin of the possessive with its apostrophe.

64. In Old English a large number of words had in the genitive case singular the ending -es; in Middle English still more words took this ending: for example, in Chaucer, "From every schires ende," "Full worthi was he in his lordes werre [war]," "at his beddes syde," "mannes herte [heart]," etc.

64. In Old English, many words had the singular genitive ending -es; in Middle English, even more words adopted this ending. For example, in Chaucer, "From every schires ende," "He was very worthy in his lordes war," "at his beddes side," "mannes heart," etc.

A false theory.

By the end of the seventeenth century the present way of indicating the possessive had become general. The use of the apostrophe, however, was not then regarded as standing for the omitted vowel of the genitive (as lord's for lordes): by a false theory the ending was thought to be a contraction of his, as schoolboys sometimes write, "George Jones his book."

By the end of the seventeenth century, the current method of indicating possession had become common. However, the apostrophe was not then seen as representing the omitted vowel of the genitive (like lord's for lordes): due to a mistaken belief, the ending was thought to be a contraction of his, similar to how schoolboys sometimes write, "George Jones his book."

Use of the apostrophe.

Though this opinion was untrue, the apostrophe has proved a great convenience, since otherwise words with a plural in -s would have three forms alike. To the eye all the forms are now distinct, but to the ear all may be alike, and the connection must tell us what form is intended.

Though this opinion was inaccurate, the apostrophe has been a huge help, since otherwise, words with a plural in -s would have three identical forms. Visually, all the forms are now distinct, but auditorily, they might sound the same, and the context must indicate which form is meant.

The use of the apostrophe in the plural also began in the seventeenth century, from thinking that s was not a possessive sign, and from a desire to have distinct forms.

The use of the apostrophe in the plural also started in the seventeenth century, because people thought s wasn't a possessive indicator and wanted to create different forms.

Sometimes s is left out in the possessive singular.

65. Occasionally the s is dropped in the possessive singular if the word ends in a hissing sound and another hissing sound follows, but the apostrophe remains to mark the possessive; as, for goodness' sake, Cervantes' satirical work.

65. Sometimes the s is dropped in the possessive singular if the word ends in a hissing sound and another hissing sound follows, but the apostrophe stays to indicate possession; for example, for goodness' sake, Cervantes' satirical work.

In other cases the s is seldom omitted. Notice these three examples from Thackeray's writings: "Harry ran upstairs to his mistress's apartment;" "A postscript is added, as by the countess's command;" "I saw what the governess's views were of the matter."

In other cases, the s is rarely left out. Check out these three examples from Thackeray's writings: "Harry ran upstairs to his mistress's apartment;" "A postscript is added, as by the countess's command;" "I saw what the governess's views were on the matter."

Possessive with compound expressions.

66. In compound expressions, containing words in apposition, a word with a phrase, etc., the possessive sign is usually last, though instances are found with both appositional words marked.

66. In compound expressions, when they include words that are in apposition or combined with a phrase, the possessive sign is usually placed last, although there are cases where both appositional words are marked.

Compare the following examples of literary usage:—

Compare the following examples of literary use:—

Do not the Miss Prys, my neighbors, know the amount of my income, the items of my son's, Captain Scrapegrace's, tailor's bill—Thackeray.

Do the Miss Prys, my neighbors, not know how much I make, the details of my son's, Captain Scrapegrace's, tailor's bill—Thackeray.

The world's pomp and power sits there on this hand: on that, stands up for God's truth one man, the poor miner Hans Luther's son.—Carlyle.

The world's grandeur and authority are represented here on one hand: on the other stands one man, the son of the poor miner Hans Luther, who stands up for God's truth.—Carlyle.

They invited me in the emperor their master's name.—Swift.

They invited me in the emperor's name.—Swift.

I had naturally possessed myself of Richardson the painter's thick octavo volumes of notes on the "Paradise Lost."—DE QUINCEY.

I had naturally gotten hold of Richardson the painter's thick octavo volumes of notes on "Paradise Lost."—DE QUINCEY.

They will go to Sunday schools to teach classes of little children the age of Methuselah or the dimensions of Og the king of Bashan's bedstead.—Holmes.

They will go to Sunday schools to teach classes of little kids about the age of Methuselah or the size of Og the king of Bashan's bed. —Holmes.

More common still is the practice of turning the possessive into an equivalent phrase; as, in the name of the emperor their master, instead of the emperor their master's name.

More commonly, people replace the possessive with an equivalent phrase; for example, in the name of the emperor their master instead of the emperor their master's name.

Possessive and no noun limited.

67. The possessive is sometimes used without belonging to any noun in the sentence; some such word as house, store, church, dwelling, etc., being understood with it: for example,—

67. The possessive is sometimes used without attaching to any noun in the sentence; words like house, store, church, dwelling, etc., are implied: for example,—

Here at the fruiterer's the Madonna has a tabernacle of fresh laurel leaves.—Ruskin.

Here at the fruit shop, the Madonna has a display of fresh laurel leaves.—Ruskin.

It is very common for people to say that they are disappointed in the first sight of St. Peter's.—Lowell.

It's pretty common for people to say they're disappointed at first sight of St. Peter's.—Lowell.

I remember him in his cradle at St. James's.—Thackeray.

I remember him in his cradle at St. James's.—Thackeray.

Kate saw that; and she walked off from the don's.—De Quincey.

Kate saw that and walked away from the don's.—De Quincey.

The double possessive.

68. A peculiar form, a double possessive, has grown up and become a fixed idiom in modern English.

68. A unique expression, a double possessive, has developed and become a standard phrase in contemporary English.

In most cases, a possessive relation was expressed in Old English by the inflection -es, corresponding to 's. The same relation was expressed in French by a phrase corresponding to of and its object. Both of these are now used side by side; sometimes they are used together, as one modifier, making a double possessive. For this there are several reasons:—

In most cases, a possessive relationship in Old English was shown with the inflection -es, which corresponds to 's. In French, the same relationship was indicated by a phrase that corresponds to of and its object. Both of these are now used together; sometimes they are combined as one modifier, creating a double possessive. There are several reasons for this:—

Its advantages: Euphony.

(1) When a word is modified by a, the, this, that, every, no, any, each, etc., and at the same time by a possessive noun, it is distasteful to place the possessive before the modified noun, and it would also alter the meaning: we place it after the modified noun with of.

(1) When a word is modified by a, the, this, that, every, no, any, each, etc., while also being modified by a possessive noun, it's awkward to place the possessive before the modified noun as it would change the meaning. Instead, we place it after the modified noun using of.

Emphasis.

(2) It is more emphatic than the simple possessive, especially when used with this or that, for it brings out the modified word in strong relief.

(2) It’s more emphatic than the basic possessive, especially when paired with this or that, because it highlights the modified word more clearly.

Clearness.

(3) It prevents ambiguity. For example, in such a sentence as, "This introduction of Atterbury's has all these advantages" (Dr. Blair), the statement clearly means only one thing,—the introduction which Atterbury made. If, however, we use the phrase of Atterbury, the sentence might be understood as just explained, or it might mean this act of introducing Atterbury. (See also Sec. 87.)

(3) It prevents confusion. For example, in a sentence like, "This introduction of Atterbury's has all these advantages" (Dr. Blair), the statement clearly means only one thing—the introduction that Atterbury made. If, however, we use the phrase of Atterbury, the sentence might be understood as just explained, or it might mean the act of introducing Atterbury. (See also Sec. 87.)

The following are some instances of double possessives:—

The following are some examples of double possessives:—

This Hall of Tinville's is dark, ill-lighted except where she stands.—Carlyle.

This hall of Tinville's is dark, poorly lit except for the spot where she stands. —Carlyle.

Those lectures of Lowell's had a great influence with me, and I used to like whatever they bade me like.—Howells

Those lectures of Lowell's really influenced me, and I found myself liking whatever they encouraged me to like.—Howells

Niebuhr remarks that no pointed sentences of Cæsar's can have come down to us.—Froude.

Niebuhr notes that no memorable quotes from Cæsar have survived to this day.—Froude.

Besides these famous books of Scott's and Johnson's, there is a copious "Life" by Thomas Sheridan.—Thackeray

Besides these famous books of Scott's and Johnson's, there is an extensive "Life" by Thomas Sheridan.—Thackeray

Always afterwards on occasions of ceremony, he wore that quaint old French sword of the Commodore's.—E. E. Hale.

Always afterward, on ceremonial occasions, he wore that strange old French sword of the Commodore's.—E.E. Hale.

Exercises.

(a) Pick out the possessive nouns, and tell whether each is appositional, objective, or subjective.

(a) Identify the possessive nouns and indicate whether each one is appositional, objective, or subjective.

(b) Rewrite the sentence, turning the possessives into equivalent phrases.

(b) Rewrite the sentence by changing the possessive forms into equivalent phrases.

1. I don't choose a hornet's nest about my ears.

1. I don't choose a hornet's nest around my ears.

2. Shall Rome stand under one man's awe?

2. Should Rome be under the control of one man?

3. I must not see thee Osman's bride.

3. I must not see you, Osman's bride.

4.

4.

At lovers' lies,
They say Jupiter laughs.

5. The world has all its eyes on Cato's son.

5. Everyone is focused on Cato's son.

6. My quarrel and the English queen's are one.

6. My conflict and the English queen's are the same.

7.

7.

Now the bright morning star, the herald of day,
Dances in from the East.

8. A man's nature runs either to herbs or weeds; therefore, let him seasonably water the one, and destroy the other.

8. A man's character leans either toward good or bad traits; so, he should nurture the good ones and get rid of the bad ones.

9.

9.

It's everyone's job to speak patiently. To those who are burdened by sorrow.

10.

10.

The success of a joke depends on the audience. For those who hear it, never in the tongue Of the one who creates it.

11. No more the juice of Egypt's grape shall moist his lip.

11. No more will the juice of Egypt's grape touch his lips.

12.

12.

There stood Shakespeare himself, crowned with every garland,
He soared to those magical lands with his imaginative shine.

13.

13.

What supports me? Do you ask? The conscience, Friend, is burdened by losing them [his eyes] overwhelmed
In defense of freedom.

14.

14.

Or where the abandoned plains of Campania are,
A tired expanse reaching up to the sky.

15.

15.

It appeared that nature herself would raise
A minister praising her Creator!

HOW TO PARSE NOUNS.

69. Parsing a word is putting together all the facts about its form and its relations to other words in the sentence.

69. Parsing a word means gathering all the information about its structure and how it relates to other words in the sentence.

In parsing, some idioms—the double possessive, for example—do not come under regular grammatical rules, and are to be spoken of merely as idioms.

In parsing, some idioms—like the double possessive, for instance—don’t follow regular grammatical rules and should just be considered idioms.

70. Hence, in parsing a noun, we state,—

70. So, when breaking down a noun, we say,—

(1) The class to which it belongs,—common, proper, etc.

(1) The category it belongs to—common, proper, etc.

(2) Whether a neuter or a gender noun; if the latter, which gender.

(2) Whether it's a neuter noun or a gendered noun; if it's gendered, which gender does it belong to.

(3) Whether singular or plural number.

(3) Whether it’s singular or plural.

(4) Its office in the sentence, determining its case.

(4) Its role in the sentence, determining its case.

The correct method.

71. In parsing any word, the following method should always be followed: tell the facts about what the word does, then make the grammatical statements as to its class, inflections, and relations.

71. When analyzing any word, you should always follow this approach: first, describe what the word does, then provide the grammatical details about its class, inflections, and relationships.

MODEL FOR PARSING.

"What is bolder than a miller's neckcloth, which takes a thief by the throat every morning?"

"What is bolder than a miller's neck scarf, which grabs a thief by the throat every morning?"

Miller's is a name applied to every individual of its class, hence it is a common noun; it is the name of a male being, hence it is a gender noun, masculine; it denotes only one person, therefore singular number; it expresses possession or ownership, and limits neckcloth, therefore possessive case.

Miller's is a term used for every member of its group, which makes it a common noun; it refers to a male, so it's a masculine gender noun; it signifies just one individual, thus it’s in singular form; it indicates possession or ownership, and modifies neckcloth, which makes it a possessive case.

Neckcloth, like miller's, is a common class noun; it has no sex, therefore neuter; names one thing, therefore singular number; subject of the verb is understood, and therefore nominative case.

Neckcloth, like miller's, is a general term; it has no gender, so it's neuter; it refers to one item, making it singular; the subject of the verb is is implied, so it's in the nominative case.

Thief is a common class noun; the connection shows a male is meant, therefore masculine gender; singular number; object of the verb takes, hence objective case.

Thief is a common noun referring to a class; the association indicates that a male is intended, thus masculine gender; singular form; and the object of the verb takes, so it's in the objective case.

Throat is neuter, of the same class and number as the word neckcloth; it is the object of the preposition by, hence it is objective case.

Throat is neutral, belonging to the same category and form as the word neckcloth; it is the object of the preposition by, so it is in the objective case.

NOTE.—The preposition sometimes takes the possessive case (see Sec. 68).

NOTE.—The preposition can sometimes take the possessive form (see Sec. 68).

Morning is like throat and neckcloth as to class, gender, and number; as to case, it expresses time, has no governing word, but is the adverbial objective.

Morning is similar to throat and neckcloth in terms of class, gender, and number; regarding its case, it indicates time, has no governing word, but functions as the adverbial objective.

Exercise.

Follow the model above in parsing all the nouns in the following sentences:—

Follow the model above to identify all the nouns in the following sentences:—

1. To raise a monument to departed worth is to perpetuate virtue.

1. Honoring those who have passed is a way to keep their virtues alive.

2. The greatest pleasure I know is to do a good action by stealth, and to have it found out by accident.

2. The biggest thrill I know is doing a good deed secretly and then having it discovered by chance.

3. An old cloak makes a new jerkin; a withered serving man, a fresh tapster.

3. An old cloak becomes a new jacket; a worn-out servant, a lively bartender.

4.

4.

That in the captain's just an angry word,
Which in the soldier is outright blasphemy.

5. Now, blessings light on him that first invented ... sleep!

5. Now, may blessings be upon the one who first invented ... sleep!

6. Necker, financial minister to Louis XVI., and his daughter, Madame de Staël, were natives of Geneva.

6. Necker, the finance minister to Louis XVI, and his daughter, Madame de Staël, were from Geneva.

7. He giveth his beloved sleep.

7. He gives his loved ones rest.

8. Time makes the worst enemies friends.

8. Time turns the worst enemies into friends.

9. A few miles from this point, where the Rhone enters the lake, stands the famous Castle of Chillon, connected with the shore by a drawbridge,—palace, castle, and prison, all in one.

9. A few miles from here, where the Rhone flows into the lake, stands the famous Castle of Chillon, linked to the shore by a drawbridge—palace, castle, and prison all in one.

10.

10.

You miserable people! You loved her for her wealth,
And hated her for her arrogance.

11. Mrs. Jarley's back being towards him, the military gentleman shook his forefinger.

11. With Mrs. Jarley's back to him, the military man shook his forefinger.


PRONOUNS.

The need of pronouns.

72. When we wish to speak of a name several times in succession, it is clumsy and tiresome to repeat the noun. For instance, instead of saying, "The pupil will succeed in the pupil's efforts if the pupil is ambitious," we improve the sentence by shortening it thus, "The pupil will succeed in his efforts if he is ambitious."

72. When we want to mention a name multiple times in a row, it can be awkward and tiring to repeat the noun. For example, instead of saying, "The student will succeed in the student's efforts if the student is ambitious," we can make the sentence better by shortening it to, "The student will succeed in his efforts if he is ambitious."

Again, if we wish to know about the ownership of a house, we evidently cannot state the owner's name, but by a question we say, "Whose house is that?" thus placing a word instead of the name till we learn the name.

Again, if we want to know who owns a house, we obviously can't give the owner's name, but by asking, "Whose house is that?" we use a word in place of the name until we find out what it is.

This is not to be understood as implying that pronouns were invented because nouns were tiresome, since history shows that pronouns are as old as nouns and verbs. The use of pronouns must have sprung up naturally, from a necessity for short, definite, and representative words.

This shouldn't be taken to mean that pronouns were invented because nouns were annoying, since history shows that pronouns are as old as nouns and verbs. The use of pronouns must have developed naturally, out of the need for short, clear, and representative words.

Definition.

A pronoun is a reference word, standing for a name, or for a person or thing, or for a group of persons or things.

A pronoun is a word that replaces a name, a person or thing, or a group of people or things.

Classes of pronouns.

73. Pronouns may be grouped in five classes:—

73. Pronouns can be divided into five categories: —

(1) Personal pronouns, which distinguish person by their form (Sec. 76).

(1) Personal pronouns, which identify the person by their form (Sec. 76).

(2) Interrogative pronouns, which are used to ask questions about persons or things.

(2) Interrogative pronouns are used to ask questions about people or things.

(3) Relative pronouns, which relate or refer to a noun, pronoun, or other word or expression, and at the same time connect two statements They are also called conjunctive.

(3) Relative pronouns refer to a noun, pronoun, or other word or expression and simultaneously link two statements. They are also known as conjunctive.

(4) Adjective pronouns, words, primarily adjectives, which are classed as adjectives when they modify nouns, but as pronouns when they stand for nouns.

(4) Adjective pronouns, words that are mainly adjectives, are considered adjectives when they modify nouns, but serve as pronouns when they replace nouns.

(5) Indefinite pronouns, which cannot be used as adjectives, but stand for an indefinite number of persons or things.

(5) Indefinite pronouns can't be used as adjectives; they represent an unspecified number of people or things.

Numerous examples of all these will be given under the separate classes hereafter treated.

Numerous examples of all these will be provided in the separate classes discussed later.

PERSONAL PRONOUNS..

Person in grammar.

74. Since pronouns stand for persons as well as names, they must represent the person talking, the person or thing spoken to, and the person or thing talked about.

74. Since pronouns represent both people and names, they need to refer to the speaker, the person or thing being addressed, and the person or thing being discussed.

This gives rise to a new term, "the distinction of person."

This leads to a new term, "the distinction of person."

Person of nouns.

75. This distinction was not needed in discussing nouns, as nouns have the same form, whether representing persons and things spoken to or spoken of. It is evident that a noun could not represent the person speaking, even if it had a special form.

75. This distinction wasn't necessary when discussing nouns, since nouns have the same form, regardless of whether they refer to people or things that are being addressed or talked about. It's clear that a noun cannot represent the person speaking, even if it had a different form.

From analogy to pronouns, which have forms for person, nouns are sometimes spoken of as first or second person by their use; that is, if they are in apposition with a pronoun of the first or second person, they are said to have person by agreement.

From analogy to pronouns, which have forms for person, nouns are sometimes referred to as first or second person based on their use; that is, if they are used alongside a pronoun of the first or second person, they are said to have person by agreement.

But usually nouns represent something spoken of.

But usually, nouns refer to something being talked about.

Three persons of pronouns.

76. Pronouns naturally are of three persons:—

76. Pronouns are naturally divided into three persons:—

(1) First person, representing the person speaking.

(1) First person, representing the speaker.

(2) Second person, representing a person or thing spoken to.

(2) Second person, referring to a person or thing being addressed.

(3) Third person, standing for a person or thing spoken of.

(3) Third person refers to a person or thing that is being talked about.

FORMS OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS.

77. Personal pronouns are inflected thus:—

Personal pronouns are inflected like this:—

FIRST PERSON.
Singular. Plural.
Nom. I we
Poss. mine, my our, ours
Obj. me us
SECOND PERSON.
Singular.
Old Form Common Form.
Nom. thou you
Poss. thine, thy your, yours
Obj. thee you
Plural.
Nom. ye you
Poss. your, yours your, yours
Obj. you you
THIRD PERSON.
Singular.
Masc. Fem. Neut..
Nom. he she it
Poss. his her, hers its
Obj. him her it
Plur. of all Three.
Nom. they
Poss. their, theirs
Obj. them

Remarks on These Forms.

First and second persons without gender.

78. It will be noticed that the pronouns of the first and second persons have no forms to distinguish gender. The speaker may be either male or female, or, by personification, neuter; so also with the person or thing spoken to.

78. You'll notice that the pronouns for the first and second persons don’t have different forms for gender. The speaker can be male or female, or even neutral through personification; the same goes for the person or thing being addressed.

Third person singular has gender.

But the third person has, in the singular, a separate form for each gender, and also for the neuter.

But the third person has, in the singular, a distinct form for each gender, including the neuter.

Old forms.

In Old English these three were formed from the same root; namely, masculine , feminine hēo, neuter hit.

In Old English, these three came from the same root; specifically, masculine , feminine hēo, and neuter hit.

The form hit (for it) is still heard in vulgar English, and hoo (for hēo) in some dialects of England.

The form hit (for it) is still heard in informal English, and hoo (for hēo) in some dialects of England.

The plurals were , heora, heom, in Old English; the forms they, their, them, perhaps being from the English demonstrative, though influenced by the cognate Norse forms.

The plurals were , heora, heom in Old English; the forms they, their, them possibly come from the English demonstrative, though they were influenced by the related Norse forms.

Second person always plural in ordinary English.

79. Thou, thee, etc., are old forms which are now out of use in ordinary speech. The consequence is, that we have no singular pronoun of the second person in ordinary speech or prose, but make the plural you do duty for the singular. We use it with a plural verb always, even when referring to a single object.

79. You, your, etc., are old forms that are no longer used in everyday conversation. As a result, we don’t have a singular pronoun for the second person in common speech or writing, so we use the plural you to represent the singular. We always pair it with a plural verb, even when talking about a single person or thing.

Two uses of the old singulars.

80. There are, however, two modern uses of thou, thy, etc.:—

80. There are, however, two modern uses of thou, thy, etc.:—

(1) In elevated style, especially in poetry; as,—

(1) In an elevated style, especially in poetry; as,—

With your clear keen joy Languor can't be; Annoyed shadow Never came near you;
You love; but you’ve never experienced love's sad excess. —Shelley.

(2) In addressing the Deity, as in prayers, etc.; for example,—

(2) When addressing God, like in prayers, etc.; for instance,—

Oh, thou Shepherd of Israel, that didst comfort thy people of old, to thy care we commit the helpless.—Beecher.

Oh, You Shepherd of Israel, who comforted Your people in the past, we entrust the helpless to Your care.—Beecher.

The form its.

81. It is worth while to consider the possessive its. This is of comparatively recent growth. The old form was his (from the nominative hit), and this continued in use till the sixteenth century. The transition from the old his to the modern its is shown in these sentences:—

81. It’s important to look at the possessive its. This form has developed relatively recently. The old form was his (from the nominative hit), and this remained in use until the sixteenth century. The shift from the old his to the modern its is illustrated in these sentences:—

1 He anointed the altar and all his vessels.—Bible

1 He blessed the altar and all his vessels.—Bible

Here his refers to altar, which is a neuter noun. The quotation represents the usage of the early sixteenth century.

Here his refers to altar, which is a neutral noun. The quotation represents the usage of the early sixteenth century.

2 It's had it head bit off by it young—Shakespeare

2 It's had its head bitten off by its young—Shakespeare

Shakespeare uses his, it, and sometimes its, as possessive of it.

Shakespeare uses his, it, and sometimes its as the possessive form of it.

In Milton's poetry (seventeenth century) its occurs only three times.

In Milton's poetry (seventeenth century) its appears only three times.

3 See heaven its sparkling portals wide display—Pope

3 See heaven its sparkling portals wide display—Pope

A relic of the olden time.

82. We have an interesting relic in such sentences as this from Thackeray: "One of the ways to know 'em is to watch the scared looks of the ogres' wives and children."

82. We have an interesting relic in sentences like this one from Thackeray: "One way to understand 'em is to see the frightened expressions of the ogres' wives and kids."

As shown above, the Old English objective was hem (or heom), which was often sounded with the h silent, just as we now say, "I saw 'im yesterday" when the word him is not emphatic. In spoken English, this form 'em has survived side by side with the literary them.

As shown above, the Old English objective was hem (or heom), which was often pronounced with the h silent, just like we now say, "I saw 'im yesterday" when the word him isn't emphasized. In spoken English, this form 'em has survived alongside the literary them.

Use of the pronouns in personification.

83. The pronouns he and she are often used in poetry, and sometimes in ordinary speech, to personify objects (Sec. 34).

83. The pronouns he and she are frequently used in poetry and, at times, in everyday conversation, to give human qualities to objects (Sec. 34).

CASES OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS.

I The Nominative.

Nominative forms.

84. The nominative forms of personal pronouns have the same uses as the nominative of nouns (see Sec. 58). The case of most of these pronouns can be determined more easily than the case of nouns, for, besides a nominative use, they have a nominative form. The words I, thou, he, she, we, ye, they, are very rarely anything but nominative in literary English, though ye is occasionally used as objective.

84. The nominative forms of personal pronouns are used in the same way as the nominative forms of nouns (see Sec. 58). It's usually easier to determine the case of these pronouns than with nouns, because they not only have a nominative use but also a nominative form. The words I, you, he, she, we, you, they are almost always nominative in modern written English, although you can occasionally be used as an objective.

Additional nominatives in spoken English.

85. In spoken English, however, there are some others that are added to the list of nominatives: they are, me, him, her, us, them, when they occur in the predicate position. That is, in such a sentence as, "I am sure it was him," the literary language would require he after was; but colloquial English regularly uses as predicate nominatives the forms me, him, her, us, them, though those named in Sec. 84 are always subjects. Yet careful speakers avoid this, and follow the usage of literary English.

85. In spoken English, there are some additional nouns that are included in the list of nominatives: they are me, him, her, us, them, when they appear in the predicate position. For example, in a sentence like, "I am sure it was him," standard written English would require he after was; however, everyday English typically uses the forms me, him, her, us, them as predicate nominatives, while those mentioned in Sec. 84 are always subjects. Still, careful speakers avoid this and adhere to the conventions of standard English.

II. The Possessive.

Not a separate class.

86. The forms my, thy, his, her, its, our, your, their, are sometimes grouped separately as POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS, but it is better to speak of them as the possessive case of personal pronouns, just as we speak of the possessive case of nouns, and not make more classes.

86. The forms my, thy, his, her, its, our, your, their are sometimes categorized separately as POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS, but it's more accurate to refer to them as the possessive case of personal pronouns, just like we talk about the possessive case of nouns, without creating more classifications.

Absolute personal pronouns.

The forms mine, thine, yours, hers, theirs, sometimes his and its, have a peculiar use, standing apart from the words they modify instead of immediately before them. From this use they are called ABSOLUTE PERSONAL PRONOUNS, or, some say, ABSOLUTE POSSESSIVES.

The forms mine, thine, yours, hers, theirs, and sometimes his and its, have a unique function. They stand separate from the nouns they modify instead of being placed right before them. Because of this usage, they are referred to as ABSOLUTE PERSONAL PRONOUNS, or as some people call them, ABSOLUTE POSSESSIVES.

As instances of the use of absolute pronouns, note the following:—

Here are some examples of absolute pronouns:—

'Twas mine, 'tis his, and has been slave to thousands. —Shakespeare.

'It was mine, it is his, and has been a slave to thousands. —Shakespeare.

And since thou own'st that praise, I spare thee mine.—Cowper.

And since you deserve that praise, I’ll hold back my own.mine.—Cowper.

My arm better than theirs can ward it off.—Landor.

My arm is better than theirs at fending it off.—Landor.

Thine are the city and the people of Granada.—Bulwer.

Your are the city and the people of Granada.—Bulwer.

Old use of mine and thine.

Formerly mine and thine stood before their nouns, if the nouns began with a vowel or h silent; thus,—

Formerly my and your came before their nouns, if the nouns started with a vowel or a silent h; thus,—

Shall I not take mine ease in mine inn?—Shakespeare.

Shall I not take my ease in my inn?—Shakespeare.

Give every man thine ear, but few thy voice.—Id.

Give every man your ear, but speak your voice to only a few.—Id.

If thine eye offend thee, pluck it out.—Bible.

If your eye causes you to sin, remove it. —Bible.

My greatest apprehension was for mine eyes.—Swift.

My biggest fear was for my eyes.—Swift.

This usage is still preserved in poetry.

This use is still found in poetry.

Double and triple possessives.

87. The forms hers, ours, yours, theirs, are really double possessives, since they add the possessive s to what is already a regular possessive inflection.

87. The forms hers, ours, yours, theirs are actually double possessives because they add the possessive s to what is already a standard possessive form.

Besides this, we have, as in nouns, a possessive phrase made up of the preposition of with these double possessives, hers, ours, yours, theirs, and with mine, thine, his, sometimes its.

Besides this, we also have, like in nouns, a possessive phrase formed by the preposition of along with these double possessives, hers, ours, yours, theirs, and with mine, thine, his, and occasionally its.

Their uses.

Like the noun possessives, they have several uses:—

Like the noun possessives, they have several uses:—

(1) To prevent ambiguity, as in the following:—

(1) To avoid confusion, as in the following:—

I have often contrasted the habitual qualities of that gloomy friend of theirs with the astounding spirits of Thackeray and Dickens.—J. T. Fields.

I often compared the usual traits of that gloomy friend of theirs with the amazing spirits of Thackeray and Dickens.—J.T. Fields.

No words of ours can describe the fury of the conflict.—J. F. Cooper.

No words of ours can capture the intensity of the conflict.—J.F. Cooper.

(2) To bring emphasis, as in these sentences:—

(2) To bring emphasis, as in these sentences:—

This thing of yours that you call a Pardon of Sins, it is a bit of rag-paper with ink.—Carlyle.

This thing of yours that you call a Pardon of Sins, it is a piece of scrap paper with ink.—Carlyle.

This ancient silver bowl of mine, it tells of good old times. —Holmes.

This old silver bowl of mine reminds me of the good old days. —Holmes.

(3) To express contempt, anger, or satire; for example,—

(3) To express disdain, anger, or sarcasm; for example,—

"Do you know the charges that unhappy sister of mine and her family have put me to already?" says the Master.—Thackeray.

"Do you know the troubles that my unhappy sister and her family have caused me already?" says the Master.—Thackeray.

He [John Knox] had his pipe of Bordeaux too, we find, in that old Edinburgh house of his.—Carlyle.

He [John Knox] also had his pipe of Bordeaux, as we see, in that old Edinburgh house of his.—Carlyle.

"Hold thy peace, Long Allen," said Henry Woodstall, "I tell thee that tongue of thine is not the shortest limb about thee."—Scott.

"Be quiet, Long Allen," said Henry Woodstall, "I can tell you that your tongue isn't the shortest thing about you."—Scott.

(4) To make a noun less limited in application; thus,—

(4) To make a noun more broadly applicable; so,—

A favorite liar and servant of mine was a man I once had to drive a brougham.—Thackeray.

A favorite liar and servant of mine was a man I once had to drive a fancy carriage.—Thackeray.

In New York I read a newspaper criticism one day, commenting upon a letter of mine.—Id.

In New York, I came across a newspaper critique one day that talked about a letter of mine. —Id.

What would the last two sentences mean if the word my were written instead of of mine, and preceded the nouns?

What would the last two sentences mean if the word my was used instead of of mine, and came before the nouns?

About the case of absolute pronouns.

88. In their function, or use in a sentence, the absolute possessive forms of the personal pronouns are very much like adjectives used as nouns.

88. In their role, or how they are used in a sentence, the absolute possessive forms of personal pronouns are quite similar to adjectives that function as nouns.

In such sentences as, "The good alone are great," "None but the brave deserves the fair," the words italicized have an adjective force and also a noun force, as shown in Sec. 20.

In sentences like, "The good alone are great," and "None but the brave deserves the fair," the italicized words function as both adjectives and nouns, as explained in Sec. 20.

So in the sentences illustrating absolute pronouns in Sec. 86: mine stands for my property, his for his property, in the first sentence; mine stands for my praise in the second. But the first two have a nominative use, and mine in the second has an objective use.

So in the sentences illustrating absolute pronouns in Sec. 86: mine represents my property, his represents his property, in the first sentence; mine represents my praise in the second. However, the first two have a nominative use, and mine in the second has an objective use.

They may be spoken of as possessive in form, but nominative or objective in use, according as the modified word is in the nominative or the objective.

They can be described as having a possessive form, but are used either as nominative or objective depending on whether the modified word is in the nominative or objective case.

III. The Objective.

The old dative case.

89. In Old English there was one case which survives in use, but not in form. In such a sentence as this one from Thackeray, "Pick me out a whip-cord thong with some dainty knots in it," the word me is evidently not the direct object of the verb, but expresses for whom, for whose benefit, the thing is done. In pronouns, this dative use, as it is called, was marked by a separate case.

89. In Old English, there was a case that still exists in use, but not in form. In a sentence like the one from Thackeray, "Pick me out a whip-cord thong with some dainty knots in it," the word me is clearly not the direct object of the verb; it indicates for whom or for whose benefit the action is performed. In pronouns, this dative usage, as it is called, was indicated by a separate case.

Now the objective.

In Modern English the same use is frequently seen, but the form is the same as the objective. For this reason a word thus used is called a dative-objective.

In modern English, the same use is often seen, but the form is the same as the objective. Because of this, a word used this way is called a dative-objective.

The following are examples of the dative-objective:—

The following are examples of the dative-objective:—

Give me neither poverty nor riches.—Bible.

Give me neither poverty nor wealth.—Bible.

Curse me this people.—Id.

Curse me this crowd.—Id.

Both joined in making him a present.—Macaulay

Both collaborated to give him a gift.—Macaulay

Is it not enough that you have burnt me down three houses with your dog's tricks, and be hanged to you!—Lamb

Is it not enough that you have burnt me down three houses with your dog's tricks, and damn you!—Lamb

I give thee this to wear at the collar.—Scott

I give you this to wear at the collar.—Scott

Other uses of the objective.

90. Besides this use of the objective, there are others:—

90. In addition to this use of the objective, there are others:—

(1) As the direct object of a verb.

(1) As the direct object of a verb.

They all handled it.—Lamb

They all dealt with it.—Lamb

(2) As the object of a preposition.

(2) As the object of a preposition.

Time is behind them and before them.—Carlyle.

Time is behind them and ahead of them. —Carlyle.

(3) In apposition.

In apposition.

She sate all last summer by the bedside of the blind beggar, him that so often and so gladly I talked with.—De Quincey.

She sat all last summer by the bedside of the blind beggar, him that I so often and so happily talked with.—De Quincey.

SPECIAL USES OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS.

Indefinite use of you and your.

91. The word you, and its possessive case yours are sometimes used without reference to a particular person spoken to. They approach the indefinite pronoun in use.

91. The word you and its possessive form yours are sometimes used without referring to a specific person being addressed. They are similar to indefinite pronouns in usage.

Your mere puny stripling, that winced at the least flourish of the rod, was passed by with indulgence.—Irving

Your small and weak boy, who flinched at the slightest swing of the rod, was let go with leniency.—Irving

To empty here, you must condense there.—Emerson.

To empty here, you must compress there.—Emerson.

The peasants take off their hats as you pass; you sneeze, and they cry, "God bless you!" The thrifty housewife shows you into her best chamber. You have oaten cakes baked some months before.—Longfellow

The farmers take off their hats as you walk by; you sneeze, and they say, "God bless you!" The careful housewife shows you into her best room. You have oat cakes that were baked a few months ago.—Longfellow

Uses of it.

92. The pronoun it has a number of uses:—

The pronoun it has several uses:—

(1) To refer to some single word preceding; as,—

(1) To refer to a single word before; as,—

Ferdinand ordered the army to recommence its march.—Bulwer.

Ferdinand ordered the army to resume its march.—Bulwer.

Society, in this century, has not made its progress, like Chinese skill, by a greater acuteness of ingenuity in trifles.—D. Webster.

Society in this century hasn’t progressed, like Chinese craftsmanship, through sharper cleverness in small things.—D. Webster.

(2) To refer to a preceding word group; thus,—

(2) To refer to a previous group of words; thus,—

If any man should do wrong merely out of ill nature, why, yet it is but like the thorn or brier, which prick and scratch because they can do no other.—Bacon.

If someone does wrong just because they have a bad attitude, it's really just like a thorn or a briar, which prick and scratch simply because that's what they do.—Bacon.

Here it refers back to the whole sentence before it, or to the idea, "any man's doing wrong merely out of ill nature."

Here it refers back to the entire previous sentence, or to the idea, "any man doing wrong simply because he has a bad nature."

(3) As a grammatical subject, to stand for the real, logical subject, which follows the verb; as in the sentences,—

(3) As a grammatical subject, it represents the actual, logical subject that comes after the verb; as in the sentences,—

It is easy in the world to live after the world's opinion. —Emerson.

It is easy in the world to live according to what others think. —Emerson.

It is this haziness of intellectual vision which is the malady of all classes of men by nature.—Newman.

It is this lack of clarity in intellectual vision that is the issue for all types of people by nature.—Newman.

It is a pity that he has so much learning, or that he has not a great deal more.—Addison.

It's a shame that he knows so much, or that he doesn't know even more.—Addison.

(4) As an impersonal subject in certain expressions which need no other subject; as,—

(4) As a neutral subject in some phrases that don't require another subject; as,—

It is finger-cold, and prudent farmers get in their barreled apples.—Thoreau.

It's chilly enough to make your fingers cold, and wise farmers are bringing in their stored apples.—Thoreau.

And when I awoke, it rained.—Coleridge.

And when I woke up, it rained.—Coleridge.

For when it dawned, they dropped their arms.—Id.

For when it dawned, they dropped their arms.—Id.

It was late and after midnight.—De Quincey.

It was late and after midnight.—De Quincey.

(5) As an impersonal or indefinite object of a verb or a preposition; as in the following sentences:—

(5) As an impersonal or indefinite object of a verb or a preposition; as in the following sentences:—

(a) Michael Paw, who lorded it over the fair regions of ancient Pavonia.—Irving.

(a) Michael Paw, who ruled the beautiful lands of ancient Pavonia.—Irving.

I made up my mind to foot it.—Hawthorne.

I decided to walk. —Hawthorne.

A sturdy lad ... who in turn tries all the professions, who teams it, farms it, peddles it, keeps a school.—Emerson.

A strong young man ... who tries out all the jobs, who works in teams, farms, sells goods, and runs a school.—Emerson.

(b) "Thy mistress leads thee a dog's life of it."—Irving.

(b) "Your mistress makes you live a miserable life of it."—Irving.

There was nothing for it but to return.—Scott.

There was no choice but to go back.—Scott.

An editor has only to say "respectfully declined," and there is an end of it.—Holmes.

An editor just needs to say "respectfully declined," and that's it.Holmes.

Poor Christian was hard put to it.—Bunyan.

Poor Christian was really struggling. —Bunyan.

Reflexive use of the personal pronouns.

93. The personal pronouns in the objective case are often used reflexively; that is, referring to the same person as the subject of the accompanying verb. For example, we use such expressions as, "I found me a good book," "He bought him a horse," etc. This reflexive use of the dative-objective is very common in spoken and in literary English.

93. Personal pronouns in the objective case are often used reflexively, meaning they refer to the same person as the subject of the accompanying verb. For example, we say things like, "I found myself a good book," "He bought himself a horse," etc. This reflexive use of the dative-objective is very common in both spoken and written English.

The personal pronouns are not often used reflexively, however, when they are direct objects. This occurs in poetry, but seldom in prose; as,—

The personal pronouns aren't usually used reflexively when they are direct objects. This happens in poetry, but rarely in prose; for example,—

Now I lay me down to sleep.—Anon.

Now I lay myself down to sleep. —Anon.

I set me down and sigh.—Burns.

I sat down and sighed.—Burns.

And millions in those lonely places, since the beginning. The passage of time has started, bringing them to rest.
In their final sleep.
—Bryant.

REFLEXIVE OR COMPOUND PERSONAL PRONOUNS.

Composed of the personal pronouns with -self, -selves.

94. The REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS, or COMPOUND PERSONAL, as they are also called, are formed from the personal pronouns by adding the word self, and its plural selves.

94. The REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS, or COMPOUND PERSONAL pronouns, are created by adding the word self to personal pronouns, with the plural form being selves.

They are myself, (ourself), ourselves, yourself, (thyself), yourselves, himself, herself, itself, themselves.

They are myself, (ourself), ourselves, yourself, (thyself), yourselves, himself, herself, itself, themselves.

Of the two forms in parentheses, the second is the old form of the second person, used in poetry.

Of the two forms in parentheses, the second is the traditional form of the second person, used in poetry.

Ourself is used to follow the word we when this represents a single person, especially in the speech of rulers; as,—

Ourself is used to follow the word we when this represents a single person, especially in the speech of rulers; as,—

I think he doesn't seem any better than a girl;
As girls were once, so we ourselves have been.
—Tennyson.
Origin of these reflexives.

95. The question might arise, Why are himself and themselves not hisself and theirselves, as in vulgar English, after the analogy of myself, ourselves, etc.?

95. The question might come up, why are himself and themselves not hisself and theirselves, like in nonstandard English, following the pattern of myself, ourselves, etc.?

The history of these words shows they are made up of the dative-objective forms, not the possessive forms, with self. In Middle English the forms meself, theself, were changed into the possessive myself, thyself, and the others were formed by analogy with these. Himself and themselves are the only ones retaining a distinct objective form.

The history of these words shows they are made up of the dative-objective forms, not the possessive forms, with self. In Middle English, the forms meself and theself were changed into the possessive forms myself, thyself, and the others were formed by analogy with these. Himself and themselves are the only ones that still have a distinct objective form.

In the forms yourself and yourselves we have the possessive your marked as singular as well as plural.

In the forms yourself and yourselves, we have the possessive your identified as both singular and plural.

Use of the reflexives.

96. There are three uses of reflexive pronouns:—

96. There are three uses of reflexive pronouns:—

(1) As object of a verb or preposition, and referring to the same person or thing as the subject; as in these sentences from Emerson:—

(1) As the object of a verb or preposition, referring to the same person or thing as the subject; as in these sentences from Emerson:—

He who offers himself a candidate for that covenant comes up like an Olympian.

He who puts himself forward as a candidate for that agreement rises like an Olympian.

I should hate myself if then I made my other friends my asylum.

I should hate myself if I then made my other friends my escape.

We fill ourselves with ancient learning.

We fill ourselves with ancient knowledge.

What do we know of nature or of ourselves?

What do we know about nature or about ourselves?

(2) To emphasize a noun or pronoun; for example,—

(2) To emphasize a noun or pronoun; for example,—

The great globe itself ... shall dissolve.—Shakespeare.

The great globe itself ... shall dissolve. —Shakespeare.

Threats to everyone;
To you yourself, to us, to everyone.
See above.
Who wouldn’t sing for Lycidas! He knew His own to sing, and create the grand rhyme.
—Milton.

NOTE.—In such sentences the pronoun is sometimes omitted, and the reflexive modifies the pronoun understood; for example,—

NOTE.—In such sentences, the pronoun is sometimes left out, and the reflexive modifies the implied pronoun; for example,—

Only itself can inspire whom it will.—Emerson.

Only itself can inspire whoever it chooses.—Emerson.

My hands are full of blossoms plucked before, Held dead within them till myself shall die.—E. B. Browning.

My hands are full of flowers I picked earlier, Keeping them alive inside me until I die.—Elizabeth Barrett Browning.

As if it were thyself that's here, I shrink with pain.—Wordsworth.

As if it were you that's here, I shrink with pain.—Wordsworth.

(3) As the precise equivalent of a personal pronoun; as,—

(3) As the exact equivalent of a personal pronoun; as,—

Lord Altamont designed to take his son and myself.—De Quincey.

Lord Altamont planned to take his son and me.—De Quincey.

Victories that neither myself nor my cause always deserved.—B. Franklin.

Victories that neither me nor my cause always deserved.—B. Franklin.

For what else have our forefathers and ourselves been taxed?—Landor.

For what else have our ancestors and us been taxed?—Landor.

Years ago, Arcturus and myself met a gentleman from China who knew the language.—Thackeray.

Years ago, Arcturus and I met a guy from China who spoke the language.—Thackeray.

Exercises on Personal Pronouns.

(a) Bring up sentences containing ten personal pronouns, some each of masculine, feminine, and neuter.

(a) Create sentences that include ten personal pronouns, with some for masculine, feminine, and neuter.

(b) Bring up sentences containing five personal pronouns in the possessive, some of them being double possessives.

(b) Bring up sentences that have five personal pronouns in the possessive form, including some that are double possessives.

(c) Tell which use each it has in the following sentences:—

(c) Identify the function of each it in the following sentences:—

1.

1.

Join us as we enjoy the journey,
On the light fantastic toe.

2. Infancy conforms to nobody; all conform to it.

2. Infancy doesn’t conform to anyone; everyone conforms to it.

3. It is an ill wind that blows nobody good.

3. A bad situation can still benefit someone.

4. Courage, father, fight it out.

4. Stay strong, Dad, push through.

5. And it grew wondrous cold.

5. And it became really cold.

6. To know what is best to do, and how to do it, is wisdom.

6. Knowing the best course of action and how to take it is wisdom.

7. If any phenomenon remains brute and dark, it is because the corresponding faculty in the observer is not yet active.

7. If any phenomenon seems raw and unclear, it's because the observer's corresponding ability isn't active yet.

8. But if a man do not speak from within the veil, where the word is one with that it tells of, let him lowly confess it.

8. But if a man does not speak from within the veil, where the word matches what it represents, he should humbly admit it.

9. It behooved him to keep on good terms with his pupils.

9. It was important for him to stay on good terms with his students.

10. Biscuit is about the best thing I know; but it is the soonest spoiled; and one would like to hear counsel on one point, why it is that a touch of water utterly ruins it.

10. Biscuit is one of the best things I know, but it spoils the fastest; and I'd really like some advice on one thing—why does even a little bit of water ruin it completely?

INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS.

Three now in use.

97. The interrogative pronouns now in use are who (with the forms whose and whom), which, and what.

97. The question words we use today are who (along with the forms whose and whom), which, and what.

One obsolete.

There is an old word, whether, used formerly to mean which of two, but now obsolete. Examples from the Bible:—

There’s an old word, whether, that used to mean which of two, but it’s now outdated. Examples from the Bible:—

Whether of them twain did the will of his father?

Which of the two did what his father wanted?

Whether is greater, the gold, or the temple?

Which is greater, the gold or the temple?

From Steele (eighteenth century):—

From Steele (18th century):—

It may be a question whether of these unfortunate persons had the greater soul.

It might be a question of which of these unfortunate people had the greater spirit.

Use of who and its forms.

98. The use of who, with its possessive and objective, is seen in these sentences:—

98. The use of who, along with its possessive and objective forms, is present in these sentences:—

Who is she in bloody coronation robes from Rheims?—De Quincey.

Who is she in those bloody coronation robes from Rheims?—De Quincey.

Whose was that soft voice, that, whispered sweetly,
I thought promised, long days of true happiness? —Bowles.

What doth she look on? Whom doth she behold?—Wordsworth.

What does she look at? Whom does she see?—Wordsworth.

From these sentences it will be seen that interrogative who refers to persons only; that it is not inflected for gender or number, but for case alone, having three forms; it is always third person, as it always asks about somebody.

From these sentences, it’s clear that the interrogative who refers to people only; it isn’t changed for gender or number, but only for case, having three forms; it’s always in the third person, since it always asks about someone.

Use of which.

99. Examples of the use of interrogative which:—

99. Examples of using the question which:—

Which of these had speed enough to sweep between the question and the answer, and divide the one from the other?—De Quincey.

Which of these had enough speed to rush between the question and the answer, and separate them from each other?—De Quincey.

Which of you, shall we say, doth love us most?—Shakespeare.

Which of you, let’s say, loves us the most?—Shakespeare.

Which of them [the sisters] shall I take?—Id.

Which of them [the sisters] should I choose?—Id.

As shown here, which is not inflected for gender, number, or case; it refers to either persons or things; it is selective, that is, picks out one or more from a number of known persons or objects.

As shown here, which doesn't change for gender, number, or case; it can refer to either people or things; it is selective, meaning it identifies one or more from a group of known people or objects.

Use of what.

100. Sentences showing the use of interrogative what:—

100. Sentences showing the use of interrogative what:—

Since I have been from Smaylho'me tower, What did your lady do? —Scott.

What is so rare as a day in June?—Lowell.

What is as rare as a day in June?—Lowell.

What wouldst thou do, old man?—Shakespeare.

What would you do, old man?

These show that what is not inflected for case; that it is always singular and neuter, referring to things, ideas, actions, etc., not to persons.

These show that what is not changed for case; that it is always singular and neutral, referring to things, ideas, actions, etc., not to people.

DECLENSION OF INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS.

101. The following are all the interrogative forms:—

101. Here are all the question forms:—

SING. AND PLUR. SING. AND PLUR. SINGULAR
Nom. who? which? what?
Poss. whose?
Obj. whom? which? what?

In spoken English, who is used as objective instead of whom; as, "Who did you see?" "Who did he speak to?"

In spoken English, who is used as the objective instead of whom; for example, "Who did you see?" "Who did he speak to?"

To tell the case of interrogatives.

102. The interrogative who has a separate form for each case, consequently the case can be told by the form of the word; but the case of which and what must be determined exactly as in nouns,—by the use of the words.

102. The question word who has a different form for each case, so you can tell the case by the word's form; however, the case of which and what has to be determined just like with nouns—by the use of the words.

For instance, in Sec. 99, which is nominative in the first sentence, since it is subject of the verb had; nominative in the second also, subject of doth love; objective in the last, being the direct object of the verb shall take.

For example, in Sec. 99, which is nominative in the first sentence because it's the subject of the verb had; nominative in the second as well, being the subject of doth love; and objective in the last, as it serves as the direct object of the verb shall take.

Further treatment of who, which and what.

103. Who, which, and what are also relative pronouns; which and what are sometimes adjectives; what may be an adverb in some expressions.

103. Who, which, and what are also relative pronouns; which and what can sometimes function as adjectives; what can act as an adverb in certain expressions.

They will be spoken of again in the proper places, especially in the treatment of indirect questions (Sec. 127).

They will be discussed again in the appropriate sections, particularly in the section on indirect questions (Sec. 127).

RELATIVE PRONOUNS.

Function of the relative pronoun.

104. Relative pronouns differ from both personal and interrogative pronouns in referring to an antecedent, and also in having a conjunctive use. The advantage in using them is to unite short statements into longer sentences, and so to make smoother discourse. Thus we may say, "The last of all the Bards was he. These bards sang of Border chivalry." Or, it may be shortened into,—

104. Relative pronouns are different from both personal and interrogative pronouns because they refer to an antecedent and can also connect clauses. The benefit of using them is that they help combine short statements into longer sentences, creating a more fluid conversation. For example, we might say, "He was the last of all the Bards. These bards sang about Border chivalry." Or, it can be shortened to,—

The last of all the Bards was he,
Who sang about Border chivalry."

In the latter sentence, who evidently refers to Bards, which is called the antecedent of the relative.

In the latter sentence, who clearly refers to Bards, which is known as the antecedent of the relative.

The antecedent.

105. The antecedent of a pronoun is the noun, pronoun, or other word or expression, for which the pronoun stands. It usually precedes the pronoun.

105. The antecedent of a pronoun is the noun, pronoun, or other word or expression that the pronoun represents. It typically comes before the pronoun.

Personal pronouns of the third person may have antecedents also, as they take the place usually of a word already used; as,—

Personal pronouns in the third person can also have antecedents, as they usually replace a word that has already been used; as,—

The priest hath his fee who comes and shrives us.—Lowell

The priest gets his fee when he comes and hears our confessions. —Lowell

In this, both his and who have the antecedent priest.

In this, both his and who refer to the priest.

The pronoun which may have its antecedent following, and the antecedent may be a word or a group of words, as will be shown in the remarks on which below.

The pronoun which can have its antecedent come after it, and the antecedent can be a single word or a phrase, as explained in the comments on which below.

Two kinds.

106. Relatives may be SIMPLE or INDEFINITE.

106. Relatives can be SIMPLE or INDEFINITE.

When the word relative is used, a simple relative is meant. Indefinite relatives, and the indefinite use of simple relatives, will be discussed further on.

When the word relative is used, it refers to a simple relative. Indefinite relatives and the indefinite use of simple relatives will be discussed later on.

The SIMPLE RELATIVES are who, which, that, what.

The SIMPLE RELATIVES are who, which, that, what.

Who and its forms.

107. Examples of the relative who and its forms:—

107. Examples of the relative who and its forms:—

1. Has a man gained anything who has received a hundred favors and rendered none?—Emerson.

1. Has a man gained anything who has received a hundred favors and given none?—Emerson.

2. That man is little to be envied whose patriotism would not gain force upon the plain of Marathon.—Dr Johnson.

2. That man is not someone to be envied whose patriotism wouldn’t be strengthened on the plain of Marathon.—Dr. Johnson.

3.

3.

For her charming son,
Who universal nature did lament.
—Milton.

4. The nurse came to us, who were sitting in an adjoining apartment.—Thackeray.

4. The nurse came to us, who were sitting in a nearby room.—Thackeray.

5.

5.

You sailors of England,
That protect our local waters;
Whose flag has withstood a thousand years,
The fight and the breeze!
—Campbell.

6. The men whom men respect, the women whom women approve, are the men and women who bless their species.—Parton

6. The men who earn respect from other men, the women who get approval from other women, are the ones who uplift their community.—Parton

Which and its forms.

108. Examples of the relative which and its forms:—

108. Examples of the relative which and its forms:—

1. They had not their own luster, but the look which is not of the earth.—Byron.

1. They didn’t have their own shine, but the appearance that is not of this world.—Byron.

2.

2.

He passed through the troubled arch of the portal, Whose heavy grate and large bar Often rolled back the tide of war.
—Scott.

3. Generally speaking, the dogs which stray around the butcher shops restrain their appetites.—Cox.

3. Generally speaking, the dogs that hang around the butcher shops control their appetites.—Cox.

4. The origin of language is divine, in the same sense in which man's nature, with all its capabilities ..., is a divine creation.—W. D. Whitney.

4. The origin of language is divine, in the same sense in which human nature, with all its abilities ..., is a divine creation.—W. D. Whitney.

5.

(a) This gradation ... ought to be kept in view; else this description will seem exaggerated, which it certainly is not.—Burke.

(a) This gradation ... should be kept in mind; otherwise this description will come across as exaggerated, which it definitely is not.—Burke.

(b) The snow was three inches deep and still falling, which prevented him from taking his usual ride.—Irving.

(b) The snow was three inches deep and still coming down, which stopped him from taking his usual ride.—Irving.

That.

109. Examples of the relative that:—

109. Examples of the relative that:—

1.

1.

The man who has no music in himself,...
Is ready for betrayal, cunning plans, and rewards.
—Shakespeare

2. The judge ... bought up all the pigs that could be had.—Lamb

2. The judge ... bought all the pigs that were available.—Lamb

3. Nature and books belong to the eyes that see them.—Emerson.

3. Nature and books belong to the eyes that see them.—Emerson.

4. For the sake of country a man is told to yield everything that makes the land honorable.—H. W. Beecher

4. For the sake of the country, a man is told to give up everything that makes the land honorable.—H. W. Beecher

5. Reader, that do not pretend to have leisure for very much scholarship, you will not be angry with me for telling you.—De Quincey.

5. Reader, that doesn't pretend to have much time for serious study, you won't be upset with me for telling you.—De Quincey.

6. The Tree Igdrasil, that has its roots down in the kingdoms of Hela and Death, and whose boughs overspread the highest heaven!—Carlyle.

6. The Tree Yggdrasil, which has its roots deep in the realms of Hel and Death, and whose branches stretch over the highest heaven!—Carlyle.

What.

110. Examples of the use of the relative what:—

110. Examples of how to use the relative what:—

1. Its net to entangle the enemy seems to be what it chiefly trusts to, and what it takes most pains to render as complete as possible.—Goldsmith.

1. Its main strategy for trapping the enemy seems to be what it primarily relies on, and what it works hardest to perfect.—Goldsmith.

2. For what he sought below is passed above, Already done is all that he would do.—Margaret Fuller.

2. For what he looked for down here is finished up there, Everything he wanted to do is already done.—Margaret Fuller.

3. Some of our readers may have seen in India a crowd of crows picking a sick vulture to death, no bad type of what often happens in that country.—Macaulay

3. Some of our readers may have seen in India a crowd of crows picking a sick vulture to death, which is not an uncommon sight in that country.—Macaulay

[To the Teacher.—If pupils work over the above sentences carefully, and test every remark in the following paragraphs, they will get a much better understanding of the relatives.]

[To the Teacher.—If students go through the sentences above thoroughly and evaluate every statement in the paragraphs that follow, they will gain a much better understanding of the relatives.]

REMARKS ON THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS.

Who.

111. By reading carefully the sentences in Sec. 107, the following facts will be noticed about the relative who:—

111. By carefully reading the sentences in Sec. 107, you'll notice the following facts about the relative who:—

(1) It usually refers to persons: thus, in the first sentence, Sec. 107, a man...who; in the second, that man...whose; in the third, son, whom; and so on.

(1) It usually refers to people: so, in the first sentence, Sec. 107, a person...who; in the second, that person...whose; in the third, child, whom; and so on.

(2) It has three case forms,—who, whose, whom.

(2) It has three case forms—who, whose, whom.

(3) The forms do not change for person or number of the antecedent. In sentence 4, who is first person; in 5, whose is second person; the others are all third person. In 1, 2, and 3, the relatives are singular; in 4, 5, and 6, they are plural.

(3) The forms don’t change based on the person or number of the antecedent. In sentence 4, who is first person; in 5, whose is second person; the others are all third person. In 1, 2, and 3, the relatives are singular; in 4, 5, and 6, they are plural.

Who referring to animals.

112. Though in most cases who refers to persons there are instances found where it refers to animals. It has been seen (Sec. 24) that animals are referred to by personal pronouns when their characteristics or habits are such as to render them important or interesting to man. Probably on the same principle the personal relative who is used not infrequently in literature, referring to animals.

112. Although in most cases who refers to people, there are instances where it refers to animals. It has been noted (Sec. 24) that animals are referred to by personal pronouns when their traits or behaviors are significant or interesting to humans. Likely following the same idea, the personal relative who is often used in literature to refer to animals.

Witness the following examples:—

Check out these examples:—

And you, warm little housekeeper [the cricket], who class With those who think the candles come too soon.—Leigh Hunt.

And you, cozy little housekeeper [the cricket], who class With those who feel the candles arrive too early.—Leigh Hunt.

The robins...have succeeded in driving off the bluejays who used to build in our pines.—Lowell.

The robins...have managed to chase away the bluejays who used to nest in our pines.—Lowell.

The little gorilla, whose wound I had dressed, flung its arms around my neck.—Thackeray.

The little gorilla, whose wound I had bandaged, wrapped its arms around my neck.—Thackeray.

A lake frequented by every fowl whom Nature has taught to dip the wing in water.—Dr. Johnson.

A lake visited by every bird that Nature has taught to dip its wings in water.—Dr. Johnson.

While we had such plenty of domestic insects who infinitely excelled the former, because they understood how to weave as well as to spin.—Swift.

While we had so many domestic insects who were far better than before, because they knew how to weave as well as spin.—Fast.

My horse, who, under his former rider had hunted the buffalo, seemed as much excited as myself.—Irving.

My horse, who, had hunted buffalo with his previous rider, seemed just as thrilled as I was.—Irving.

Other examples might be quoted from Burke, Kingsley, Smollett, Scott, Cooper, Gibbon, and others.

Other examples could be cited from Burke, Kingsley, Smollett, Scott, Cooper, Gibbon, and others.

Which.

113. The sentences in Sec. 108 show that—

113. The sentences in Sec. 108 show that—

(1) Which refers to animals, things, or ideas, not persons.

(1) Which refers to animals, things, or ideas, not people.

(2) It is not inflected for gender or number.

(2) It doesn’t change for gender or number.

(3) It is nearly always third person, rarely second (an example of its use as second person is given in sentence 32, p. 96).

(3) It’s almost always written in third person, only occasionally in second (an example of its use in second person is found in sentence 32, p. 96).

(4) It has two case forms,—which for the nominative and objective, whose for the possessive.

(4) It has two forms: which for the nominative and objective, and whose for the possessive.

Examples of whose, possessive case of which.

114. Grammarians sometimes object to the statement that whose is the possessive of which, saying that the phrase of which should always be used instead; yet a search in literature shows that the possessive form whose is quite common in prose as well as in poetry: for example,—

114. Grammarians sometimes argue against the idea that whose is the possessive form of which, claiming that the phrase of which should always be used instead; however, a look through literature shows that the possessive form whose is actually quite common in both prose and poetry: for example,—

I swept the horizon, and saw at one glance the glorious elevations, on whose tops the sun kindled all the melodies and harmonies of light.—Beecher.

I scanned the horizon and, in an instant, saw the magnificent peaks, on which the sun ignited all the melodies and harmonies of light.—Beecher.

Men may be ready to fight to the death, and to persecute without pity, for a religion whose creed they do not understand, and whose precepts they habitually disobey.—Macaulay

Men might be willing to fight to the death and persecute without mercy for a religion whose beliefs they don't understand and whose teachings they consistently ignore.—Macaulay

Beneath these sluggish waves lay the once proud cities of the plain, whose grave was dug by the thunder of the heavens.—Scott.

Beneath these slow waves were the once proud cities of the plain, whose grave was dug by the thunder of the skies.—Scott.

Many great and opulent cities whose population now exceeds that of Virginia during the Revolution, and whose names are spoken in the remotest corner of the civilized world.—Mcmaster.

Many great and luxurious cities whose populations now exceed that of Virginia during the Revolution, and whose names are recognized in the farthest corners of the civilized world.—McMaster.

Through the heavy door whose bronze network closes the place of his rest, let us enter the church itself.—Ruskin.

Through the heavy door that bronze network closes the place of his rest, let us enter the church itself.—Ruskin.

This moribund '61, whose career of life is just coming to its terminus.—Thackeray.

This dying '61, whose life is just coming to an end.—Thackeray.

So in Matthew Arnold, Kingsley, Burke, and numerous others.

So in Matthew Arnold, Kingsley, Burke, and many others.

Which and its antecedents.

115. The last two sentences in Sec. 108 show that which may have other antecedents than nouns and pronouns. In 5 (a) there is a participial adjective used as the antecedent; in 5 (b) there is a complete clause employed as antecedent. This often occurs.

115. The last two sentences in Sec. 108 show that which can have other subjects besides nouns and pronouns. In 5 (a), a participial adjective is used as the subject; in 5 (b), a complete clause is used as the subject. This happens often.

Sometimes, too, the antecedent follows which; thus,—

Sometimes, the antecedent also comes after which; so,—

And, even worse, everything you’ve done
It has only been for a rebellious son.
—Shakespeare.

Primarily, which is very notable and curious, I observe that men of business rarely know the meaning of the word "rich."—Ruskin.

Primarily, which is very noticeable and interesting, I see that businessmen rarely understand the meaning of the word “rich.” —Ruskin.

I demurred to this honorary title upon two grounds,—first, as being one toward which I had no natural aptitudes or predisposing advantages; secondly (which made her stare), as carrying with it no real or enviable distinction.—De Quincey.

I hesitated to accept this honorary title for two reasons: first, because I had no natural abilities or advantages suited for it; and second (which surprised her), because it offers no real or desirable distinction.—De Quincey.

That.

116. In the sentences of Sec. 109, we notice that—

116. In the sentences of Sec. 109, we notice that—

(1) That refers to persons, animals, and things.

(1) That refers to people, animals, and objects.

(2) It has only one case form, no possessive.

(2) It has only one case form, with no possessive.

(3) It is the same form for first, second, and third persons.

(3) It is the same structure for first, second, and third persons.

(4) It has the same form for singular and plural.

(4) It has the same form for both singular and plural.

It sometimes borrows the possessive whose, as in sentence 6, Sec. 109, but this is not sanctioned as good usage.

It sometimes uses the possessive whose, like in sentence 6, Sec. 109, but this isn't considered proper usage.

What.

117. The sentences of Sec. 110 show that—

117. The sentences of Sec. 110 show that—

(1) What always refers to things; is always neuter.

(1) What always refers to things; it is always neutral.

(2) It is used almost entirely in the singular.

(2) It's mostly used in the singular.

(3) Its antecedent is hardly ever expressed. When expressed, it usually follows, and is emphatic; as, for example,—

(3) Its predecessor is rarely mentioned. When it is mentioned, it usually comes after and is emphasized; for instance,—

What I would, that do I not; but what I hate, that do I.—Bible

What I want, I don't do; but what I hate, I do. —Bible

What fates impose, that men must needs abide.—Shakespeare.

What fate decides, people must accept.—Shakespeare.

What a man does, that he has.—Emerson.

What a man does, he has. —Emerson.

Compare this:—

Compare this:—

Alas! is it not too true, what we said?—Carlyle.

Alas! is it not too true, what we said?—Carlyle.

DECLENSION OF RELATIVE PRONOUNS.

118. These are the forms of the simple relatives:—

118. These are the types of simple relatives:—

SINGULAR AND PLURAL.
Nom. who which that what
Poss. whose whose
Obj. whom which that what

HOW TO PARSE RELATIVES.

119. The gender, number, and person of the relatives who, which, and that must be determined by those of the antecedent; the case depends upon the function of the relative in its own clause.

119. The gender, number, and person of the relatives who, which, and that must be determined by those of the antecedent; the case depends on the role of the relative in its own clause.

For example, consider the following sentence:

For example, think about this sentence:

"He uttered truths that wrought upon and molded the lives of those who heard him."

"He spoke truths that shaped and changed the lives of those who listened to him."

Since the relatives hold the sentence together, we can, by taking them out, let the sentence fall apart into three divisions: (1) "He uttered truths;" (2) "The truths wrought upon and molded the lives of the people;" (3) "These people heard him."

Since the relatives keep the sentence intact, we can remove them to break the sentence down into three parts: (1) "He spoke truths;" (2) "The truths influenced and shaped the lives of the people;" (3) "These people listened to him."

That evidently refers to truths, consequently is neuter, third person, plural number. Who plainly stands for those or the people, either of which would be neuter, third person, plural number. Here the relative agrees with its antecedent.

That clearly refers to truths, so it is neuter, third person, plural. Who obviously stands for those or the people, both of which would also be neuter, third person, plural. Here, the relative agrees with its antecedent.

We cannot say the relative agrees with its antecedent in case. Truths in sentence (2), above, is subject of wrought upon and molded; in (1), it is object of uttered. In (2), people is the object of the preposition of; in (3), it is subject of the verb heard. Now, that takes the case of the truths in (2), not of truths which is expressed in the sentence: consequently that is in the nominative case. In the same way who, standing for the people understood, subject of heard, is in the nominative case.

We can't say that the relative pronoun agrees with its antecedent in case. In sentence (2), above, Truths is the subject of wrought upon and molded; in (1), it is the object of uttered. In (2), people is the object of the preposition of; in (3), it is the subject of the verb heard. Now, that takes the case of the truths in (2), not of truths as shown in the sentence: therefore, that is in the nominative case. Similarly, who, standing for the people understood as the subject of heard, is in the nominative case.

Exercise.

First find the antecedents, then parse the relatives, in the following sentences:—

First find the antecedents, then identify the relatives in the following sentences:—

1. How superior it is in these respects to the pear, whose blossoms are neither colored nor fragrant!

1. How much better it is in these ways than the pear, whose flowers are neither colorful nor fragrant!

2. Some gnarly apple which I pick up in the road reminds me by its fragrance of all the wealth of Pomona.

2. A gnarly apple I find in the road reminds me of all the riches of Pomona with its scent.

3. Perhaps I talk with one who is selecting some choice barrels for filling an order.

3. Maybe I'm chatting with someone who's picking out some good barrels for an order.

4. Ill blows the wind that profits nobody.

4. Bad luck comes from a situation that benefits no one.

5. Alas! it is we ourselves that are getting buried alive under this avalanche of earthly impertinences.

5. Unfortunately, it’s us who are getting buried alive under this pile of everyday nonsense.

6. This method also forces upon us the necessity of thinking, which is, after all, the highest result of all education.

6. This method also makes us realize the importance of thinking, which is, after all, the ultimate goal of education.

7. I know that there are many excellent people who object to the reading of novels as a waste of time.

7. I know that there are many great people who think reading novels is a waste of time.

8. I think they are trying to outwit nature, who is sure to be cunninger than they.

8. I think they're trying to outsmart nature, which is definitely more clever than they are.

Parsing what, the simple relative.

120. The relative what is handled differently, because it has usually no antecedent, but is singular, neuter, third person. Its case is determined exactly as that of other relatives. In the sentence, "What can't be cured must be endured," the verb must be endured is the predicate of something. What must be endured? Answer, What can't be cured. The whole expression is its subject. The word what, however, is subject of the verb can't be cured, and hence is in the nominative case.

120. The relative what is treated differently because it usually has no antecedent, but it is singular, neuter, and in the third person. Its case is determined just like that of other relatives. In the sentence, "What can't be cured must be endured," the verb must be endured acts as the predicate for something. What needs to be endured? The answer is What can't be cured. The entire phrase serves as its subject. The word what, however, is the subject of the verb can't be cured, and so it is in the nominative case.

"What we call nature is a certain self-regulated motion or change." Here the subject of is, etc., is what we call nature; but of this, we is the subject, and what is the direct object of the verb call, so is in the objective case.

"What we refer to as nature is a specific kind of self-regulated motion or change." In this case, the subject of is is what we refer to as nature; however, in this context, we is the subject, and what is the direct object of the verb refer, so it is in the objective case.

Another way.

Some prefer another method of treatment. As shown by the following sentences, what is equivalent to that which:—

Some people prefer a different treatment approach. As shown by the following sentences, what is the same as that which:—

It has been said that "common souls pay with what they do, nobler souls with that which they are."—Emerson.

It has been said that "ordinary people pay with what they do, while greater souls pay with who they are."—Emerson.

That which is pleasant often appears under the name of evil; and what is disagreeable to nature is called good and virtuous.—Burke.

What is enjoyable often shows up as evil; and what goes against nature is referred to as good and virtuous.—Burke.

Hence some take what as a double relative, and parse that in the first clause, and which in the second clause; that is, "common souls pay with that [singular, object of with] which [singular, object of do] they do."

Hence some interpret what as a double relative and analyze that in the first clause, and which in the second clause; that is, "common souls pay with that [singular, object of with] which [singular, object of do] they do."

INDEFINITE RELATIVES.

List and examples.

121. INDEFINITE RELATIVES are, by meaning and use, not as direct as the simple relatives.

121. INDEFINITE RELATIVES are, in meaning and use, not as straightforward as the simple relatives.

They are whoever, whichever, whatever, whatsoever; less common are whoso, whosoever, whichsoever, whatsoever. The simple relatives who, which, and what may also be used as indefinite relatives. Examples of indefinite relatives (from Emerson):—

They are whoever, whichever, whatever, whatsoever; less common are whoso, whosoever, whichsoever, whatsoever. The simple relatives who, which, and what can also be used as indefinite relatives. Examples of indefinite relatives (from Emerson):—

1. Whoever has flattered his friend successfully must at once think himself a knave, and his friend a fool.

1. Anyone who has successfully flattered their friend must immediately think of themselves as a trickster, and their friend as a fool.

2. It is no proof of a man's understanding, to be able to affirm whatever he pleases.

2. Just because a man can say anything he wants doesn’t mean he understands it.

3. They sit in a chair or sprawl with children on the floor, or stand on their head, or what else soever, in a new and original way.

3. They sit in a chair, spread out with kids on the floor, stand on their heads, or whatever else, in a fresh and creative way.

4. Whoso is heroic will always find crises to try his edge.

4. Whoever is heroic will always find challenges to test their mettle.

5. Only itself can inspire whom it will.

5. Only it can inspire whoever it wants.

6. God offers to every mind its choice between truth and repose. Take which you please,—you cannot have both.

6. God gives every mind a choice between truth and comfort. Pick whichever you like,—you can't have both.

7. Do what we can, summer will have its flies.

7. Do what we can, summer will have its pests.

Meaning and use.

122. The fitness of the term indefinite here cannot be shown better than by examining the following sentences:—

122. The appropriateness of the term indefinite here can be best demonstrated by looking at the following sentences:—

1. There is something so overruling in whatever inspires us with awe, in all things which belong ever so remotely to terror, that nothing else can stand in their presence.—Burke.

1. There’s something so overwhelming in whatever inspires us with awe, in everything that is even slightly related to terror, that nothing else can hold its ground in their presence.—Burke.

2. Death is there associated, not with everything that is most endearing in social and domestic charities, but with whatever is darkest in human nature and in human destiny.—Macaulay.

2. Death is linked not with everything that is most beloved in social and domestic kindness, but with whatever is darkest in human nature and in human fate.—Macaulay.

It is clear that in 1, whatever is equivalent to all things which, and in 2, to everything that; no certain antecedent, no particular thing, being referred to. So with the other indefinites.

It's clear that in 1, whatever means all things that, and in 2, it means everything that; no specific antecedent or particular thing is mentioned. The same goes for other indefinite terms.

What simple relative and what indefinite relative.

123. The above helps us to discriminate between what as a simple and what as an indefinite relative.

123. The above helps us to distinguish between what as a simple term and what as an indefinite relative.

As shown in Sec. 120, the simple relative what is equivalent to that which or the thing which,—some particular thing; as shown by the last sentence in Sec. 121, what means anything that, everything that (or everything which). The difference must be seen by the meaning of the sentence, as what hardly ever has an antecedent.

As shown in Sec. 120, the simple relative what is equivalent to that which or the thing which,—some specific thing; as indicated by the last sentence in Sec. 121, what means anything that, everything that (or everything which). The difference should be understood through the meaning of the sentence, as what rarely has an antecedent.

The examples in sentences 5 and 6, Sec. 121, show that who and which have no antecedent expressed, but mean any one whom, either one that, etc.

The examples in sentences 5 and 6, Sec. 121, show that who and which have no stated antecedent, but mean anyone whom, either one that, etc.

OTHER WORDS USED AS RELATIVES.

But and as.

124. Two words, but and as, are used with the force of relative pronouns in some expressions; for example,—

124. Two words, but and as, are used with the force of relative pronouns in some expressions; for example,—

1. There is not a leaf rotting on the highway but has force in it: how else could it rot?—Carlyle.

1. There isn't a single leaf decaying on the highway that doesn't have purpose: how else could it decay?—Carlyle.

2. This, amongst such other troubles as most men meet with in this life, has been my heaviest affliction.—De Quincey.

2. This, along with the other difficulties that most people face in life, has been my greatest burden.—De Quincey.

Proof that they have the force of relatives.

Compare with these the two following sentences:—

Compare these with the two sentences below:—

3. There is nothing but is related to us, nothing that does not interest us.—Emerson.

3. There is nothing but what is related to us, nothing that does not interest us.—Emerson.

4. There were articles of comfort and luxury such as Hester never ceased to use, but which only wealth could have purchased.—Hawthorne.

4. There were items of comfort and luxury that Hester always used, but that only wealth could have bought.—Hawthorne.

Sentence 3 shows that but is equivalent to the relative that with not, and that as after such is equivalent to which.

Sentence 3 shows that but is the same as the relative that with not, and that as following such is the same as which.

For as after same see "Syntax" (Sec. 417).

For as after same see "Syntax" (Sec. 417).

Former use of as.

125. In early modern English, as was used just as we use that or which, not following the word such; thus,—

125. In early modern English, as was used just like we use that or which, and it didn't come after the word such; so,—

I haven't seen that gentleness in your eyes. And show love as I used to have.
—Shakespeare

This still survives in vulgar English in England; for example,—

This still exists in everyday English in England; for example,—

"Don't you mind Lucy Passmore, as charmed your warts for you when you was a boy? "—Kingsley

"Don't you remember Lucy Passmore, who enchanted your warts for you when you were a boy? "—Kingsley

This is frequently illustrated in Dickens's works.

This is often shown in Dickens's works.

Other substitutes.

126. Instead of the phrases in which, upon which, by which, etc., the conjunctions wherein, whereupon, whereby, etc., are used.

126. Instead of the phrases in which, upon which, by which, etc., the conjunctions wherein, whereupon, whereby, etc., are used.

A man is the facade of a temple wherein all wisdom and good abide.—Emerson.

A man is the face of a temple where all wisdom and goodness reside.—Emerson.

The sovereignty of this nature whereof we speak.—Id.

The sovereignty of this kind that we talk about.—Id.

The beloved home faces whereupon
That flickering firelight dimmed and illuminated. —Whittier.

PRONOUNS IN INDIRECT QUESTIONS.

Special caution needed here.

127. It is sometimes hard for the student to tell a relative from an interrogative pronoun. In the regular direct question the interrogative is easily recognized; so is the relative when an antecedent is close by. But compare the following in pairs:—

127. It can be tricky for students to distinguish between a relative pronoun and an interrogative pronoun. In a straightforward question, the interrogative is clear; the same goes for the relative when there's a nearby antecedent. But check out the following pairs:—

1.

1.

(a) Like a gentleman of leisure who is strolling out for pleasure.

(a) Like a leisurely gentleman who is taking a nice walk for enjoyment.

(b) Well we knew who stood behind, though the earthwork hid them.

(b) Well, we knew who was behind there, even though the dirt mound concealed them.

2.

2.

(a) But what you gain in time is perhaps lost in power.

(a) But what you save in time might be lost in power.

(b) But what had become of them they knew not.

(b) But what had happened to them, they did not know.

3.

3.

(a) These are the lines which heaven-commanded Toil shows on his deed.

(a) These are the lines that heaven commanded Hard work shows in his actions.

(b) And since that time I thought it not amiss To judge which were the best of all these three.

(b) And since that time, I thought it would be okay to decide which one of these three was the best.

In sentences 1 (a), 2 (a) and 3 (a) the regular relative use is seen; who having the antecedent gentleman, what having the double use of pronoun and antecedent, which having the antecedent lines.

In sentences 1 (a), 2 (a) and 3 (a), the standard relative usage is shown; who relates to the antecedent gentleman, what serves as both pronoun and antecedent, and which relates to the antecedent lines.

But in 1 (b), 2 (b), and 3 (b), there are two points of difference from the others considered: first, no antecedent is expressed, which would indicate that they are not relatives; second, a question is disguised in each sentence, although each sentence as a whole is declarative in form. Thus, 1 (b), if expanded, would be, "Who stood behind? We knew," etc., showing that who is plainly interrogative. So in 2 (b), what is interrogative, the full expression being, "But what had become of them? They knew not." Likewise with which in 3 (b).

But in 1 (b), 2 (b), and 3 (b), there are two key differences from the other examples we looked at: first, there’s no expressed antecedent, which means they aren’t relatives; second, there’s a hidden question in each sentence, even though they’re all structured as declarative sentences. So, 1 (b), if we expanded it, would read, "Who stood behind? We knew," etc., making it clear that who is definitely a question word. Similarly, in 2 (b), what is a question, with the complete thought being, "But what had become of them? They knew not." The same goes for which in 3 (b).

How to decide.

In studying such sentences, (1) see whether there is an antecedent of who or which, and whether what = that + which (if so, it is a simple relative; if not, it is either an indefinite relative or an interrogative pronoun); (2) see if the pronoun introduces an indirect question (if it does, it is an interrogative; if not, it is an indefinite relative).

In examining these sentences, (1) check if there's a subject for who or which, and whether what equals that + which (if it does, it's a simple relative; if not, it’s either an indefinite relative or an interrogative pronoun); (2) determine if the pronoun introduces an indirect question (if it does, it’s interrogative; if not, it’s an indefinite relative).

Another caution.

128. On the other hand, care must be taken to see whether the pronoun is the word that really asks the question in an interrogative sentence. Examine the following:—

128. On the other hand, we need to check if the pronoun is the word that actually asks the question in an interrogative sentence. Look at the following:—

1.

1.

Sweet rose! Where does this color come from? Which color excels? —Drummond

2.

2.

And then what amazing things will you do
Whose beauty warms us so? —Walker

3.

3.

Is this a romance? Or is it a faithful picture of what has lately been in a neighboring land?—Macaulay

Is this a romance? Or is it an accurate portrayal of what has recently happened in a neighboring country?—Macaulay

These are interrogative sentences, but in none of them does the pronoun ask the question. In the first, whence is the interrogative word, which has the antecedent hue. In the second, whose has the antecedent you, and asks no question. In the third, the question is asked by the verb.

These are question sentences, but in none of them does the pronoun actually ask the question. In the first one, whence is the question word, with which referring back to hue. In the second, whose refers to you and isn’t asking a question. In the third, the question is posed by the verb.

OMISSION OF THE RELATIVES.

Relative omitted when object.

129. The relative is frequently omitted in spoken and in literary English when it would be the object of a preposition or a verb. Hardly a writer can be found who does not leave out relatives in this way when they can be readily supplied in the mind of the reader. Thus,—

129. The relative is often left out in both spoken and written English when it would be the object of a preposition or verb. You can hardly find a writer who doesn’t skip relatives in this way when they can be easily inferred by the reader. So,—

These are the sounds we feed upon.—Fletcher.

These are the sounds we rely on.—Fletcher.

I visited many other apartments, but shall not trouble my reader with all the curiosities I observed.—Swift.

I checked out a bunch of other apartments, but I won’t bore my reader with all the interesting things I saw.—Fast.

Exercise.

Workout.

Put in the relatives who, which, or that where they are omitted from the following sentences, and see whether the sentences are any smoother or clearer:—

Put in the relatives who, which, or that where they are missing from the following sentences, and see if the sentences are any smoother or clearer:—

1. The insect I am now describing lived three years,—Goldsmith.

1. The insect I’m about to describe lived for three years, —Goldsmith.

2. They will go to Sunday schools through storms their brothers are afraid of.—Holmes.

2. They will attend Sunday schools despite the storms that scare their brothers.—Holmes.

3. He opened the volume he first took from the shelf.—G. Eliot.

3. He opened the book he first grabbed from the shelf.—George Eliot.

4. He could give the coals in that queer coal scuttle we read of to his poor neighbor.—Thackeray.

4. He could give the coals in that strange coal bucket we read about to his poor neighbor.—Thackeray.

5. When Goldsmith died, half the unpaid bill he owed to Mr. William Filby was for clothes supplied to his nephew.—Forster

5. When Goldsmith passed away, half of the unpaid bill he owed to Mr. William Filby was for clothes provided to his nephew.—Forster

6. The thing I want to see is not Redbook Lists, and Court Calendars, but the life of man in England.—Carlyle.

6. What I want to see isn't Redbook Lists or Court Calendars, but the life of people in England.—Carlyle.

7. The material they had to work upon was already democratical by instinct and habitude.—Lowell.

7. The material they had to work with was already democratic by nature and habit.—Lowell.

Relative omitted when subject.

130. We often hear in spoken English expressions like these:—

130. We often hear expressions like these in everyday English:—

There isn't one here ‸ knows how to play ball.

There isn't anyone here who knows how to play ball.

There was such a crowd ‸ went, the house was full.

There was such a crowd that when I went, the house was packed.

Here the omitted relative would be in the nominative case. Also in literary English we find the same omission. It is rare in prose, and comparatively so in poetry. Examples are,—

Here, the missing relative would be in the nominative case. You can also find the same omission in literary English. It's uncommon in prose and relatively rare in poetry. Examples are,—

The silent truth that it was she was superior.—Thackeray

The unspoken truth was that she was better. —Thackeray

I have a mind presages me such thrift.—Shakespeare.

I have a feeling that I'm meant for such frugality.—Shakespeare.

There's a nun in Dryburgh bower,
Never looks at the sun.
—Scott.
And you can gather garlands there.
Would honor a summer queen.
—Id.

'Tis distance lends enchantment to the view.—Campbell.

Distance makes the view enchanting.—Campbell.

Exercises on the Relative Pronoun.

(a) Bring up sentences containing ten instances of the relatives who, which, that, and what.

(a) Give examples of sentences that include ten occurrences of the relatives who, which, that, and what.

(b) Bring up sentences having five indefinite relatives.

(b) Provide sentences that include five indefinite relatives.

(c) Bring up five sentences having indirect questions introduced by pronouns.

(c) Provide five sentences that contain indirect questions started by pronouns.

(d) Tell whether the pronouns in the following are interrogatives, simple relatives, or indefinite relatives:—

(d) Identify whether the pronouns in the following are interrogative, simple relative, or indefinite relative:—

1. He ushered him into one of the wherries which lay ready to attend the Queen's barge, which was already proceeding.

1. He led him to one of the rowboats that were ready to accompany the Queen's barge, which was already on its way.

2. The nobles looked at each other, but more with the purpose to see what each thought of the news, than to exchange any remarks on what had happened.

2. The nobles glanced at one another, more to gauge each other's reactions to the news than to actually comment on what had happened.

3. Gracious Heaven! who was this that knew the word?

3. Good heavens! Who was this person that knew the word?

4. It needed to be ascertained which was the strongest kind of men; who were to be rulers over whom.

4. It needed to be determined who was the strongest type of men and who would be in charge of whom.

5. He went on speaking to who would listen to him.

5. He kept talking to anyone who would listen.

6. What kept me silent was the thought of my mother.

6. What made me stay quiet was the thought of my mom.

ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS.

Function of adjective pronouns.

131. Most of the words how to be considered are capable of a double use,—they may be pure modifiers of nouns, or they may stand for nouns. In the first use they are adjectives; in the second they retain an adjective meaning, but have lost their adjective use. Primarily they are adjectives, but in this function, or use, they are properly classed as adjective pronouns.

131. Most of the words we need to consider can be used in two ways—they can either act as modifiers for nouns, or they can stand on their own as nouns. When they modify nouns, they are adjectives; when they take on a noun role, they keep their adjective meaning, but lose their adjective use. Primarily, they are adjectives, but when used this way, they are properly categorized as adjective pronouns.

The following are some examples of these:—

The following are some examples of these:—

Some say that the place was bewitched.—Irving.

Some say that the place was cursed.—Irving.

That mysterious realm where everyone shall take His room in the quiet halls of death.
—Bryant.
How happy is he, born or taught
That doesn't serve someone else's will. —Wotton

That is more than any martyr can stand.—Emerson.

That is more than any martyr can handle.—Emerson.

Caution.
Adjectives, not pronouns.

Hence these words are like adjectives used as nouns, which we have seen in such expressions as, "The dead are there;" that is, a word, in order to be an adjective pronoun, must not modify any word, expressed or understood. It must come under the requirement of pronouns, and stand for a noun. For instance, in the following sentences—"The cubes are of stainless ivory, and on each is written, in letters of gold, 'Truth;'" "You needs must play such pranks as these;" "They will always have one bank to sun themselves upon, and another to get cool under;" "Where two men ride on a horse, one must ride behind"—the words italicized modify nouns understood, necessarily thought of: thus, in the first, "each cube;" in the second, "these pranks," in the others, "another bank," "one man."

So these words are like adjectives used as nouns, which we’ve seen in phrases like, "The dead are there;" that is, a word, to be an adjective pronoun, must not modify any word, expressed or understood. It has to meet the requirements of pronouns and stand for a noun. For example, in the following sentences—"The cubes are made of stainless ivory, and on each is written, in letters of gold, 'Truth;'" "You simply must play such pranks as these;" "They will always have one bank to bask in the sun on, and another to get cool under;" "Where two men ride on a horse, one must ride behind"—the italicized words modify nouns that are understood and necessarily thought of: thus, in the first, "each cube;" in the second, "these pranks," in the others, "another bank," "one man."

Classes of adjective pronouns.

132. Adjective pronouns are divided into three classes:—

132. Adjective pronouns are classified into three categories:—

(1) DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS, such as this, that, the former, etc.

(1) DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS, like this, that, the former, etc.

(2) DISTRIBUTIVE PRONOUNS, such as each, either, neither, etc.

DISTRIBUTIVE PRONOUNS, like each, either, neither, etc.

(3) NUMERAL PRONOUNS, as some, any, few, many, none, all, etc.

(3) NUMBER PRONOUNS, like some, any, few, many, none, all, etc.

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS

Definition and examples.

133. A DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN is one that definitely points out what persons or things are alluded to in the sentence.

133. A DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN is one that clearly indicates which people or things are being referenced in the sentence.

The person or thing alluded to by the demonstrative may be in another sentence, or may be the whole of a sentence. For example, "Be that as it may" could refer to a sentiment in a sentence, or an argument in a paragraph; but the demonstrative clearly points to that thing.

The person or thing referred to by the demonstrative could be in another sentence or could represent an entire sentence. For example, "Be that as it may" might refer to an idea in a sentence or an argument in a paragraph; however, the demonstrative clearly indicates that thing.

The following are examples of demonstratives:—

Here are some examples of demonstratives:—

I did not say this in so many words.

I didn't say this exactly.

All these he saw; but what he fain had seen He could not see.

All these he saw; but what he really wanted to see he could not see.

Beyond that I seek not to penetrate the veil.

Beyond that, I don't wish to look behind the curtain.

How much we forgive in those who yield us the rare spectacle of heroic manners!

How much we forgive in those who give us the rare sight of heroic behavior!

The correspondence of Bonaparte with his brother Joseph, when the latter was the King of Spain.

The correspondence between Bonaparte and his brother Joseph, when the latter was the King of Spain.

Such are a few isolated instances, accidentally preserved.

These are a few isolated instances that were accidentally preserved.

Even as I have seen, they that plow iniquity, and sow wickedness, reap the same.

Even as I have seen, those who cultivate wrongdoing and spread evil will reap the same.

They know that patriotism has its glorious opportunities and its sacred duties. They have not shunned the one, and they have well performed the other.

They understand that patriotism comes with its proud opportunities and its important responsibilities. They have embraced the one, and they have carried out the other well.

NOTE.—It will be noticed in the first four sentences that this and that are inflected for number.

NOTE.—You'll notice in the first four sentences that this and that change form based on number.

Exercises.

(a) Find six sentences using demonstrative adjective pronouns.

(a) Find six sentences using demonstrative adjective pronouns.

(b) In which of the following is these a pronoun?—

(b) In which of the following is these a pronoun?—

1. Formerly the duty of a librarian was to keep people as much as possible from the books, and to hand these over to his successor as little worn as he could.—Lowell.

1. In the past, the job of a librarian was to keep people away from the books as much as possible and to pass them on to the next librarian in the least worn condition.—Lowell.

2. They had fewer books, but these were of the best.—Id.

2. They had fewer books, but these were the best.—Id.

3. A man inspires affection and honor, because he was not lying in wait for these.—Emerson

3. A man earns love and respect because he didn't scheme for these.—Emerson

4. Souls such as these treat you as gods would.—Id.

4. Souls like these treat you like gods would.—Id.

5. These are the first mountains that broke the uniform level of the earth's surface.—Agassiz

5. These are the first mountains that disrupted the flatness of the earth's surface.—Agassiz

DISTRIBUTIVE PRONOUNS.

Definition and examples.

134. The DISTRIBUTIVE PRONOUNS are those which stand for the names of persons or things considered singly.

134. The DISTRIBUTIVE PRONOUNS are the ones that represent the names of people or things looked at individually.

Simple.

Some of these are simple pronouns; for example,—

Some of these are simple pronouns; for example,—

They stood, or sat, or reclined, as seemed good to each.

They stood, sat, or lounged, whatever felt right to each.

As two yoke devils sworn to other's purpose.

As two yoke devils committed to each other's purpose.

Their minds accorded into one strain, and made delightful music which neither could have claimed as all his own.

Their minds came together in harmony and created beautiful music that neither could claim as entirely his own.

Compound.

Two are compound pronouns,—each other, one another. They may be separated into two adjective pronouns; as,

Two are compound pronouns—each other, one another. They can be split into two adjective pronouns; as,

We violated our reverence each for the other's soul. —Hawthorne.

We disrespected our respect for each other's soul. —Hawthorne.

More frequently they are considered as one pronoun.

More often, they're seen as a single pronoun.

They led one another, as it were, into a high pavilion of their thoughts.—Hawthorne.

They guided each other, so to speak, into a lofty pavilion of their thoughts.—Hawthorne.

Men take each other's measure when they react.—Emerson.

Men evaluate each other based on their reactions.—Emerson.

Exercise.—Find sentences containing three distributive pronouns.

Exercise.—Find sentences that include three distributive pronouns.

NUMERAL PRONOUNS.

Definition and examples.

135. The NUMERAL PRONOUNS are those which stand for an uncertain number or quantity of persons or things.

135. The NUMERAL PRONOUNS are those that represent an unknown number or amount of people or things.

The following sentences contain numeral pronouns:—

The following sentences include number-based pronouns:—

Trusting too much to others' care is the ruin of many.

Trusting too much in others' care is the downfall of many.

'Tis of no importance how large his house, you quickly come to the end of all.

It's not important how big his house is; you'll soon reach the end of everything.

Another opposes him with sound argument.

Another challenges him with solid reasoning.

It is as if one should be so enthusiastic a lover of poetry as to care nothing for Homer or Milton.

It’s as if one should be such a passionate lover of poetry that they wouldn’t care at all for Homer or Milton.

There were plenty more for him to fall in company with, as some of the rangers had gone astray.

There were plenty more for him to meet up with, as some of the rangers had gotten lost.

The Soldan, imbued, as most were, with the superstitions of his time, paused over a horoscope.

The Soldan, influenced like most by the superstitions of his era, stopped to examine a horoscope.

If those [taxes] were the only ones we had to pay, we might the more easily discharge them.

If those were the only taxes we had to pay, we could handle them more easily.

Much might be said on both sides.

Much can be said for both sides.

If my hand has made another's job easier.
It sensed the guidance that it doesn't assert.
So let all perish whose hearts have never learned to feel warmth. For the good of others, or to dissolve for others' suffering.

None shall rule but the humble.

No one shall rule but the humble.

Some inflected.

It will be noticed that some of these are inflected for case and number; such as one other, another.

It will be noticed that some of these change form for case and number; such as one other, another.

The word one has a reflexive form; for example,—

The word one has a reflexive form; for example,—

One reflexive.

The best way to punish oneself for doing ill seems to me to go and do good.—Kingsley.

The best way to punish yourself for doing something wrong, in my opinion, is to go and do something good.—Kingsley.

The lines sound so prettily to one's self.—Holmes.

The lines sound so beautifully to yourself.—Holmes.

Exercise.—Find sentences containing ten numeral pronouns.

Exercise.—Find sentences containing ten numeral pronouns.

INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.

Definition and examples.

136. Indefinite pronouns are words which stand for an indefinite number or quantity of persons or things; but, unlike adjective pronouns, they are never used as adjectives.

136. Indefinite pronouns are words that represent an unclear number or amount of people or things; however, unlike adjective pronouns, they are never used as adjectives.

Most of them are compounds of two or more words:—

Most of them are made up of two or more words:—

List.

Somebody, some one, something; anybody, any one (or anyone), anything; everybody, every one (or everyone), everything; nobody, no one, nothing; somebody else, anyone else, everybody else, every one else, etc.; also aught, naught; and somewhat, what, and they.

Somebody, someone, something; anybody, anyone, anything; everybody, everyone, everything; nobody, no one, nothing; somebody else, anyone else, everybody else, everyone else, etc.; also aught, naught; and somewhat, what, and they.

The following sentences contain indefinite pronouns:—

The following sentences contain indefinite pronouns:—

As he had them of all hues, he hoped to fit everybody's fancy.

As he had them in all colors, he hoped to match everyone's taste.

Every one knows how laborious the usual method is of attaining to arts and sciences.

Everyone knows how hard the usual way is to gain knowledge in the arts and sciences.

Nothing sheds more honor on our early history than the impression which these measures everywhere produced in America.

Nothing brings more respect to our early history than the impact these measures had across America.

Let us also perform something worthy to be remembered.

Let’s also do something memorable.

William of Orange was more than anything else a religious man.

William of Orange was more than anything else a religious person.

Frederick was discerned to be a purchaser of everything that nobody else would buy.

Frederick was known to be someone who bought everything that nobody else wanted.

These other souls draw me as nothing else can.

These other souls attract me like nothing else can.

The genius that created it now creates somewhat else.

The genius who made it is now creating something different.

Every one else stood still at his post.

Everyone else stood still at their post.

That is perfectly true: I did not want anybody else's authority to write as I did.

That’s completely true: I didn't want anyone else’s authority to write the way I did.

They indefinite means people in general; as,—

They is an indefinite term that refers to people in general; as,—

At lovers' perjuries, they say, Jove laughs.—Shakespeare.

At lovers' lies, they say, Jove laughs.—Shakespeare.

What indefinite is used in the expression "I tell you what." It means something, and was indefinite in Old English.

What indefinite is used in the expression "I tell you what." It means something, and was indefinite in Old English.

Now, when it comes to making chairs, I’ll tell you what,
There's always a weakest spot somewhere.

Exercise.—Find sentences with six indefinite pronouns.

Exercise.—Find sentences that contain six indefinite pronouns.

137. Some indefinite pronouns are inflected for case, as shown in the words everybody's, anybody else's, etc.

137. Some indefinite pronouns change form based on case, as seen in the words everybody's, anybody else's, etc.

See also "Syntax" (Sec. 426) as to the possessive case of the forms with else.

See also "Syntax" (Sec. 426) regarding the possessive case of the forms with else.

HOW TO PARSE PRONOUNS.

A reminder.

138. In parsing pronouns the student will need particularly to guard against the mistake of parsing words according to form instead of according to function or use.

138. In analyzing pronouns, the student should be especially careful not to make the mistake of interpreting words based on their form instead of their function or usage.

Exercise.

Parse in full the pronouns in the following sentences:—

Parse in full the pronouns in the following sentences:—

1. She could not help laughing at the vile English into which they were translated.

1. She couldn't help but laugh at the terrible English they were translated into.

2. Our readers probably remember what Mrs. Hutchinson tells us of herself.

2. Our readers probably remember what Mrs. Hutchinson shares about herself.

3. Whoever deals with M. de Witt must go the plain way that he pretends to, in his negotiations.

3. Anyone who deals with M. de Witt must take the straightforward approach that he claims to use in his negotiations.

4. Some of them from whom nothing was to be got, were suffered to depart; but those from whom it was thought that anything could be extorted were treated with execrable cruelty.

4. Some of them, from whom nothing could be gained, were allowed to leave; but those believed to have something that could be forced out of them were treated with horrible cruelty.

5. All was now ready for action.

5. Everything was now ready to go.

6. Scarcely had the mutiny broken up when he was himself again.

6. As soon as the mutiny ended, he was back to being himself again.

7. He came back determined to put everything to the hazard.

7. He returned ready to risk it all.

8. Nothing is more clear than that a general ought to be the servant of his government, and of no other.

8. Nothing is clearer than that a general should be the servant of their government, and no one else.

9. Others did the same thing, but not to quite so enormous an extent.

9. Others did the same thing, but not to such a large extent.

10. On reaching the approach to this about sunset of a beautiful evening in June, I first found myself among the mountains,—a feature of natural scenery for which, from my earliest days, it was not extravagant to say that I hungered and thirsted.

10. As I arrived at the foothills around sunset on a beautiful June evening, I found myself among the mountains—a part of nature I had longed for since my earliest days.

11. I speak of that part which chiefly it is that I know.

11. I’m talking about the part that I know best.

12. A smaller sum I had given to my friend the attorney (who was connected with the money lenders as their lawyer), to which, indeed, he was entitled for his unfurnished lodgings.

12. I had given a smaller amount to my friend the attorney (who was working with the money lenders as their lawyer), which he was indeed owed for his empty lodgings.

13. Whatever power the law gave them would be enforced against me to the utmost.

13. Any authority the law gave them would be used against me to the fullest extent.

14. O thou that rollest above, round as the shield of my fathers!

14. O you who roll above, round like my fathers' shield!

15. But there are more than you ever heard of who die of grief in this island of ours.

15. But there are many more than you realize who die of grief on this island of ours.

16. But amongst themselves is no voice nor sound.

16. But among themselves, there is no voice or sound.

17. For this did God send her a great reward.

17. Because of this, God gave her a huge reward.

18. The table was good; but that was exactly what Kate cared little about.

18. The table was nice; but that was exactly what Kate didn't care much about.

19. Who and what was Milton? That is to say, what is the place which he fills in his own vernacular literature?

19. Who was Milton and what did he represent? In other words, what role does he play in his own English literature?

20. These hopes are mine as much as theirs.

20. These hopes belong to me just as much as they do to them.

21. What else am I who laughed or wept yesterday, who slept last night like a corpse?

21. What else am I, who laughed or cried yesterday, who slept last night like a dead person?

22. I who alone am, I who see nothing in nature whose existence I can affirm with equal evidence to my own, behold now the semblance of my being, in all its height, variety, and curiosity reiterated in a foreign form.

22. I, who exist alone, I, who see nothing in nature that I can confirm with the same certainty as my own existence, now observe the reflection of my being, displayed in all its height, diversity, and intrigue, repeated in a different form.

23.

23.

What hand wouldn’t gather a garland? For you who are so beautiful?

24.

24.

And I had done a really terrible thing,
And it would work for them woe.

25. Whatever he knows and thinks, whatever in his apprehension is worth doing, that let him communicate.

25. Whatever he knows and thinks, whatever he believes is worth doing, he should share.

26. Rip Van Winkle was one of those foolish, well-oiled dispositions, who take the world easy, eat white bread or brown, whichever can be got with least thought or trouble.

26. Rip Van Winkle was one of those carefree, easygoing people who take life as it comes, eating white bread or brown, whichever is easiest to get without much thought or effort.

27.

27.

And will your mother feel sorry for me,
Who am I, a maiden so sad?

28.

28.

They don't know that I knew you,
Who knew you too well.

29.

29.

I reminded you of our beloved Lake,
By the old Hall that may no longer belong to me.

30.

30.

He sat down, grabbed a pen, and traced
Words that I couldn't guess of.

31.

31.

Time leaves no mark on your blue brow:
Just as the dawn of creation saw, you now roll.

32.

32.

Wild Spirit, you who are present everywhere;
Destroyer and preserver; listen, oh, listen!

33. A smile of hers was like an act of grace.

33. Her smile was like an act of kindness.

34. No man can learn what he has not preparation for learning.

34. No one can learn what they aren’t prepared to learn.

35. What can we see or acquire but what we are?

35. What can we see or gain that isn't part of who we are?

36. He teaches who gives, and he learns who receives.

36. The one who gives teaches, and the one who receives learns.

37. We are by nature observers; that is our permanent state.

37. We are naturally observers; that's our constant state.

38. He knew not what to do, and so he read.

38. He didn't know what to do, so he read.

39. Who hears me, who understands me, becomes mine.

39. Whoever hears me and understands me becomes mine.

40. The men who carry their points do not need to inquire of their constituents what they should say.

40. The men who stand their ground don't need to ask their constituents what to say.

41. Higher natures overpower lower ones by affecting them with a certain sleep.

41. Higher beings dominate lower ones by putting them into a certain kind of trance.

42. Those who live to the future must always appear selfish to those who live to the present.

42. People who focus on the future will always seem selfish to those who are focused on the present.

43. I am sorry when my independence is invaded or when a gift comes from such as do not know my spirit.

43. I feel upset when my independence is violated or when a gift comes from people who don’t understand me.

44. Here I began to howl and scream abominably, which was no bad step towards my liberation.

44. This is when I started to howl and scream horribly, which was actually a good move toward my freedom.

45. The only aim of the war is to see which is the stronger of the two—which is the master.

45. The sole purpose of the war is to determine which side is stronger—who will be the master.


ADJECTIVES.

Office of Adjectives.

139. Nouns are seldom used as names of objects without additional words joined to them to add to their meaning. For example, if we wish to speak of a friend's house, we cannot guide one to it by merely calling it a house. We need to add some words to tell its color, size, position, etc., if we are at a distance; and if we are near, we need some word to point out the house we speak of, so that no other will be mistaken for it. So with any object, or with persons.

139. Nouns are rarely used as names for objects without additional words that provide more context. For example, if we want to refer to a friend's house, we can't just call it a house. We need to include details like its color, size, or location if we’re far away; and if we’re close by, we need a word to specify which house we mean, so there's no confusion with another. This applies to any object or person as well.

As to the kind of words used, we may begin with the common adjectives telling the characteristics of an object. If a chemist discovers a new substance, he cannot describe it to others without telling its qualities: he will say it is solid, or liquid, or gaseous; heavy or light; brittle or tough; white or red; etc.

As for the type of words used, we can start with the common adjectives that describe the characteristics of an object. When a chemist finds a new substance, they can't explain it to others without mentioning its qualities: they will say it's solid, or liquid, or gaseous; heavy or light; brittle or tough; white or red; etc.

Again, in pointing out an object, adjectives are used; such as in the expressions "this man," "that house," "yonder hill," etc.

Again, when pointing out an object, adjectives are used; such as in the phrases "this man," "that house," "over there hill," etc.

Instead of using nouns indefinitely, the number is limited by adjectives; as, "one hat," "some cities," "a hundred men."

Instead of using nouns endlessly, the number is restricted by adjectives; like, "one hat," "some cities," "a hundred men."

The office of an adjective, then, is to narrow down or limit the application of a noun. It may have this office alone, or it may at the same time add to the meaning of the noun.

The role of an adjective is to specify or restrict the meaning of a noun. It can do this on its own, or it can also enhance the meaning of the noun at the same time.

Substantives.

140. Nouns are not, however, the only words limited by adjectives: pronouns and other words and expressions also have adjectives joined to them. Any word or word group that performs the same office as a noun may be modified by adjectives.

140. Nouns aren't the only words that adjectives can limit: pronouns and other words and phrases can also have adjectives attached to them. Any word or group of words that acts like a noun can be modified by adjectives.

To make this clear, notice the following sentences:—

To clarify, take a look at the following sentences:—

Pronoun.

If he be thankful for small benefits, it shows that he weighs men's minds, and their trash.—Bacon.

If he is thankful for small benefits, it shows that he considers people's thoughts and their nonsense.—Bacon.

Infinitives.

To err is human; to forgive, divine.—Pope.

To err is human; to forgive is divine. —Pope.

With exception of the "and then," the "and there," and the still less significant "and so," they constitute all his connections.—Coleridge.

With the exception of "and then," "and there," and the even less significant "and so," these make up all his connections.—Coleridge.

Definition.

141. An adjective is a word joined to a noun or other substantive word or expression, to describe it or to limit its application.

141. An adjective is a word that connects to a noun or other meaningful word or phrase to describe it or to limit its meaning.

Classes of adjectives.

142. Adjectives are divided into four classes:—

142. Adjectives are divided into four categories:—

(1) Descriptive adjectives, which describe by expressing qualities or attributes of a substantive.

(1) Descriptive adjectives describe by expressing the qualities or attributes of a noun.

(2) Adjectives of quantity, used to tell how many things are spoken of, or how much of a thing.

(2) Adjectives of quantity, used to indicate how many things are being referred to, or how much of something there is.

(3) Demonstrative adjectives, pointing out particular things.

(3) Demonstrative adjectives, showing specific items.

(4) Pronominal adjectives, words primarily pronouns, but used adjectively sometimes in modifying nouns instead of standing for them. They include relative and interrogative words.

(4) Pronominal adjectives, words that are primarily pronouns but can also be used as adjectives to modify nouns instead of replacing them. They include relative and interrogative words.

DESCRIPTIVE ADJECTIVES.

143. This large class includes several kinds of words:—

143. This large category includes several types of words:—

(1) SIMPLE ADJECTIVES expressing quality; such as safe, happy, deep, fair, rash, beautiful, remotest, terrible, etc.

(1) SIMPLE ADJECTIVES expressing quality; like safe, happy, deep, fair, rash, beautiful, remotest, terrible, etc.

(2) COMPOUND ADJECTIVES, made up of various words thrown together to make descriptive epithets. Examples are, "Heaven-derived power," "this life-giving book," "his spirit wrapt and wonder-struck," "ice-cold water," "half-dead traveler," "unlooked-for burden," "next-door neighbor," "ivory-handled pistols," "the cold-shudder-inspiring Woman in White."

(2) COMPOUND ADJECTIVES, created by combining different words to form descriptive phrases. Examples are, "Heaven-derived power," "this life-giving book," "his spirit wrapped and wonder-struck," "ice-cold water," "half-dead traveler," "unlooked-for burden," "next-door neighbor," "ivory-handled pistols," "the cold-shudder-inspiring Woman in White."

(3) PROPER ADJECTIVES, derived from proper nouns; such as, "an old English manuscript," "the Christian pearl of charity," "the well-curb had a Chinese roof," "the Roman writer Palladius."

(3) PROPER ADJECTIVES, derived from proper nouns; such as, "an old English manuscript," "the Christian pearl of charity," "the well-curb had a Chinese roof," "the Roman writer Palladius."

(4) PARTICIPIAL ADJECTIVES, which are either pure participles used to describe, or participles which have lost all verbal force and have no function except to express quality. Examples are,—

(4) PARTICIPIAL ADJECTIVES, which are either pure participles used for description, or participles that have lost all verbal power and only serve to express quality. Examples include,—

Pure participial adjectives: "The healing power of the Messiah," "The shattering sway of one strong arm," "trailing clouds," "The shattered squares have opened into line," "It came on like the rolling simoom," "God tempers the wind to the shorn lamb."

Pure participial adjectives: "The healing power of the Messiah," "The shattering strength of one strong arm," "Trailing clouds," "The shattered squares have lined up," "It came on like the rolling sandstorm," "God adjusts the wind for the shorn lamb."

Faded participial adjectives: "Sleep is a blessed thing;" "One is hungry, and another is drunken;" "under the fitting drapery of the jagged and trailing clouds;" "The clearness and quickness are amazing;" "an aged man;" "a charming sight."

Faded participial adjectives: "Sleep is a blessed thing;" "One is hungry, and another is drunk;" "under the fitting drapery of the jagged and trailing clouds;" "The clarity and quickness are amazing;" "an elderly man;" "a charming sight."

Caution.

144. Care is needed, in studying these last-named words, to distinguish between a participle that forms part of a verb, and a participle or participial adjective that belongs to a noun.

144. When studying these last-mentioned words, it's important to differentiate between a participle that is part of a verb and a participle or participial adjective that belongs to a noun.

For instance: in the sentence, "The work was well and rapidly accomplished," was accomplished is a verb; in this, "No man of his day was more brilliant or more accomplished," was is the verb, and accomplished is an adjective.

For example: in the sentence, "The work was well and quickly done," was done is a verb; in this, "No man of his time was more brilliant or more accomplished," was is the verb, and accomplished is an adjective.

Exercises.

1. Bring up sentences with twenty descriptive adjectives, having some of each subclass named in Sec. 143.

1. Come up with sentences that use twenty descriptive adjectives, including some from each subclass mentioned in Sec. 143.

2. Is the italicized word an adjective in this?—

2. Is the italicized word an adjective in this?—

The old sources of intellectual excitement seem to be well-nigh exhausted.

The old sources of intellectual excitement seem to be almost used up.

ADJECTIVES OF QUANTITY.

145. Adjectives of quantity tell how much or how many. They have these three subdivisions:—

145. Adjectives of quantity indicate how much or how many. They are divided into three categories:—

How much.

(1) QUANTITY IN BULK: such words as little, much, some, no, any, considerable, sometimes small, joined usually to singular nouns to express an indefinite measure of the thing spoken of.

(1) QUANTITY IN BULK: words like little, much, some, no, any, and considerable, and sometimes small, are typically used with singular nouns to indicate an undefined amount of the thing being discussed.

The following examples are from Kingsley:—

The following examples are from Kingsley:—

So he said goodbye with a lot of the lady's tears.
We started this with a lot of effort and only a little reward.
Because I had some knowledge of surgery and bloodletting.
But whenever she looked at Mr. Oxenham, it seemed like she took no care as long as he was around.

Examples of small an adjective of quantity:—

Examples of small as a quantity adjective:—

"The deil's in it but I bude to anger him!" said the woman, and walked away with a laugh of small satisfaction.—Macdonald.

"The devil's in it, but I had to make him mad!" said the woman, and walked away with a laugh of small satisfaction.—MacDonald.

'Tis midnight, but small thoughts have I of sleep.—Coleridge.

It's midnight, but I have very little hope of sleep. —Coleridge.

It gives small idea of Coleridge's way of talking.—Carlyle.

It gives small idea of Coleridge's way of talking.—Carlyle.

When some, any, no, are used with plural nouns, they come under the next division of adjectives.

When some, any, no are used with plural nouns, they fall into the next category of adjectives.

How many.

(2) QUANTITY IN NUMBER, which may be expressed exactly by numbers or remotely designated by words expressing indefinite amounts. Hence the natural division into—

(2) QUANTITY IN NUMBER, which can be expressed precisely by numbers or referred to vaguely by words that indicate indefinite amounts. Therefore, it naturally divides into—

(a) Definite numerals; as, "one blaze of musketry;" "He found in the pathway fourteen Spaniards;" "I have lost one brother, but I have gained fourscore;" "a dozen volunteers."

(a) Definite numerals; as, "one blast of gunfire;" "He found fourteen Spaniards in the path;" "I have lost one brother, but I have gained eighty;" "a dozen volunteers."

(b) Indefinite numerals, as the following from Kingsley: "We gave several thousand pounds for it;" "In came some five and twenty more, and with them a few negroes;" "Then we wandered for many days;" "Amyas had evidently more schemes in his head;" "He had lived by hunting for some months;" "That light is far too red to be the reflection of any beams of hers."

(b) Indefinite numerals, as shown in the following from Kingsley: "We gave several thousand pounds for it;" "In came some twenty-five more, and with them a few blacks;" "Then we wandered for many days;" "Amyas clearly had more plans in his head;" "He had lived by hunting for some months;" "That light is way too red to be the reflection of any of her beams."

Single ones of any number of changes.

(3) DISTRIBUTIVE NUMERALS, which occupy a place midway between the last two subdivisions of numeral adjectives; for they are indefinite in telling how many objects are spoken of, but definite in referring to the objects one at a time. Thus,—

(3) DISTRIBUTIVE NUMERALS, which sit between the last two categories of numeral adjectives; they are unclear about how many items are being discussed, but they are specific in talking about the items one at a time. So,—

Every town had its fair; every village, its wake.—Thackeray.

Every town had its fair; every village, its celebration.—Thackeray.

An arrow was quivering in each body.—Kingsley.

An arrow was quivering in each body. —Kingsley.

Few on either side but had their shrewd scratch to show.—Id.

Few on either side didn't have their clever mark to show.—Same.

Before I learned to use my words to hurt My conscience with a guilty sound,
Or did they have the dark skill to dispense
A few sins to everyone sense.
—Vaughan.

Exercise.—Bring up sentences with ten adjectives of quantity.

Exercise.—Create sentences using ten adjectives of quantity.

DEMONSTRATIVE ADJECTIVES.

Not primarily pronouns.

146. The words of this list are placed here instead of among pronominal adjectives, for the reason that they are felt to be primarily adjectives; their pronominal use being evidently a shortening, by which the words point out but stand for words omitted, instead of modifying them. Their natural and original use is to be joined to a noun following or in close connection.

146. The words in this list are placed here instead of with pronouns because they're primarily seen as adjectives. Their use as pronouns is clearly a simplification, where the words indicate but stand in for omitted words rather than modifying them. Their natural and original function is to be connected to a noun that follows or is closely related.

The list.

The demonstrative adjectives are this, that, (plural these, those), yonder (or yon), former, latter; also the pairs one (or the one)—the other, the formerthe latter, used to refer to two things which have been already named in a sentence.

The demonstrative adjectives are this, that, (plural these, those), yonder (or yon), former, latter; also the pairs one (or the one)—the other, the formerthe latter, used to refer to two things that have already been mentioned in a sentence.

Examples.

The following sentences present some examples:—

The following sentences provide a few examples:—

The bashful virgin's sidelong looks of love, The matron's glance that would those looks reprove.—Goldsmith.

The shy virgin's sideways glances of affection, The matron's look that would disapprove of those glances.—Goldsmith.

These were thy charms...but all these charms are fled.—Id.

These were your charms...but all these charms are gone.—Id.

About this time I met with an odd volume of the "Spectator."—B. Franklin.

About this time I came across a strange copy of the "Spectator."—Ben Franklin.

Yonder proud ships are not means of annoyance to you.—D. Webster.

Those proud ships aren't a source of annoyance to you.—D. Webster.

Yon cloud with that long purple cleft.—Wordsworth.

That cloud with the long purple split.

I chose for the students of Kensington two characteristic examples of early art, of equal skill; but in the one case, skill which was progressive—in the other, skill which was at pause.—Ruskin.

I selected two standout examples of early art for the students of Kensington, both equally skilled; however, in one instance, the skill was advancing—in the other, the skill was stagnant.—Ruskin.

Exercise.—Find sentences with five demonstrative adjectives.

Exercise.—Find sentences that contain five demonstrative adjectives.

Ordinal numerals classed under demonstratives.

147. The class of numerals known as ordinals must be placed here, as having the same function as demonstrative adjectives. They point out which thing is meant among a series of things mentioned. The following are examples:—

147. The group of numbers called ordinals should be included here since they serve the same purpose as demonstrative adjectives. They indicate which item is being referenced among a group of items mentioned. Here are some examples:—

The first regular provincial newspapers appear to have been created in the last decade of the seventeenth century, and by the middle of the eighteenth century almost every important provincial town had its local organ.—Bancroft.

The first regular provincial newspapers seem to have been established in the last decade of the seventeenth century, and by the middle of the eighteenth century, nearly every significant provincial town had its local publication.—Bancroft.

These do not, like the other numerals, tell how many things are meant. When we speak of the seventeenth century, we imply nothing as to how many centuries there may be.

These don’t, like the other numbers, indicate how many things are involved. When we refer to the seventeenth century, we don’t imply anything about how many centuries there could be.

PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES.

Definition.

148. As has been said, pronominal adjectives are primarily pronouns; but, when they modify words instead of referring to them as antecedents, they are changed to adjectives. They are of two kinds,—RELATIVE and INTERROGATIVE,—and are used to join sentences or to ask questions, just as the corresponding pronouns do.

148. As mentioned before, pronominal adjectives are mainly pronouns; however, when they modify words instead of referring to them as antecedents, they shift to adjectives. There are two types—RELATIVE and INTERROGATIVE—and they are used to connect sentences or to ask questions, just like the corresponding pronouns do.

Modify names of persons or things.

149. The RELATIVE ADJECTIVES are which and what; for example,—

149. The RELATIVE ADJECTIVES are which and what; for example,—

It matters not what rank he has, what revenues or garnitures. —Carlyle.

It doesn’t matter what rank he holds, what income or possessions he has. —Carlyle.

The silver and laughing Xenil, careless what lord should possess the banks that bloomed by its everlasting course.—Bulwer.

The bright, cheerful Xenil didn’t care who owned the banks that flourished along its timeless flow. —Bulwer.

The taking of which bark. I verily believe, was the ruin of every mother's son of us.—Kingsley.

The taking of which bark. I honestly believe, was the downfall of every single one of us.—Kingsley.

In which evil strait Mr. Oxenham fought desperately.—Id.

In which difficult situation Mr. Oxenham fought desperately.—Id.

Indefinite relative adjectives.

150. The INDEFINITE RELATIVE adjectives are what, whatever, whatsoever, whichever, whichsoever. Examples of their use are,—

150. The INDEFINITE RELATIVE adjectives are what, whatever, whatsoever, whichever, whichsoever. Examples of their use are,—

He in his turn tasted some of its flavor, which, make what sour mouths he would for pretense, proved not altogether displeasing to him.—Lamb.

He, in his turn, tried some of its flavor, which, no matter how much he pretended to make a sour face, turned out not to be entirely unpleasant for him.—Lamb.

Whatever correction of our popular views from insight, nature will be sure to bear us out in.—Emerson.

Any adjustment of our common beliefs based on understanding, nature will definitely support us in.—Emerson.

Whatsoever kind of man he is, you at least give him full authority over your son.—Ruskin.

Whatever kind of man he is, you should at least give him full authority over your son.—Ruskin.

Was there, as it rather seemed, a circle of ominous shadow moving along with his deformity, whichever way he turned himself?—Hawthorne.

Was there, as it seemed, a circle of dark shadow following his deformity, no matter how he turned? —Hawthorne.

I see new sufferings and new people suffering. Around me, whichever way I move,
And whichever way I turn, and gaze.
—Longfellow (From Dante).

151. The INTERROGATIVE ADJECTIVES are which and what. They may be used in direct and indirect questions. As in the pronouns, which is selective among what is known; what inquires about things or persons not known.

151. The INTERROGATIVE ADJECTIVES are which and what. They can be used in both direct and indirect questions. Similar to the pronouns, which is used to choose from what is known; what asks about things or people that are unknown.

In direct questions.

Sentences with which and what in direct questions:—

Sentences with which and what in direct questions:—

Which debt must I pay first, the debt to the rich, or the debt to the poor?—Emerson.

Which debt should I pay first, the one to the rich, or the one to the poor?—Emerson.

But when the Trojan war comes, which side will you take? —Thackeray.

But when the Trojan war starts, which side will you choose? —Thackeray.

But what books in the circulating library circulate?—Lowell.

But what books in the circulating library circulate?—Lowell.

Which inviting ghost in the moonlit shadows
Guides my steps and indicates that clearing over there?
—Pope.
In indirect questions.

Sentences with which and what in indirect questions:—

Sentences with which and what in indirect questions:—

His head...looked like a weathercock perched upon his spindle neck to tell which way the wind blew.—Irving.

His head...looked like a weather vane perched on his thin neck to indicate which way the wind was blowing.—Irving.

A lady once remarked, he [Coleridge] could never fix which side of the garden walk would suit him best.—Carlyle.

A lady once said he [Coleridge] could never decide which side of the garden path would be best for him.—Carlyle.

He was turned before long into all the universe, where it was uncertain what game you would catch, or whether any.—Id.

He soon found himself in the entire universe, where it was unclear what game you might catch, or if you'd catch any at all.—Id.

At what rate these materials would be distributed and precipitated in regular strata, it is impossible to determine.—Agassiz.

At what rate these materials would be distributed and precipitated in regular layers is impossible to determine.—Agassiz.

Adjective what in exclamations.

152. In exclamatory expressions, what (or what a) has a force somewhat like a descriptive adjective. It is neither relative nor interrogative, but might be called an EXCLAMATORY ADJECTIVE; as,—

152. In exclamatory expressions, what (or what a) acts a bit like a descriptive adjective. It's neither relative nor interrogative, but can be referred to as an EXCLAMATORY ADJECTIVE; as,—

Oh, what a revolution! and what a heart must I have, to contemplate without emotion that elevation and that fall!—Burke.

Oh, what a revolution! and what a heart must I have, to contemplate without emotion that elevation and that fall!—Burke.

What a piece of work is man!—Shakespeare.

What an amazing piece of work is man!—Shakespeare.

And yet, alas, the making of it right, what a business for long time to come!—Carlyle

And yet, unfortunately, fixing it is going to be quite a task for a long time!—Carlyle

Through what hardships it may attain to bear a sweet fruit!—Thoreau.

Through what hardships it may endure to bear a sweet fruit!—Thoreau.

Exercise.—Find ten sentences containing pronominal adjectives.

Exercise.—Find ten sentences that include pronominal adjectives.

INFLECTIONS OF ADJECTIVES.

153 .Adjectives have two inflections,—number and comparison.

153. Adjectives have two forms: number and comparison.

NUMBER.—This, That.

NUMBER.—This, That.

History of this—these and that—those.

154. The only adjectives having a plural form are this and that (plural these, those).

154. The only adjectives that have a plural form are this and that (plural these, those).

This is the old demonstrative; that being borrowed from the forms of the definite article, which was fully inflected in Old English. The article that was used with neuter nouns.

This is the old demonstrative; that is borrowed from the forms of the definite article, which was fully inflected in Old English. The article that was used with neuter nouns.

In Middle English the plural of this was this or thise, which changed its spelling to the modern form these.

In Middle English, the plural of this was this or thise, which changed its spelling to the modern form these.

Those borrowed from this.

But this had also another plural, thās (modern those). The old plural of that was tha (Middle English tho or thow): consequently tho (plural of that) and those (plural of this) became confused, and it was forgotten that those was really the plural of this; and in Modern English we speak of these as the plural of this, and those as the plural of that.

But this also had another plural, thās (modern those). The old plural of that was tha (Middle English tho or thow): as a result, tho (plural of that) and those (plural of this) became mixed up, and it was overlooked that those was actually the plural of this; in Modern English, we refer to these as the plural of this, and those as the plural of that.

COMPARISON.

155. Comparison is an inflection not possessed by nouns and pronouns: it belongs to adjectives and adverbs.

155. Comparison is a feature that nouns and pronouns don't have; it belongs to adjectives and adverbs.

Meaning of comparison.

When we place two objects side by side, we notice some differences between them as to size, weight, color, etc. Thus, it is said that a cow is larger than a sheep, gold is heavier than iron, a sapphire is bluer than the sky. All these have certain qualities; and when we compare the objects, we do so by means of their qualities,—cow and sheep by the quality of largeness, or size; gold and iron by the quality of heaviness, or weight, etc.,—but not the same degree, or amount, of the quality.

When we put two objects next to each other, we notice some differences in size, weight, color, and so on. For example, a cow is larger than a sheep, gold is heavier than iron, and a sapphire is bluer than the sky. Each of these has specific qualities, and when we compare the objects, we do it based on their qualities—comparing cow and sheep by size, gold and iron by weight, etc.—but not by the same degree or amount of the quality.

The degrees belong to any beings or ideas that may be known or conceived of as possessing quality; as, "untamed thought, great, giant-like, enormous;" "the commonest speech;" "It is a nobler valor;" "the largest soul."

The degrees refer to any beings or ideas that can be recognized or imagined as having qualities; for example, "wild thoughts, impressive, giant-like, vast;" "the most ordinary speech;" "It is a greater courage;" "the biggest soul."

Also words of quantity may be compared: for example, "more matter, with less wit;" "no fewer than a hundred."

Also, words that express quantity can be compared: for example, "more substance, with less wit;" "no less than a hundred."

Words that cannot be compared.

156. There are some descriptive words whose meaning is such as not to admit of comparison; for example,—

156. There are some descriptive words whose meaning is so unique that they cannot be compared; for example,—

His company became very agreeable to the brave old professor of arms, whose favorite pupil he was.—Thackeray.

His company was very pleasing to the courageous old professor of arms, who was his favorite student.—Thackeray.

A main difference betwixt men is, whether they attend their own affair or not.—Emerson

A main difference between men is whether they take care of their own business or not.—Emerson

It was his business to administer the law in its final and closest application to the offender—Hawthorne.

It was his responsibility to enforce the law in its final and most direct application to the offender—Hawthorne.

Freedom is a perpetual, organic, universal institution, in harmony with the Constitution of the United States.—Seward.

Freedom is a continuous, natural, universal institution, in line with the Constitution of the United States.—Seward.

So with the words sole, sufficient, infinite, immemorial, indefatigable, indomitable, supreme, and many others.

So with the words sole, sufficient, infinite, immemorial, indefatigable, indomitable, supreme, and many others.

It is true that words of comparison are sometimes prefixed to them, but, strictly considered, they are not compared.

It’s true that comparison words are sometimes added to them, but if you look at it closely, they aren’t actually being compared.

Definition.

157. Comparison means the changes that words undergo to express degrees in quality, or amounts in quantity.

157. Comparison refers to the modifications that words experience to indicate varying levels of quality or different quantities.

The two forms.

158. There are two forms for this inflection: the comparative, expressing a greater degree of quality; and the superlative, expressing the greatest degree of quality.

158. There are two forms for this inflection: the comparative, which shows a higher degree of quality; and the superlative, which shows the highest degree of quality.

These are called degrees of comparison.

These are called comparison degrees.

These are properly the only degrees, though the simple, uninflected form is usually called the positive degree.

These are basically the only degrees, although the simple, uninflected form is typically referred to as the positive degree.

159. The comparative is formed by adding -er, and the superlative by adding -est, to the simple form; as, red, redder, reddest; blue, bluer, bluest; easy, easier, easiest.

159. The comparative form is created by adding -er, and the superlative form by adding -est, to the basic form; for example, red, redder, reddest; blue, bluer, bluest; easy, easier, easiest.

Substitute for inflection in comparison.

160. Side by side with these inflected forms are found comparative and superlative expressions making use of the adverbs more and most. These are often useful as alternative with the inflected forms, but in most cases are used before adjectives that are never inflected.

160. Alongside these inflected forms, we also see comparative and superlative expressions that use the adverbs more and most. These can often serve as alternatives to the inflected forms, but more often they are used before adjectives that aren’t inflected.

They came into use about the thirteenth century, but were not common until a century later.

They started being used around the thirteenth century, but weren't common until a hundred years later.

Which rule,— -er and -est or more and most?

161. The English is somewhat capricious in choosing between the inflected forms and those with more and most, so that no inflexible rule can be given as to the formation of the comparative and the superlative.

161. English is a bit unpredictable when it comes to choosing between inflected forms and those using more and most, so there’s no strict rule for forming the comparative and superlative.

The general rule is, that monosyllables and easily pronounced words of two syllables add -er and -est; and other words are preceded by more and most.

The general rule is that one-syllable words and easily pronounced two-syllable words add -er and -est; while other words use more and most.

But room must be left in such a rule for pleasantness of sound and for variety of expression.

But there should be some flexibility in such a rule for the sake of a pleasing sound and for variety in how things are expressed.

To see how literary English overrides any rule that could be given, examine the following taken at random:—

To see how literary English goes beyond any rules that could be established, take a look at the following example chosen at random:—

From Thackeray: "The handsomest wives;" "the immensest quantity of thrashing;" "the wonderfulest little shoes;" "more odd, strange, and yet familiar;" "more austere and holy."

From Thackeray: "The most beautiful wives;" "the largest amount of thrashing;" "the most amazing little shoes;" "odder, stranger, and yet familiar;" "more serious and sacred."

From Ruskin: "The sharpest, finest chiseling, and patientest fusing;" "distantest relationships;" "sorrowfulest spectacles."

From Ruskin: "The sharpest, finest chiseling, and most patient fusing;" "most distant relationships;" "most sorrowful spectacles."

Carlyle uses beautifulest, mournfulest, honestest, admirablest, indisputablest, peaceablest, most small, etc.

Carlyle uses most beautiful, most mournful, most honest, most admirable, most indisputable, most peaceful, smallest, etc.

These long, harsh forms are usually avoided, but more and most are frequently used with monosyllables.

These long, harsh forms are usually avoided, but more and most are often used with one-syllable words.

162. Expressions are often met with in which a superlative form does not carry the superlative meaning. These are equivalent usually to very with the positive degree; as,—

162. Expressions are often found where a superlative form doesn’t actually hold the superlative meaning. These usually equate to very in its positive form; for example,—

To this the Count offers a most wordy declaration of the benefits conferred by Spain.—The Nation, No 1507

To this, the Count gives a very lengthy statement about the advantages provided by Spain.—The Nation, No 1507

In all formulas that Johnson could stand by, there needed to be a most genuine substance.—Carlyle

In all the formulas that Johnson believed in, there had to be a most genuine substance.—Carlyle

A gentleman, who, though born in no very high degree, was most finished, polished, witty, easy, quiet.—Thackeray

A gentleman, who, although not born into a high status, was most refined, polished, witty, graceful, calm.—Thackeray

He had actually nothing else save a rope around his neck, which hung behind in the queerest way.—Id.

He actually had nothing else except a rope around his neck, which hung down in the strangest way.—Id.

"So help me God, madam, I will," said Henry Esmond, falling on his knees, and kissing the hand of his dearest mistress.—Id.

"So help me God, ma'am, I will," said Henry Esmond, dropping to his knees and kissing the hand of his dearest mistress.—Same.

Adjectives irregularly compared.

163. Among the variously derived adjectives now in our language there are some which may always be recognized as native English. These are adjectives irregularly compared.

163. Among the various adjectives we have in our language, some can always be identified as native to English. These are the adjectives that are irregularly compared.

Most of them have worn down or become confused with similar words, but they are essentially the same forms that have lived for so many centuries.

Most of them have worn down or become confused with similar words, but they are basically the same forms that have existed for so many centuries.

The following lists include the majority of them:—

The following lists include most of them:—

LIST I.
1. Good or well Better Best
2. Evil, bad, ill Worse Worst
3. Little Less, lesser Least
4. Much or many More Most
5. Old Elder, older Eldest, oldest
6. Nigh Nigher Nighest, next
7. Near Nearer Nearest
8. Far Farther, further Farthest, furthest
9. Late Later, latter Latest, last
10. Hind Hinder Hindmost, hindermost
LIST II.
These have no adjective positive:—
1. [In] Inner Inmost, innermost
2. [Out] Outer, utter Outmost, outermost
Utmost, uttermost
3. [Up] Upper Upmost, uppermost
LIST III.
A few of comparative form but not comparative meaning:—
After Over Under Nether

Remarks on Irregular Adjectives.

List I.

164. (1) The word good has no comparative or superlative, but takes the place of a positive to better and best. There was an old comparative bet, which has gone out of use; as in the sentence (14th century), "Ich singe bet than thu dest" (I sing better than thou dost). The superlative I form was betst, which has softened to the modern best.

164. (1) The word good doesn’t have a comparative or superlative form, but it serves as the base for better and best. There used to be an old comparative, bet, that’s no longer used; for example, in the sentence from the 14th century, "Ich singe bet than thu dest" (I sing better than you do). The old superlative form was betst, which has evolved into the modern best.

(2) In Old English, evil was the positive to worse, worst; but later bad and ill were borrowed from the Norse, and used as positives to the same comparative and superlative. Worser was once used, a double comparative; as in Shakespeare,—

(2) In Old English, evil was the positive form of worse and worst; but later bad and ill were borrowed from the Norse and used as the positive forms for the same comparative and superlative. Worser was once used as a double comparative; as in Shakespeare,—

O, throw away the worser part of it.—Hamlet.

O, throw away the worse part of it.—Hamlet.

(3) Little is used as positive to less, least, though from a different root. A double comparative, lesser, is often used; as,—

(3) Little is used as positive to less, least, though from a different root. A double comparative, lesser, is often used; as,—

We have it in a much lesser degree.—Matthew Arnold.

We have it in a much smaller degree.—Matthew Arnold.

Thrust the lesser half by main force into the fists of Ho-ti. —Lamb.

Thrust the lesser half with all your strength into the fists of Ho-ti. —Lamb.

(4) The words much and many now express quantity; but in former times much was used in the sense of large, great, and was the same word that is found in the proverb, "Many a little makes a mickle." Its spelling has been micel, muchel, moche, much, the parallel form mickle being rarely used.

(4) The words much and many now indicate quantity; however, in the past, much was used to mean large or great, and it is the same word found in the saying, "Many a little makes a mickle." Its spelling has varied through micel, muchel, moche, and much, while the parallel form mickle is used infrequently.

The meanings greater, greatest, are shown in such phrases as,—

The meanings greater, greatest, are shown in phrases like,—

The more part being of one mind, to England we sailed.—Kingsley.

The more part being of one mind, we sailed to England.—Kingsley.

The most part kept a stolid indifference.—Id.

The main part stayed indifferent.—Id.

The latter, meaning the largest part, is quite common.

The latter, meaning the largest part, is pretty common.

(5) The forms elder, eldest, are earlier than older, oldest. A few other words with the vowel o had similar change in the comparative and superlative, as long, strong, etc.; but these have followed old by keeping the same vowel o in all the forms, instead of lenger, strenger, etc., the old forms.

(5) The forms elder and eldest came before older and oldest. A few other words with the vowel o underwent a similar change in the comparative and superlative, like long and strong; however, these have followed old by keeping the same vowel o in all forms, instead of lenger and strenger, which are the older forms.

(6) and (7) Both nigh and near seem regular in Modern English, except the form next; but originally the comparison was nigh, near, next. In the same way the word high had in Middle English the superlative hexte.

(6) and (7) Both nigh and near seem regular in Modern English, except for the form next; but originally the comparison was nigh, near, next. Similarly, the word high had the superlative hexte in Middle English.

By and by the comparative near was regarded as a positive form, and on it were built a double comparative nearer, and the superlative nearest, which adds -est to what is really a comparative instead of a simple adjective.

By then, the comparative near was seen as a positive form, and from it were created a double comparative nearer and the superlative nearest, which adds -est to what is actually a comparative instead of a straightforward adjective.

(8) These words also show confusion and consequent modification, coming about as follows: further really belongs to another series,—forth, further, first. First became entirely detached from the series, and furthest began to be used to follow the comparative further; then these were used as comparative and superlative of far.

(8) These words also show confusion and subsequent changes, happening like this: further actually belongs to a different series,—forth, further, first. First became completely separate from the series, and furthest started to be used as the superlative for the comparative further; then these were used as the comparative and superlative of far.

The word far had formerly the comparative and superlative farrer, farrest. In imitation of further, furthest, th came into the others, making the modern farther, farthest. Between the two sets as they now stand, there is scarcely any distinction, except perhaps further is more used than farther in the sense of additional; as, for example,—

The word far used to have the comparative and superlative forms farrer and farrest. Following the pattern of further and furthest, th became part of the others, creating the modern forms farther and farthest. Between the two sets as they now exist, there is hardly any difference, except that further is probably used more than farther when referring to something additional; for example,—

When that evil principle was left with no further material to support it.—Hawthorne.

When that wicked principle was left with no additional material to support it.—Hawthorne.

(9) Latter and last are the older forms. Since later, latest, came into use, a distinction has grown up between the two series. Later and latest have the true comparative and superlative force, and refer to time; latter and last are used in speaking of succession, or series, and are hardly thought of as connected in meaning with the word late.

(9) Latter and last are the older forms. Since later and latest came into use, a distinction has developed between the two sets. Later and latest have the true comparative and superlative meanings and refer to time; latter and last are used when talking about succession or series, and are rarely considered related in meaning to the word late.

(10) Hinder is comparative in form, but not in meaning. The form hindmost is really a double superlative, since the m is for -ma, an old superlative ending, to which is added -ost, doubling the inflection. Hind-er-m-ost presents the combination comparative + superlative + superlative.

(10) Hinder is comparative in its structure, but not in its meaning. The form hindmost is essentially a double superlative, as the m comes from -ma, an old superlative ending, to which -ost is added, creating a double inflection. Hind-er-m-ost showcases the combination of comparative + superlative + superlative.

List II.

165. In List II. (Sec. 163) the comparatives and superlatives are adjectives, but they have no adjective positives.

165. In List II. (Sec. 163) the comparatives and superlatives are adjectives, but they have no positive forms.

The comparatives are so in form, but not in their meaning.

The comparatives look similar in form, but they don't have the same meaning.

The superlatives show examples again of double inflection, and of comparative added to double-superlative inflection.

The superlatives again show examples of double inflection and of a comparative added to double-superlative inflection.

Examples (from Carlyle) of the use of these adjectives: "revealing the inner splendor to him;" "a mind that has penetrated into the inmost heart of a thing;" "This of painting is one of the outermost developments of a man;" "The outer is of the day;" "far-seeing as the sun, the upper light of the world;" "the innermost moral soul;" "their utmost exertion."

Examples (from Carlyle) of the use of these adjectives: "revealing the inner splendor to him;" "a mind that has penetrated into the inmost heart of a thing;" "This of painting is one of the outermost developments of a man;" "The outer is of the day;" "far-seeing as the sun, the upper light of the world;" "the innermost moral soul;" "their utmost exertion."

-Most added to other words.

166. The ending -most is added to some words that are not usually adjectives, or have no comparative forms.

166. The ending -most is added to some words that aren't typically adjectives or don't have comparative forms.

There, on the very topmost twig, sits that ridiculous but sweet-singing bobolink.—H. W. Beecher.

There, on the very topmost twig, sits that ridiculous but sweet-singing bobolink.—H.W. Beecher.

Decidedly handsome, having such a skin as became a young woman of family in northernmost Spain.—De Quincey.

He was definitely handsome, with a complexion that suited a young woman from a prominent family in northernmost Spain.—De Quincey.

Highest and midmost, was descried The royal banner floating wide.—Scott.

Highest and midmost, was seen The royal banner flying high.—Scott.

List III.

167. The adjectives in List III. are like the comparative forms in List II. in having no adjective positives. They have no superlatives, and have no comparative force, being merely descriptive.

167. The adjectives in List III are similar to the comparative forms in List II because they don’t have positive forms. They don’t have superlatives and lack any comparative strength, serving only to describe.

Her bows were deep in the water, but her after deck was still dry.—Kingsley.

Her bows were deep in the water, but her after deck was still dry.—Kingsley.

Her, by the by, in after years I vainly endeavored to trace.—De Quincey.

Her, by the way, in later years I tried in vain to trace.—De Quincey.

The upper and the under side of the medal of Jove.—Emerson.

The front and back of the medal of Jove.—Emerson.

Have you ever considered what a deep under meaning there lies in our custom of strewing flowers?—Ruskin.

Have you ever thought about the profound under meaning behind our tradition of scattering flowers?—Ruskin.

Perhaps he rose out of some nether region.—Hawthorne.

Perhaps he came from some underworld region.—Hawthorne.

Over is rarely used separately as an adjective.

Over is rarely used alone as an adjective.

CAUTION FOR ANALYZING OR PARSING.

Think what each adjective belongs to.

168. Some care must be taken to decide what word is modified by an adjective. In a series of adjectives in the same sentence, all may belong to the same noun, or each may modify a different word or group of words.

168. Some care must be taken to determine which word an adjective modifies. In a series of adjectives within the same sentence, they may all refer to the same noun, or each might modify a different word or group of words.

For example, in this sentence, "The young pastor's voice was tremulously sweet, rich, deep, and broken," it is clear that all four adjectives after was modify the noun voice. But in this sentence, "She showed her usual prudence and her usual incomparable decision," decision is modified by the adjective incomparable; usual modifies incomparable decision, not decision alone; and the pronoun her limits usual incomparable decision.

For instance, in this sentence, "The young pastor's voice was tremulously sweet, rich, deep, and broken," it's clear that all four adjectives after was modify the noun voice. But in this sentence, "She showed her usual prudence and her usual incomparable decision," decision is modified by the adjective incomparable; usual modifies incomparable decision, not decision alone; and the pronoun her limits usual incomparable decision.

Adjectives modifying the same noun are said to be of the same rank; those modifying different words or word groups are said to be adjectives of different rank. This distinction is valuable in a study of punctuation.

Adjectives that modify the same noun are described as being of the same rank; those that modify different words or groups of words are referred to as adjectives of different rank. This distinction is important when studying punctuation.

Exercise.

In the following quotations, tell what each adjective modifies:—

In the following quotations, identify what each adjective modifies:—

1. Whenever that look appeared in her wild, bright, deeply black eyes, it invested them with a strange remoteness and intangibility.—Hawthorne.

1. Whenever that look showed up in her wild, bright, deeply black eyes, it gave them a strange sense of distance and elusiveness.—Hawthorne.

2. It may still be argued, that in the present divided state of Christendom a college which is positively Christian must be controlled by some religious denomination.—Noah Porter.

2. It can still be argued that, in the current divided state of Christianity, a college that is explicitly Christian must be affiliated with a specific religious denomination.—Noah Porter.

3. Every quaking leaf and fluttering shadow sent the blood backward to her heart.—Mrs. Stowe.

3. Every shaking leaf and flitting shadow made her heart race.—Mrs. Stowe.

4. This, our new government, is the first in the history of the world based upon this great physical, philosophical, and moral truth.—A. H. Stephens

4. This new government of ours is the first in the world’s history to be founded on this significant physical, philosophical, and moral truth.—A. H. Stephens

5. May we not, therefore, look with confidence to the ultimate universal acknowledgment of the truths upon which our system rests?—Id.

5. Can we not, then, confidently anticipate the eventual widespread recognition of the truths that underpin our system?—Id.

6. A few improper jests and a volley of good, round, solid, satisfactory, and heaven-defying oaths.—Hawthorne.

6. A few inappropriate jokes and a barrage of strong, firm, satisfying, and utterly outrageous curses.—Hawthorne.

7. It is well known that the announcement at any private rural entertainment that there is to be ice cream produces an immediate and profound impression.—Holmes.

7. Everyone knows that when it’s announced at any private country event that there will be ice cream, it makes an instant and strong impact.Holmes.

ADVERBS USED AS ADJECTIVES.

169. By a convenient brevity, adverbs are sometimes used as adjectives; as, instead of saying, "the one who was then king," in which then is an adverb, we may say "the then king," making then an adjective. Other instances are,—

169. For the sake of convenience, adverbs are sometimes used as adjectives; for example, instead of saying, "the one who was then king," where then is an adverb, we can say "the then king," turning then into an adjective. Other examples include,—

My then favorite, in prose, Richard Hooker.—Ruskin.

My favorite prose writer, Richard Hooker.—Ruskin.

Our sometime sister, now our queen.—Shakespeare

Our former sister, now our queen.—Shakespeare

Messrs. Bradbury and Evans, the then and still owners. —Trollope.

Messrs. Bradbury and Evans, the then and still owners. —Trollope.

The seldom use of it.—Trench.

The rarely use of it.—Trench.

For thy stomach's sake, and thine often infirmities.—Bible.

For your stomach's sake and your frequent health issues.—Bible.

HOW TO PARSE ADJECTIVES.

What to tell in parsing.

170. Since adjectives have no gender, person, or case, and very few have number, the method of parsing is simple.

170. Since adjectives don't have gender, person, or case, and very few have number, the process of parsing is straightforward.

In parsing an adjective, tell—

In analyzing an adjective, tell—

(1) The class and subclass to which it belongs.

(1) The category and subcategory it belongs to.

(2) Its number, if it has number.

(2) Its number, if it has a number.

(3) Its degree of comparison, if it can be compared.

(3) Its level of comparison, if it can be compared.

(4) What word or words it modifies.

(4) Which word or words it modifies.

MODEL FOR PARSING.

These truths are not unfamiliar to your thoughts.

These truths aren't new to you.

These points out what truths, therefore demonstrative; plural number, having a singular, this; cannot be compared; modifies the word truths.

These highlight what truths are, therefore demonstrative; plural in number, having a singular, this; cannot be compared; modifies the term truths.

Unfamiliar describes truths, therefore descriptive; not inflected for number; compared by prefixing more and most; positive degree; modifies truths.

Unfamiliar describes truths, so it's descriptive; it doesn't change for singular or plural; you can compare it by adding more and most; it’s in its base form; it modifies truths.

Exercise.

Parse in full each adjective in these sentences:—

Parse in full each adjective in these sentences:—

1. A thousand lives seemed concentrated in that one moment to Eliza.

1. It felt like a thousand lives were focused in that one moment for Eliza.

2. The huge green fragment of ice on which she alighted pitched and creaked.

2. The massive green chunk of ice she landed on shifted and squeaked.

3. I ask nothing of you, then, but that you proceed to your end by a direct, frank, manly way.

3. I ask nothing from you, then, except that you pursue your goals in a straightforward, honest, and strong manner.

4. She made no reply, and I waited for none.

4. She didn’t respond, and I didn’t expect her to.

5. A herd of thirty or forty tall ungainly figures took their way, with awkward but rapid pace, across the plain.

5. A group of thirty or forty tall, awkward figures moved quickly across the plain, despite their clumsiness.

6. Gallantly did the lion struggle in the folds of his terrible enemy, whose grasp each moment grew more fierce and secure, and most astounding were those frightful yells.

6. The lion fought bravely against his fearsome enemy, whose grip became more intense and secure with each passing moment, and those terrifying screams were truly astonishing.

7. This gave the young people entire freedom, and they enjoyed it to the fullest extent.

7. This gave the young people complete freedom, and they took full advantage of it.

8. I will be as harsh as truth and as uncompromising as justice.

8. I will be as tough as the truth and as unwavering as justice.

9. To every Roman citizen he gives, To every several man, seventy-five drachmas.

9. He gives each Roman citizen, to every individual, seventy-five drachmas.

10. Each member was permitted to entertain all the rest on his or her birthday, on which occasion the elders of the family were bound to be absent.

10. Each member could celebrate their birthday by hosting everyone else, and during this occasion, the older family members were required to stay away.

11. Instantly the mind inquires whether these fishes under the bridge, yonder oxen in the pasture, those dogs in the yard, are immutably fishes, oxen, and dogs.

11. Right away, the mind starts to wonder if the fish under the bridge, the oxen in the field, and the dogs in the yard are permanently fish, oxen, and dogs.

12. I know not what course others may take.

12. I don’t know what other people will choose to do.

13. With every third step, the tomahawk fell.

13. With every third step, the tomahawk dropped.

14. What a ruthless business this war of extermination is!

14. What a brutal business this war of extermination is!

15. I was just emerging from that many-formed crystal country.

15. I was just coming out of that multi-faceted crystal land.

16. On what shore has not the prow of your ships dashed?

16. On what shore hasn't the bow of your ships crashed?

17. The laws and institutions of his country ought to have been more to him than all the men in his country.

17. The laws and institutions of his country should have mattered more to him than all the people in his country.

18. Like most gifted men, he won affections with ease.

18. Like most talented people, he effortlessly won people's affection.

19. His letters aim to elicit the inmost experience and outward fortunes of those he loves, yet are remarkably self-forgetful.

19. His letters are meant to draw out the deepest feelings and outer events of those he cares about, yet they come across as surprisingly selfless.

20. Their name was the last word upon his lips.

20. Their name was the final thing he uttered.

21. The captain said it was the last stick he had seen.

21. The captain said it was the last stick he had seen.

22. Before sunrise the next morning they let us out again.

22. The next morning, before sunrise, they let us out again.

23. He was curious to know to what sect we belonged.

23. He was curious to find out which group we were a part of.

24. Two hours elapsed, during which time I waited.

24. Two hours passed while I waited.

25. In music especially, you will soon find what personal benefit there is in being serviceable.

25. In music, especially, you'll quickly discover how much you can gain personally by being helpful.

26. To say what good of fashion we can, it rests on reality, and hates nothing so much as pretenders.

26. To say what good fashion we can, it relies on reality and hates nothing more than fakes.

27. Here lay two great roads, not so much for travelers that were few, as for armies that were too many by half.

27. Here were two major roads, not so much for the few travelers, but for the armies that were far too numerous.

28. On whichever side of the border chance had thrown Joanna, the same love to France would have been nurtured.

28. No matter which side of the border Joanna found herself on, she would have still held the same love for France.

29. What advantage was open to him above the English boy?

29. What advantage did he have over the English boy?

30. Nearer to our own times, and therefore more interesting to us, is the settlement of our own country.

30. Closer to our own times, and therefore more interesting to us, is the settlement of our country.

31. Even the topmost branches spread out and drooped in all directions, and many poles supported the lower ones.

31. Even the highest branches spread out and hung down in all directions, and many poles propped up the lower ones.

32. Most fruits depend entirely on our care.

32. Most fruits rely completely on our care.

33. Even the sourest and crabbedest apple, growing in the most unfavorable position, suggests such thoughts as these, it is so noble a fruit.

33. Even the sourest and most twisted apple, growing in the worst spot, inspires thoughts like these; it’s such a noble fruit.

34. Let him live in what pomps and prosperities he like, he is no literary man.

34. He can live in whatever luxury and success he wants, but he's not a literary person.

35. Through what hardships it may bear a sweet fruit!

35. No matter what struggles it endures, it can still bear sweet fruit!

36. Whatsoever power exists will have itself organized.

36. Any power that exists will be organized in some way.

37. A hard-struggling, weary-hearted man was he.

37. He was a weary-hearted man, struggling hard.


ARTICLES.

171. There is a class of words having always an adjectival use in general, but with such subtle functions and various meanings that they deserve separate treatment. In the sentence, "He passes an ordinary brick house on the road, with an ordinary little garden," the words the and an belong to nouns, just as adjectives do; but they cannot be accurately placed under any class of adjectives. They are nearest to demonstrative and numeral adjectives.

171. There’s a group of words that are usually used as adjectives overall, but their nuanced roles and different meanings make them worth discussing separately. In the sentence, "He passes an ordinary brick house on the road, with an ordinary little garden," the words the and an are associated with nouns, similar to how adjectives are; however, they can't be precisely categorized as any specific type of adjectives. They are closest to demonstrative and numeral adjectives.

Their origin.

172. The article the comes from an old demonstrative adjective (, sēo, ðat, later thē, thēo, that) which was also an article in Old English. In Middle English the became an article, and that remained a demonstrative adjective.

172. The word the comes from an old demonstrative adjective (, sēo, ðat, later thē, thēo, that) that also served as an article in Old English. In Middle English, the evolved into an article, while that stayed a demonstrative adjective.

An or a came from the old numeral ān, meaning one.

An or a comes from the old numeral ān, meaning one.

Two relics.

Our expressions the one, the other, were formerly that one, that other; the latter is still preserved in the expression, in vulgar English, the tother. Not only this is kept in the Scotch dialect, but the former is used, these occurring as the tane, the tother, or the tane, the tither; for example,—

Our phrases the one and the other used to be that one and that other; the latter is still found in the slang term the tother. Not only is this used in the Scottish dialect, but the former can also be found, appearing as the tane, the tother or the tane, the tither; for example,—

We ca' her sometimes the tane, sometimes the tother.—Scott.

We call her sometimes the one, sometimes the other.—Scott.

An before vowel sounds, a before consonant sounds.

173. Ordinarily an is used before vowel sounds, and a before consonant sounds. Remember that a vowel sound does not necessarily mean beginning with a vowel, nor does consonant sound mean beginning with a consonant, because English spelling does not coincide closely with the sound of words. Examples: "a house," "an orange," "a European," "an honor," "a yelling crowd."

173. Normally, an is used before vowel sounds, and a is used before consonant sounds. Keep in mind that a vowel sound doesn't always mean it starts with a vowel, and consonant sound doesn't always mean it starts with a consonant because English spelling doesn't always match how words sound. Examples: "a house," "an orange," "a European," "an honor," "a yelling crowd."

An with consonant sounds.

174. Many writers use an before h, even when not silent, when the word is not accented on the first syllable.

174. Many writers use an before h, even when it's not silent, if the word isn't stressed on the first syllable.

An historian, such as we have been attempting to describe, would indeed be an intellectual prodigy.—Macaulay.

A historian, like the one we've been trying to describe, would truly be an intellectual genius.—Macaulay.

The Persians were an heroic people like the Greeks.—Brewer.

The Persians were a heroic people just like the Greeks.—Brewer.

He [Rip] evinced an hereditary disposition to attend to anything else but his business.—Irving.

He showed a natural tendency to focus on everything except his work.—Irving.

An habitual submission of the understanding to mere events and images.—Coleridge.

A consistent tendency to accept things just as they are, focusing on events and images.—Coleridge.

An hereditary tenure of these offices.—Thomas Jefferson.

A hereditary hold on these positions.—Thomas Jefferson.

Definition.

175. An article is a limiting word, not descriptive, which cannot be used alone, but always joins to a substantive word to denote a particular thing, or a group or class of things, or any individual of a group or class.

175. An article is a limiting word that isn't descriptive; it can't stand alone and always attaches to a noun to refer to a specific item, a group or category of items, or any individual from that group or category.

Kinds.

176. Articles are either definite or indefinite.

176. Articles are either specific or general.

The is the definite article, since it points out a particular individual, or group, or class.

The is the definite article because it refers to a specific individual, group, or class.

An or a is the indefinite article, because it refers to any one of a group or class of things.

An or a is the indefinite article because it refers to any one item from a group or class of things.

An and a are different forms of the same word, the older ān.

An and a are different forms of the same word, the older ān.

USES OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE.

Reference to a known object.

177. The most common use of the definite article is to refer to an object that the listener or reader is already acquainted with; as in the sentence,—

177. The most common use of the definite article is to refer to an object that the listener or reader is already familiar with; as in the sentence,—

Don't you remember how, when the dragon was infesting the neighborhood of Babylon, the citizens used to walk dismally out of evenings, and look at the valleys round about strewed with the bones?—Thackeray.

Don't you remember how, when the dragon was terrorizing the neighborhood of Babylon, the citizens would sadly walk out in the evenings and look at the valleys scattered with bones?—Thackeray.

NOTE.—This use is noticed when, on opening a story, a person is introduced by a, and afterwards referred to by the:—

NOTE.—This use is noticeable when, at the beginning of a story, a person is introduced by a, and is later referred to by the:—

By and by a giant came out of the dark north, and lay down on the ice near Audhumla.... The giant frowned when he saw the glitter of the golden hair.—Heroes Of Asgard.

By and by, a giant came out of the dark north and lay down on the ice near Audhumla. The giant frowned when he saw the shine of the golden hair. —Asgard's Heroes.

With names of rivers.

178. The is often prefixed to the names of rivers; and when the word river is omitted, as "the Mississippi," "the Ohio," the article indicates clearly that a river, and not a state or other geographical division, is referred to.

178. The is often placed before the names of rivers; and when the word river is left out, like in "the Mississippi," "the Ohio," the article makes it clear that a river, and not a state or any other geographical area, is being mentioned.

No wonder I could face the Mississippi with so much courage supplied to me.—Thackeray.

No wonder I could face the Mississippi with so much courage backing me up.—Thackeray.

The Dakota tribes, doubtless, then occupied the country southwest of the Missouri.—G. Bancroft.

The Dakota tribes definitely occupied the area southwest of the Missouri. —G. Bancroft.

To call attention to attributes.

179. When the is prefixed to a proper name, it alters the force of the noun by directing attention to certain qualities possessed by the person or thing spoken of; thus,—

179. When the is added to a proper name, it changes the meaning of the noun by highlighting specific qualities of the person or thing being referred to; so,—

The Bacon, the Spinoza, the Hume, Schelling, Kant, or whosoever propounds to you a philosophy of the mind, is only a more or less awkward translator of things in your consciousness.—Emerson.

The Bacon, the Spinoza, the Hume, Schelling, Kant, or anyone who presents you with a philosophy of the mind is just a more or less clumsy interpreter of what's in your consciousness.—Emerson.

With plural of abstract nouns.

180. The, when placed before the pluralized abstract noun, marks it as half abstract or a common noun.

180. The, when used before a plural abstract noun, identifies it as somewhat abstract or as a common noun.

Common.

His messages to the provincial authorities.—Motley.

His messages to the province authorities. —Motley.

Half abstract.

He was probably skilled in the subtleties of Italian statesmanship.—Id.

He was likely good at the subtleties of Italian politics.—See above.

With adjectives used as nouns.

181. When the precedes adjectives of the positive degree used substantively, it marks their use as common and plural nouns when they refer to persons, and as singular and abstract when they refer to qualities.

181. When the comes before positive adjectives used as nouns, it indicates that they are being used as common, plural nouns when referring to people, and as singular and abstract nouns when referring to qualities.

1. The simple rise as by specific levity, not into a particular virtue, but into the region of all the virtues.—Emerson.

1. The simple rise through a certain lightness, not towards a specific virtue, but into the realm of all virtues.—Emerson.

2. If the good is there, so is the evil.—Id.

2. If the good exists, then the evil does too.—Id.

Caution.

NOTE.—This is not to be confused with words that have shifted from adjectives and become pure nouns; as,—

NOTE.—This should not be confused with words that have changed from adjectives to pure nouns; as,—

As she hesitated to pass on, the gallant, throwing his cloak from his shoulders, laid it on the miry spot.—Scott.

As she paused to move forward, the gallant, tossing off his cloak, placed it over the muddy area.—Scott.

But De Soto was no longer able to abate the confidence or punish the temerity of the natives.—G. Bancroft.

But De Soto could no longer reduce the confidence or punish the audacity of the natives.—G. Bancroft.

One thing for its class.

182. The before class nouns may mark one thing as a representative of the class to which it belongs; for example,—

182. The before class nouns can identify one item as a representative of the group to which it belongs; for example,—

The faint, silvery warblings heard over the partially bare and moist fields from the bluebird, the song sparrow, and the redwing, as if the last flakes of winter tinkled as they fell!—Thoreau.

The soft, silvery sounds coming from the partly exposed and damp fields from the bluebird, the song sparrow, and the redwing, like the final snowflakes of winter tinkling as they drop!—Thoreau.

In the sands of Africa and Arabia the camel is a sacred and precious gift.—Gibbon.

In the deserts of Africa and Arabia, the camel is a sacred and valuable gift.—Gibbon.

For possessive person pronouns.

183. The is frequently used instead of the possessive case of the personal pronouns his, her, etc.

183. The is often used instead of the possessive forms of personal pronouns like his, her, and so on.

More than one hinted that a cord twined around the head, or a match put between the fingers, would speedily extract the required information.—Kingsley.

More than one person suggested that a cord wrapped around the head, or a match placed between the fingers, would quickly get the needed information.—Kingsley.

The mouth, and the region of the mouth, were about the strongest features in Wordsworth's face.—De Quincey.

The mouth, and the area around it, were some of the most prominent features in Wordsworth's face.—De Quincey.

The for a.

184. In England and Scotland the is often used where we use a, in speaking of measure and price; as,—

184. In England and Scotland, the is often used where we use a, when talking about measure and price; like,—

Wheat, the price of which necessarily varied, averaged in the middle of the fourteenth century tenpence the bushel, barley averaging at the same time three shillings the quarter.—Froude.

Wheat, whose price frequently changed, averaged around ten pence per bushel in the middle of the fourteenth century, while barley averaged about three shillings per quarter.—Froude.

A very strong restrictive.

185. Sometimes the has a strong force, almost equivalent to a descriptive adjective in emphasizing a word,—

185. Sometimes the has a strong impact, almost equivalent to a descriptive adjective in emphasizing a word,—

No doubt but ye are the people, and wisdom shall die with you.—Bible.

No doubt you are the people, and wisdom will die with you.—Bible.

As for New Orleans, it seemed to me the city of the world where you can eat and drink the most and suffer the least.—Thackeray.

As for New Orleans, it felt to me like the city in the world where you can eat and drink the most and suffer the least.—Thackeray.

He was the man in all Europe that could (if any could) have driven six-in-hand full gallop over Al Sirat.—De Quincey.

He was the man in all of Europe who could (if anyone could) have driven a six-horse team at full gallop over Al Sirat.—De Quincey.

Mark of a substantive.

186. The, since it belongs distinctively to substantives, is a sure indication that a word of verbal form is not used participially, but substantively.

186. The, because it uniquely pertains to nouns, clearly shows that a word in verbal form is being used as a noun, not as a participle.

In the hills of Sacramento there is gold for the gathering.—Emerson.

In the hills of Sacramento, there’s gold to be found.—Emerson.

I thought the writing excellent, and wished, if possible, to imitate it.—Franklin.

I thought the writing was excellent and wished, if possible, to imitate it.—Franklin.

Caution.

187. There is one use of the which is different from all the above. It is an adverbial use, and is spoken of more fully in Sec. 283. Compare this sentence with those above:—

187. There’s one way to use the that’s different from all the ones mentioned above. It’s used as an adverb, and I’ll discuss it in more detail in Sec. 283. Check out this sentence in comparison to the ones above:—

There was something ugly and evil in his face, which they had not previously noticed, and which grew still the more obvious to the sight the oftener they looked upon him.—Hawthorne.

There was something ugly and evil in his face that they hadn’t noticed before, and it became even more obvious the more they looked at him.—Hawthorne.

Exercise.—Find sentences with five uses of the definite article.

Exercise.—Find sentences that use the definite article five times.

USES OF THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE.

Denotes any one of a class.

188. The most frequent use of the indefinite article is to denote any one of a class or group of objects: consequently it belongs to singular words; as in the sentence,—

188. The most common use of the indefinite article is to refer to any one item from a class or group of objects; therefore, it applies to singular nouns; as in the sentence,—

Near the churchyard gate stands a poor-box, fastened to a post by iron bands and secured by a padlock, with a sloping wooden roof to keep off the rain.—Longfellow

Near the churchyard gate, there's a poor box, attached to a post with iron bands and locked with a padlock, featuring a slanted wooden roof to protect it from the rain.—Longfellow

Widens the scope of proper nouns.

189. When the indefinite article precedes proper names, it alters them to class names. The qualities or attributes of the object are made prominent, and transferred to any one possessing them; as,—

189. When the indefinite article comes before proper names, it turns them into class names. The qualities or characteristics of the object become more noticeable and are applied to anyone who has them; as,—

The vulgar riot and debauchery, which scarcely disgraced an Alcibiades or a Cæsar, have been exchanged for the higher ideals of a Bayard or a Sydney.—Pearson

The crude chaos and indulgence, which hardly tarnished an Alcibiades or a Cæsar, have been replaced by the nobler ideals of a Bayard or a Sydney.—Pearson

With abstract nouns.

190. An or a before abstract nouns often changes them to half abstract: the idea of quality remains, but the word now denotes only one instance or example of things possessing the quality.

190. An or a before abstract nouns often turns them into partially abstract terms: the concept of quality stays, but the word now refers to just one instance or example of things that have that quality.

Become half abstract.

The simple perception of natural forms is a delight.—Emerson

The straightforward appreciation of natural shapes is a delight.—Emerson

If thou hadst a sorrow of thine own, the brook might tell thee of it.—Hawthorne

If you had a sorrow of your own, the brook might tell you about it.—Hawthorne

In the first sentence, instead of the general abstract notion of delight, which cannot be singular or plural, a delight means one thing delightful, and implies others having the same quality.

In the first sentence, instead of the general abstract idea of delight, which can't be singular or plural, a delight refers to one thing that's delightful and suggests that there are others with the same quality.

So a sorrow means one cause of sorrow, implying that there are other things that bring sorrow.

So a sorrow refers to one source of sadness, suggesting that there are other things that can cause sorrow.

Become pure class nouns.

NOTE.—Some abstract nouns become common class nouns with the indefinite article, referring simply to persons; thus,—

NOTE.—Some abstract nouns turn into common class nouns with the indefinite article, referring simply to people; thus,—

If the poet of the "Rape of the Lock" be not a wit, who deserves to be called so?—Thackeray.

If the poet of the "Rape of the Lock" isn't a wit, then who deserves that title?—Thackeray.

He had a little brother in London with him at this time,—as great a beauty, as great a dandy, as great a villain.—Id.

He had a little brother in London with him at this time—just as big a beauty, just as big a dandy, just as big a villain.—Id.

A youth to fortune and to fame unknown.—Gray.

A young person unknown to wealth and fame.—Gray.

Changes material to class nouns.

191. An or a before a material noun indicates the change to a class noun, meaning one kind or a detached portion; as,—

191. An or a before a material noun shows the shift to a class noun, meaning one type or a separate part; as,—

Those who live in the steeple,...
Experience a sense of glory in just rolling. On the human heart a stone. —Poe.
When God first created man,
Having a glass of blessings nearby. —Herb.

The roofs were turned into arches of massy stone, joined by a cement that grew harder by time.—Johnson.

The roofs became strong stone arches, connected by cement that hardened over time.—Johnson.

Like the numeral adjective one.

192. In some cases an or a has the full force of the numeral adjective one. It is shown in the following:—

192. In some cases an or a carries the full meaning of the number one. This is illustrated in the following:—

To every room there was an open and a secret passage.—Johnson.

To each room, there was an open and a secret passage.—Johnson.

In a short time these become a small tree, an inverted pyramid resting on the apex of the other.—Thoreau.

In a short time, these become a small tree, an inverted pyramid resting on the point of the other.—Thoreau.

All men are at last of a size.—Emerson.

All men are finally the same size. —Emerson.

At the approach of spring the red squirrels got under my house, two at a time.—Thoreau.

As spring arrived, the red squirrels came under my house, two at a time.—Thoreau.

Equivalent to the word each or every.

193. Often, also, the indefinite article has the force of each or every, particularly to express measure or frequency.

193. Often, the indefinite article is used to mean each or every, especially when talking about measures or frequency.

It would be so much more pleasant to live at his ease than to work eight or ten hours a day.—Bulwer

It would be so much nicer to live comfortably than to work eight or ten hours a day.—Bulwer

Compare to Sec. 184.

Strong beer, such as we now buy for eighteenpence a gallon, was then a penny a gallon.—Froude

Strong beer, which we now buy for eighteen pence a gallon, was only a penny a gallon back then.—Froude

With such, many, what.

194. An or a is added to the adjectives such, many, and what, and may be considered a part of these in modifying substantives.

194. An or a is added to the adjectives such, many, and what, and can be seen as part of these when they modify nouns.

How was I to pay such a debt?—Thackeray.

How was I supposed to pay such a debt?—Thackeray.

Many a one you and I have had here below.—Thackeray.

Many a one you and I have had down here.—Thackeray.

What a world of merriment then melody foretells!—Poe.

What a world of fun that melody promises!—Edgar Allan Poe.

With not and many.

195. Not and never with a or an are numeral adjectives, instead of adverbs, which they are in general.

195. Not and never with a or an are numeral adjectives, instead of adverbs, which they are in general.

Not a drum was heard, not a funeral note.—Wolfe

Not a drum was heard, not a funeral note.—Wolfe

My Lord Duke was as hot as a flame at this salute, but said never a word.—Thackeray.

My Lord Duke was as angry as a flame at this greeting, but said not a word.—Thackeray.

NOTE.—All these have the function of adjectives; but in the last analysis of the expressions, such, many, not, etc., might be considered as adverbs modifying the article.

NOTE.—All these serve as adjectives; however, when you break down the expressions, such, many, not, etc., could be viewed as adverbs that modify the article.

With few or little.

196. The adjectives few and little have the negative meaning of not much, not many, without the article; but when a is put before them, they have the positive meaning of some. Notice the contrast in the following sentences:—

196. The adjectives few and little have the negative meaning of not much, not many, without the article; but when a is put before them, they have the positive meaning of some. Notice the contrast in the following sentences:—

Of the country beyond the Mississippi little more was known than of the heart of Africa.—Mcmaster

Of the land beyond the Mississippi, very little more was known than of the heart of Africa.—McMaster

To both must I of necessity cling, supported always by the hope that when a little time, a few years, shall have tried me more fully in their esteem, I may be able to bring them together.—Keats's Letters.

To both I must inevitably hold on, always supported by the hope that when a little time, a few years, have tested me more completely in their opinion, I might be able to bring them together.—Keats's Letters.

Few of the great characters of history have been so differently judged as Alexander.—Smith, History of Greece

Few of the great figures in history have been judged so differently as Alexander.—Smith, History of Greece

With adjectives, changed to nouns.

197. When the is used before adjectives with no substantive following (Sec. 181 and note), these words are adjectives used as nouns, or pure nouns; but when an or a precedes such words, they are always nouns, having the regular use and inflections of nouns; for example,—

197. When the is used before adjectives without a noun following (Sec. 181 and note), these words function as adjectives that act like nouns, or pure nouns; however, when an or a comes before such words, they are always nouns, following the usual use and inflections of nouns; for example,—

Such are the words a brave should use.—Cooper.

Such are the words a brave person should use. —Cooper.

In the great society of wits, John Gay deserves to be a favorite, and to have a good place.—Thackeray

In the impressive world of clever people, John Gay deserves to be a favorite and to hold a respected position.—Thackeray

Only the name of one obscure epigrammatist has been embalmed for use in the verses of a rival.—Pearson.

Only the name of one little-known poet has been preserved for use in the verses of a rival.—Pearson.

Exercise.—Bring up sentences with five uses of the indefinite article.

Exercise.—Create sentences that include five uses of the indefinite article.

HOW TO PARSE ARTICLES.

198. In parsing the article, tell—

In reading the article, tell—

(1) What word it limits.

What word does it limit?

(2) Which of the above uses it has.

(2) What the above uses are.

Exercise.

Parse the articles in the following:—

Parse the articles in the following:—

1. It is like gathering a few pebbles off the ground, or bottling a little air in a phial, when the whole earth and the whole atmosphere are ours.

1. It’s like picking up a few pebbles from the ground or putting some air in a bottle when the entire earth and the whole atmosphere belong to us.

2. Aristeides landed on the island with a body of Hoplites, defeated the Persians and cut them to pieces to a man.

2. Aristeides arrived on the island with a group of Hoplites, defeated the Persians, and slaughtered them without mercy.

3. The wild fire that lit the eye of an Achilles can gleam no more.

3. The fierce fire that once ignited the eyes of Achilles can shine no more.

4. But it is not merely the neighborhood of the cathedral that is mediæval; the whole city is of a piece.

4. But it’s not just the area around the cathedral that is medieval; the entire city is connected.

5. To the herdsman among his cattle in remote woods, to the craftsman in his rude workshop, to the great and to the little, a new light has arisen.

5. To the herdsman with his cattle in distant woods, to the craftsman in his simple workshop, to the great and to the small, a new light has emerged.

6. When the manners of Loo are heard of, the stupid become intelligent, and the wavering, determined.

6. When people hear about the ways of Loo, the foolish become wise, and the indecisive find their determination.

7. The student is to read history actively, and not passively.

7. The student should engage with history actively, not just passively.

8. This resistance was the labor of his life.

8. This struggle was the work of his life.

9. There was always a hope, even in the darkest hour.

9. There was always a glimmer of hope, even in the darkest times.

10. The child had a native grace that does not invariably coexist with faultless beauty.

10. The child had a natural elegance that doesn't always go hand in hand with perfect beauty.

11. I think a mere gent (which I take to be the lowest form of civilization) better than a howling, whistling, clucking, stamping, jumping, tearing savage.

11. I believe that a mere gentleman (which I consider to be the most basic level of civilization) is better than a wild, noisy, chaotic savage who howls, whistles, clucks, stomps, jumps, and tears things apart.

12. Every fowl whom Nature has taught to dip the wing in water.

12. Every bird that Nature has taught to dip its wing in water.

13. They seem to be lines pretty much of a length.

13. They look like they’re all about the same length.

14. Only yesterday, but what a gulf between now and then!

14. Just yesterday, but what a huge difference between now and then!

15. Not a brick was made but some man had to think of the making of that brick.

15. No brick was created without someone first imagining how to make that brick.

16. The class of power, the working heroes, the Cortes, the Nelson, the Napoleon, see that this is the festivity and permanent celebration of such as they; that fashion is funded talent.

16. The powerful class, the working heroes, the Cortes, the Nelson, the Napoleon, recognize that this is the celebration and ongoing festivity for people like them; that style is built on talent.


VERBS AND VERBALS..

VERBS.

Verb,—the word of the sentence.

199. The term verb is from the Latin verbum meaning word: hence it is the word of a sentence. A thought cannot be expressed without a verb. When the child cries, "Apple!" it means, See the apple! or I have an apple! In the mariner's shout, "A sail!" the meaning is, "Yonder is a sail!"

199. The term verb comes from the Latin word verbum, which means word: so it is the word in a sentence. You can't express a thought without a verb. When a child yells, "Apple!" they mean, Look at the apple! or I have an apple! In the sailor's shout, "A sail!" the meaning is, "There is a sail over there!"

Sentences are in the form of declarations, questions, or commands; and none of these can be put before the mind without the use of a verb.

Sentences are made up of statements, questions, or commands; and none of these can be understood without using a verb.

One group or a group of words.

200. The verb may not always be a single word. On account of the lack of inflections, verb phrases are very frequent. Hence the verb may consist of:

200. The verb might not always be just one word. Because of the lack of inflections, verb phrases are quite common. Therefore, the verb can be made up of:

(1) One word; as, "The young man obeyed."

(1) One word; as, "The young man complied."

(2) Several words of verbal nature, making one expression; as, (a) "Some day it may be considered reasonable," (b) "Fearing lest he might have been anticipated."

(2) A few words conveyed verbally, forming one expression; like, (a) "At some point, it might be seen as reasonable," (b) "Worried that he could have been anticipated."

(3) One or more verbal words united with other words to compose one verb phrase: as in the sentences, (a) "They knew well that this woman ruled over thirty millions of subjects;" (b) "If all the flummery and extravagance of an army were done away with, the money could be made to go much further;" (c) "It is idle cant to pretend anxiety for the better distribution of wealth until we can devise means by which this preying upon people of small incomes can be put a stop to."

(3) One or more action words combined with other words to form a single verb phrase: as in the sentences, (a) "They knew well that this woman had control over thirty million subjects;" (b) "If all the nonsense and excess of an army were eliminated, the money could be stretched much further;" (c) "It’s pointless talk to pretend concern for a fairer distribution of wealth until we can come up with ways to ensure that this exploitation of people with low incomes can be stopped."

In (a), a verb and a preposition are used as one verb; in (b), a verb, an adverb, and a preposition unite as a verb; in (c), an article, a noun, a preposition, are united with verbs as one verb phrase.

In (a), a verb and a preposition combine to form one verb; in (b), a verb, an adverb, and a preposition come together as a verb; in (c), an article, a noun, and a preposition are combined with verbs to create one verb phrase.

Definition and caution.

201. A verb is a word used as a predicate, to say something to or about some person or thing. In giving a definition, we consider a verb as one word.

201. A verb is a word that acts as a predicate, describing something about a person or thing. When defining it, we think of a verb as a single word.

Now, it is indispensable to the nature of a verb that it is "a word used as a predicate." Examine the sentences in Sec. 200: In (1), obeyed is a predicate; in (2, a), may be considered is a unit in doing the work of one predicate; in (2, b), might have been anticipated is also one predicate, but fearing is not a predicate, hence is not a verb; in (3, b), to go is no predicate, and not a verb; in (3, c), to pretend and preying have something of verbal nature in expressing action in a faint and general way, but cannot be predicates.

Now, it’s essential for a verb to be defined as "a word used as a predicate." Look at the sentences in Sec. 200: In (1), obeyed is a predicate; in (2, a), may be considered functions as a single unit performing the role of one predicate; in (2, b), might have been anticipated is also one predicate, but fearing isn’t a predicate, so it’s not a verb; in (3, b), to go is not a predicate and thus not a verb; in (3, c), to pretend and preying have a somewhat verbal nature in expressing action in a vague and general way, but they cannot be predicates.

In the sentence, "Put money in thy purse," put is the predicate, with some word understood; as, "Put thou money in thy purse."

In the sentence, "Put money in your purse," put is the predicate, with a word understood; as in, "Put you money in your purse."

VERBS CLASSIFIED ACCORDING TO MEANING AND USE.

TRANSITIVE AND INTRANSITIVE VERBS.

The nature of the transitive verb.

202. By examining a few verbs, it may be seen that not all verbs are used alike. All do not express action: some denote state or condition. Of those expressing action, all do not express it in the same way; for example, in this sentence from Bulwer,—"The proud lone took care to conceal the anguish she endured; and the pride of woman has an hypocrisy which can deceive the most penetrating, and shame the most astute,"—every one of the verbs in Italics has one or more words before or after it, representing something which it influences or controls. In the first, lone took what? answer, care; endured what? anguish; etc. Each influences some object, which may be a person, or a material thing, or an idea. Has takes the object hypocrisy; can deceive has an object, the most penetrating; (can) shame also has an object, the most astute.

202. By looking at a few verbs, we can see that not all verbs are used in the same way. Not all of them express action; some indicate a state or condition. Among those that do express action, not all convey it in the same manner. For instance, in this sentence from Bulwer, — "The proud lone took care to conceal the anguish she endured; and the pride of woman has a hypocrisy which can deceive the most penetrating, and shame the most astute," — every verb in italics has one or more words before or after it that represent something it influences or controls. In the first instance, lone took what? The answer is care; endured what? anguish; and so on. Each verb influences an object, which can be a person, a material thing, or an idea. Has takes the object hypocrisy; can deceive has an object, the most penetrating; (can) shame also has an object, the most astute.

In each case, the word following, or the object, is necessary to the completion of the action expressed in the verb.

In each case, the word that comes after, or the object, is essential for completing the action described by the verb.

All these are called transitive verbs, from the Latin transire, which means to go over. Hence

All these are called transitive verbs, from the Latin transire, which means to go over. Hence

Definition.

203. A transitive verb is one which must have an object to complete its meaning, and to receive the action expressed.

203. A transitive verb is one that requires an object to complete its meaning and to receive the action expressed.

The nature of intransitive verbs.

204. Examine the verbs in the following paragraph:—

204. Look at the verbs in the following paragraph:—

She sprang up at that thought, and, taking the staff which always guided her steps, she hastened to the neighboring shrine of Isis. Till she had been under the guardianship of the kindly Greek, that staff had sufficed to conduct the poor blind girl from corner to corner of Pompeii.—Bulwer

She jumped up at that thought, and, grabbing the staff that always guided her, she hurried to the nearby shrine of Isis. Until she had been under the care of the kind Greek, that staff had been enough to help the poor blind girl navigate every corner of Pompeii.—Bulwer

In this there are some verbs unlike those that have been examined. Sprang, or sprang up, expresses action, but it is complete in itself, does not affect an object; hastened is similar in use; had been expresses condition, or state of being, and can have no object; had sufficed means had been sufficient, and from its meaning cannot have an object.

In this, there are some verbs that are different from those that have been examined. Sprang, or sprang up, shows action, but it stands on its own and doesn’t affect an object; hastened is used in a similar way; had been shows a condition or state of being and cannot have an object; had sufficed means had been sufficient, and based on its meaning, it cannot have an object.

Such verbs are called intransitive (not crossing over). Hence

Such verbs are called intransitive (not crossing over). Hence

Definition.

205. An intransitive verb is one which is complete in itself, or which is completed by other words without requiring an object.

205. An intransitive verb is one that stands alone or is completed by other words without needing an object.

Study use, not form, of verbs here.

206. Many verbs can be either transitive or intransitive, according to their use in the sentence, It can be said, "The boy walked for two hours," or "The boy walked the horse;" "The rains swelled the river," or "The river swelled because of the rain;" etc.

206. Many verbs can be either transitive or intransitive, depending on how they’re used in the sentence. You can say, "The boy walked for two hours," or "The boy walked the horse;" "The rains swelled the river," or "The river swelled because of the rain;" etc.

The important thing to observe is, many words must be distinguished as transitive or intransitive by use, not by form.

The important thing to notice is that many words need to be classified as transitive or intransitive based on use, not by form.

207. Also verbs are sometimes made transitive by prepositions. These may be (1) compounded with the verb; or (2) may follow the verb, and be used as an integral part of it: for example,—

207. Also, verbs can sometimes become transitive through the use of prepositions. These can either (1) be combined with the verb, or (2) follow the verb and function as a key part of it: for example,—

Asking her pardon for having withstood her.—Scott.

Asking her forgiveness for having withstood her.—Scott.

I can wish myself no worse than to have it all to undergo a second time.—Kingsley.

I can't wish for anything worse than having to go through it all again.—Kingsley.

A weary gloom in the deep caverns of his eyes, as of a child that has outgrown its playthings.—Hawthorne.

A tired sadness in the deep caverns of his eyes, like a child that has outgrown its toys.—Hawthorne.

It is amusing to walk up and down the pier and look at the countenances passing by.—B. Taylor.

It’s funny to stroll up and down the pier and watch the faces that go by.—B. Taylor.

He was at once so out of the way, and yet so sensible, that I loved, laughed at, and pitied him.—Goldsmith.

He was both so unusual and yet so reasonable that I loved, laughed at, and felt sorry for him.—Goldsmith.

My little nurse told me the whole matter, which she had cunningly picked out from her mother.—Swift.

My little nurse shared the entire story with me, which she had cleverly figured out from her mother.—Fast.

Exercises.

(a) Pick out the transitive and the intransitive verbs in the following:—

(a) Identify the transitive and intransitive verbs in the following:—

1. The women and children collected together at a distance.

1. The women and children gathered together at a distance.

2. The path to the fountain led through a grassy savanna.

2. The path to the fountain went through a grassy savanna.

3. As soon as I recovered my senses and strength from so sudden a surprise, I started back out of his reach where I stood to view him; he lay quiet whilst I surveyed him.

3. Once I got my bearings and regained my strength from such a sudden shock, I stepped back out of his reach to take a good look at him; he lay still while I examined him.

4. At first they lay a floor of this kind of tempered mortar on the ground, upon which they deposit a layer of eggs.

4. First, they lay down a floor of this tempered mortar on the ground, on top of which they place a layer of eggs.

5. I ran my bark on shore at one of their landing places, which was a sort of neck or little dock, from which ascended a sloping path or road up to the edge of the meadow, where their nests were; most of them were deserted, and the great thick whitish eggshells lay broken and scattered upon the ground.

5. I brought my boat ashore at one of their landing spots, which was like a small dock with a sloping path leading up to the meadow where their nests were. Most of the nests were empty, and the large thick whitish eggshells were broken and scattered on the ground.

6. Accordingly I got everything on board, charged my gun, set sail cautiously, along shore. As I passed by Battle Lagoon, I began to tremble.

6. So I got everything on board, loaded my gun, and set sail carefully along the shore. As I passed Battle Lagoon, I started to tremble.

7. I seized my gun, and went cautiously from my camp: when I had advanced about thirty yards, I halted behind a coppice of orange trees, and soon perceived two very large bears, which had made their way through the water and had landed in the grove, and were advancing toward me.

7. I grabbed my gun and quietly left my camp. After moving about thirty yards, I stopped behind a patch of orange trees and soon spotted two huge bears that had crossed the water and landed in the grove, making their way toward me.

(b) Bring up sentences with five transitive and five intransitive verbs.

(b) Create sentences using five transitive verbs and five intransitive verbs.

VOICE, ACTIVE AND PASSIVE.

Meaning of active voice.

208. As has been seen, transitive verbs are the only kind that can express action so as to go over to an object. This implies three things,—the agent, or person or thing acting; the verb representing the action; the person or object receiving the act.

208. As we've seen, transitive verbs are the only type that can show action directed toward an object. This involves three elements: the doer, or the person or thing performing the action; the verb that describes the action; and the person or object affected by the action.

In the sentence, "We reached the village of Sorgues by dusk, and accepted the invitation of an old dame to lodge at her inn," these three things are found: the actor, or agent, is expressed by we; the action is asserted by reached and accepted; the things acted upon are village and invitation. Here the subject is represented as doing something. The same word is the subject and the agent. This use of a transitive verb is called the active voice.

In the sentence, "We arrived at the village of Sorgues by dusk and accepted an invitation from an old woman to stay at her inn," there are three key elements: the doer, or agent, is represented by we; the actions are conveyed by arrived and accepted; and the objects being acted upon are village and invitation. Here, the subject is shown as performing an action. The same word serves as both the subject and the agent. This usage of a transitive verb is called the active voice.

Definition.

209. The active voice is that form of a verb which represents the subject as acting; or

209. The active voice is the form of a verb that shows the subject performing the action; or

The active voice is that form of a transitive verb which makes the subject and the agent the same word.

The active voice is the form of a transitive verb where the subject and the agent are the same word.

A question.

210. Intransitive verbs are always active voice. Let the student explain why.

210. Intransitive verbs are always in the active voice. Have the student explain why.

Meaning of passive voice.

211. In the assertion of an action, it would be natural to suppose, that, instead of always representing the subject as acting upon some person or thing, it must often happen that the subject is spoken of as acted upon; and the person or thing acting may or may not be expressed in the sentence: for example,—

211. When stating an action, it seems reasonable to think that instead of always describing the subject as doing something to another person or object, there are many instances where the subject is described as being acted upon; and the person or object that is doing the action may or may not be mentioned in the sentence: for example,—

All infractions of love and equity in our social relations are speedily punished. They are punished by fear.—Emerson.

All violations of love and fairness in our social interactions are quickly addressed. They are addressed by fear.—Emerson.

Here the subject infractions does nothing: it represents the object toward which the action of are punished is directed, yet it is the subject of the same verb. In the first sentence the agent is not expressed; in the second, fear is the agent of the same action.

Here, the subject infractions doesn't do anything: it represents the object that the action of are punished targets, yet it is also the subject of the same verb. In the first sentence, the agent isn’t mentioned; in the second, fear is the agent of that same action.

So that in this case, instead of having the agent and subject the same word, we have the object and subject the same word, and the agent may be omitted from the statement of the action.

So in this case, instead of having the agent and subject be the same word, we have the object and subject as the same word, and the agent can be left out of the statement about the action.

Passive is from the Latin word patior, meaning to endure or suffer; but in ordinary grammatical use passive means receiving an action.

Passive comes from the Latin word patior, which means to endure or suffer; however, in common grammatical use, passive refers to receiving an action.

Definition.

212. The passive voice is that form of the verb which represents the subject as being acted upon; or—

212. The passive voice is the verb form that shows the subject as receiving the action; or—

The passive voice is that form of the verb which represents the subject and the object by the same word.

The passive voice is the verb form that expresses the subject and the object using the same word.

Exercises.

Workouts.

(a) Pick out the verbs in the active and the passive voice:—

(a) Identify the verbs in both active and passive voice:—

1. In the large room some forty or fifty students were walking about while the parties were preparing.

1. In the large room, about forty or fifty students were wandering around while the groups were getting ready.

2. This was done by taking off the coat and vest and binding a great thick leather garment on, which reached to the knees.

2. This was done by removing the coat and vest and putting on a heavy leather garment that went down to the knees.

3. They then put on a leather glove reaching nearly to the shoulder, tied a thick cravat around the throat, and drew on a cap with a large visor.

3. They then put on a leather glove that went almost up to the shoulder, tied a thick scarf around their neck, and pulled on a cap with a wide visor.

4. This done, they were walked about the room a short time; their faces all this time betrayed considerable anxiety.

4. After that, they walked around the room for a little while; their faces showed a lot of anxiety the whole time.

5. We joined the crowd, and used our lungs as well as any.

5. We blended in with the crowd and used our voices just like everyone else.

6. The lakes were soon covered with merry skaters, and every afternoon the banks were crowded with spectators.

6. The lakes quickly filled up with cheerful skaters, and every afternoon, the banks were packed with onlookers.

7. People were setting up torches and lengthening the rafts which had been already formed.

7. People were lighting torches and extending the rafts that had already been made.

8. The water was first brought in barrels drawn by horses, till some officer came and opened the fire plug.

8. The water was initially transported in barrels pulled by horses until some officer arrived and opened the fire hydrant.

9. The exclusive in fashionable life does not see that he excludes himself from enjoyment, in the attempt to appropriate it.

9. The person obsessed with fashion doesn’t realize that by trying to own enjoyment, they’re actually shutting themselves out from it.

(b) Find sentences with five verbs in the active and five in the passive voice.

(b) Find sentences that have five verbs in the active voice and five in the passive voice.

MOOD.

Definition.

213. The word mood is from the Latin modus, meaning manner, way, method. Hence, when applied to verbs,—

213. The word mood comes from the Latin modus, which means manner, way, method. So, when used with verbs,—

Mood means the manner of conceiving and expressing action or being of some subject.

Mood refers to the way of thinking about and expressing the actions or state of a subject.

The three ways.

214. There are three chief ways of expressing action or being:—

214. There are three main ways to express action or existence:—

(1) As a fact; this may be a question, statement, or assumption.

(1) This can be a question, statement, or assumption.

(2) As doubtful, or merely conceived of in the mind.

(2) As questionable, or just imagined in the mind.

(3) As urged or commanded.

As asked or told.

INDICATIVE MOOD.

Deals with facts.

215. The term indicative is from the Latin indicare (to declare, or assert). The indicative represents something as a fact,—

215. The term indicative comes from the Latin indicare (to declare or assert). The indicative presents something as a fact,—

Affirms or denies.

(1) By declaring a thing to be true or not to be true; thus,—

(1) By stating that something is true or not true; thus,—

Distinction is the consequence, never the object, of a great mind.—Allston.

Distinction is the result, never the goal, of a great mind.—Allston.

I do not remember when or by whom I was taught to read; because I cannot and never could recollect a time when I could not read my Bible.—D. Webster.

I don't remember when or by whom I was taught to read; because I can't and never could recall a time when I couldn't read my Bible.—D. Webster.

Assumed as a fact.
Caution.

(2) By assuming a thing to be true without declaring it to be so. This kind of indicative clause is usually introduced by if (meaning admitting that, granting that, etc.), though, although, etc. Notice that the action is not merely conceived as possible; it is assumed to be a fact: for example,—

(2) By assuming something to be true without stating it as such. This type of indicative clause is usually introduced by if (meaning assuming that, granting that, etc.), though, although, etc. Note that the action is not just seen as possible; it is taken as a fact: for example,—

If the penalties of rebellion hung over an unsuccessful contest; if America was yet in the cradle of her political existence; if her population little exceeded two millions; if she was without government, without fleets or armies, arsenals or magazines, without military knowledge,—still her citizens had a just and elevated sense of her rights.—A. Hamilton.

If the consequences of rebellion loomed over a failed struggle; if America was still in the early stages of her political life; if her population was just over two million; if she had no government, no fleets or armies, arsenals or supplies, and no military experience—still her citizens had a rightful and noble understanding of her rights.—A. Hamilton.

(3) By asking a question to find out some fact; as,—

(3) By asking a question to find out some fact; as,—

Is private credit the friend and patron of industry?—Hamilton.

Is private credit a friend and supporter of industry?—Hamilton.

With respect to novels what shall I say?—N. Webster.

With regard to novels, what should I say?—Noah Webster.

Definition.

216 .The indicative mood is that form of a verb which represents a thing as a fact, or inquires about some fact.

216. The indicative mood is the form of a verb that expresses a statement of fact or asks about a fact.

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.

Meaning of the word.

217. Subjunctive means subjoined, or joined as dependent or subordinate to something else.

217. Subjunctive means attached, or linked as dependent or subordinate to something else.

This meaning is misleading.

If its original meaning be closely adhered to, we must expect every dependent clause to have its verb in the subjunctive mood, and every clause not dependent to have its verb in some other mood.

If we stick closely to its original meaning, we should expect every dependent clause to have its verb in the subjunctive mood, and every clause not dependent to have its verb in a different mood.

But this is not the case. In the quotation from Hamilton (Sec. 215, 2) several subjoined clauses introduced by if have the indicative mood, and also independent clauses are often found having the verb in the subjunctive mood.

But this is not the case. In the quotation from Hamilton (Sec. 215, 2) several added clauses introduced by if are in the indicative mood, and independent clauses often use the verb in the subjunctive mood.

Cautions.

Three cautions will be laid down which must be observed by a student who wishes to understand and use the English subjunctive:—

Three cautions will be provided that must be followed by a student who wants to understand and use the English subjunctive:—

(1) You cannot tell it always by the form of the word. The main difference is, that the subjunctive has no -s as the ending of the present tense, third person singular; as, "If he come."

(1) You can't always tell by the word's form. The main difference is that the subjunctive doesn't have an -s as the ending for the present tense, third person singular; for example, "If he come."

(2) The fact that its clause is dependent or is introduced by certain words will not be a safe rule to guide you.

(2) Just because its clause is dependent or starts with certain words doesn’t mean it’s a reliable rule to follow.

(3) The meaning of the verb itself must be keenly studied.

(3) The meaning of the verb itself needs to be closely examined.

Definition.

218. The subjunctive mood is that form or use of the verb which expresses action or being, not as a fact, but as merely conceived of in the mind.

218. The subjunctive mood is the form or use of the verb that expresses action or being, not as a fact, but as something simply imagined in the mind.

Subjunctive in Independent Clauses.

I. Expressing a Wish.

219. The following are examples of this use:—

219. Here are some examples of this usage:—

Heaven rest her soul!—Moore.

Rest in peace!—Moore.

God grant you find one face there You loved when all was young.—Kingsley.

God grant you find a familiar face there you loved when everything was young.—Kingsley.

Now tremble dimples on your cheek, Sweet be your lips to taste and speak.—Beddoes.

Now tremble dimples on your cheek, Sweet be your lips to taste and speak.—Beddoes.

Long die thy happy days before thy death.—Shakespeare.

Long live your happy days before your death.—Shakespeare.

II. A Contingent Declaration or Question.

220. This really amounts to the conclusion, or principal clause, in a sentence, of which the condition is omitted.

220. This really comes down to the conclusion, or main part, of a sentence, where the condition is left out.

Our chosen specimen of the hero as literary man [if we were to choose one] would be this Goethe.—Carlyle.

Our selected example of the hero as a literary figure [if we had to pick one] would be this Goethe.—Carlyle.

I could lie down like a sleepy child,
And cry away the life of care
Which I have endured and still have to endure.
—Shelley.

Most excellent stranger, as you come to the lakes simply to see their loveliness, might it not be as well to ask after the most beautiful road, rather than the shortest?—De Quincey.

Most excellent stranger, as you come to the lakes just to admire their beauty, would it not be better to ask for the most beautiful road, rather than the shortest?—De Quincey.

Subjunctive in Dependent Clauses.

I. Condition or Supposition.

221. The most common way of representing the action or being as merely thought of, is by putting it into the form of a supposition or condition; as,—

221. The most common way to represent an action or existence as just a thought is by putting it in the form of a supposition or condition; for example,—

Now, if the fire of electricity and that of lightning be the same, this pasteboard and these scales may represent electrified clouds.—Franklin.

Now, if the fire of electricity and that of lightning are the same, this cardboard and these scales might represent electrified clouds.—Franklin.

Here no assertion is made that the two things are the same; but, if the reader merely conceives them for the moment to be the same, the writer can make the statement following. Again,—

Here, there's no claim that the two things are the same; however, if the reader just considers them to be the same for a moment, the writer can make the following statement. Again,—

If it be Sunday [supposing it to be Sunday], the peasants sit on the church steps and con their psalm books.—Longfellow.

If it is Sunday [assuming it’s Sunday], the peasants sit on the church steps and go over their psalm books.—Longfellow.

STUDY OF CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.

222. There are three kinds of conditional sentences:—

222. There are three types of conditional sentences:—

Real or true.

(1) Those in which an assumed or admitted fact is placed before the mind in the form of a condition (see Sec. 215, 2); for example,—

(1) These involve a fact that is assumed or acknowledged, presented to the mind as a condition (see Sec. 215, 2); for example,—

If they were unacquainted with the works of philosophers and poets, they were deeply read in the oracles of God. If their names were not found in the registers of heralds, they were recorded in the Book of Life.—Macaulay.

If they weren't familiar with the works of philosophers and poets, they were well-versed in the teachings of God. If their names weren't listed in the records of heralds, they were noted in the Book of Life.—Macaulay.

Ideal,—may or may not be true.

(2) Those in which the condition depends on something uncertain, and may or may not be regarded true, or be fulfilled; as,—

(2) Those where the condition relies on something uncertain, and might or might not be considered true, or be met; as,—

If, in our case, the representative system ultimately fail, popular government must be pronounced impossible.—D. Webster.

If our representative system ultimately fails, we must declare popular government impossible.—D. Webster.

If this be the glory of Julius, the first great founder of the Empire, so it is also the glory of Charlemagne, the second founder.—Bryce.

If this is the glory of Julius, the first great founder of the Empire, then it is also the glory of Charlemagne, the second founder.—Bryce.

If any man consider the present aspects of what is called by distinction society, he will see the need of these ethics. —Emerson.

If anyone thinks about the current state of what is commonly referred to as society, they'll recognize the necessity of these ethics. —Emerson.

Unreal—cannot be true.

(3) Suppositions contrary to fact, which cannot be true, or conditions that cannot be fulfilled, but are presented only in order to suggest what might be or might have been true; thus,—

(3) Assumptions contrary to fact, which can’t be true, or conditions that can’t be met, but are put forward just to imply what might be or might have been true; therefore,—

If these things were true, society could not hold together. —Lowell.

If these things were true, society couldn't stay together. —Lowell.

Did not my writings produce me some solid pudding, the great deficiency of praise would have quite discouraged me.—Franklin.

If my writings didn't give me some solid recognition, the lack of praise would have really discouraged me.—Franklin.

Had he for once cast all such feelings aside, and striven energetically to save Ney, it would have cast such an enhancing light over all his glories, that we cannot but regret its absence.—Bayne.

If he had for once set all those feelings aside and worked hard to save Ney, it would have added such a glowing light to all his achievements that we can't help but feel sorry it didn't happen.—Bayne.

NOTE.—Conditional sentences are usually introduced by if, though, except, unless, etc.; but when the verb precedes the subject, the conjunction is often omitted: for example, "Were I bidden to say how the highest genius could be most advantageously employed," etc.

NOTE.—Conditional sentences are usually started with if, though, except, unless, etc.; but when the verb comes before the subject, the conjunction is often left out: for example, "Were I invited to explain how the greatest talent could be used most effectively," etc.

Exercise.

In the following conditional clauses, tell whether each verb is indicative or subjunctive, and what kind of condition:—

In the following conditional clauses, identify whether each verb is indicative or subjunctive, and what type of condition it represents:—

1. The voice, if he speak to you, is of similar physiognomy, clear, melodious, and sonorous.—Carlyle.

1. If he speaks to you, his voice has a similar appearance, clear, melodic, and resonant.—Carlyle.

2. Were you so distinguished from your neighbors, would you, do you think, be any the happier?—Thackeray.

2. If you were so different from your neighbors, do you think you would be any happier?—Thackeray.

3. Epaminondas, if he was the man I take him for, would have sat still with joy and peace, if his lot had been mine.—Emerson.

3. Epaminondas, if he was the person I think he was, would have sat quietly with joy and peace if he had my situation.—Emerson.

4. If a damsel had the least smattering of literature, she was regarded as a prodigy.—Macaulay.

4. If a young woman had even a little bit of knowledge about literature, she was seen as a wonder.—Macaulay.

5. I told him, although it were the custom of our learned in Europe to steal inventions from each other,... yet I would take such caution that he should have the honor entire.—Swift.

5. I told him that even though it’s common for our scholars in Europe to copy each other's inventions,... I would be careful to ensure that he gets all the credit.—Fast.

6. If he had reason to dislike him, he had better not have written, since he [Byron] was dead.—N. P. Willis.

6. If he had a reason to dislike him, he should have refrained from writing, since he [Byron] was already dead.—N.P. Willis.

7. If it were prostrated to the ground by a profane hand, what native of the city would not mourn over its fall?—Gayarre.

7. If it were brought down to the ground by a disrespectful hand, which local resident wouldn't grieve over its downfall?—Gayarre.

8. But in no case could it be justified, except it be for a failure of the association or union to effect the object for which it was created.—Calhoun.

8. But in no case could it be justified, unless it was due to the association or union failing to achieve the purpose for which it was created.—Calhoun.

II. Subjunctive of Purpose.

223. The subjunctive, especially be, may, might, and should, is used to express purpose, the clause being introduced by that or lest; as,—

223. The subjunctive, especially be, may, might, and should, is used to express purpose, with the clause introduced by that or lest; as,—

It was necessary, he supposed, to drink strong beer, that he might be strong to labor.—Franklin.

It was necessary, he thought, to drink strong beer so that he could be strong enough to work.—Franklin.

I have been the more particular...that you may compare such unlikely beginnings with the figure I have since made there.—Id.

I have been more specific...that you can compare such unlikely beginnings with the person I have become since then.—Id.

He [Roderick] with sudden impulse that way rode, To tell of what had passed, lest in the strife They should engage with Julian's men.—Southey.

He [Roderick] rode in that direction suddenly, wanting to share what had happened, to avoid getting caught up in the conflict with Julian's men.—Southey.

III. Subjunctive of Result.

224. The subjunctive may represent the result toward which an action tends:—

224. The subjunctive can reflect the outcome that an action aims for:—

So many thoughts come and go,
It would be pointless for her to close her eyes. —Coleridge.
Live your life in such a way that when your time comes to join
The countless caravan...
You don't go, like the quarry slave at night.
—Bryant.

IV. In Temporal Clauses.

225. The English subjunctive, like the Latin, is sometimes used in a clause to express the time when an action is to take place.

225. The English subjunctive, just like in Latin, is sometimes used in a clause to indicate when an action is supposed to happen.

Let it rise, till it meet the sun in his coming.—D. Webster.

Let it rise until it meets the sun in its coming.—D. Webster.

Rise up, before it be too late!—Hawthorne.

Rise up, before it's too late!—Hawthorne.

But it won’t be long. Before this is thrown aside.
—Wordsworth.

V. In Indirect Questions.

226. The subjunctive is often found in indirect questions, the answer being regarded as doubtful.

226. The subjunctive is often used in indirect questions, where the answer is considered uncertain.

Ask the great man if there be none greater.—Emerson

Ask the great man if there is anyone greater.—Emerson

What the best arrangement were, none of us could say.—Carlyle.

What the best arrangement was, none of us could say.—Carlyle.

Whether it were morning or whether it were afternoon, in her confusion she had not distinctly known.—De Quincey.

Whether it was morning or whether it was afternoon, in her confusion she had not clearly known.—De Quincey.

VI. Expressing a Wish.

227. After a verb of wishing, the subjunctive is regularly used in the dependent clause.

227. After a verb expressing a wish, the subjunctive is typically used in the dependent clause.

The transmigiation of souls is no fable. I would it were! —Emerson.

The transmigration of souls is no myth. I wish it were! —Emerson.

Bright star! Would I were steadfast as thou art!—Keats.

Bright star! I wish I were as steady as you are!—Keats.

I've wished that little isle had wings, And we, inside its enchanting groves,
Were taken off to seas unknown.
—Moore.

VII. In a Noun Clause.

Subject.

228. The noun clause, in its various uses as subject, object, in apposition, etc., often contains a subjunctive.

228. The noun clause, in its different uses as a subject, object, in apposition, etc., often includes a subjunctive.

The essence of originality is not that it be new.—Carlyle

The essence of originality isn't that it has to be new.—Carlyle

Apposition or logical subject.

To appreciate the wild and sharp flavors of those October fruits, it is necessary that you be breathing the sharp October or November air.—Thoreau.

To really enjoy the bold and intense flavors of those October fruits, you need to be breathing in that crisp October or November air.—Thoreau.

Complement.

The first merit, that which admits neither substitute nor equivalent, is, that everything be in its place.—Coleridge.

The first advantage, which has no substitute or equivalent, is that everything is in its place.—Coleridge.

Object.

As sure as Heaven shall rescue me, I have no thought what men they be.—Coleridge.

As certain as Heaven will save me, I have no idea what kind of men they are. —Coleridge.

Some might lament that I were cold.—Shelley.

Some might lament that I was cold.—Shelley.

After verbs of commanding.

This subjunctive is very frequent after verbs of commanding.

This subjunctive is very common after verbs of commanding.

See that there be no traitors in your camp.—Tennyson.

See that there are no traitors in your camp.—Tennyson.

Come, tell me everything you’ve seen,
And look, you tell me true. —Scott.

See that thy scepter be heavy on his head.—De Quincey.

See that your scepter is heavy on his head.—De Quincey.

VIII. Concessive Clauses.

229. The concession may be expressed—

The concession may be stated—

(1) In the nature of the verb; for example,—

(1) In the nature of the verb; for example,—

Be the matter how it may, Gabriel Grub was afflicted with rheumatism to the end of his days.—Dickens.

No matter how it was, Gabriel Grub suffered from rheumatism until the end of his life.—Dickens.

Be the appeal made to the understanding or the heart, the sentence is the same—that rejects it.—Brougham

Whether the appeal is made to the mind or the heart, the result is the same—rejection.—Brougham

(2) By an indefinite relative word, which may be

(2) By an indefinite relative word, which may be

(a) Pronoun.

(a) Pronoun.

Whatever happens, we'll turn aside,
And check out the Braes of Yarrow.
—Wordsworth.

(b) Adjective.

Adjective.

That hunger of applause, of cash, or whatsoever victual it may be, is the ultimate fact of man's life.—Carlyle.

That craving for applause, money, or whatever it may be, is the ultimate truth of human life. —Carlyle.

(c) Adverb.

(c) Adverb.

Wherever he dreams under mountain or stream, The spirit he loves stays. —Shelley.

Prevalence of the Subjunctive Mood.

230. As shown by the wide range of literature from which these examples are selected, the subjunctive is very much used in literary English, especially by those who are artistic and exact in the expression of their thought.

230. As demonstrated by the wide variety of literature from which these examples are taken, the subjunctive is frequently used in literary English, particularly by those who are creative and precise in expressing their ideas.

At the present day, however, the subjunctive is becoming less and less used. Very many of the sentences illustrating the use of the subjunctive mood could be replaced by numerous others using the indicative to express the same thoughts.

Nowadays, however, the subjunctive is being used less and less. Many of the sentences showing how the subjunctive mood works could be swapped for several others using the indicative to convey the same ideas.

The three uses of the subjunctive now most frequent are, to express a wish, a concession, and condition contrary to fact.

The three most common uses of the subjunctive now are to express a wish, a concession, and a condition that contradicts reality.

In spoken English, the subjunctive were is much used in a wish or a condition contrary to fact, but hardly any other subjunctive forms are.

In spoken English, the subjunctive were is commonly used to express a wish or a situation that is not true, but very few other subjunctive forms are.

It must be remembered, though, that many of the verbs in the subjunctive have the same form as the indicative. Especially is this true of unreal conditions in past time; for example,—

It should be noted, however, that many of the verbs in the subjunctive have the same form as those in the indicative. This is especially true for unreal conditions in the past; for example,—

Were we of open sense as the Greeks were, we had found [should have found] a poem here.—Carlyle.

If we had the same open-mindedness as the Greeks, we would have discovered a poem here.—Carlyle.

IMPERATIVE MOOD.

Definition.

231. The imperative mood is the form of the verb used in direct commands, entreaties, or requests.

231. The imperative mood is the verb form used for direct commands, pleas, or requests.

Usually second person.

232. The imperative is naturally used mostly with the second person, since commands are directed to a person addressed.

232. The imperative is mainly used with the second person, as commands are directed at the person being addressed.

(1) Command.

Order.

Call up the shades of Demosthenes and Cicero to vouch for your words; point to their immortal works.—J. Q. Adams.

Invoke the spirits of Demosthenes and Cicero to back up your words; refer to their timeless works.—J. Q. Adams.

Honor all men; love all men; fear none.—Channing.

Respect everyone; love everyone; fear none. —Channing.

(2) Entreaty.

Request.

Oh, from these serious features of your face
Spare me and my loved ones, and don’t let us face the anger. Of the wild untamed elements.
—Bryant.

(3) Request.

Request.

"Hush! mother," whispered Kit. "Come along with me."—Dickens

"Hush! Mom," whispered Kit. "Come with me."—Dickens

Tell me, how was it you thought of coming here?—Id.

Tell me, how did you think of coming here?—Id.

Sometimes with first person in the plural.

But the imperative may be used with the plural of the first person. Since the first person plural person is not really I + I, but I + you, or I + they, etc., we may use the imperative with we in a command, request, etc., to you implied in it. This is scarcely ever found outside of poetry.

But the imperative can also be used with the plural form of the first person. Since the first person plural isn't just I + I, but I + you, or I + they, etc., we can use the imperative with we in a command or request, etc., addressing you implicitly. This is rarely seen outside of poetry.

We part in friendship from your land,
And, noble earl, take my hand.
—Scott.
Then let’s not seek their camp—for there The silence holds my despair. —Campbell.
Let's break our watch up.
—Shakespeare.

Usually this is expressed by let with the objective: "Let us go." And the same with the third person: "Let him be accursed."

Usually this is expressed by let with the objective: "Let us go." And the same with the third person: "Let him be accursed."

Exercises on the Moods.

(a) Tell the mood of each verb in these sentences, and what special use it is of that mood:—

(a) Identify the mood of each verb in these sentences and explain its specific use:—

1. Wherever the standard of freedom and independence has been or shall be unfurled, there will her heart and her prayers be.

1. Wherever the banner of freedom and independence has been or will be raised, there will be her heart and her prayers.

2.

2.

Notice this difference, child of earth!
While everyone plays their part,
Not everything that can be said is valuable.
The heart's silence.

3. Oh, that I might be admitted to thy presence! that mine were the supreme delight of knowing thy will!

3. Oh, how I wish I could be with you! How wonderful it would be to know what you want!

4.

4.

It would be worth ten years of peaceful life,
One look at their array!

5. Whatever inconvenience ensue, nothing is to be preferred before justice.

5. No matter what inconvenience arises, nothing should take precedence over justice.

6.

6.

The bright sun would catch it at sunset. And use it for an anvil until he had filled it. The shelves of heaven with flaming thunderbolts.

7.

7.

Meet what changes should control. Our existence, so we don't stagnate in comfort.

8.

8.

She said, "The Devil take the goose,
And God forget the stranger!

9. Think not that I speak for your sakes.

9. Don't think that I'm speaking for your benefit.

10. "Now tread we a measure!" said young Lochinvar.

10. "Now let’s dance!" said young Lochinvar.

11. Were that a just return? Were that Roman magnanimity?

11. Was that a fair response? Was that Roman generosity?

12. Well; how he may do his work, whether he do it right or wrong, or do it at all, is a point which no man in the world has taken the pains to think of.

12. Well; how he does his work, whether he does it right or wrong, or if he does it at all, is something that no one in the world has bothered to consider.

13. He is, let him live where else he like, in what pomps and prosperities he like, no literary man.

13. He can live wherever he wants and enjoy whatever success he chooses, but he is not a literary person.

14. Could we one day complete the immense figure which these flagrant points compose!

14. Could we ever fully understand the huge picture created by these obvious issues!

15. "Oh, then, my dear madam," cried he, "tell me where I may find my poor, ruined, but repentant child."

15. "Oh, then, my dear lady," he exclaimed, "please tell me where I can find my poor, broken, but remorseful child."

16.

16.

Will that bundle of darts not fall unbound,
Unless, stripped of your empty earthly pride,
Do you bring it to be blessed where saints and angels gather?

17.

17.

Forget yourself to marble, till
With a heavy, sad gaze looking down You fix them on the earth as securely.

18.

18.

He, as if a tool,
Blew imitations of hoots to the quiet owls,
That they might respond to him.

19.

19.

From the moss, violets and jonquils peek,
And send their sharp scent through the brain,
Until you might faint from that delightful pain.

20. That a man parade his doubt, and get to imagine that debating and logic is the triumph and true work of what intellect he has; alas! this is as if you should overturn the tree.

20. It’s sad that a man displays his doubt and believes that debating and logic are the true achievements of his intellect; it’s like trying to topple a tree.

21.

21.

The rich soil nourishes your sprawling roots. That deeply strikes!
The northern morning shines over you, High up in silver spikes!

22. Though abyss open under abyss, and opinion displace opinion, all are at last contained in the Eternal cause.

22. Even though one depth opens beneath another and one opinion replaces another, in the end, everything is encompassed by the Eternal cause.

23. God send Rome one such other sight!

23. May God grant Rome another sight like that!

24. "Mr. Marshall," continued Old Morgan, "see that no one mentions the United States to the prisoner."

24. "Mr. Marshall," Old Morgan went on, "make sure nobody brings up the United States in front of the prisoner."

25. If there is only one woman in the nation who claims the right to vote, she ought to have it.

25. If there’s only one woman in the country who claims the right to vote, she should have it.

26. Though he were dumb, it would speak.

26. Even if he were quiet, it would still speak.

27. Meantime, whatever she did,—whether it were in display of her own matchless talents, or whether it were as one member of a general party,—nothing could exceed the amiable, kind, and unassuming deportment of Mrs. Siddons.

27. In the meantime, no matter what she did—whether it was showcasing her incredible talents or participating as part of a group—nothing could match the friendly, generous, and humble behavior of Mrs. Siddons.

28. It makes a great difference to the force of any sentence whether there be a man behind it or no.

28. It makes a big difference to the impact of any sentence whether there's a person behind it or not.

(b) Find sentences with five verbs in the indicative mood, five in the subjunctive, five in the imperative.

(b) Find sentences with five verbs in the indicative mood, five in the subjunctive, and five in the imperative.

TENSE.

Definition.

233. Tense means time. The tense of a verb is the form or use indicating the time of an action or being.

233. Tense means time. The tense of a verb is the form or usage that shows when an action is taking place or when something exists.

Tenses in English.

Old English had only two tenses,—the present tense, which represented present and future time; and the past tense. We still use the present for the future in such expressions as, "I go away to-morrow;" "If he comes, tell him to wait."

Old English had just two tenses: the present tense, which indicated both present and future time, and the past tense. We still use the present for the future in phrases like, "I go away tomorrow;" "If he comes, tell him to wait."

But English of the present day not only has a tense for each of the natural time divisions,—present, past, and future,—but has other tenses to correspond with those of highly inflected languages, such as Latin and Greek.

But modern English not only has a tense for each of the natural time divisions—present, past, and future—but it also has other tenses to match those of highly inflected languages like Latin and Greek.

The distinct inflections are found only in the present and past tenses, however: the others are compounds of verbal forms with various helping verbs, called auxiliaries; such as be, have, shall, will.

The unique inflections are only present in the present and past tenses; the others are compounds of verb forms with different helping verbs, known as auxiliaries; such as be, have, shall, will.

The tenses in detail.

234. Action or being may be represented as occurring in present, past, or future time, by means of the present, the past, and the future tense. It may also be represented as finished in present or past or future time by means of the present perfect, past perfect, and future perfect tenses.

234. Action or existence can be shown as happening in the present, past, or future through the present, past, and future tenses. It can also be indicated as completed in the present, past, or future with the present perfect, past perfect, and future perfect tenses.

Not only is this so: there are what are called definite forms of these tenses, showing more exactly the time of the action or being. These make the English speech even more exact than other languages, as will be shown later on, in the conjugations.

Not only is this true: there are what are called definite forms of these tenses, which indicate more precisely the time of the action or state. These make English speech even more precise than other languages, as will be demonstrated later in the conjugations.

PERSON AND NUMBER.

235. The English verb has never had full inflections for number and person, as the classical languages have.

235. The English verb has never had complete inflections for number and person like classical languages do.

When the older pronoun thou was in use, there was a form of the verb to correspond to it, or agree with it, as, "Thou walkest," present; "Thou walkedst," past; also, in the third person singular, a form ending in -eth, as, "It is not in man that walketh, to direct his steps."

When the older pronoun thou was used, there was a verb form that matched it, such as "Thou walkest," for present tense; "Thou walkedst," for past tense; and also, in the third person singular, a form ending in -eth, like in, "It is not in man that walketh, to direct his steps."

But in ordinary English of the present day there is practically only one ending for person and number. This is the third person, singular number; as, "He walks;" and this only in the present tense indicative. This is important in questions of agreement when we come to syntax.

But in everyday English today, there is basically only one ending for person and number. This is the third person, singular; for example, "He walks;" and this applies only in the present tense indicative. This is important when discussing agreement in syntax.

CONJUGATION.

Definition.

236. Conjugation is the regular arrangement of the forms of the verb in the various voices, moods, tenses, persons, and numbers.

236. Conjugation is the regular setup of the different forms of a verb across various voices, moods, tenses, persons, and numbers.

In classical languages, conjugation means joining together the numerous endings to the stem of the verb; but in English, inflections are so few that conjugation means merely the exhibition of the forms and the different verb phrases that express the relations of voice, mood, tense, etc.

In classical languages, conjugation means joining together the many endings to the base of the verb; but in English, inflections are so limited that conjugation simply refers to showing the forms and the various verb phrases that express the relationships of voice, mood, tense, etc.

Few forms.

237. Verbs in modern English have only four or five forms; for example, walk has walk, walks, walked, walking, sometimes adding the old forms walkest, walkedst, walketh. Such verbs as choose have five,—choose, chooses, chose, choosing, chosen (old, choosest, chooseth, chosest).

237. Verbs in modern English have only four or five forms; for example, walk has walk, walks, walked, walking, sometimes adding the old forms walkest, walkedst, walketh. Verbs like choose have five forms—choose, chooses, chose, choosing, chosen (old forms are choosest, chooseth, chosest).

The verb be has more forms, since it is composed of several different roots,—am, are, is, were, been, etc.

The verb be has more forms because it comes from several different roots—am, are, is, were, been, etc.

238. INFLECTIONS OF THE VERB BE.

238. FORMS OF THE VERB BE.

Indicative Mood.

PRESENT TENSE. PAST TENSE.
Singular Plural Singular Plural
1. I am We are 1. I was We were
2. You are
(thou art)
You are 2. You were
(thou wast, wert)
You were
3. [He] is [They] are 3. [He] was [They were]

Subjunctive Mood.

PRESENT TENSE. PAST TENSE.
Singular Plural Singular Plural
1. I be We be 1. I were We were
2. You (thou) be You be 2. You were
(thou wert)
You were
3. [He] be [They] be 3. [He] were [They] were

Imperative Mood.

PRESENT TENSE
Singular and Plural
Be.
Remarks on the verb be.

239. This conjugation is pieced out with three different roots: (1) am, is; (2) was, were; (3) be.

239. This conjugation consists of three different roots: (1) am, is; (2) was, were; (3) be.

Instead of the plural are, Old English had beoth and sind or sindon, same as the German sind. Are is supposed to have come from the Norse language.

Instead of the plural are, Old English used beoth and sind or sindon, just like the German sind. Are is believed to have originated from the Norse language.

The old indicative third person plural be is sometimes found in literature, though it is usually a dialect form; for example,—

The old third person plural form of be is sometimes found in literature, though it usually appears as a dialect form; for example,—

Where be the sentries who used to salute as the Royal chariots drove in and out?—Thackeray

Where are the guards who used to salute as the royal chariots came and went?—Thackeray

Where be the gloomy shades, and desolate mountains?—Whittier

Where are the gloomy shadows and desolate mountains? —Whittier

Uses of be.

240. The forms of the verb be have several uses:—

240. The forms of the verb be have several uses:—

(1) As principal verbs.

As main verbs.

The light that never was on sea and land.—Wordsworth.

The light that never existed on sea and land.—Wordsworth.

(2) As auxiliary verbs, in four ways,—

(2) As helping verbs, in four ways,—

(a) With verbal forms in -ing (imperfect participle) to form the definite tenses.

(a) Using verbal forms ending in -ing (imperfect participle) to create the definite tenses.

Broadswords are maddening in the rear,—Each broadsword bright was brandishing like beam of light.—Scott.

Broadswords are frustrating in the back,—Each broadsword bright was swinging like a beam of light.—Scott.

(b) With the past participle in -ed, -en, etc., to form the passive voice.

(b) Use the past participle in -ed, -en, etc., to create the passive voice.

Through serious vision and shining silver dream,
His infancy was nurtured.
—Shelley.

(c) With past participle of intransitive verbs, being equivalent to the present perfect and past perfect tenses active; as,

(c) With the past participle of intransitive verbs, it’s equivalent to the present perfect and past perfect tenses in active voice; as,

When we're gone From every object precious to human eyes.
—Wordsworth

We drank tea, which was now become an occasional banquet.—Goldsmith.

We drank tea, which had now become an occasional banquet.—Goldsmith.

(d) With the infinitive, to express intention, obligation, condition, etc.; thus,

(d) With the infinitive, to express intention, obligation, condition, etc.; thus,

It was to have been called the Order of Minerva.—Thackeray.

It was supposed to be named the Order of Minerva.—Thackeray.

Ingenuity and cleverness are to be rewarded by State prizes.—Id.

Ingenuity and cleverness will be rewarded with State prizes.—Id.

If I were to explain the motion of a body falling to the ground.—Burke

If I were to explain how a body falls to the ground.—Burke

241. INFLECTIONS OF THE VERB CHOOSE.

241. FORMS OF THE VERB CHOOSE.

Indicative Mood.

PRESENT TENSE. PAST TENSE.
Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural.
1. I choose We choose 1. I chose We chose
2. You choose You choose 2. You chose You chose
3. [He] chooses [They] choose 3. [He] chose [They] chose

Subjunctive Mood.

PRESENT TENSE. PAST TENSE.
Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural.
1. I choose We choose 1. I chose We chose
2. You choose You choose 2. You chose You chose
3. [He] choose [They] choose 3. [He] chose [They] chose

Imperative Mood.

PRESENT TENSE
Singular and Plural
Choose.

FULL CONJUGATION OF THE VERB CHOOSE.

Machinery of a verb in the voices, tenses, etc.

242. In addition to the above inflected forms, there are many periphrastic or compound forms, made up of auxiliaries with the infinitives and participles. Some of these have been indicated in Sec. 240, (2).

242. Besides the forms mentioned above, there are many periphrastic or compound forms, which consist of auxiliary verbs combined with infinitives and participles. Some of these have been noted in Sec. 240, (2).

The ordinary tenses yet to be spoken of are made up as follows:—

The everyday tenses that still need to be discussed are formed as follows:—

(1) Future tense, by using shall and will with the simple or root form of the verb; as, "I shall be," "He will choose."

(1) Future tense, by using shall and will with the simple or root form of the verb; for example, "I shall be," "He will choose."

(2) Present perfect, past perfect, future perfect, tenses, by placing have, had, and shall (or will) have before the past participle of any verb; as, "I have gone" (present perfect), "I had gone" (past perfect), "I shall have gone" (future perfect).

(2) Present perfect, past perfect, future perfect, tenses, by placing have, had, and shall (or will) have before the past participle of any verb; for example, "I have gone" (present perfect), "I had gone" (past perfect), "I shall have gone" (future perfect).

(3) The definite form of each tense, by using auxiliaries with the imperfect participle active; as, "I am running," "They had been running."

(3) The definite form of each tense, using auxiliaries with the active present participle; for example, "I am running," "They had been running."

(4) The passive forms, by using the forms of the verb be before the past participle of verbs; as, "I was chosen," "You are chosen."

(4) The passive forms use forms of the verb be before the past participle of verbs; for example, "I was chosen," "You are chosen."

243. The following scheme will show how rich our language is in verb phrases to express every variety of meaning. Only the third person, singular number, of each tense, will be given.

243. The following scheme will show how rich our language is in verb phrases to convey every type of meaning. Only the third person, singular form, of each tense will be provided.

ACTIVE VOICE.

Indicative Mood.
Present. He chooses.
Present definite. He is choosing.
Past. He chose.
Past definite. He was choosing.
Future. He will choose.
Future definite. He will he choosing.
Present perfect. He has chosen.
Present perfect definite. He has been choosing.
Past perfect. He had chosen.
Past perfect definite. He had been choosing.
Future perfect. He will have chosen.
Future perfect definite. He will have been choosing.

Subjunctive Mood.
Present. [If, though, lest, etc.] he choose.
Present definite. " he be choosing.
Past. " he chose (or were to choose).
Past definite. " he were choosing (or were to be choosing).
Present perfect. " he have chosen.
Present perfect definite. " he have been choosing.
Past perfect. " Same as indicative.
Past perfect definite. " Same as indicative.
Imperative Mood.
Present. (2d per.) Choose.
Present definite. " Be choosing.

NOTE.—Since participles and infinitives are not really verbs, but verbals, they will be discussed later (Sec. 262).

NOTE.—Since participles and infinitives aren't actually verbs, but verbal forms, they will be discussed later (Sec. 262).

PASSIVE VOICE.

Indicative Mood.
Present. He is chosen.
Present definite. He is being chosen.
Past. He was chosen.
Past definite. He was being chosen.
Future. He will be chosen.
Future definite. None.
Present perfect. He has been chosen.
Present perfect definite. None.
Past perfect. He had been chosen.
Past perfect definite. None.
Future perfect. He will have been chosen.
Future perfect definite. None.
Subjunctive Mood.
Present.. [If, though, lest, etc.] he be chosen.
Present definite. " None.
Past. " he were chosen (or were to be chosen).
Past definite. " he were being chosen.
Present perfect. " he have been chosen.
Present perfect definite. " None.
Past Perfect. " he had been chosen.
Past perfect definite. " None.
Imperative Mood.
Present tense. (2d per.) Be chosen.

Also, in affirmative sentences, the indicative present and past tenses have emphatic forms made up of do and did with the infinitive or simple form; as, "He does strike," "He did strike."

Also, in affirmative sentences, the present and past indicative tenses have emphatic forms made up of do and did followed by the base form; for example, "He does strike," "He did strike."

[Note to Teacher.—This table is not to be learned now; if learned at all, it should be as practice work on strong and weak verb forms. Exercises should be given, however, to bring up sentences containing such of these conjugation forms as the pupil will find readily in literature.]

[Note to Teacher.—This table shouldn't be memorized right now; if it is to be learned at all, it should be through practice on strong and weak verb forms. However, exercises should be provided that include sentences featuring any of these conjugation forms that students will easily encounter in literature.]

VERBS CLASSIFIED ACCORDING TO FORM.

Kinds.

244. According to form, verbs are strong or weak.

According to form, verbs are strong or weak.

Definition.

A strong verb forms its past tense by changing the vowel of the present tense form, but adds no ending; as, run, ran; drive, drove.

A strong verb creates its past tense by changing the vowel in the present tense form, but it doesn't add any ending; for example, run, ran; drive, drove.

A weak verb always adds an ending to the present to form the past tense, and may or may not change the vowel: as, beg, begged; lay, laid; sleep, slept; catch, caught.

A weak verb always adds an ending in the present to create the past tense, and might or might not change the vowel: for example, beg, begged; lay, laid; sleep, slept; catch, caught.

245. TABLE OF STRONG VERBS.

245. TABLE OF POWERFUL VERBS.

NOTE. Some of these also have weak forms, which are in parentheses

NOTE. Some of these also have weak forms, which are in parentheses.

Present Tense. Past Tense. Past Participle.
abide abode abode
arise arose arisen
awake awoke (awaked) awoke (awaked)
bear bore borne (active)born (passive)
begin began begun
behold beheld beheld
bid bade, bid bidden, bid
bind bound bound,[adj. bounden]
bite bit bitten, bit
blow blew blown
break broke broken
chide chid chidden, chid
choose chose chosen
cleave clove, clave (cleft) cloven (cleft)
climb [clomb] climbed climbed
cling clung clung
come came come
crow crew (crowed) (crowed)
dig dug dug
do did done
draw drew drawn
drink drank drunk, drank[adj. drunken]
drive drove driven
eat ate, eat eaten, eat
fall fell fallen
fight fought fought
find found found
fling flung flung
fly flew flown
forbear forbore forborne
forget forgot forgotten
forsake forsook forsaken
freeze froze frozen
get got got [gotten]
give gave given
go went gone
grind ground ground
grow grew grown
hang hung (hanged) hung (hanged)
hold held held
know knew known
lie lay lain
ride rode ridden
ring rang rung
run ran run
see saw seen
shake shook shaken
shear shore (sheared) shorn (sheared)
shine shone shone
shoot shot shot
shrink shrank or shrunk shrunk
shrive shrove shriven
sing sang or sung sung
sink sank or sunk sunk [adj. sunken]
sit sat [sate] sat
slay slew slain
slide slid slidden, slid
sling slung slung
slink slunk slunk
smite smote smitten
speak spoke spoken
spin spun spun
spring sprang, sprung sprung
stand stood stood
stave stove (staved) (staved)
steal stole stolen
stick stuck stuck
sting stung stung
stink stunk, stank stunk
stride strode stridden
strike struck struck, stricken
string strung strung
strive strove striven
swear swore sworn
swim swam or swum swum
swing swung swung
take took taken
tear tore torn
thrive throve (thrived) thriven (thrived)
throw threw thrown
tread trod trodden, trod
wear wore worn
weave wove woven
win won won
wind wound wound
wring wrung wrung
write wrote written

Remarks on Certain Verb Forms.

246. Several of the perfect participles are seldom used except as adjectives: as, "his bounden duty," "the cloven hoof," "a drunken wretch," "a sunken snag." Stricken is used mostly of diseases; as, "stricken with paralysis."

246. Many of the perfect participles are rarely used outside of being adjectives: for example, "his bounden duty," "the cloven hoof," "a drunken wretch," "a sunken snag." Stricken is mostly used in relation to illnesses, as in "stricken with paralysis."

The verb bear (to bring forth) is peculiar in having one participle (borne) for the active, and another (born) for the passive. When it means to carry or to endure, borne is also a passive.

The verb bear (to bring forth) is unusual because it has one participle (borne) for the active form and a different one (born) for the passive form. When it means to carry or endure, borne is also a passive form.

The form clomb is not used in prose, but is much used in vulgar English, and sometimes occurs in poetry; as,—

The form clomb isn’t used in written language, but it’s common in informal English and can sometimes be found in poetry; as,—

Thou hast clomb aloft.—Wordsworth

You have climbed high.—Wordsworth

Or pine grove whither woodman never clomb.—Coleridge

Or pine grove where no woodman has ever climbed.—Coleridge

The forms of cleave are really a mixture of two verbs,—one meaning to adhere or cling; the other, to split. The former used to be cleave, cleaved, cleaved; and the latter, cleave, clave or clove, cloven. But the latter took on the weak form cleft in the past tense and past participle,—as (from Shakespeare), "O Hamlet! thou hast cleft my heart in twain,"—while cleave (to cling) sometimes has clove, as (from Holmes), "The old Latin tutor clove to Virgilius Maro." In this confusion of usage, only one set remains certain,—cleave, cleft, cleft (to split).

The forms of cleave are really a mix of two verbs—one meaning to stick or cling; the other, to divide. The first used to be cleave, cleaved, cleaved; and the second, cleave, clave or clove, cloven. But the second took on the weak form cleft in the past tense and past participle—as (from Shakespeare), "O Hamlet! you have cleft my heart in two,"—while cleave (to cling) sometimes has clove, as (from Holmes), "The old Latin tutor clove to Virgilius Maro." In this confusion of usage, only one set remains certain—cleave, cleft, cleft (to divide).

Crew is seldom found in present-day English.

Crew is rarely used in modern English.

Not a cock crew, nor a dog barked.—Irving.

Not a rooster crowed, nor a dog barked.—Irving.

Our cock, which always crew at eleven, now told us it was time for repose.—Goldsmith.

Our rooster, which always crows at eleven, now told us it was time to rest.—Jeweler.

Historically, drunk is the one correct past participle of the verb drink. But drunk is very much used as an adjective, instead of drunken (meaning intoxicated); and, probably to avoid confusion with this, drank is a good deal used as a past participle: thus,—

Historically, drunk is the only correct past participle of the verb drink. However, drunk is often used as an adjective instead of drunken (meaning intoxicated); and, probably to avoid confusion with this, drank is frequently used as a past participle: thus,—

We had each drank three times at the well.—B. Taylor.

We had each drunk three times at the well.—B. Taylor.

This liquor was generally drank by Wood and Billings. —Thackeray.

This liquor was generally drunk by Wood and Billings. —Thackeray.

Sometimes in literary English, especially in that of an earlier period, it is found that the verb eat has the past tense and past participle eat (ĕt), instead of ate and eaten; as, for example,—

Sometimes in literary English, especially from an earlier time, the verb eat is seen with the past tense and past participle eat (ĕt), rather than ate and eaten; for example,—

It ate the food it ne'er had eat.—Coleridge.

It ate the food it had never eaten.—Coleridge.

How fairy Mab the junkets eat.—Milton.

How fairy Mab the junkets eat.—Milton.

The island princes are too bold Have consume our substance.
—Tennyson.

This is also very much used in spoken and vulgar English.

This is also commonly used in casual and informal English.

The form gotten is little used, got being the preferred form of past participle as well as past tense. One example out of many is,—

The form gotten is rarely used, got being the preferred past participle and past tense. One example out of many is,—

We had all got safe on shore.—De Foe.

We all made it to shore safely. —De Foe.

Hung and hanged both are used as the past tense and past participle of hang; but hanged is the preferred form when we speak of execution by hanging; as,

Hung and hanged are both used as the past tense and past participle of hang, but hanged is the preferred form when referring to execution by hanging; as,

The butler was hanged.—Bible.

The butler was hanged.—Bible.

The verb sat is sometimes spelled sate; for example,—

The verb sat is sometimes spelled sate; for example,—

Might we have sate and talked where gowans blow.—Wordsworth.

Might we have sate and talked where daisies grow.—Wordsworth.

He sate him down, and seized a pen.—Byron.

He sat him down and grabbed a pen.—Byron.

"But I sate still and finished my plaiting."—Kingsley.

"But I sat still and finished my braiding."—Kingsley.

Usually shear is a weak verb. Shorn and shore are not commonly used: indeed, shore is rare, even in poetry.

Usually shear is a weak verb. Shorn and shore are not commonly used; in fact, shore is rare, even in poetry.

Hearing this, Geraint reached for his sword,
Shore through the dark neck. —Tennyson.

Shorn is used sometimes as a participial adjective, as "a shorn lamb," but not much as a participle. We usually say, "The sheep were sheared" instead of "The sheep were shorn."

Shorn is sometimes used as a participial adjective, as in "a shorn lamb," but it's not commonly used as a participle. We usually say, "The sheep were sheared" instead of "The sheep were shorn."

Went is borrowed as the past tense of go from the old verb wend, which is seldom used except in poetry; for example,—

Went is taken as the past tense of go from the old verb wend, which is rarely used except in poetry; for example,—

If you, maiden, would go with me To leave both the tower and the town.
—Scott.

Exercises.

Exercises.

(a) From the table (Sec. 245), make out lists of verbs having the same vowel changes as each of the following:—

(a) From the table (Sec. 245), create lists of verbs that have the same vowel changes as each of the following:—

  • 1. Fall, fell, fallen.
  • 2. Begin, began, begun.
  • 3. Find, found, found.
  • 4. Give, gave, given.
  • 5. Drive, drove, driven.
  • 6. Throw, threw, thrown.
  • 7. Fling, flung, flung.
  • 8. Break, broke, broken.
  • 9. Shake, shook, shaken.
  • 10. Freeze, froze, frozen.

(b) Find sentences using ten past-tense forms of strong verbs.

(b) Find sentences using ten past-tense forms of strong verbs.

(c) Find sentences using ten past participles of strong verbs.

(c) Find sentences using ten past participles of strong verbs.

[To the Teacher,—These exercises should be continued for several lessons, for full drill on the forms.]

[To the Teacher,—These exercises should be continued for several lessons to thoroughly practice the forms.]

DEFECTIVE STRONG VERBS.

247. There are several verbs which are lacking in one or more principal parts. They are as follows:—

247. There are several verbs that are missing one or more of their main forms. They are as follows:—

PRESENT. PAST. PRESENT. PAST.
may might [ought] ought
can could shall should
[must] must will would

248. May is used as either indicative or subjunctive, as it has two meanings. It is indicative when it expresses permission, or, as it sometimes does, ability, like the word can: it is subjunctive when it expresses doubt as to the reality of an action, or when it expresses wish, purpose, etc.

248. "May" can be used in either an indicative or subjunctive way because it has two meanings. It's indicative when it shows permission or, at times, ability, similar to the word can: it's subjunctive when it indicates doubt about whether an action is real, or when it conveys a wish, purpose, etc.

Indicative Use: Permission. Ability.

If I may lightly employ the Miltonic figure, "far off his coming shines."—Winier.

If I may casually use the Miltonic phrase, "far off his coming shines."—Winier.

A young arm might sway
A mass that no priest could perform.
—Scott.

His superiority none might question.—Channing.

His superiority no one could question.—Channing.

Subjunctive use.

In whatever manner the separate parts of a constitution may be arranged, there is one general principle, etc.—Paine.

In whatever way the different parts of a constitution can be organized, there is one fundamental principle, etc.—Paine.

(See also Sec. 223.)
And from her beautiful and pure flesh
May violets bloom!
—Shakespeare.

249. Can is used in the indicative only. The l in could did not belong there originally, but came through analogy with should and would. Could may be subjunctive, as in Sec. 220.

249. Can is only used in the indicative form. The l in could wasn't originally part of the word but came about through comparison with should and would. Could might also be considered subjunctive, as discussed in Sec. 220.

250. Must is historically a past-tense form, from the obsolete verb motan, which survives in the sentence, "So mote it be." Must is present or past tense, according to the infinitive used.

250. Must is originally a past-tense form from the outdated verb motan, which is still seen in the phrase, "So mote it be." Must acts as either present or past tense, depending on the infinitive used.

All must concede to him a sublime power of action.—Channing

All must concede to him an extraordinary ability to take action.—Channing

This, of course, must have been an ocular deception.—Hawthorne.

This, of course, must have been an optical illusion.—Hawthorne.

251. The same remarks apply to ought, which is historically the past tense of the verb owe. Like must, it is used only in the indicative mood; as,

251. The same comments apply to ought, which is historically the past tense of the verb owe. Like must, it's used only in the indicative mood; as,

The just imputations on our own faith ought first to be removed.... Have we valuable territories and important posts...which ought long since to have been surrendered?—A. Hamilton.

The rightful accusations about our own beliefs should first be addressed.... Do we have valuable lands and key positions that should have been given up a long time ago?—Hamilton.

It will be noticed that all the other defective verbs take the pure infinitive without to, while ought always has to.

It will be noticed that all the other defective verbs take the pure infinitive without to, while ought always has to.

Shall and Will.

252. The principal trouble in the use of shall and will is the disposition, especially in the United States, to use will and would, to the neglect of shall and should, with pronouns of the first person; as, "I think I will go."

252. The main issue with using shall and will is the tendency, especially in the United States, to use will and would, while neglecting shall and should, with first-person pronouns; for example, "I think I will go."

Uses of shall and should.

The following distinctions must be observed:—

The following distinctions must be observed:—

(1) With the FIRST PERSON, shall and should are used,—

(1) In the FIRST PERSON, shall and should are used,—

Futurity and questions—first person.

(a) In making simple statements or predictions about future time; as,—

(a) When making basic statements or predictions about the future; for example,—

The time will come full soon, I shall be gone.—L. C. Moulton.

The time will come very soon, I will be gone.—L.C. Moulton.

(b) In questions asking for orders, or implying obligation or authority resting upon the subject; as,—

(b) In questions that ask for commands, or suggest an obligation or authority that applies to the subject; as,—

With respect to novels, what shall I say?—N. Webster.

With respect to novels, what should I say?—N. Webster.

How shall I describe the luster which at that moment burst upon my vision?—C. Brockden Brown.

How should I describe the brilliance that suddenly filled my sight?—C. Brockden Brown.

Second and third persons.

(2) With the SECOND AND THIRD PERSONS, shall and should are used,—

(2) With the SECOND AND THIRD PERSONS, shall and should are used,—

(a) To express authority, in the form of command, promise, or confident prediction. The following are examples:—

(a) To show authority through commands, promises, or confident predictions. Here are some examples:—

Never mind, my lad, whilst I live thou shalt never want a friend to stand by thee.—Irving.

Never mind, my boy, as long as I’m alive, you will never lack a friend to stand by you.—Irving.

They shall have venison to eat, and corn to hoe.—Cooper.

They will have venison to eat, and corn to hoe.—Coop.

The sea shall crush thee; yea, the ponderous wave up the loose beach shall grind and scoop thy grave.—Thaxter.

The sea will crush you; yes, the heavy wave on the loose beach will grind and scoop your grave.—Thaxter.

She should not walk, he said, through the dust and heat of the noon; No, she should ride like a queen, not walk slowly like a
farmer.
—Longfellow.

(b) In indirect quotations, to express the same idea that the original speaker put forth (i.e., future action); for example,—

(b) In indirect quotations, to convey the same idea that the original speaker expressed (i.e., future action); for example,—

He declares that he shall win the purse from you.—Bulwer.

He claims that he will win the prize from you.—Bulwer.

She rejects his suit with scorn, but assures him that she shall make great use of her power over him.—Macaulay.

She turns down his offer with disdain but promises that she will make the most of her influence over him.—Macaulay.

Fielding came up more and more bland and smiling, with the conviction that he should win in the end.—A. Larned.

Fielding appeared increasingly neutral and cheerful, convinced that he would ultimately win.—A. Larned.

Those who had too presumptuously concluded that they should pass without combat were something disconcerted.—Scott.

Those who had too confidently assumed that they should get through without a fight were a bit unsettled.—Scott.

(c) With direct questions of the second person, when the answer expected would express simple futurity; thus,—

(c) With direct questions to the second person, when the expected answer would indicate simple future time; thus,—

"Should you like to go to school at Canterbury?"—Dickens.

"Would you like to go to school at Canterbury?"—Dickens.

First, second and third persons.

(3) With ALL THREE PERSONS,—

With all three people,—

(a) Should is used with the meaning of obligation, and is equivalent to ought.

(a) Should means obligation and is equivalent to ought.

I never was what I should be.—H. James, Jr.

I was never what I should be.—H. James, Jr..

Milton! thou should'st be living at this hour.—Wordsworth.

Milton! you should be alive at this moment.—Wordsworth.

He should not flatter himself with the delusion that he can make or unmake the reputation of other men.—Winter.

He should not deceive himself into thinking that he can create or destroy other people's reputations.—Winter.

(b) Shall and should are both used in dependent clauses of condition, time, purpose, etc.; for example,—

(b) Shall and should are both used in dependent clauses for conditions, time, purpose, etc.; for example,—

When your mind There will be a mansion for all impressive figures. —Wordsworth.

Suppose this back-door gossip should be utterly blundering and untrue, would any one wonder?—Thackeray.

Suppose this back-door gossip were completely wrong and false, would anyone be surprised?—Thackeray.

Jealous lest the sky should have a listener.—Byron.

Jealous that the sky might have an audience. —Byron.

If thou should'st ever come by chance or choice to Modena.—Rogers.

If you ever happen to visit Modena.—Rogers.

If I should be where I no more can hear thy voice.—Wordsworth.

If I should be in a place where I can no longer hear your voice.—Wordsworth.

That accents and looks so winning should disarm me of my resolution, was to be expected.—C. B. Brown.

That charm and appearance so appealing should weaken my determination, was to be expected.—C.B. Brown.

253. Will and would are used as follows:—

Will and would are used as follows:—

Authority as to future action—first person.

(1) With the FIRST PERSON, will and would are used to express determination as to the future, or a promise; as, for example,—

(1) In the FIRST PERSON, will and would are used to show determination about the future or to make a promise; for example,—

I will go myself now, and will not return until all is finished.—Cable.

I will go myself now, and will not return until everything is done.—Cable.

And promised...that I would do him justice, as the sole inventor.—Swift.

And promised...that I would give him credit, as the sole inventor.—Fast.

Disguising a command.

(2) With the SECOND PERSON, will is used to express command. This puts the order more mildly, as if it were merely expected action; as,—

(2) With the SECOND PERSON, will is used to express command. This puts the order more mildly, as if it were merely expected action; as,—

Thou wilt take the skiff, Roland, and two of my people,... and fetch off certain plate and belongings.—Scott.

You will take the small boat, Roland, along with two of my people,... and bring back some plate and belongings.—Scott.

You will proceed to Manassas at as early a moment as practicable, and mark on the grounds the works, etc.—War Records.

You will go to Manassas as soon as possible and note the work, etc., on the grounds.—War Records.

Mere futurity.

(3) With both SECOND AND THIRD PERSONS, will and would are used to express simple futurity, action merely expected to occur; for example,—

(3) With both SECOND AND THIRD PERSONS, will and would are used to express simple futurity, action merely expected to occur; for example,—

All this will sound wild and chimerical.—Burke.

All this will sound crazy. —Burke.

She would tell you that punishment is the reward of the wicked.—Landor.

She would tell you that punishment is the consequence of the wicked.—Landor.

When I am in town, you'll always have somebody to sit with you. To be sure, so you will.—Dickens.

When I'm in town, you'll always have someone to sit with you. For sure, you will.—Dickens.

(4) With FIRST, SECOND, AND THIRD PERSONS, would is used to express a wish,—the original meaning of the word will; for example,—

(4) With FIRST, SECOND, AND THIRD PERSONS, would is used to express a wish—the original meaning of the word will; for example,—

Subject I omitted: often so.

Would that a momentary emanation from thy glory would visit me!—C. B. Brown.

I wish that a brief burst of your glory would come to me!—C.B. Brown.

Thine was a dangerous gift, when thou wast born, The gift of Beauty. Would thou hadst it not.—Rogers

Your gift was dangerous when you were born, the gift of beauty. I wish you never had it. —Rogers

It shall be gold if thou wilt, but thou shalt answer to me for the use of it.—Scott.

It will be gold if you want it to be, but you will have to answer to me for how you use it.—Scott.

What wouldst thou have a good great man obtain?—Coleridge.

What would you have a truly great man achieve?—Coleridge.

(5) With the THIRD PERSON, will and would often denote an action as customary, without regard to future time; as,

(5) With the THIRD PERSON, will and would often indicate an action as usual, without considering future time; for example,

They will go to Sunday schools, through storms their brothers are afraid of.... They will stand behind a table at a fair all day.—Holmes

They will go to Sunday schools, through storms their brothers are afraid of.... They will stand behind a table at a fair all day.—Holmes

On a slight suspicion, they would cut off the hands of numbers of the natives, for punishment or intimidation.—Bancroft.

On a small suspicion, they would cut off the hands of several natives, either for punishment or to instill fear.—Bancroft.

In this stately chair would he sit, and this magnificent pipe would he smoke, shaking his right knee with a constant motion.—Irving.

In this grand chair he would sit, and this impressive pipe he would smoke, constantly shaking his right knee.—Irving.

Conjugation of Shall and Will as Auxiliaries (with Choose).

254. To express simply expected action:—

To simply express expected action:—

ACTIVE VOICE. PASSIVE VOICE.
Singular. Singular.
1. I shall choose. I shall be chosen.
2. You will choose. You will be chosen.
3. [He] will choose. [He] will be chosen.
Plural. Plural.
1. We shall choose. We shall be chosen.
2. You will choose. You will be chosen.
3. [They] will choose. [They] will be chosen.

To express determination, promise, etc.:—

To show determination or promise:—

ACTIVE VOICE. PASSIVE VOICE.
Singular. Singular.
1. I will choose. I will be chosen.
2. You shall choose. You shall be chosen.
3. [He] shall choose. [He] shall be chosen.
Plural. Plural.
1. We will choose. 1. We will be chosen.
2. You shall choose. 2. You shall be chosen.
3. [They] shall choose. 3. [They] shall be chosen.

Exercises on Shall and Will.

(a) From Secs. 252 and 253, write out a summary or outline of the various uses of shall and will.

(a) From Secs. 252 and 253, create a summary or outline of the different ways to use shall and will.

(b) Examine the following sentences, and justify the use of shall and will, or correct them if wrongly used:—

(b) Look at the following sentences and explain the use of shall and will, or fix them if they're used incorrectly:—

1. Thou art what I would be, yet only seem.

1. You are what I want to be, yet only appear to be.

2. We would be greatly mistaken if we thought so.

2. We would be seriously wrong if we thought that.

3. Thou shalt have a suit, and that of the newest cut; the wardrobe keeper shall have orders to supply you.

3. You shall have a suit, and it should be of the latest style; the wardrobe keeper will be instructed to provide it for you.

4. "I shall not run," answered Herbert stubbornly.

4. "I'm not going to run," replied Herbert stubbornly.

5. He informed us, that in the course of another day's march we would reach the prairies on the banks of the Grand Canadian.

5. He told us that after another day's march, we would reach the prairies along the banks of the Grand Canadian.

6. What shall we do with him? This is the sphinx-like riddle which we must solve if we would not be eaten.

6. What should we do with him? This is the mysterious riddle we need to figure out if we want to survive.

7. Will not our national character be greatly injured? Will we not be classed with the robbers and destroyers of mankind?

7. Won't our national character be seriously harmed? Will we not be seen as robbers and destroyers of humanity?

8. Lucy stood still, very anxious, and wondering whether she should see anything alive.

8. Lucy stood frozen, feeling very anxious and wondering if she would see anything alive.

9. I would be overpowered by the feeling of my disgrace.

9. I would be overwhelmed by the feeling of my shame.

10. No, my son; whatever cash I send you is yours: you will spend it as you please, and I have nothing to say.

10. No, my son; any money I send you is yours: you can spend it however you want, and I have no say in it.

11. But I will doubtless find some English person of whom to make inquiries.

11. But I'm sure I'll find someone English to ask about it.

12. Without having attended to this, we will be at a loss to understand several passages in the classics.

12. If we don't pay attention to this, we will struggle to understand several parts of the classics.

13. "I am a wayfarer," the stranger said, "and would like permission to remain with you a little while."

13. "I’m a traveler," the stranger said, "and I’d like to stay with you for a little while."

14. The beast made a sluggish movement, then, as if he would have more of the enchantment, stirred her slightly with his muzzle.

14. The beast moved sluggishly, then, as if he wanted more of the magic, nudged her gently with his muzzle.

WEAK VERBS.

WEAK VERBS.

255. Those weak verbs which add -d or -ed to form the past tense and past participle, and have no change of vowel, are so easily recognized as to need no special treatment. Some of them are already given as secondary forms of the strong verbs.

255. Those weak verbs that add -d or -ed to create the past tense and past participle, and don't change their vowel, are easy to recognize and don't require any special treatment. Some of them have already been provided as secondary forms of the strong verbs.

But the rest, which may be called irregular weak verbs, need some attention and explanation.

But the rest, which can be called irregular weak verbs, require some attention and clarification.

256. The irregular weak verbs are divided into two classes,—

256. The irregular weak verbs are divided into two classes,—

The two classes of irregular weak verbs.

(1) Those which retain the -d or -t in the past tense, with some change of form for the past tense and past participle.

(1) Those that keep the -d or -t in the past tense, along with some alteration for the past tense and past participle.

(2) Those which end in -d or -t, and have lost the ending which formerly was added to this.

(2) Those that end in -d or -t, and have lost the ending that used to be added to them.

The old ending to verbs of Class II. was -de or -te; as,—

The old ending for verbs of Class II was -de or -te; as,—

This worthi man ful wel his wit bisette [used].—Chaucer.

This worthy man fully used his wisdom. —Chaucer.

Of smale houndes hadde she, that sche fedde With rosted flessh, or mylk and wastel breed.—Id.

Of small hounds she had, which she fed with roasted meat, or milk and white bread.—Same.

This ending has now dropped off, leaving some weak verbs with the same form throughout: as set, set, set; put, put, put.

This ending has now disappeared, leaving some weak verbs with the same form throughout: as set, set, set; put, put, put.

257. Irregular Weak Verbs.—Class I.

257. Irregular Weak Verbs—Class I.

Present Tense. Past Tense. Past Participle.
bereave bereft, bereave bereft, bereaved
beseech besought besought
burn burned, burnt burnt
buy bought bought
catch caught caught
creep crept crept
deal dealt dealt
dream dreamt, dreamed dreamt, dreamed
dwell dwelt dwelt
feel felt felt
flee fled fled
have had had (once haved)
hide hid hidden, hid
keep kept kept
kneel knelt knelt
lay laid laid
lean leaned, leant leaned, leant
leap leaped, leapt leaped, leapt
leave left left
lose lost lost
make made (once maked) made
mean meant meant
pay paid paid
pen [inclose] penned, pen penned, pent
say said said
seek sought sought
sell sold sold
shoe shod shod
sleep slept slept
spell spelled, spelt spelt
spill spilt spilt
stay staid, stayed staid, stayed
sweep swept swept
teach taught taught
tell told told
think thought thought
weep wept wept
work worked, wrought worked, wrought

258. Irregular Weak Verbs.—Class II.

258. Irregular Weak Verbs - Class II.

Present Tense. Past Tense. Past Participle.
bend bent, bended bent, bended
bleed bled bled
breed bred bred
build built built
cast cast cast
cost cost cost
feed fed fed
gild gilded, gilt gilded, gilt
gird girt, girded girt, girded
hit hit hit
hurt hurt hurt
knit knit, knitted knit, knitted
lead led led
let let let
light lighted, lit lighted, lit
meet met met
put put put
quit quit, quitted quit, quitted
read read read
rend rent rent
rid rid rid
send sent sent
set set set
shed shed shed
shred shred shred
shut shut shut
slit slit slit
speed sped sped
spend spent spent
spit spit [obs. spat] spit [obs. spat]
split split split
spread spread spread
sweat sweat sweat
thrust thrust thrust
wed wed, wedded wed, wedded
wet wet, wetted wet, wetted
Tendency to phonetic spelling.

250. There seems to be in Modern English a growing tendency toward phonetic spelling in the past tense and past participle of weak verbs. For example, -ed, after the verb bless, has the sound of t: hence the word is often written blest. So with dipt, whipt, dropt, tost, crost, drest, prest, etc. This is often seen in poetry, and is increasing in prose.

250. In Modern English, there seems to be a growing trend towards phonetic spelling in the past tense and past participle of weak verbs. For example, -ed after the verb bless, is pronounced like t: so the word is often written as blest. The same goes for dipt, whipt, dropt, tost, crost, drest, prest, and so on. This is frequently observed in poetry and is on the rise in prose.

Some Troublesome Verbs.

Lie and lay in use and meaning.

260. Some sets of verbs are often confused by young students, weak forms being substituted for correct, strong forms.

260. Some groups of verbs are often mixed up by young students, with weak forms being used instead of the correct strong forms.

Lie and lay need close attention. These are the forms:—

Lie and lay require careful attention. Here are the forms:—

Present Tense. Past Tense. Pres. Participle. Past Participle.
1. Lie lay lying lain
2. Lay laid laying laid

The distinctions to be observed are as follows:—

The distinctions to note are as follows:—

(1) Lie, with its forms, is regularly intransitive as to use. As to meaning, lie means to rest, to recline, to place one's self in a recumbent position; as, "There lies the ruin."

(1) Lie, in its different forms, is usually intransitive in usage. In terms of meaning, lie refers to resting, reclining, or putting oneself in a lying down position; for example, "There lies the ruin."

(2) Lay, with its forms, is always transitive as to use. As to meaning, lay means to put, to place a person or thing in position; as, "Slowly and sadly we laid him down." Also lay may be used without any object expressed, but there is still a transitive meaning; as in the expressions, "to lay up for future use," "to lay on with the rod," "to lay about him lustily."

(2) Lay, in all its forms, is always transitive in its usage. In terms of meaning, lay means to put or place a person or thing in a specific position; for example, "Slowly and sadly we laid him down." Additionally, lay can be used without directly mentioning an object, but it still carries a transitive meaning, as seen in expressions like "to lay up for future use," "to lay on with the rod," and "to lay about him vigorously."

Sit and set.

261. Sit and set have principal parts as follows:—

261. Sit and set have main forms as follows:—

Present Tense. Past Tense. Pres. Participle. Past Participle.
1. Sit sat sitting sat
2. Set set setting set

Notice these points of difference between the two verbs:—

Take note of these differences between the two verbs:—

(1) Sit, with its forms, is always intransitive in use. In meaning, sit signifies (a) to place one's self on a seat, to rest; (b) to be adjusted, to fit; (c) to cover and warm eggs for hatching, as, "The hen sits."

(1) Sit, in all its forms, is always intransitive in use. In meaning, sit refers to (a) putting oneself down on a seat to rest; (b) being positioned or fitting; (c) covering and warming eggs for hatching, as in, "The hen sits."

(2) Set, with its forms, is always transitive in use when it has the following meanings: (a) to put or place a thing or person in position, as "He set down the book;" (b) to fix or establish, as, "He sets a good example."

(2) Set, in its various forms, is always transitive when used with the following meanings: (a) to put or place something or someone in position, as in "He set down the book;" (b) to fix or establish, as in "He sets a good example."

Set is intransitive when it means (a) to go down, to decline, as, "The sun has set;" (b) to become fixed or rigid, as, "His eyes set in his head because of the disease;" (c) in certain idiomatic expressions, as, for example, "to set out," "to set up in business," "to set about a thing," "to set to work," "to set forward," "the tide sets in," "a strong wind set in," etc.

Set is intransitive when it means (a) to go down, to decline, as in, "The sun has set;" (b) to become fixed or rigid, as in, "His eyes set in his head because of the disease;" (c) in certain idiomatic expressions, like, for example, "to set out," "to set up in business," "to set about a task," "to set to work," "to set forward," "the tide sets in," "a strong wind set in," etc.

Exercise.

Examine the forms of lie, lay, sit and set in these sentences; give the meaning of each, and correct those used wrongly.

Examine the forms of lie, lay, sit, and set in these sentences; explain the meaning of each, and fix any that are used incorrectly.

1. If the phenomena which lie before him will not suit his purpose, all history must be ransacked.

1. If the things in front of him don’t serve his purpose, he must search through all of history.

2. He sat with his eyes fixed partly on the ghost and partly on Hamlet, and with his mouth open.

2. He sat with his eyes focused partly on the ghost and partly on Hamlet, and with his mouth open.

3. The days when his favorite volume set him upon making wheelbarrows and chairs,... can never again be the realities they were.

3. The days when his favorite book inspired him to build wheelbarrows and chairs... can never be the same realities they once were.

4. To make the jacket sit yet more closely to the body, it was gathered at the middle by a broad leathern belt.

4. To make the jacket fit even more snugly to the body, it was gathered at the waist by a wide leather belt.

5. He had set up no unattainable standard of perfection.

5. He hadn’t established any impossible standards of perfection.

6. For more than two hundred years his bones lay undistinguished.

6. For over two hundred years, his bones remained unremarkable.

7. The author laid the whole fault on the audience.

7. The author blamed the entire issue on the audience.

8. Dapple had to lay down on all fours before the lads could bestride him.

8. Dapple had to get down on all fours before the guys could climb on him.

9.

9.

And send him...to his gods where happiness lies
His small hope for a nearby harbor or bay,
And threw him back down to the ground:—there let him stay.

10. Achilles is the swift-footed when he is sitting still.

10. Achilles is swift-footed even when he’s sitting still.

11. It may be laid down as a general rule, that history begins in novel, and ends in essay.

11. A general rule can be established: history starts with a novel and ends with an essay.

12. I never took off my clothes, but laid down in them.

12. I never took my clothes off; I just lay down in them.


VERBALS.

Definition.

262. Verbals are words that express action in a general way, without limiting the action to any time, or asserting it of any subject.

262. Verbals are words that convey action in a broad sense, not tying the action to any specific time or asserting it to any particular subject.

Kinds.

Verbals may be participles, infinitives, or gerunds.

Verbals can be participles, infinitives, or gerunds.

PARTICIPLES.

Definition.

263. Participles are adjectival verbals; that is, they either belong to some substantive by expressing action in connection with it, or they express action, and directly modify a substantive, thus having a descriptive force. Notice these functions.

263. Participles are adjectival verbals; that is, they either relate to a noun by showing action related to it, or they express action and directly modify a noun, giving it a descriptive quality. Pay attention to these functions.

Pure participle in function.

1. At length, wearied by his cries and agitations, and not knowing how to put an end to them, he addressed the animal as if he had been a rational being.—Dwight.

1. Eventually, tired of his cries and struggles, and not knowing how to stop them, he spoke to the animal as if it were a thinking being.—Dwight.

Here wearied and knowing belong to the subject he, and express action in connection with it, but do not describe.

Here wearied and knowing belong to the subject he, and express action in connection with it, but do not describe.

Express action and also describe.

2. Another name glided into her petition—it was that of the wounded Christian, whom fate had placed in the hands of bloodthirsty men, his avowed enemies.—Scott.

2. Another name slipped into her request—it was that of the wounded Christian, who fate had put in the hands of bloodthirsty men, his avowed enemies.—Scott.

Here wounded and avowed are participles, but are used with the same adjectival force that bloodthirsty is (see Sec. 143, 4).

Here wounded and avowed are participles, but they are used with the same adjectival force that bloodthirsty is (see Sec. 143, 4).

Participial adjectives have been discussed in Sec. 143 (4), but we give further examples for the sake of comparison and distinction.

Participial adjectives were discussed in Sec. 143 (4), but we're providing more examples for comparison and differentiation.

Fossil participles as adjectives.

3. As learned a man may live in a cottage or a college commmon-room.—Thackeray

3. A knowledgeable man can live in a cottage or a college common room.—Thackeray

4. Not merely to the soldier are these campaigns interesting —Bayne.

4. These campaigns are interesting not just to the soldier interesting —Bayne.

5. How charming is divine philosophy!—Milton.

How charming is divine philosophy! —Milton.

Forms of the participle.

264. Participles, in expressing action, may be active or passive, incomplete (or imperfect), complete (perfect or past), and perfect definite.

264. Participles, when describing action, can be active or passive, incomplete (or imperfect), complete (perfect or past), and perfect definite.

They cannot be divided into tenses (present, past, etc.), because they have no tense of their own, but derive their tense from the verb on which they depend; for example,—

They can't be divided into tenses (present, past, etc.) because they don't have their own tense, but take their tense from the verb they rely on; for example,—

1. He walked conscientiously through the services of the day, fulfilling every section the minutest, etc.—De Quincey.

1. He walked diligently through the day's tasks, completing every part down to the smallest detail, etc.—De Quincey.

Fulfilling has the form to denote continuance, but depends on the verb walked, which is past tense.

Fulfilling suggests an ongoing action, but relies on the verb walked, which is in the past tense.

2.
Now the bright morning star, the herald of the day,
Comes dancing from the East.
—Milton.

Dancing here depends on a verb in the present tense.

Dancing here relies on a verb in the present tense.

265. PARTICIPLES OF THE VERB CHOOSE.

PARTICIPLES OF THE VERB CHOOSE.

ACTIVE VOICE.
Imperfect. Choosing.
Perfect. Having chosen.
Perfect definite. Having been choosing.
PASSIVE VOICE.
Imperfect. None
Perfect. Chosen, being chosen, having been chosen.
Perfect definite. None.

Exercise.

Pick out the participles, and tell whether active or passive, imperfect, perfect, or perfect definite. If pure participles, tell to what word they belong; if adjectives, tell what words they modify.

Pick out the participles and indicate whether they are active or passive, imperfect, perfect, or perfect definite. If they are pure participles, identify the word they belong to; if they are adjectives, specify which words they modify.

1. The change is a large process, accomplished within a large and corresponding space, having, perhaps, some central or equatorial line, but lying, like that of our earth, between certain tropics, or limits widely separated.

1. The change is a significant process, taking place within a vast and related area, possibly having some central or equatorial line, but positioned, like our Earth, between certain tropics or widely separated boundaries.

2. I had fallen under medical advice the most misleading that it is possible to imagine.

2. I had followed the most misleading medical advice one could ever imagine.

3. These views, being adopted in a great measure from my mother, were naturally the same as my mother's.

3. These opinions, which I largely inherited from my mother, were naturally very similar to hers.

4. Endowed with a great command over herself, she soon obtained an uncontrolled ascendency over her people.

4. With a strong sense of self-control, she quickly gained an uncontrollable influence over her people.

5. No spectacle was more adapted to excite wonder.

5. No sight was better suited to spark amazement.

6. Having fully supplied the demands of nature in this respect, I returned to reflection on my situation.

6. After completely meeting my natural needs in this regard, I went back to thinking about my situation.

7. Three saplings, stripped of their branches and bound together at their ends, formed a kind of bedstead.

7. Three saplings, stripped of their branches and tied together at their ends, created a sort of frame for a bed.

8. This all-pervading principle is at work in our system,—the creature warring against the creating power.

8. This all-encompassing principle is operating in our system—the creature fighting against the creative power.

9. Perhaps I was too saucy and provoking.

9. Maybe I was too bold and irritating.

10. Nothing of the kind having been done, and the principles of this unfortunate king having been distorted,... try clemency.

10. Since nothing like that has happened, and the principles of this unfortunate king have been twisted,... try kindness.

INFINITIVES.

266. Infinitives, like participles, have no tense. When active, they have an indefinite, an imperfect, a perfect, and a perfect definite form; and when passive, an indefinite and a perfect form, to express action unconnected with a subject.

266. Infinitives, like participles, don’t have a tense. In the active voice, they have an indefinite, an imperfect, a perfect, and a perfect definite form; and in the passive voice, they have an indefinite and a perfect form, to indicate action that isn't linked to a specific subject.

267. INFINITIVES OF THE VERB CHOOSE.

267. INFINITIVES OF THE VERB CHOOSE.

ACTIVE VOICE.
Indefinite. [To] choose.
Imperfect. [To] be choosing.
Perfect. [To] have chosen.
Perfect definite. [To] have been choosing.
PASSIVE VOICE.
Indefinite. [To] be chosen.
Perfect. [To] have been chosen.
To with the infinitive.

268. In Sec. 267 the word to is printed in brackets because it is not a necessary part of the infinitive.

268. In Sec. 267, the word to is in brackets because it's not a required part of the infinitive.

It originally belonged only to an inflected form of the infinitive, expressing purpose; as in the Old English, "Ūt ēode se sǣdere his sæd tō sāwenne" (Out went the sower his seed to sow).

It originally belonged only to an inflected form of the infinitive, expressing purpose; as in the Old English, "Ūt ēode se sǣdere his sæd tō sāwenne" (Out went the sower his seed to sow).

Cases when to is omitted.

But later, when inflections became fewer, to was used before the infinitive generally, except in the following cases:—

But later, when inflections became less common, to was generally used before the infinitive, except in the following cases:—

(1) After the auxiliaries shall, will (with should and would).

(1) After the auxiliaries shall, will (with should and would).

(2) After the verbs may (might), can (could), must; also let, make, do (as, "I do go" etc.), see, bid (command), feel, hear, watch, please; sometimes need (as, "He need not go") and dare (to venture).

(2) After the verbs may (might), can (could), must; also let, make, do (as in, "I do go" etc.), see, bid (command), feel, hear, watch, please; sometimes need (as in, "He need not go") and dare (to venture).

(3) After had in the idiomatic use; as, "You had better go" "He had rather walk than ride."

(3) After had in the idiomatic use; as, "You had better go" "He had rather walk than ride."

(4) In exclamations; as in the following examples:—

(4) In exclamations; like in the following examples:—

"He find pleasure in doing good!" cried Sir William.—Goldsmith.

"He finds pleasure in doing good!" yelled Sir William.—Goldsmith.

I urge an address to his kinswoman! I approach her when in a base disguise! I do this!—Scott.

I encourage a conversation with his relative! I go to her in a low-profile disguise! I do this!—Scott.

"She ask my pardon, poor woman!" cried Charles.—Macaulay.

"She asks for my forgiveness, poor woman!" cried Charles.—Macaulay.

269. Shall and will are not to be taken as separate verbs, but with the infinitive as one tense of a verb; as, "He will choose," "I shall have chosen," etc.

269. Shall and will should not be viewed as separate verbs, but with the infinitive as a single tense of a verb; for example, "He will choose," "I shall have chosen," etc.

Also do may be considered an auxiliary in the interrogative, negative, and emphatic forms of the present and past, also in the imperative; as,—

Also do can be seen as a helper verb in questions, negations, and emphatic statements in both the present and past tenses, as well as in commands; for example,—

What! doth she, too, as the credulous imagine, learn [doth learn is one verb, present tense] the love of the great stars? —Bulwer.

What! does she, too, as the gullible think, learn the love of the great stars? —Bulwer.

Do not entertain so weak an imagination—Burke.

Don't entertain such a weak imagination—Burke.

She did not weep—she did not break forth into reproaches.—Irving.

She didn’t weep—she didn’t speak out in reproach. —Irving.

270. The infinitive is sometimes active in form while it is passive in meaning, as in the expression, "a house to let." Examples are,—

270. The infinitive can sometimes look active but actually has a passive meaning, like in the phrase, "a house to let." Here are some examples:—

She was a kind, liberal woman; rich rather more than needed where there were no opera boxes to rent.—De Quincey.

She was a generous, open-minded woman; wealthier than necessary where there were no opera boxes to rent.—De Quincey.

Tho' it seems my spurs are yet to win.—Tennyson.

Tho' it seems my spurs are yet to win.—Tennyson.

But there was nothing to do.—Howells.

But there was nothing to do.

They shall have venison to eat, and corn to hoe.—Cooper.

They will have venison to eat and corn to hoe.—Coop.

Nolan himself saw that something was to pay.—E. E. Hale.

Nolan himself realized that something was to pay.—E. E. Hale.

271. The various offices which the infinitive and the participle have in the sentence will be treated in Part II., under "Analysis," as we are now learning merely to recognize the forms.

271. The different roles that the infinitive and the participle play in a sentence will be covered in Part II., under "Analysis," since we are currently just focusing on identifying the forms.

GERUNDS.

272. The gerund is like the participle in form, and like a noun in use.

272. The gerund looks like a participle but functions like a noun.

The participle has been called an adjectival verbal; the gerund may be called a noun verbal. While the gerund expresses action, it has several attributes of a noun,—it may be governed as a noun; it may be the subject of a verb, or the object of a verb or a preposition; it is often preceded by the definite article; it is frequently modified by a possessive noun or pronoun.

The participle is often referred to as an adjectival verbal; the gerund can be called a noun verbal. While the gerund expresses action, it also has several characteristics of a noun— it can be governed like a noun; it can be the subject of a verb, or the object of a verb or a preposition; it is often preceded by the definite article; and it is frequently modified by a possessive noun or pronoun.

Distinguished from participle and verbal noun.

273. It differs from the participle in being always used as a noun: it never belongs to or limits a noun.

273. It is different from the participle because it is always used as a noun: it never modifies or limits a noun.

It differs from the verbal noun in having the property of governing a noun (which the verbal noun has not) and of expressing action (the verbal noun merely names an action, Sec. II).

It differs from the verbal noun in that it can govern a noun (which the verbal noun cannot) and expresses action (the verbal noun simply names an action, Sec. II).

The following are examples of the uses of the gerund:—

The following are examples of how to use the gerund:—

(1) Subject: "The taking of means not to see another morning had all day absorbed every energy;" "Certainly dueling is bad, and has been put down."

(1) Subject: "The decision not to see another morning had consumed every ounce of energy all day;" "Definitely dueling is wrong and has been banned."

(2) Object: (a) "Our culture therefore must not omit the arming of the man." (b) "Nobody cares for planting the poor fungus;" "I announce the good of being interpenetrated by the mind that made nature;" "The guilt of having been cured of the palsy by a Jewish maiden."

(2) Objective: (a) "Our culture must not ignore the empowerment of individuals." (b) "No one pays attention to growing the poor fungus;" "I proclaim the benefits of being infused with the mindset that created nature;" "The burden of being healed of the paralysis by a Jewish girl."

(3) Governing and Governed: "We are far from having exhausted the significance of the few symbols we use," also (2, b), above; "He could embellish the characters with new traits without violating probability;" "He could not help holding out his hand in return."

(3) Governing and Governed: "We are far from having exhausted the significance of the few symbols we use," also (2, b), above; "He could decorate the characters with new traits without violating probability;" "He couldn't help holding out his hand in return."

Exercise.—Find sentences containing five participles, five infinitives, and five gerunds.

Exercise.—Find sentences that contain five participles, five infinitives, and five gerunds.

SUMMARY OF WORDS IN -ING

274. Words in -ing are of six kinds, according to use as well as meaning. They are as follows:—

274. Words that end in -ing come in six types, based on how they are used and what they mean. They are as follows:—

(1) Part of the verb, making the definite tenses.

(1) Part of the verb, creating the definite tenses.

(2) Pure participles, which express action, but do not assert.

(2) Pure participles, which express action but do not make any assertions.

(3) Participial adjectives, which express action and also modify.

(3) Participial adjectives, which convey action and also modify.

(4) Pure adjectives, which have lost all verbal force.

(4) Pure adjectives, which have lost all action.

(5) Gerunds, which express action, may govern and be governed.

(5) Gerunds, which show action, can take control and be controlled.

(6) Verbal nouns, which name an action or state, but cannot govern.

(6) Verbal nouns, which refer to an action or state, but cannot take a direct object.

Exercise.

Tell to which of the above six classes each -ing word in the following sentences belongs:—

Tell which of the six classes each -ing word in the following sentences belongs to:—

1. Here is need of apologies for shortcomings.

1. We need to apologize for our shortcomings.

2. Then how pleasing is it, on your leaving the spot, to see the returning hope of the parents, when, after examining the nest, they find the nurslings untouched!

2. Then how wonderful it is, when you leave, to see the parents’ hope return as they check the nest and find the babies unharmed!

3. The crowning incident of my life was upon the bank of the Scioto Salt Creek, in which I had been unhorsed by the breaking of the saddle girths.

3. The most significant moment of my life happened on the banks of Scioto Salt Creek, where I was thrown from my horse because the saddle girths broke.

4. What a vast, brilliant, and wonderful store of learning!

4. What an immense, brilliant, and amazing collection of knowledge!

5. He is one of the most charming masters of our language.

5. He is one of the most charming masters of our language.

6. In explaining to a child the phenomena of nature, you must, by object lessons, give reality to your teaching.

6. When explaining the phenomena of nature to a child, you must use hands-on examples to make your teaching feel real.

7. I suppose I was dreaming about it. What is dreaming?

7. I guess I was dreaming about it. What does dreaming mean?

8. It is years since I heard the laughter ringing.

8. It's been years since I heard that laughter.

9. Intellect is not speaking and logicizing: it is seeing and ascertaining.

9. Intellect isn't just about talking and reasoning; it's about observing and understanding.

10. We now draw toward the end of that great martial drama which we have been briefly contemplating.

10. We are now nearing the end of that epic battle story we've been briefly considering.

11. The second cause of failure was the burning of Moscow.

11. The second reason for failure was the burning of Moscow.

12. He spread his blessings all over the land.

12. He shared his blessings throughout the land.

13. The only means of ascending was by my hands.

13. The only way to climb up was by using my hands.

14. A marble figure of Mary is stretched upon the tomb, round which is an iron railing, much corroded, bearing her national emblem.

14. A marble statue of Mary lies on the tomb, which is surrounded by a rusted iron railing featuring her national emblem.

15. The exertion left me in a state of languor and sinking.

15. The effort left me feeling weak and drained.

16. Thackeray did not, like Sir Walter Scott, write twenty pages without stopping, but, dictating from his chair, he gave out sentence by sentence, slowly.

16. Thackeray didn’t, like Sir Walter Scott, write twenty pages without a break, but instead, dictating from his chair, he delivered it sentence by sentence, slowly.


HOW TO PARSE VERBS AND VERBALS.

I. VERBS.

275. In parsing verbs, give the following points:—

275. When analyzing verbs, consider these key points:—

(1) Class: (a) as to form,—strong or weak, giving principal parts; (b) as to use,—transitive or intransitive.

(1) Class: (a) in terms of form—strong or weak, providing principal parts; (b) in terms of use—transitive or intransitive.

(2) Voice,—active or passive.

Voice—active or passive.

(3) Mood,—indicative, subjunctive, or imperative.

Mood—indicative, subjunctive, or imperative.

(4) Tense,—which of the tenses given in Sec. 234.

(4) Tense— which of the tenses listed in Sec. 234.

(5) Person and number, in determining which you must tell—

(5) When figuring out which person and number you need to mention—

(6) What the subject is, for the form of the verb may not show the person and number.

(6) What the topic is, because the verb form might not indicate the person and number.

Caution.

276. It has been intimated in Sec. 235, we must beware of the rule, "A verb agrees with its subject in person and number." Sometimes it does; usually it does not, if agrees means that the verb changes its form for the different persons and numbers. The verb be has more forms than other verbs, and may be said to agree with its subject in several of its forms. But unless the verb is present, and ends in -s, or is an old or poetic form ending in -st or -eth, it is best for the student not to state it as a general rule that "the verb agrees with its subject in person and number," but merely to tell what the subject of the verb is.

276. As mentioned in Sec. 235, we need to be cautious about the rule, "A verb agrees with its subject in person and number." Sometimes this is true; most of the time it's not, if by agrees we mean that the verb changes its form based on different persons and numbers. The verb be has more forms than other verbs and can be said to agree with its subject in several of its forms. However, unless the verb is in the present tense and ends with -s, or if it's an older or poetic form ending in -st or -eth, it's better for the student not to present it as a general rule that "the verb agrees with its subject in person and number," but simply to identify what the subject of the verb is.

II. VERB PHRASES.

277. Verb phrases are made up of a principal verb followed by an infinitive, and should always be analyzed as phrases, and not taken as single verbs. Especially frequent are those made up of should, would, may, might, can, could, must, followed by a pure infinitive without to. Take these examples:—

277. Verb phrases consist of a main verb followed by an infinitive and should always be analyzed as phrases rather than treated as single verbs. Commonly, these phrases include should, would, may, might, can, could, must, followed by a bare infinitive without to. Here are some examples:—

1. Lee should of himself have replenished his stock.

Lee should have restocked his.

2. The government might have been strong and prosperous.

2. The government could have been strong and prosperous.

In such sentences as 1, call should a weak verb, intransitive, therefore active; indicative, past tense; has for its subject Lee. Have replenished is a perfect active infinitive.

In sentences like 1, call should a weak verb, intransitive, so active; indicative, past tense; it has Lee as its subject. Have replenished is a perfect active infinitive.

In 2, call might a weak verb, intransitive, active, indicative (as it means could), past tense; has the subject government. Have been is a perfect active infinitive.

In 2, call might a weak verb, intransitive, active, indicative (since it means could), past tense; has the subject government. Have been is a perfect active infinitive.

For fuller parsing of the infinitive, see Sec. 278(2).

For a more complete explanation of the infinitive, see Sec. 278(2).

III. VERBALS.

278. (1) Participle. Tell (a) from what verb it is derived; (b) whether active or passive, imperfect, perfect, etc.; (c) to what word it belongs. If a participial adjective, give points (a) and (b), then parse it as an adjective.

278. (1) Participle. Identify (a) the verb it comes from; (b) whether it’s active or passive, imperfect, perfect, etc.; (c) which word it relates to. If it's a participial adjective, provide details for (a) and (b), and then analyze it as an adjective.

(2) Infinitive. Tell (a) from what verb it is derived; (b) whether indefinite, perfect, definite, etc.

(2) Infinitive. Indicate (a) the verb it comes from; (b) whether it's indefinite, perfect, definite, etc.

(3) Gerund. (a) From what verb derived; (b) its use (Sec. 273).

(3) Gerund. (a) From what verb it comes; (b) its usage (Sec. 273).

Exercise.

Parse the verbs, verbals, and verb phrases in the following sentences:—

Parse the verbs, verb forms, and verb phrases in the following sentences:—

1. Byron builds a structure that repeats certain elements in nature or humanity.

1. Byron creates a framework that echoes specific aspects of nature or humanity.

2. The birds were singing as if there were no aching hearts, no sin nor sorrow, in the world.

2. The birds were singing like there were no broken hearts, no wrongdoings, or sadness in the world.

3. Let it rise! let it rise, till it meet the sun in his coming; let the earliest light of the morning gild it, and parting day linger and play on its summit.

3. Let it rise! Let it rise until it meets the sun as it comes; let the first light of morning shine on it, and as the day ends, let it linger and play on its peak.

4. You are gathered to your fathers, and live only to your country in her grateful remembrance.

4. You are reunited with your ancestors and live only in the grateful memory of your country.

5. Read this Declaration at the head of the army.

5. Read this Declaration at the front of the army.

6.

6.

He smiled at us kindly, as it spread from one side to the other,
All along the way, a loud shout rang out, "God save our Lord the King!"

7. When he arose in the morning, he thought only of her, and wondered if she were yet awake.

7. When he got up in the morning, he could only think about her and wondered if she was already awake.

8. He had lost the quiet of his thoughts, and his agitated soul reflected only broken and distorted images of things.

8. He had lost the peace of his thoughts, and his troubled mind reflected only fragmented and distorted images of everything.

9.

9.

So, just in case I feel tempted To repay harm with harm,
From now on in me instill,
O God, a kind willingness.

10. The sun appears to beat in vain at the casements.

10. The sun seems to be hitting uselessly against the windows.

11. Margaret had come into the workshop with her sewing, as usual.

11. Margaret had entered the workshop with her sewing, just like always.

12.

12.

There are two things that will remain with memory—
Whatever else happens—while life goes on.

13. To the child it was not permitted to look beyond into the hazy lines that bounded his oasis of flowers.

13. The child was not allowed to look beyond the blurry lines that framed his garden of flowers.

14. With them, morning is not a new issuing of light, a new bursting forth of the sun; a new waking up of all that has life, from a sort of temporary death.

14. For them, morning isn’t just a new arrival of light, a fresh appearance of the sun; it’s not a new awakening of everything alive from a kind of temporary death.

15. Whatever ground you sow or plant, see that it is in good condition.

15. Whatever land you cultivate or plant, make sure it is in good shape.

16. However that be, it is certain that he had grown to delight in nothing else than this conversation.

16. No matter what, it’s clear that he had come to enjoy nothing more than this conversation.

17. The soul having been often born, or, as the Hindoos say, "traveling the path of existence through thousands of births," there is nothing of which she has not gained knowledge.

17. The soul, having been born many times, or as the Hindus say, "traveling the path of existence through thousands of births," has gained knowledge of everything.

18. The ancients called it ecstasy or absence,—a getting-out of their bodies to think.

18. The ancients referred to it as ecstasy or absence—stepping out of their bodies to think.

19. Such a boy could not whistle or dance.

19. That boy couldn't whistle or dance.

20. He had rather stand charged with the imbecility of skepticism than with untruth.

20. He would prefer to be seen as foolish for being skeptical than to be seen as dishonest.

21. He can behold with serenity the yawning gulf between the ambition of man and his power of performance.

21. He can calmly see the vast gap between human ambition and our ability to achieve it.

22. He passed across the room to the washstand, leaving me upon the bed, where I afterward found he had replaced me on being awakened by hearing me leap frantically up and down on the floor.

22. He walked across the room to the washstand, leaving me on the bed, where I later discovered he had put me back after waking up to the sound of me jumping wildly up and down on the floor.

23. In going for water, he seemed to be traveling over a desert plain to some far-off spring.

23. While fetching water, he appeared to be journeying across a desert plain to a distant spring.

24. Hasheesh always brings an awakening of perception which magnifies the smallest sensation.

24. Hasheesh always enhances awareness, amplifying even the slightest sensations.

25. I have always talked to him as I would to a friend.

25. I've always talked to him like I would to a friend.

26. Over them multitudes of rosy children came leaping to throw garlands on my victorious road.

26. Many cheerful children came jumping over to throw garlands on my victorious path.

27. Oh, had we some bright little isle of our own!

27. Oh, if only we had a bright little island of our own!

28.

28.

It's better, you say, to agree; Enjoy the feast while we can, and live before life runs out.

29. And now wend we to yonder fountain, for the hour of rest is at hand.

29. And now let's go to that fountain, because it's time to take a break.


ADVERBS.

Adverbs modify.

279. The word adverb means joined to a verb. The adverb is the only word that can join to a verb to modify it.

279. The term adverb means attached to a verb. The adverb is the only type of word that can attach itself to a verb to change its meaning.

A verb.

When action is expressed, an adverb is usually added to define the action in some way,—time, place, or manner: as, "He began already to be proud of being a Rugby boy [time];" "One of the young heroes scrambled up behind [place];" "He was absolute, but wisely and bravely ruling [manner]."

When action is expressed, an adverb is usually included to clarify the action in some way—time, place, or manner: for example, "He began already to be proud of being a Rugby boy [time];" "One of the young heroes scrambled up behind [place];" "He was absolute, but wisely and bravely ruling [manner]."

An adjective or an adverb.

But this does not mean that adverbs modify verbs only: many of them express degree, and limit adjectives or adverbs; as, "William's private life was severely pure;" "Principles of English law are put down a little confusedly."

But this doesn’t mean that adverbs modify verbs only: many of them express degree and limit adjectives or adverbs; for example, "William's private life was severely pure;" "Principles of English law are stated a little confusingly."

Sometimes a noun or pronoun.

Sometimes an adverb may modify a noun or pronoun; for example,—

Sometimes an adverb can modify a noun or pronoun; for example,—

The young man reveres men of genius, because, to speak truly, they are more himself than he is.—Emerson.

The young man looks up to brilliant people because, honestly, they represent more of who he is than he does himself.—Emerson.

Is it only poets, and men of leisure and cultivation, who live with nature?—Id.

Is it only poets and people who have the time and education to appreciate it, who really connect with nature?—Id.

To the almost terror of the persons present, Macaulay began with the senior wrangler of 1801-2-3-4, and so on.—Thackeray.

To the almost terror of those present, Macaulay started with the senior wrangler of 1801-2-3-4, and so on.—Thackeray.

Nor was it altogether nothing.—Carlyle.

Nor was it not nothing.—Carlyle.

Sounds overflow the listener's brain So sweet that joy is almost pain.—Shelley.

Sounds fill the listener's mind so sweetly that joy is almost painful.—Shelley.

The condition of Kate is exactly that of Coleridge's "Ancient Mariner."—De Quincey.

The state of Kate is exactly like that of Coleridge's "Ancient Mariner."—De Quincey.

He was incidentally news dealer.—T. B. Aldrich.

He was a news dealer. —T. B. Aldrich.

NOTE.—These last differ from the words in Sec. 169, being adverbs naturally and fitly, while those in Sec. 169 are felt to be elliptical, and rather forced into the service of adjectives.

NOTE.—These last are different from the words in Sec. 169, being adverbs that are natural and appropriate, while those in Sec. 169 are considered to be elliptical and somewhat awkwardly used as adjectives.

Also these adverbs modifying nouns are to be distinguished from those standing after a noun by ellipsis, but really modifying, not the noun, but some verb understood; thus,—

Also, these adverbs that modify nouns should be distinguished from those that stand after a noun due to ellipsis, but are actually modifying, not the noun, but some implied verb; thus,—

The gentle winds and waters [that are] near, Make music to the lonely ear.—Byron.

The soft winds and nearby waters make music for the lonely listener.—Byron.

With bowering leaves [that grow] o'erhead, to which the eye Looked up half sweetly, and half awfully.—Leigh Hunt.

With leafy branches overhead, that made the eye look up with a mix of sweetness and fear.—Leigh Hunt.

A phrase.

An adverb may modify a phrase which is equivalent to an adjective or an adverb, as shown in the sentences,—

An adverb can modify a phrase that acts like an adjective or another adverb, as illustrated in the sentences,—

They had begun to make their effort much at the same time.—Trollope.

They had started to make their effort all at once.—Trollope.

I draw forth the fruit, all wet and glossy, maybe nibbled by rabbits and hollowed out by crickets, and perhaps with a leaf or two cemented to it, but still with a rich bloom to it.—Thoreau.

I pull out the fruit, all wet and shiny, maybe nibbled by rabbits and hollowed out by crickets, and perhaps with a leaf or two stuck to it, but still with a rich shine to it.—Thoreau.

A clause or sentence.

It may also modify a sentence, emphasizing or qualifying the statement expressed; as, for example,—

It can also change a sentence, highlighting or clarifying the statement made; for instance,—

And certainly no one ever entered upon office with so few resources of power in the past.—Lowell.

And definitely no one has ever taken office with so few resources of power in the past.—Lowell.

Surely happiness is reflective, like the light of heaven. —Irving.

Definitely happiness is reflective, like the light of heaven. —Irving.

We are offered six months' credit; and that, perhaps, has induced some of us to attend it.—Franklin.

We’re given six months of credit, and that, maybe, has encouraged some of us to go for it.—Franklin.

Definition.

280. An adverb, then, is a modifying word, which may qualify an action word or a statement, and may add to the meaning of an adjective or adverb, or a word group used as such.

280. An adverb is a word that modifies or describes an action, a statement, or even adds more detail to an adjective, another adverb, or a group of words acting as one.

NOTE.—The expression action word is put instead of verb, because any verbal word may be limited by an adverb, not simply the forms used in predication.

NOTE.—The term action word is used instead of verb, because any verbal word can be modified by an adverb, not just the forms used in statements.

281. Adverbs may be classified in two ways: (1) according to the meaning of the words; (2) according to their use in the sentence.

281. Adverbs can be classified in two ways: (1) based on the meaning of the words; (2) based on their function in the sentence.

ADVERBS CLASSIFIED ACCORDING TO MEANING.

282. Thus considered, there are six classes:—

282. When looked at this way, there are six categories:—

(1) Time; as now, to-day, ever, lately, before, hitherto, etc.

Time; as now, today, ever, recently, before, so far, etc.

(2) Place. These may be adverbs either of

(2) Place. These can be adverbs that indicate either

  • (a) PLACE WHERE; as here,there,where,near,yonder, above, etc.

    (a) LOCATION; as here,there,where,near,yonder, above, etc.

  • (b) PLACE TO WHICH; as hither,thither,whither, whithersoever, etc.

    (b) PLACE TO WHICH; as here,there,where, wherever, etc.

  • (c) PLACE FROM WHICH; as hence,thence,whence, whencesoever, etc.

    (c) PLACE FROM WHICH; as hence, thence, whence, whencesoever, etc.

(3) Manner, telling how anything is done; as well, slowly, better, bravely, beautifully. Action is conceived or performed in so many ways, that these adverbs form a very large class.

(3) Manner, describing how something is done; like well, slowly, better, bravely, beautifully. Actions can be imagined or carried out in so many ways that these adverbs create a huge category.

(4) Number, telling how many times: once, twice, singly, two by two, etc.

(4) Number, indicating how many times: once, twice, one at a time, in pairs, etc.

(5) Degree, telling how much; as little, slightly, too, partly, enough, greatly, much, very, just, etc. (see also Sec. 283).

(5) Degree, indicating how much; like little, slightly, too, partly, enough, greatly, much, very, just, etc. (see also Sec. 283).

(6) Assertion, telling the speaker's belief or disbelief in a statement, or how far he believes it to be true; as perhaps, maybe, surely, possibly, probably, not, etc.

(6) Assertion, expressing the speaker's belief or doubt in a statement, or how much they think it’s true; like perhaps, maybe, surely, possibly, probably, not, etc.

Special remarks on adverbs of degree.

283. The is an adverb of degree when it limits an adjective or an adverb, especially the comparative of these words; thus,—

283. The is an adverb of degree when it restricts an adjective or an adverb, particularly the comparative form of these words; therefore,—

But not the less the blare of the tumultuous organ wrought its own separate creations.—De Quincey.

But still, the loud sound of the chaotic organ created its own distinct pieces. —De Quincey.

The more they multiply, the more friends you will have; the more evidently they love liberty, the more perfect will be their obedience.—Burke.

The more they grow, the more friends you'll have; the more clearly they embrace freedom, the more perfect their obedience will be.—Burke.

This and that are very common as adverbs in spoken English, and not infrequently are found in literary English; for example,—

This and that are very common adverbs in spoken English, and you often find them in literary English; for example,—

The master...was for this once of her opinion.—R. LOUIS STEVENSON.

The master...was for this once of her opinion.—R. LOUIS STEVENSON.

Death! To die! I owe that much To what, at least, I was.—Browning.

Death! To die! I owe that much to what I at least was.—Browning.

This long's the text.—Shakespeare.

This is the text.—Shakespeare.

[Sidenote The status of such.]

[Sidenote The status of this.]

Such is frequently used as an equivalent of so: such precedes an adjective with its noun, while so precedes only the adjective usually.

Such is often used in place of so: such comes before an adjective with its noun, while so usually comes before just the adjective.

Meekness,...which gained him such universal popularity.—Irving.

Meekness,...which gained him such universal popularity.—Irving.

Such a glittering appearance that no ordinary man would have been able to close his eyes there.—Hawthorne.

Such a dazzling sight that no regular person could have kept their eyes shut there.—Hawthorne.

An eye of such piercing brightness and such commanding power that it gave an air of inspiration.—Lecky.

An eye of such piercing brightness and such commanding power that it exuded an aura of inspiration.—Lecky.

So also in Grote, Emerson, Thackeray, Motley, White, and others.

So also in Grote, Emerson, Thackeray, Motley, White, and others.

Pretty.

Pretty has a wider adverbial use than it gets credit for.

Pretty is used as an adverb more often than people realize.

I believe our astonishment is pretty equal.—Fielding.

I think our surprise is pretty equal.—Fielding.

Hard blows and hard money, the feel of both of which you know pretty well by now.—Kingsley.

Hard knocks and hard cash, the experience of both of which you know pretty well by now.—Kingsley.

The first of these generals is pretty generally recognized as the greatest military genius that ever lived.—Bayne.

The first of these generals is pretty much recognized as the greatest military genius that ever lived.—Bayne.

A pretty large experience.—Thackeray.

A pretty big experience.—Thackeray.

Pretty is also used by Prescott, Franklin, De Quincey, Defoe, Dickens, Kingsley, Burke, Emerson, Aldrich, Holmes, and other writers.

Pretty is also used by Prescott, Franklin, De Quincey, Defoe, Dickens, Kingsley, Burke, Emerson, Aldrich, Holmes, and other authors.

Mighty.

The adverb mighty is very common in colloquial English; for example,—

The adverb "mighty" is quite common in everyday English; for instance,—

"Mighty well, Deacon Gookin!" replied the solemn tones of the minister.—Hawthorne.

"Very well, Deacon Gookin!" replied the serious voice of the minister.—Hawthorne.

"Maybe you're wanting to get over?—anybody sick? Ye seem mighty anxious!"—H. B. Stowe.

"Are you trying to get over something? Is anyone feeling sick? You seem really anxious!" —Harriet Beecher Stowe.

It is only occasionally used in literary English; for example,—

It’s only used occasionally in literary English; for example,—

You are mighty courteous.—Bulwer.

You are really courteous.—Bulwer.

Beau Fielding, a mighty fine gentleman.—Thackeray.

Beau Fielding, a really fine gentleman.—Thackeray.

"Peace, Neville," said the king, "thou think'st thyself mighty wise, and art but a fool."—Scott.

"Calm down, Neville," said the king, "you think you're really smart, but you're just a fool."—Scott.

I perceived his sisters mighty busy.—Goldsmith.

I noticed his sisters really busy. —Goldsmith.

Notice meanings.

284. Again, the meaning of words must be noticed rather than their form; for many words given above may be moved from one class to another at will: as these examples,—"He walked too far [place];" "That were far better [degree];" "He spoke positively [manner];" "That is positively untrue [assertion];" "I have seen you before [time];" "The house, and its lawn before [place]."

284. Again, we need to focus on the meaning of words rather than their form; many of the words mentioned above can easily be switched from one category to another, like in these examples: “He walked too far [place];” “That would be far better [degree];” “He spoke positively [manner];” “That is positively untrue [assertion];” “I have seen you before [time];” “The house, and its lawn before [place].”

ADVERBS CLASSIFIED ACCORDING TO USE.

Simple.

285. All adverbs which have no function in the sentence except to modify are called simple adverbs. Such are most of those given already in Sec. 282.

285. All adverbs that only serve to modify and have no other function in the sentence are called simple adverbs. Most of those mentioned in Sec. 282 fall into this category.

Interrogative.

286. Some adverbs, besides modifying, have the additional function of asking a question.

286. Some adverbs, in addition to modifying, also serve the purpose of asking a question.

Direct questions.

These may introduce direct questions of—

These may introduce direct questions about—

(1) Time.

Now.

When did this humane custom begin?—H. Clay.

When did this compassionate tradition start?—H. Clay.

(2) Place.

Location.

Where will you have the scene?—Longfellow

Where will you set the scene?—Longfellow

(3) Manner.

(3) Behavior.

And how looks it now?—Hawthorne.

And how does it look now? —Hawthorne.

(4) Degree.

Degree.

"How long have you had this whip?" asked he.—Bulwer.

"How long have you had this whip?" he asked.—Bulwer.

(5) Reason.

Reason.

Why that wild stare and wilder cry?—Whittier

Why that crazy look and even crazier shout?—Whittier

Now wherefore stopp'st thou me?—Coleridge

Now why do you stop me? —Coleridge

Indirect questions.

Or they may introduce indirect questions of—

Or they might bring up indirect questions about—

(1) Time.

Timing.

I do not remember when I was taught to read.—D. Webster.

I don't remember when I learned to read.—D. Webster.

(2) Place.

Location.

I will not ask where thou liest low.—Byron

I won't ask where you are lying low.—Byron

(3) Manner.

(3) Style.

Who set you to cast about what you should say to the select souls, or how to say anything to such?—Emerson.

Who told you to think about what you should say to the special people, or how to say anything to them?—Emerson.

(4) Degree.

Degree.

Being too sleepy to understand
How far the unknown goes beyond what we know.
Longfellow

(5) Reason.

(b) Reason.

I hearkened, I know not why.—Poe.

I listened, I don't know why.—Poe.

287. There is a class of words usually classed as conjunctive adverbs, as they are said to have the office of conjunctions in joining clauses, while having the office of adverbs in modifying; for example,—

287. There’s a group of words typically referred to as conjunctive adverbs, because they function like conjunctions by connecting clauses, while also acting as adverbs by modifying; for example,—

When last I saw thy young blue eyes, they smiled.—Byron.

When I last saw your young blue eyes, they smiled.—Byron.

But in reality, when does not express time and modify, but the whole clause, when...eyes; and when has simply the use of a conjunction, not an adverb. For further discussion, see Sec. 299 under "Subordinate Conjunctions."

But in reality, when doesn’t indicate time or modify, but the entire clause, when...eyes; and when is just functioning as a conjunction, not as an adverb. For further discussion, see Sec. 299 under "Subordinate Conjunctions."

Exercise.—Bring up sentences containing twenty adverbs, representing four classes.

Exercise.—Create sentences using twenty adverbs, covering four categories.

COMPARISON OF ADVERBS.

288. Many adverbs are compared, and, when compared, have the same inflection as adjectives.

288. Many adverbs can be compared, and when they are compared, they use the same form as adjectives.

The following, irregularly compared, are often used as adjectives:—

The following, although irregularly compared, are often used as adjectives:—

Positive. Comparative. Superlative.
well better best
ill or badly worse worst
much more most
little less least
nigh or near nearer nearest or next
far farther, further farthest, furthest
late later latest, last
(rathe, obs.) rather

289. Most monosyllabic adverbs add -er and -est to form the comparative and superlative, just as adjectives do; as, high, higher, highest; soon, sooner, soonest.

289. Most one-syllable adverbs add -er and -est to create the comparative and superlative forms, just like adjectives do; for example, high, higher, highest; soon, sooner, soonest.

Adverbs in -ly usually have more and most instead of the inflected form, only occasionally having -er and -est.

Adverbs ending in -ly typically use more and most instead of adding -er and -est, which is only seen occasionally.

Its strings boldlier swept.—Coleridge.

Its strings bolder swept.—Coleridge.

None can deem harshlier of me than I deem.—Byron.

None can think of me as more harshly than I think of myself.—Byron.

Only that we may wiselier see.—Emerson.

Only that we may see more wisely. —Emerson.

Then must she keep it safelier.—Tennyson.

Then must she keep it safer.—Tennyson.

I should freelier rejoice in that absence.—Shakespeare.

I should rejoice more in that absence.—Shakespeare.

Form vs. use.

290. The fact that a word ends in -ly does not make it an adverb. Many adjectives have the same ending, and must be distinguished by their use in the sentence.

290. Just because a word ends in -ly doesn’t mean it’s an adverb. Many adjectives share that ending and need to be identified by how they’re used in the sentence.

Exercise.

Tell what each word in ly modifies, then whether it is an adjective or an adverb.

Tell what each word in ly modifies, then state whether it is an adjective or an adverb.

1. It seems certain that the Normans were more cleanly in their habits, more courtly in their manners.

1. It seems clear that the Normans were cleaner in their habits and more refined in their manners.

2. It is true he was rarely heard to speak.

2. It's true he rarely spoke.

3. He would inhale the smoke slowly and tranquilly.

3. He would take slow, calm puffs of smoke.

4. The perfectly heavenly law might be made law on earth.

4. The ideal divine law could become law on earth.

5. The king winced when he saw his homely little bride.

5. The king cringed when he saw his plain little bride.

6.

6.

With his proud, sparkling eye,
And his royal demeanor.

7.

7.

And all around, a beautiful blue sky
It was clearly felt, as the leaves laughed through.

8. He is inexpressibly mean, curiously jolly, kindly and good-natured in secret.

8. He is incredibly mean, oddly cheerful, kind, and good-natured beneath the surface.

291. Again, many words without -ly have the same form, whether adverbs or adjectives.

291. Again, many words without -ly look the same, whether they are adverbs or adjectives.

The reason is, that in Old and Middle English, adverbs derived from adjectives had the ending -e as a distinguishing mark; as,—

The reason is that in Old and Middle English, adverbs formed from adjectives had the ending -e as a distinguishing feature; for example,—

If men smoot it with a yerde smerte [If men smote it with a rod smartly].—Chaucer.

If men hit it hard with a rod. —Chaucer.

This e dropping off left both words having the same form.

This e dropping off left both words looking the same.

Weeds were sure to grow quicker in his fields.—Irving.

Weeds were definitely going to grow faster in his fields.—Irving.

O sweet and far from cliff and scar The horns of Elfland faintly blowing.—Tennyson.

O sweet and far from cliff and scar The horns of Elfland faintly blowing.—Tennyson.

But he must do his errand right.—Drake

But he must do his job right.—Drake

Long she looked in his tiny face.—Id.

Long she looked at his small face.—Id.

Not near so black as he was painted.—Thackeray.

Not nearly as bad as he was made out to be.—Thackeray.

In some cases adverbs with -ly are used side by side with those without -ly, but with a different meaning. Such are most, mostly; near, nearly; even, evenly; hard, hardly; etc.

In some cases, adverbs that end in -ly are used alongside those that don’t, but they have different meanings. Examples include most and mostly; near and nearly; even and evenly; hard and hardly; etc.

Special use of there.

292. Frequently the word there, instead of being used adverbially, merely introduces a sentence, and inverts the usual order of subject and predicate.

292. Often, the word there, instead of being used as an adverb, simply starts a sentence and flips the usual order of the subject and predicate.

This is such a fixed idiom that the sentence, if it has the verb be, seems awkward or affected without this "there introductory." Compare these:—

This is such a common phrase that the sentence, if it includes the verb be, feels awkward or forced without this "there introductory." Compare these:—

1. There are eyes, to be sure, that give no more admission into the man than blueberries.—Emerson.

1. There are eyes, to be sure, that reveal no more about a person than blueberries do.—Emerson.

2. Time was when field and watery cove With modulated echoes rang.—Wordsworth.

2. There was a time when the fields and watery coves echoed in harmony.—Wordsworth.

HOW TO PARSE ADVERBS.

293. In parsing adverbs, give—

In analyzing adverbs, provide—

(1) The class, according to meaning and also use.

(1) The class, based on meaning and usage.

(2) Degree of comparison, if the word is compared.

(2) Degree of comparison, if the word is being compared.

(3) What word or word group it modifies.

(3) Which word or group of words it modifies.

Exercise.

Parse all the adverbs in the following sentences:—

Parse all the adverbs in these sentences:—

1. Now the earth is so full that a drop overfills it.

1. Now the earth is so full that even a drop can make it overflow.

2. The higher we rise in the scale of being, the more certainly we quit the region of the brilliant eccentricities and dazzling contrasts which belong to a vulgar greatness.

2. The higher we go in the hierarchy of existence, the more definitely we leave behind the flashy oddities and striking contrasts that come with a superficial greatness.

3.

3.

We sit in the warm shade and feel good. How the sap moves up and blooms swell.

4. Meanwhile the Protestants believed somewhat doubtfully that he was theirs.

4. Meanwhile, the Protestants somewhat doubtfully believed that he was one of them.

5. Whence else could arise the bruises which I had received, but from my fall?

5. Where else could the bruises I got come from if not from my fall?

6. We somehow greedily gobble down all stories in which the characters of our friends are chopped up.

6. We somehow greedily devour all the stories where our friends' characters are taken apart.

7. How carefully that blessed day is marked in their little calendars!

7. How carefully that special day is marked in their little calendars!

8. But a few steps farther on, at the regular wine-shop, the Madonna is in great glory.

8. But a few steps further on, at the usual wine shop, the Madonna is in full glory.

9. The foolish and the dead alone never change their opinion.

9. Only the clueless and the dead never change their minds.

10. It is the Cross that is first seen, and always, burning in the center of the temple.

10. The Cross is the first thing you see, always glowing in the center of the temple.

11. For the impracticable, however theoretically enticing, is always politically unwise.

11. Because what is impractical, no matter how appealing it may seem in theory, is always politically unwise.

12. Whence come you? and whither are you bound?

12. Where are you coming from? and where are you headed?

13. How comes it that the evil which men say spreads so widely and lasts so long, whilst our good kind words don't seem somehow to take root and blossom?

13. Why is it that the evil people talk about spreads so widely and lasts so long, while our kind words don’t seem to take root and flourish?

14. At these carousals Alexander drank deep.

14. At these parties, Alexander drank heavily.

15. Perhaps he has been getting up a little architecture on the road from Florence.

15. Maybe he has been picking up some architecture knowledge on the way from Florence.

16. It is left you to find out why your ears are boxed.

16. It's up to you to figure out why you've been slapped.

17. Thither we went, and sate down on the steps of a house.

17. There we went and sat down on the steps of a house.

18. He could never fix which side of the garden walk would suit him best, but continually shifted.

18. He could never decide which side of the garden path would be best for him, so he constantly changed his mind.

19. But now the wind rose again, and the stern drifted in toward the bank.

19. But now the wind picked up again, and the back of the boat drifted toward the shore.

20. He caught the scent of wild thyme in the air, and found room to wonder how it could have got there.

20. He caught the smell of wild thyme in the air and couldn't help but wonder how it got there.

21. They were soon launched on the princely bosom of the Thames, upon which the sun now shone forth.

21. They were soon set out on the majestic Thames, where the sun was now shining brightly.

22. Why should we suppose that conscientious motives, feeble as they are constantly found to be in a good cause, should be omnipotent for evil?

22. Why should we think that even weak conscientious motives, which are often seen in good causes, could be all-powerful for bad ones?

24. It was pretty bad after that, and but for Polly's outdoor exercise, she would undoubtedly have succumbed.

24. It got pretty bad after that, and if it weren't for Polly's outdoor exercise, she definitely would have given in.


CONJUNCTIONS.

294. Unlike adverbs, conjunctions do not modify: they are used solely for the purpose of connecting.

294. Unlike adverbs, conjunctions don’t modify; they’re used only for connecting.

Examples of the use of conjunctions:—

Examples of using conjunctions:—

They connect words.

(1) Connecting words: "It is the very necessity and condition of existence;" "What a simple but exquisite illustration!"

(1) Connecting words: "It is the essential and condition of existence;" "What a straightforward but beautiful illustration!"

Word groups: Phrases.
Clauses.

(2) Connecting word groups: "Hitherto the two systems have existed in different States, but side by side within the American Union;" "This has happened because the Union is a confederation of States."

(2) Connecting word groups: "Until now, the two systems have existed in different states, but alongside each other within the American Union;" "This has occurred because the Union is a confederation of states."

Sentences.

(3) Connecting sentences: "Unanimity in this case can mean only a very large majority. But even unanimity itself is far from indicating the voice of God."

(3) Connecting sentences: "In this situation, unanimity can only mean a really large majority. But even unanimity itself doesn’t necessarily reflect the voice of God."

Paragraphs.

(4) Connecting sentence groups: Paragraphs would be too long to quote here, but the student will readily find them, in which the writer connects the divisions of narration or argument by such words as but, however, hence, nor, then, therefore, etc.

(4) Connecting sentence groups: Paragraphs would be too long to quote here, but the student will easily find them, where the writer connects parts of narration or argument using words like but, however, hence, nor, then, therefore, etc.

Definition.

295. A conjunction is a linking word, connecting words, word groups, sentences, or sentence groups.

295. A conjunction is a linking word that connects words, phrases, sentences, or groups of sentences.

Classes of conjunctions.

296. Conjunctions have two principal divisions:—

Conjunctions have two main types:—

(1) Coördinate, joining words, word groups, etc., of the same rank.

(1) Coordinate, connecting words, word groups, etc., of the same level.

(2) Subordinate, joining a subordinate or dependent clause to a principal or independent clause.

(2) Subordinate, connecting a subordinate or dependent clause to a main or independent clause.

COÖRDINATE CONJUNCTIONS.

297. Coördinate conjunctions are of four kinds:

297. Coordinating conjunctions are of four types:

(1) COPULATIVE, coupling or uniting words and expressions in the same line of thought; as and, also, as well as, moreover, etc.

(1) COPULATIVE, words and phrases that connect or combine ideas in the same line of thought; such as and, also, as well as, moreover, etc.

(2) ADVERSATIVE, connecting words and expressions that are opposite in thought; as but, yet, still, however, while, only, etc.

(2) ADVERSATIVE, connecting words and phrases that are opposite in meaning; such as but, yet, still, however, while, only, etc.

(3) CAUSAL, introducing a reason or cause. The chief ones are, for, therefore, hence, then.

(3) CAUSAL, introducing a reason or cause. The main ones are, for, therefore, hence, then.

(4) ALTERNATIVE, expressing a choice, usually between two things. They are or, either, else, nor, neither, whether.

(4) ALTERNATIVE, indicating a choice, typically between two things. They are or, either, else, nor, neither, whether.

Correlatives.

298. Some of these go in pairs, answering to each other in the same sentence; as, both...and; not only...but (or but also); either...or; whether...or; neither...nor; whether...or whether.

298. Some of these come in pairs, responding to each other in the same sentence, like, both...and; not only...but (or but also); either...or; whether...or; neither...nor; whether...or whether.

Some go in threes; as, not only...but... and; either...or...or; neither...nor... nor.

Some come in threes; like, not only...but... and; either...or...or; neither...nor... nor.

Further examples of the use of coördinate conjunctions:—

Further examples of using coordinating conjunctions:—

Copulative.

Your letter, likewise, had its weight; the bread was spent, the butter too; the window being open, as well as the room door.

Your letter, also, had its impact; the bread was gone, the butter too; with the window open, as well as the room door.

Adversative.

The assertion, however, serves but to show their ignorance. "Can this be so?" said Goodman Brown. "Howbeit, I have nothing to do with the governor and council."

The statement, however, only reveals their ignorance. "Is this really true?" said Goodman Brown. "Howbeit, I have nothing to do with the governor and council."

Nevertheless, in this mansion of gloom I now proposed to myself a sojourn of some weeks.

However, in this gloomy mansion, I now planned to stay for a few weeks.

Alternative.

While the earth bears a plant, or the sea rolls its waves.

While the earth grows a plant, or the sea crashes its waves.

They also noted less, where in the air A thousand streamers displayed beauty.
Causal.

Therefore the poet is not any permissive potentate, but is emperor in his own right. For it is the rule of the universe that corn shall serve man, and not man corn.

So the poet isn't just a lenient ruler; he's an emperor in his own right. Because the natural order of the universe is that corn should serve man, not the other way around.

Examples of the use of correlatives:—

Examples of using correlatives:—

He began to doubt whether both he and the world around him were not bewitched.—Irving.

He started to wonder if both he and the world surrounding him were under a spell.—Irving.

He is not only bold and vociferous, but possesses a considerable talent for mimicry, and seems to enjoy great satisfaction in mocking and teasing other birds.—Wilson.

He is not only bold and loud, but also has a real talent for mimicry, and he clearly enjoys mocking and teasing other birds.—Wilson.

It is...the same whether I move my hand along the surface of a body, or whether such a body is moved along my hand.—Burke.

It’s the same whether I move my hand across the surface of a body, or whether that body is moved along my hand.—Burke.

Neither the place in which he found himself, nor the exclusive attention that he attracted, disturbed the self-possession of the young Mohican.—Cooper.

Neither the location he was in, nor the focused attention he received, upset the composure of the young Mohican.Cooper.

Neither was there any phantom memorial of life, nor wing of bird, nor echo, nor green leaf, nor creeping thing, that moved or stirred upon the soundless waste.—De Quincey.

There was no ghostly reminder of life, no bird in flight, no echo, no green leaf, no crawling creature that moved or stirred in the silent expanse.—De Quincey.

SUBORDINATE CONJUNCTIONS.

299. Subordinate conjunctions are of the following kinds:—

299. Subordinate conjunctions come in the following types:—

(1) PLACE: where, wherever, whither, whereto, whithersoever, whence, etc.

PLACE: where, wherever, to where, whither, from where, etc.

(2) TIME: when, before, after, since, as, until, whenever, while, ere, etc.

(2) TIME: when, before, after, since, as, until, whenever, while, ere, etc.

(3) MANNER: how, as, however, howsoever.

MANNER: how, as, but, anyway.

(4) CAUSE or REASON: because, since, as, now, whereas, that, seeing, etc.

(4) CAUSE or REASON: because, since, as, now, whereas, that, seeing, etc.

(5) COMPARISON: than and as.

(5) COMPARISON: than and as.

(6) PURPOSE: that, so, so that, in order that, lest, so...as.

(6) PURPOSE: that, so, so that, in order that, lest, so... as.

(7) RESULT: that, so that, especially that after so.

(7) RESULT: that, so that, especially that after so.

(8) CONDITION or CONCESSION: if, unless, so, except, though, although; even if, provided, provided that, in case, on condition that, etc.

(8) CONDITION or CONCESSION: if, unless, so, except, though, although; even if, provided, provided that, in case, on condition that, etc.

(9) SUBSTANTIVE: that, whether, sometimes if, are used frequently to introduce noun clauses used as subject, object, in apposition, etc.

(9) SUBSTANTIVE: that, whether, sometimes if, are often used to introduce noun clauses that function as subject, object, in apposition, etc.

Examples of the use of subordinate conjunctions:—

Examples of using subordinating conjunctions:—

Place.

Where the treasure is, there will the heart be also.—Bible.

Where your treasure is, that's where your heart will be too. —Bible.

To lead from eighteen to twenty millions of men whithersoever they will.—J. Quincy.

To lead from eighteen to twenty million people wherever they want.—J. Quincy.

An artist will delight in excellence wherever he meets it. —Allston.

An artist will find joy in excellence wherever they encounter it. —Allston.

Time.

I promise to devote myself to your happiness whenever you shall ask it of me.—Paulding.

I promise to commit myself to your happiness whenever you need it from me.—Paulding.

It is sixteen years since I saw the Queen of France.—Burke.

It’s been sixteen years since I saw the Queen of France.—Burke.

Manner.

Let the world go how it will.—Carlyle

Let the world go how it will.—Carlyle

Events proceed, not as they were expected or intended, but as they are impelled by the irresistible laws.—Ames.

Events unfold, not as they were expected or planned, but as they are driven by the unstoppable laws.—Ames.

Cause, reason.

I see no reason why I should not have the same thought.—Emerson.

I see no reason why I shouldn't have the same thought.—Emerson.

Then Denmark blessed our chief,
That he gave her peace. —Campbell.
Now that he is dead, his martyrdom will bear fruit. He should have had late harvests from the palms in his life.
—H. H. Jackson.

Sparing neither whip nor spur, seeing that he carried the vindication of his patron's fame in his saddlebags.—Irving.

Sparing neither whip nor spur, knowing that he carried the vindication of his patron's fame in his saddlebags.—Irving.

Comparison.

As a soldier, he was more solicitous to avoid mistakes than to perform exploits that are brilliant.—Ames.

As a soldier, he was more concerned with avoiding mistakes than with achieving spectacular feats.—Ames.

All the subsequent experience of our race had gone over him with as little permanent effect as [as follows the semi-adverbs as and so in expressing comparison] the passing breeze.—Hawthorne.

All the experiences that followed for our kind had impacted him as little as the breeze that passes by. —Hawthorne.

Purpose.

We wish for a thousand heads, a thousand bodies, that we might celebrate its immense beauty.—Emerson.

We long for a thousand heads, a thousand bodies, so we can celebrate its immense beauty.—Emerson.

Result.
So many thoughts went back and forth,
That would be a waste for her to close her eyes. —Coleridge.

I was again covered with water, but not so long but I held it out.—Defoe.

I was drenched again, but not for long before I managed to hold it out.—Defoe.

Condition.

A ridicule which is of no import unless the scholar heed it.—Emerson.

A mockery that doesn't matter unless the scholar pays attention to it.—Emerson.

There flowers or weeds can grow as they please,
So I don't see them. —Byron.
Concession.
What though the brightness that was once so bright
Be gone from my sight forever. —Wordsworth.
Substantive.

It seems a pity that we can only spend it once.—Emerson.

It seems a pity that we can only spend it once.—Emerson.

We do not believe that he left any worthy man his foe who had ever been his friend.—Ames.

We don't think he left any decent man as an enemy who had ever been his friend.—Ames.

Let us see whether the greatest, the wisest, the purest-hearted of all ages are agreed in any wise on this point.—Ruskin.

Let’s see whether the greatest, the wisest, the purest-hearted of all time come to a consensus on this point.—Ruskin.

Who can tell if Washington be a great man or no?—Emerson.

Who can say whether Washington is a great man or not?—Emerson.

300. As will have been noticed, some words—for example, since, while, as, that, etc.—may belong to several classes of conjunctions, according to their meaning and connection in the sentence.

300. As you may have noticed, some words—like since, while, as, that, etc.—can fit into multiple categories of conjunctions, depending on their meaning and how they connect in the sentence.

Exercises.

(a) Bring up sentences containing five examples of coördinate conjunctions.

(a) Provide sentences that include five examples of coordinating conjunctions.

(b) Bring up sentences containing three examples of correlatives.

(b) Provide sentences that include three examples of correlatives.

(c) Bring up sentences containing ten subordinate conjunctions.

(c) Provide sentences that have ten subordinate conjunctions.

(d) Tell whether the italicized words in the following sentences are conjunctions or adverbs; classify them if conjunctions:—

(d) Indicate whether the italicized words in the following sentences are conjunctions or adverbs; if they are conjunctions, classify them:—

1. Yet these were often exhibited throughout our city.

1. Yet these were often shown all over our city.

2. No one had yet caught his character.

2. No one had still figured out his character.

3. After he was gone, the lady called her servant.

3. After he left, the woman called her servant.

4. And they lived happily forever after.

4. And they lived happily ever after.

5. They, however, hold a subordinate rank.

5. They, however, hold a lower rank.

6. However ambitious a woman may be to command admiration abroad, her real merit is known at home.

6. However ambitious a woman may be to earn admiration elsewhere, her true worth is recognized at home.

7. Whence else could arise the bruises which I had received?

7. Where else could the bruises I had gotten come from?

8. He was brought up for the church, whence he was occasionally called the Dominie.

8. He was raised for the church, from which he was sometimes called the Dominie.

9. And then recovering, she faintly pressed her hand.

9. And then as she regained her strength, she weakly held out her hand.

10. In what point of view, then, is war not to be regarded with horror?

10. From what perspective, then, should we not view war as horrifying?

11. The moth fly, as he shot in air, Crept under the leaf, and hid her there.

11. The moth flew, as it soared through the air, crept under the leaf, and hid there.

12. Besides, as the rulers of a nation are as liable as other people to be governed by passion and prejudice, there is little prospect of justice in permitting war.

12. Besides, the leaders of a nation are just as likely as anyone else to be driven by emotions and bias, so allowing war offers little hope for justice.

13. While a faction is a minority, it will remain harmless.

13. While a group is a minority, it will stay harmless.

14. While patriotism glowed in his heart, wisdom blended in his speech her authority with her charms.

14. While patriotism shone in his heart, wisdom combined her authority with her charm in his speech.

15. Hence it is highly important that the custom of war should be abolished.

15. Therefore it is very important that the practice of war should be abolished.

16. The raft and the money had been thrown near her, none of the lashings having given way; only what is the use of a guinea amongst tangle and sea gulls?

16. The raft and the money had been tossed close to her, none of the bindings having come loose; but what’s the point of having a guinea surrounded by weeds and seagulls?

17. Only let his thoughts be of equal scope, and the frame will suit the picture.

17. Just let his thoughts be broad enough, and the frame will fit the picture.

SPECIAL REMARKS.

As if.

301. As if is often used as one conjunction of manner, but really there is an ellipsis between the two words; thus,—

301. As if is often used as a way to join clauses, but there’s actually a missing part between the two words; so,—

But your soft murmuring
Sounds sweet as if a sister's voice is correcting.
—Byron.

If analyzed, the expression would be, "sounds sweet as [the sound would be] if a sister's voice reproved;" as, in this case, expressing degree if taken separately.

If analyzed, the expression would be, "sounds sweet as [the sound would be] if a sister's voice reproved;" as, in this case, expressing degree if taken separately.

But the ellipsis seems to be lost sight of frequently in writing, as is shown by the use of as though.

But the ellipsis often gets overlooked in writing, as demonstrated by the use of as though.

As though.

302. In Emerson's sentence, "We meet, and part as though we parted not," it cannot be said that there is an ellipsis: it cannot mean "we part as [we should part] though" etc.

302. In Emerson's sentence, "We meet, and part as though we parted not," it can't be claimed that there's an ellipsis: it doesn't mean "we part as [we should part] though" etc.

Consequently, as if and as though may be taken as double conjunctions expressing manner. As though seems to be in as wide use as the conjunction as if; for example,—

Consequently, as if and as though can be seen as double conjunctions that express manner. As though appears to be just as commonly used as the conjunction as if; for example,—

Do you know a farmer who acts and lives as though he believed one word of this?—H. Greeley.

Do you know a farmer who acts and lives as if he believed even one word of this?—H. Greeley.

His voice ... sounded as though it came out of a barrel.—Irving.

His voice sounded like it came out of a barrel. —Irving.

Blinded equally by sunshine and by rain,
As if a rose should close up and become a bud again.
—Keats

Examples might be quoted from almost all authors.

Examples could be taken from nearly all writers.

As for as if.

303. In poetry, as is often equivalent to as if.

303. In poetry, as is often used the same way as as if.

And their eyes became strangely dull,
Clouded, even as they would weep. —Emily Brontë.
We appeared to talk quietly,
So moved slowly about,
Since we had given her half our powers
To make a living. —Hood.

HOW TO PARSE CONJUNCTIONS.

HOW TO ANALYZE CONJUNCTIONS.

304. In parsing conjunctions, tell—

In analyzing conjunctions, inform—

(1) To what class and subclass they belong.

(1) What class and subclass they belong to.

(2) What words, word groups, etc., they connect.

(2) What words, phrases, etc., they link.

Caution.

In classifying them, particular attention must be paid to the meaning of the word. Some conjunctions, such as nor, and, because, when, etc., are regularly of one particular class; others belong to several classes. For example, compare the sentences,—

In classifying them, particular attention must be paid to the meaning of the word. Some conjunctions, such as nor, and, because, when, etc., are typically of one specific class; others belong to multiple classes. For example, compare the sentences,—

1. It continued raining, so that I could not stir abroad.—Defoe

1. It kept raining, so I couldn't go outside.—Defoe

2. There will be an agreement in whatever variety of actions, so they be each honest and natural in their hour.—Emerson

2. There will be an agreement in whatever kinds of actions, as long as they are each honest and natural in their own time.—Emerson

3. It was too dark to put an arrow into the creature's eye; so they paddled on.—Kingsley

3. It was too dark to shoot an arrow at the creature's eye; so they paddled on.—Kingsley

In sentence 1, so that expresses result, and its clause depends on the other, hence it is a subordinate conjunction of result; in 2, so means provided,—is subordinate of condition; in 3, so means therefore, and its clause is independent, hence it is a coördinate conjunction of reason.

In sentence 1, so that shows a result, and its clause relies on the other, so it is a subordinate conjunction of result; in 2, so means provided—and acts as a subordinate conjunction of condition; in 3, so means therefore, and its clause stands alone, making it a coordinating conjunction of reason.

Exercise.

Parse all the conjunctions in these sentences:—

Parse all the conjunctions in these sentences:—

1. When the gods come among men, they are not known.

1. When the gods interact with people, they go unnoticed.

2. If he could solve the riddle, the Sphinx was slain.

2. If he could solve the riddle, the Sphinx would be defeated.

3. A lady with whom I was riding in the forest said to me that the woods always seemed to wait, as if the genii who inhabit them suspended their deeds until the wayfarer had passed.

3. A woman I was riding with in the forest told me that the woods always felt like they were on pause, as if the spirits that lived there were holding back their actions until the traveler had moved on.

4. The mountain of granite blooms into an eternal flower, with the lightness and delicate finish as well as the aërial proportions and perspective of vegetable scenery.

4. The granite mountain transforms into a timeless flower, showcasing a lightness and delicate finish, along with the airy proportions and perspective reminiscent of natural landscapes.

5. At sea, or in the forest, or in the snow, he sleeps as warm, dines with as good an appetite, and associates as happily, as beside his own chimneys.

5. Whether at sea, in the forest, or in the snow, he sleeps just as warmly, eats with just as big an appetite, and connects just as happily as he does by his own fireplace.

6. Our admiration of the antique is not admiration of the old, but of the natural.

6. Our admiration for the antique isn't about venerating the old, but rather appreciating the natural.

7. "Doctor," said his wife to Martin Luther, "how is it that whilst subject to papacy we prayed so often and with such fervor, whilst now we pray with the utmost coldness, and very seldom?"

7. "Doctor," his wife said to Martin Luther, "how is it that when we were under the papacy we prayed so often and with such passion, but now we pray with total indifference and very rarely?"

8. All the postulates of elfin annals,—that the fairies do not like to be named; that their gifts are capricious and not to be trusted; and the like,—I find them true in Concord, however they might be in Cornwall or Bretagne.

8. All the beliefs about fairy tales—that fairies don’t like to be named, that their gifts are unpredictable and unreliable, and so on—I find to be true in Concord, no matter how they might be in Cornwall or Brittany.

9. He is the compend of time; he is also the correlative of nature.

9. He is the summary of time; he is also the counterpart of nature.

10. He dismisses without notice his thought, because it is his.

10. He dismisses his thought without a second thought, simply because it's his.

11. The eye was placed where one ray should fall, that it might testify of that particular ray.

11. The eye was positioned to receive one specific ray, so it could bear witness to that particular ray.

12. It may be safely trusted, so it be faithfully imparted.

12. It can be trusted as long as it's shared honestly.

13. He knows how to speak to his contemporaries.

13. He knows how to talk to his peers.

14. Goodness must have some edge to it,—else it is none.

14. Goodness has to have some strength to it; otherwise, it isn’t really goodness.

15. I hope it is somewhat better than whim at last.

15. I hope it turns out to be a bit more than just a fleeting fancy in the end.

16. Now you have the whip in your hand, won't you lay on?

16. Now that you have the whip in your hand, won't you use it?

17. I scowl as I dip my pen into the inkstand.

17. I frown as I dip my pen into the inkwell.

18. I speak, therefore, of good novels only.

18. So, I'm only talking about good novels.

19. Let her loose in the library as you do a fawn in a field.

19. Let her roam in the library like you would a fawn in a field.

20. And whether consciously or not, you must be, in many a heart, enthroned.

20. And whether you realize it or not, you have to be, in many hearts, seen as royalty.

21. It is clear, however, the whole conditions are changed.

21. It is clear, however, that the entire situation has changed.

22. I never rested until I had a copy of the book.

22. I didn’t stop until I got a copy of the book.

23. For, though there may be little resemblance otherwise, in this they agree, that both were wayward.

23. Because, even if they don’t have much in common otherwise, they both agree on this: that they were both rebellious.

24. Still, she might have the family countenance; and Kate thought he looked with a suspicious scrutiny into her face as he inquired for the young don.

24. Still, she might have the family look; and Kate thought he was examining her face closely with a hint of suspicion as he asked about the young don.

25. He follows his genius whithersoever it may lead him.

25. He follows his instincts wherever they take him.

26. The manuscript indeed speaks of many more, whose names I omit, seeing that it behooves me to hasten.

26. The manuscript actually mentions many more, whose names I leave out since I need to move quickly.

27. God had marked this woman's sin with a scarlet letter, which had such efficacy that no human sympathy could reach her, save it were sinful like herself.

27. God had marked this woman's sin with a scarlet letter, which was so powerful that no human sympathy could touch her unless it was sinful like her own.

28. I rejoice to stand here no longer, to be looked at as though I had seven heads and ten horns.

28. I’m glad to stand here no more, to be stared at like I have seven heads and ten horns.

29. He should neither praise nor blame nor defend his equals.

29. He shouldn’t praise, criticize, or defend his peers.

30. There was no iron to be seen, nor did they appear acquainted with its properties; for they unguardedly took a drawn sword by the edge, when it was presented to them.

30. There wasn't any iron in sight, nor did they seem to know anything about its properties; they carelessly grabbed a drawn sword by the blade when it was handed to them.


PREPOSITIONS..

305. The word preposition implies place before: hence it would seem that a preposition is always before its object. It may be so in the majority of cases, but in a considerable proportion of instances the preposition is after its object.

305. The word preposition means placed before: so it seems that a preposition is always before its object. This might be true most of the time, but in quite a few cases, the preposition actually comes after its object.

This occurs in such cases as the following:—

This happens in situations like the following:—

Preposition not before its object.

(1) After a relative pronoun, a very common occurrence; thus,—

(1) After a relative pronoun, a very common occurrence; thus,—

The most dismal Christmas fun which these eyes ever looked on.—Thackeray.

The most depressing Christmas fun that these eyes have ever seen.—Thackeray.

An ancient nation which they know nothing of.—Emerson.

An ancient nation they know nothing of. —Emerson.

A foe, whom a champion has fought with to-day.—Scott.

A foe a champion fought today.

Some little toys that girls are fond of.—Swift.

Some little toys girls love. —Swift.

"It's the man that I spoke to you about" said Mr. Pickwick.—Dickens.

"It's the man that I told you about," said Mr. Pickwick.—Dickens.

(2) After an interrogative adverb, adjective, or pronoun, also frequently found:—

(2) After a questioning adverb, adjective, or pronoun, also often seen:—

What God doth the wizard pray to?—Hawthorne.

What god does the wizard pray to? —Hawthorne.

What is the little one thinking about?—J. G. Holland.

What is the little one thinking about?—J.G. Holland.

Where the Devil did it come from, I wonder?—Dickens.

Where did that come from, I wonder? —Dickens.

(3) With an infinitive, in such expressions as these:—

(3) Using an infinitive, in phrases like these:—

A proper quarrel for a Crusader to do battle in.—Scott.

A proper quarrel for a Crusader to fight in.—Scott.

"You know, General, it was nothing to joke about."—Cable

"You know, General, it was not something to joke about."—Cable

Had no harsh treatment to reproach herself with.—Boyesen

Had no harsh treatment to regret.

A loss of vitality scarcely to be accounted for.—Holmes.

A loss of vitality that’s hard to explain. —Holmes.

Places for horses to be hitched to.—Id.

Places for horses to be tied.

(4) After a noun,—the case in which the preposition is expected to be, and regularly is, before its object; as,—

(4) After a noun,—the case where the preposition is expected to be, and usually is, before its object; as,—

And unseen mermaids' magical song
Weeds start bubbling up.
—Beddoes.
Always breathless and always young,
All human passion above. —Keats.

306. Since the object of a preposition is most often a noun, the statement is made that the preposition usually precedes its object; as in the following sentence, "Roused by the shock, he started from his trance."

306. Since the object of a preposition is usually a noun, it's often stated that the preposition comes before its object; as in the following sentence, "Roused by the shock, he started from his trance."

Here the words by and from are connectives; but they do more than connect. By shows the relation in thought between roused and shock, expressing means or agency; from shows the relation in thought between started and trance, and expresses separation. Both introduce phrases.

Here, the words by and from are connectors; but they do more than just connect. By indicates the relationship in thought between roused and shock, expressing means or agency; from indicates the relationship in thought between started and trance, and expresses separation. Both introduce phrases.

Definition.

307. A preposition is a word joined to a noun or its equivalent to make up a qualifying or an adverbial phrase, and to show the relation between its object and the word modified.

307. A preposition is a word that connects to a noun or its equivalent to form a qualifying or adverbial phrase, and it illustrates the relationship between its object and the word it modifies.

Objects, nouns and the following.

308. Besides nouns, prepositions may have as objects—

308. Besides nouns, prepositions can also have as objects—

(1) Pronouns: "Upon them with the lance;" "With whom I traverse earth."

(1) Pronouns: "On them with the lance;" "With whom I travel the earth."

(2) Adjectives: "On high the winds lift up their voices."

(2) Adjectives: "Up in the sky, the winds raise their voices."

(3) Adverbs: "If I live wholly from within;" "Had it not been for the sea from aft."

(3) Adverbs: "If I live completely from within;" "If it hadn't been for the sea from behind."

(4) Phrases: "Everything came to her from on high;" "From of old they had been zealous worshipers."

(4) Phrases: "Everything came to her from above;" "Since ancient times they had been eager worshipers."

(5) Infinitives: "The queen now scarce spoke to him save to convey some necessary command for her service."

(5) Infinitives: "The queen barely spoke to him except to give some necessary instruction for her service."

(6) Gerunds: "They shrink from inflicting what they threaten;" "He is not content with shining on great occasions."

(6) Gerunds: "They hesitate to impose what they threaten;" "He is not satisfied with excelling in important moments."

(7) Clauses:

(7) Terms:

"Every soldier's eye shall shine brightly
To where your sky-born glories burn."
Object usually objective case, if noun or pronoun.

309. The object of a preposition, if a noun or pronoun, is usually in the objective case. In pronouns, this is shown by the form of the word, as in Sec. 308 (1).

309. The object of a preposition, when it's a noun or pronoun, is typically in the objective case. In pronouns, this is indicated by the form of the word, as shown in Sec. 308 (1).

Often possessive.

In the double-possessive idiom, however, the object is in the possessive case after of; for example,—

In the double-possessive idiom, however, the object is in the possessive case after of; for example,—

There was also a book of Defoe's,... and another of Mather's.—Franklin.

There was also a book by Defoe,... and another by Mather.—Franklin.

See also numerous examples in Secs. 68 and 87.

See also many examples in Sections 68 and 87.

Sometimes nominative.

And the prepositions but and save are found with the nominative form of the pronoun following; as,—

And the prepositions but and save are found with the nominative form of the pronoun following; as,—

Nobody knows except my mate and me. Where our home and our young ones lie.
—BRYANT.

USES OF PREPOSITIONS.

Inseparable.

310. Prepositions are used in three ways:—

310. Prepositions are used in three ways:—

(1) Compounded with verbs, adverbs, or conjunctions; as, for example, with verbs, withdraw, understand, overlook, overtake, overflow, undergo, outstay, outnumber, overrun, overgrow, etc.; with adverbs, thereat, therein, therefrom, thereby, therewith, etc.; with conjunctions, whereat, wherein, whereon, wherethrough, whereupon, etc.

(1) Combined with verbs, adverbs, or conjunctions; for example, with verbs, withdraw, understand, overlook, overtake, overflow, undergone, outstay, outnumber, overrun, overgrow, etc.; with adverbs, thereat, therein, therefrom, thereby, therewith, etc.; with conjunctions, whereat, wherein, whereon, wherethrough, whereupon, etc.

Separable.

(2) Following a verb, and being really a part of the verb. This use needs to be watched closely, to see whether the preposition belongs to the verb or has a separate prepositional function. For example, in the sentences, (a) "He broke a pane from the window," (b) "He broke into the bank," in (a), the verb broke is a predicate, modified by the phrase introduced by from; in (b), the predicate is not broke, modified by into the bank, but broke into—the object, bank.

(2) After a verb, functioning as part of the verb. This usage should be monitored closely to determine if the preposition is part of the verb or serves a separate prepositional role. For instance, in the sentences, (a) "He broke a pane from the window," (b) "He broke into the bank," in (a), the verb broke acts as a predicate, modified by the phrase that starts with from; in (b), the predicate is not just broke modified by into the bank, but broke into — with the object being bank.

Study carefully the following prepositions with verbs:—

Study carefully the following prepositions with verbs:—

Considering the space they took up.—Swift.

Considering the space they occupied. —Swift.

I loved, laughed at, and pitied him.—Goldsmith.

I loved, laughed at, and felt sorry for him.—Goldsmith.

The sun breaks through the darkest clouds.—Shakespeare.

The sun shines through the darkest clouds.—Shakespeare.

They will root up the whole ground.—Swift.

They will dig up the whole ground.—Swift.

A friend prevailed upon one of the interpreters.—Addison

A friend encouraged one of the interpreters.—Addison

My uncle approved of it.—Franklin.

My uncle was cool with it.—Franklin.

The robber who broke into them.—Landor.

The robber who broke in on them.—Landor.

This period is not obscurely hinted at.—Lamb.

This period is not vaguely suggested. —Lamb.

The judge winked at the iniquity of the decision.—Id.

The judge winked at the unfairness of the decision.—See above.

The pupils' voices, conning over their lessons.—Irving.

The pupils' voices, going over their lessons.—Irving.

To help out his maintenance.—Id.

To assist his maintenance.—Id.

With such pomp is Merry Christmas ushered in.—Longfellow.

With such excitement is Merry Christmas welcomed.—Longfellow.

Ordinary use as connective, relation words.

(3) As relation words, introducing phrases,—the most common use, in which the words have their own proper function.

(3) As relation words, introducing phrases — the most common usage, where the words serve their specific function.

Usefulness of prepositions.

311. Prepositions are the subtlest and most useful words in the language for compressing a clear meaning into few words. Each preposition has its proper and general meaning, which, by frequent and exacting use, has expanded and divided into a variety of meanings more or less close to the original one.

311. Prepositions are the most subtle and useful words in the language for expressing a clear meaning in just a few words. Each preposition has its specific and general meaning, which, through frequent and careful use, has broadened and split into various meanings that are more or less related to the original one.

Take, for example, the word over. It expresses place, with motion, as, "The bird flew over the house;" or rest, as, "Silence broods over the earth." It may also convey the meaning of about, concerning; as, "They quarreled over the booty." Or it may express time: "Stay over night."

Take, for example, the word over. It indicates location with movement, like, "The bird flew over the house;" or it can show a state of rest, as in, "Silence hangs over the earth." It can also mean about or concerning, as in, "They argued over the loot." Or it can indicate time: "Stay over night."

The language is made richer and more flexible by there being several meanings to each of many prepositions, as well as by some of them having the same meaning as others.

The language becomes richer and more flexible because many prepositions have multiple meanings, and some even share the same meaning as others.

CLASSES OF PREPOSITIONS.

312. It would be useless to attempt to classify all the prepositions, since they are so various in meaning.

312. It would be pointless to try to categorize all the prepositions, since they have such a wide range of meanings.

The largest groups are those of place, time, and exclusion.

The biggest groups are those of place, time, and exclusion.

PREPOSITIONS OF PLACE.

313. The following are the most common to indicate place:—

313. The following are the most common ways to indicate place:—

(1) PLACE WHERE: abaft, about, above, across, amid (amidst), among (amongst), at, athwart, below, beneath, beside, between (betwixt), beyond, in, on, over, under (underneath), upon, round or around, without.

(1) PLACE WHERE: abaft, about, above, across, amid, among, at, athwart, below, beneath, beside, between, beyond, in, on, over, under, upon, round or around, without.

(2) PLACE WHITHER: into, unto, up, through, throughout, to, towards.

(2) PLACE WHERE: into, unto, up, through, throughout, to, towards.

(3) PLACE WHENCE: down, from (away from, down from, from out, etc.), off, out of.

(3) PLACE WHENCE: down, from (away from, down from, from out, etc.), off, out of.

Abaft is exclusively a sea term, meaning back of.

Abaft is strictly a nautical term, meaning the back of.

Among (or amongst) and between (or betwixt) have a difference in meaning, and usually a difference in use. Among originally meant in the crowd (on gemong), referring to several objects; between and betwixt were originally made up of the preposition be (meaning by) and twēon or twēonum (modern twain), by two, and be with twīh (or twuh), having the same meaning, by two objects.

Among (or amongst) and between (or betwixt) have different meanings and generally different uses. Among originally meant in the crowd (on gemong), referring to several objects; between and betwixt were originally made up of the preposition be (meaning by) and twēon or twēonum (modern twain), meaning by two, and be with twīh (or twuh), which also means by two objects.

As to modern use, see "Syntax" (Sec. 459).

As for current usage, see "Syntax" (Sec. 459).

PREPOSITIONS OF TIME.

314. They are after, during, pending, till or until; also many of the prepositions of place express time when put before words indicating time, such as at, between, by, about, on, within, etc.

314. They are after, during, pending, til or until; also many prepositions of place express time when used before words that indicate time, such as at, between, by, about, on, within, etc.

These are all familiar, and need no special remark.

These are all well-known and don't need any special comment.

EXCLUSION OR SEPARATION.

315. The chief ones are besides, but, except, save, without. The participle excepting is also used as a preposition.

315. The main ones are besides, but, except, save, without. The participle excepting is also used as a preposition.

MISCELLANEOUS PREPOSITIONS.

316. Against implies opposition, sometimes place where. In colloquial English it is sometimes used to express time, now and then also in literary English; for example,—

316. Against means being in opposition to something, and can also refer to a physical location. In everyday English, it’s sometimes used to indicate time, occasionally seen in literary English as well; for example,—

She contrived to fit up the baby's cradle for me against night.—Swift

She managed to set up the baby's crib for me before night.—Fast

About, and the participial prepositions concerning, respecting, regarding, mean with reference to.

About, and the participial prepositions concerning, respecting, regarding, mean with reference to.

Phrase prepositions.

317. Many phrases are used as single prepositions: by means of, by virtue of, by help of, by dint of, by force of; out of, on account of, by way of, for the sake of; in consideration of, in spite of, in defiance of, instead of, in view of, in place of; with respect to, with regard to, according to, agreeably to; and some others.

317. Many phrases are used as single prepositions: by means of, by virtue of, with the help of, by dint of, by force of; out of, because of, through, for the sake of; in consideration of, despite, in defiance of, instead of, in light of, in place of; regarding, concerning, according to, in agreement with; and some others.

318. Besides all these, there are some prepositions that have so many meanings that they require separate and careful treatment: on (upon), at, by, for, from, of, to, with.

318. In addition to all these, there are some prepositions that have so many meanings that they need to be addressed separately and carefully: on (upon), at, by, for, from, of, to, with.

No attempt will be made to give all the meanings that each one in this list has: the purpose is to stimulate observation, and to show how useful prepositions really are.

No attempt will be made to give all the meanings that each one in this list has: the goal is to encourage observation and to demonstrate how useful prepositions actually are.

At.

319. The general meaning of at is near, close to, after a verb or expression implying position; and towards after a verb or expression indicating motion. It defines position approximately, while in is exact, meaning within.

319. The general meaning of at is near, close to, when used after a verb or phrase that suggests a position; and towards when used after a verb or phrase that indicates movement. It describes position loosely, while in is precise, meaning within.

Its principal uses are as follows:—

Its main uses are as follows:—

(1) Place where.

Location.

They who heard it listened with a curling horror at the heart.—J. F. Cooper.

They who heard it listened with a curling horror at the heart.—J.F. Cooper.

There had been a strike at the neighboring manufacturing village, and there was to be a public meeting, at which he was besought to be present.—T. W. Higginson.

There had been a strike in the neighboring manufacturing village, and there was going to be a public meeting, where he was asked to be present.—T.W. Higginson.

(2) Time, more exact, meaning the point of time at which.

(2) Time, to be more precise, refers to the specific moment when.

He wished to attack at daybreak.—Parkman.

He wanted to attack at dawn.—Parkman.

They buried him darkly, at dead of night.—Wolfe

They buried him quietly, in the dead of night.—Wolfe

(3) Direction.

Direction.

The mother stood looking wildly down at the unseemly object.—Cooper.

The mother stood looking wildly down at the inappropriate object.—Coop.

You are next invited...to grasp at the opportunity, and take for your subject, "Health."—Higginson.

You are now invited...to seize the opportunity and choose "Health" as your subject.—Higginson.

Here belong such expressions as laugh at, look at, wink at, gaze at, stare at, peep at, scowl at, sneer at, frown at, etc.

Here belong such expressions as laugh at, look at, wink at, gaze at, stare at, peep at, scowl at, sneer at, frown at, etc.

We laugh at the elixir that promises to prolong life to a thousand years.—Johnson.

We laugh at the potion that claims to extend life to a thousand years.—Johnson.

"You never mean to say," pursued Dot, sitting on the floor and shaking her head at him.—Dickens.

"You never actually mean to say," Dot continued, sitting on the floor and shaking her head at him.—Dickens.

(4) Source or cause, meaning because of, by reason of.

(4) Source or cause, meaning because of, by reason of.

I felt my heart chill at the dismal sound.—T. W. Knox.

I felt my heart freeze at the gloomy sound.—T.W. Knox.

Delighted at this outburst against the Spaniards.—Parkman.

Delighted by this outburst against the Spaniards. —Parkman.

(5) Then the idiomatic phrases at last, at length, at any rate, at the best, at the worst, at least, at most, at first, at once, at all, at one, at naught, at random, etc.; and phrases signifying state or condition of being, as, at work, at play, at peace, at war, at rest, etc.

(5) Then the idiomatic phrases finally, eventually, regardless, at best, at worst, at least, at most, initially, immediately, at all, together, for nothing, randomly, etc.; and phrases indicating a state or condition of being, such as, at work, having fun, in peace, in conflict, at rest, etc.

Exercise.—Find sentences with three different uses of at.

Exercise.—Find sentences that use at in three different ways.

By.

320. Like at, by means near or close to, but has several other meanings more or less connected with this,—

320. Like at, by means near or close to, but has several other meanings that are more or less related to this,—

(1) The general meaning of place.

The general meaning of place.

Richard was standing by the window.—Aldrich.

Richard was standing by the window.—Aldrich.

Provided always the coach had not shed a wheel by the roadside.—Id.

Provided the coach hadn't lost a wheel by the roadside.Id.

(2) Time.

Time.

But by this time the bell of Old Alloway began tolling.—B. Taylor

But by this time the bell of Old Alloway started ringing.—B. Taylor

The angel came by night.—R. H. Stoddard.

The angel came at night.—R. H. Stoddard.

(3) Agency or means.

(3) Agency or method.

Menippus knew which were the kings by their howling louder.—M. D. Conway.

Menippus could tell who the kings were by their louder howling. —M.D. Conway.

At St. Helena, the first port made by the ship, he stopped. —Parton.

At St. Helena, the first port visited by the ship, he stopped. —Parton.

(4) Measure of excess, expressing the degree of difference.

(4) Measure of excess, showing how much things differ.

At that time [the earth] was richer, by many a million of acres.—De Quincey.

At that time, the earth was richer by many millions of acres. —De Quincey.

He was taller by almost the breadth of my nail.—Swift.

He was taller by almost the width of my nail.—Fast.

(5) It is also used in oaths and adjurations.

(5) It is also used in oaths and affirmations.

By my faith, that is a very plump hand for a man of eighty-four!—Parton.

By my faith, that is a very hefty hand for a man of eighty-four!—Parton.

They implore us by the long trials of struggling humanity; by the blessed memory of the departed; by the wrecks of time; by the ruins of nations.—Everett.

They urge us by the long struggles of humanity; by the cherished memories of those we've lost; by the remnants of time; by the ruins of nations.—Everett.

Exercise.—Find sentences with three different meanings of by.

Exercise.—Find sentences that show three different meanings of by.

For.

321. The chief meanings of for are as follows:—

321. The main meanings of for are as follows:—

(1) Motion towards a place, or a tendency or action toward the attainment of any object.

(1) Movement toward a place, or an inclination or action aimed at achieving any goal.

Pioneers who were opening the way for the march of the nation.—Cooper.

Pioneers who were paving the way for the progress of the nation.—Cooper.

She saw the boat headed for her.—Warner.

She saw the boat heading for her.—Warner.

(2) In favor of, for the benefit of, in behalf of, a person or thing.

(2) In favor of, for the benefit of, on behalf of, a person or thing.

He and they were for immediate attack.—Parkman

He and they were ready for immediate attack.—Parkman

The people were then against us; they are now for us.—W. L. Garrison.

The people were then against us; they are now for us.—W. L. Garrison.

(3) Duration of time, or extent of space.

(3) Duration of time, or extent of space.

For a long time the disreputable element outshone the virtuous.—H. H. Bancroft.

For a long time, the shady element outshined the virtuous.—H. H. Bancroft.

He could overlook all the country for many a mile of rich woodland.—Irving.

He could see for miles across the rich woodlands.—Irving.

(4) Substitution or exchange.

(4) Substitution or exchange.

There are gains for all our losses.—Stoddard.

There are gains for all our losses. —Stoddard.

Thus did the Spaniards make bloody atonement for the butchery of Fort Caroline.—Parkman.

Thus did the Spaniards make a bloody sacrifice for the butchery of Fort Caroline.—Parkman.

(5) Reference, meaning with regard to, as to, respecting, etc.

(5) Reference, meaning about, regarding, concerning, etc.

For the rest, the Colonna motto would fit you best.—Emerson.

For the rest, the Colonna motto suits you the best.—Emerson.

For him, poor fellow, he repented of his folly.—E. E. Hale

For him, poor guy, he regretted his mistake.—E. E. Hale

This is very common with asas for me, etc.

This is very common with asas for me, etc.

(6) Like as, meaning in the character of, as being, etc.

(6) Like as, meaning in the character of, as being, etc.

"Nay, if your worship can accomplish that," answered Master Brackett, "I shall own you for a man of skill indeed!" —Hawthorne.

"Well, if you can pull that off," replied Master Brackett, "I'll definitely consider you a skilled guy!" —Hawthorne.

Wavering whether he should put his son to death for an unnatural monster.—Lamb.

Wavering about whether he should kill his son for being an unnatural monster.—Lamb.

(7) Concession, meaning although, considering that etc.

(7) Concession, meaning although, given that etc.

"For a fool," said the Lady of Lochleven, "thou hast counseled wisely."—Scott

"For a fool," said the Lady of Lochleven, "you have given wise advice."No changes needed.

By my faith, that is a very plump hand for a man of eighty-four!—Parton.

By my faith, that is a very full hand for a man of eighty-four!—Parton.

(8) Meaning notwithstanding, or in spite of.

(8) Meaning despite, or regardless of.

But the Colonel, for all his title, had a forest of poor relations.—Holmes.

But the Colonel, despite his title, had a lot of struggling relatives.—Holmes.

Still, for all her slips,
One of Eve's relatives.
—Hoodie.

(9) Motive, cause, reason, incitement to action.

(9) Motive, cause, reason, motivation to act.

The twilight being...hardly more wholesome for its glittering mists of midge companies.—Ruskin.

The evening is...barely more healthy for its shimmering haze of swarms of bugs.—Ruskin.

An Arab woman, but a few sunsets since, ate her child, for famine.—Id.

An Arab woman, just a few sunsets ago, ate her child, because of famine.—Id.

Here Satouriona forgot his dignity, and leaped for joy.—Parkman.

Here Satouriona forgot his dignity and jumped for joy.—Parkman.

(10) For with its object preceding the infinitive, and having the same meaning as a noun clause, as shown by this sentence:—

(10) For its object comes before the infinitive and has the same meaning as a noun clause, as demonstrated by this sentence:—

It is by no means necessary that he should devote his whole school existence to physical science; nay, more, it is not necessary for him to give up more than a moderate share of his time to such studies.—Huxley.

It’s definitely not required that he should spend his entire school life on physical science; in fact, it’s not necessary for him to dedicate more than a moderate amount of his time to these studies.—Huxley.

Exercise.—Find sentences with five meanings of for.

Exercise.—Find sentences that show five different meanings of for.

From.

322. The general idea in from is separation or source. It may be with regard to—

322. The basic concept in from is separation or origin. It can relate to—

(1) Place.

Location.

Like boys escaped from school.—H. H. Bancroft

Like boys skipping school.—H. H. Bancroft

Thus they drifted from snow-clad ranges to burning plain.—Id.

Thus they drifted from snow-covered mountains to scorched plains.—Id.

(2) Origin.

Origin.

Coming from a race of day-dreamers, Ayrault had inherited the faculty of dreaming also by night.—Higginson.

Coming from a race of daydreamers, Ayrault had inherited the ability to dream at night as well.—Higginson.

From harmony, from divine harmony This universal framework started.
—Dryden.

(3) Time.

Time.

A distrustful, if not a desperate man, did he become from the night of that fearful dream—Hawthorne.

A distrustful, if not a desperate man, did he become from the night of that fearful dream—Hawthorne.

(4) Motive, cause, or reason.

(4) Motive, cause, or reason.

It was from no fault of Nolan's.—Hale.

It wasn't Nolan's fault.—Hale.

The young cavaliers, from a desire of seeming valiant, ceased to be merciful.—Bancroft.

The young knights, driven by a desire to appear brave, stopped being compassionate.—Bancroft.

Exercise.—Find sentences with three meanings of from.

Exercise.—Find sentences that show three different meanings of from.

Of.

323. The original meaning of of was separation or source, like from. The various uses are shown in the following examples:—

323. The original meaning of of was separation or source, similar to from. The different uses are illustrated in the following examples:—

I. The From Relation.

(1) Origin or source.

Origin or source.

The king holds his authority of the people.—Milton.

The king gets his power from the people.—Milton.

Thomas à Becket was born of reputable parents in the city of London.—Hume.

Thomas à Becket was born to respectable parents in the city of London.—Hume.

(2) Separation: (a) After certain verbs, such as ease, demand, rob, divest, free, clear, purge, disarm, deprive, relieve, cure, rid, beg, ask, etc.

(2) Separation: (a) After certain verbs, like ease, demand, rob, divest, free, clear, purge, disarm, deprive, relieve, cure, rid, beg, ask, etc.

Two old Indians cleared the spot of brambles, weeds, and grass.—Parkman.

Two elderly Native Americans cleared the area of brambles, weeds, and grass.—Parkman.

Asked no odds of, acquitted them of, etc.—Aldrich.

Asked no favors, acquitted them, etc. —Aldrich.

(b) After some adjectives,—clear of, free of, wide of, bare of, etc.; especially adjectives and adverbs of direction, as north of, south of, etc.

(b) After some adjectives, — clear of, free of, wide of, bare of, etc.; especially adjectives and adverbs of direction, like north of, south of, etc.

The hills were bare of trees.—Bayard Taylor.

The hills were treeless.—Bayard Taylor.

Back of that tree, he had raised a little Gothic chapel. —Gavarre.

Back of that tree, he had built a small Gothic chapel. —Gavarre.

(c) After nouns expressing lack, deprivation, etc.

(c) After nouns that indicate lack, deprivation, etc.

A singular want of all human relation.—Higginson.

A singular want of all human connection. —Higginson.

(d) With words expressing distance.

With words that create distance.

Until he had come within a staff's length of the old dame. —Hawthorne

Until he had come within a staff's length of the old dame. —Hawthorne

Within a few yards of the young man's hiding place.—Id.

Within a few yards of the young man's hiding place.—See.

(3) With expressions of material, especially out of.

(3) With expressions of material, especially out of.

White shirt with diamond studs, or breastpin of native gold.—Bancroft.

White shirt with diamond studs, or breastpin of native gold.—Bancroft.

Sandals, bound with thongs of boar's hide.—Scott

Sandals, tied with leather thongs.—Scott

Who formed, out of the most unpromising materials, the finest army that Europe had yet seen.—Macaulay

Who built, from the most unlikely materials, the best army that Europe had ever seen.—Macaulay

(4) Expressing cause, reason, motive.

(4) Expressing cause, reason, motive.

The author died of a fit of apoplexy.—Boswell.

The author died from a stroke.—Boswell.

More than one altar was richer of his vows.—Lew Wallace.

More than one altar was richer for his vows.—Lew Wallace.

"Good for him!" cried Nolan. "I am glad of that."—E. E. Hale.

"Good for him!" shouted Nolan. "I'm really glad about that."—E. E. Hale.

(5) Expressing agency.

Taking ownership.

You cannot make a boy know, of his own knowledge, that Cromwell once ruled England.—Huxley.

You can't make a boy understand, on his own, that Cromwell once ruled England.—Huxley.

He is away of his own free will.—Dickens

He is away on his own free will.—Dickens

II. Other Relations expressed by Of.

II. Other Relations expressed by Of.

(6) Partitive, expressing a part of a number or quantity.

(6) Partitive, indicating a portion of a count or amount.

Of the Forty, there were only twenty-one members present. —Parton.

Of the Forty, there were only twenty-one members present. —Parton.

He washed out some of the dirt, separating thereby as much of the dust as a ten-cent piece would hold.—Bancroft.

He rinsed off some of the dirt, separating as much of the dust as a dime would hold.—Bancroft.

See also Sec. 309.

(7) Possessive, standing, with its object, for the possessive, or being used with the possessive case to form the double possessive.

(7) Possessive, standing, with its object, for the possessive, or being used with the possessive case to form the double possessive.

Not even woman's love, and the dignity of a queen, could give shelter from his contumely.—W. E. Channing.

Not even a woman's love, or the dignity of a queen, could protect her from his disrespect.—W.E. Channing.

And the mighty secret of the Sierra stood revealed.—Bancroft.

And the incredible secret of the Sierra was now clear. —Bancroft.

(8) Appositional, which may be in the case of—

(8) Appositional, which might be in the case of—

(a) Nouns.

Nouns.

Such a book as that of Job.—Froude.

Such a book as Job.

The fair city of Mexico.—Prescott.

The fair city of Mexico. —Prescott.

The nation of Lilliput.—Swift.

The nation of Lilliput. —Swift.

(b) Noun and gerund, being equivalent to an infinitive.

(b) Noun and gerund, serving the same purpose as an infinitive.

In the vain hope of appeasing the savages.—Cooper.

In the pointless hope of calming the savages.—Coop.

Few people take the trouble of finding out what democracy really is.—Lowell.

Few people take the time to find out what democracy really is.—Lowell.

(c) Two nouns, when the first is descriptive of the second.

(c) Two nouns, where the first describes the second.

This crampfish of a Socrates has so bewitched him.—Emerson

This annoying Socrates has completely mesmerized him.—Emerson

A sorry antediluvian makeshift of a building you may think it.—Lamb.

A pathetic, outdated makeshift building, you might think.Lamb dish.

An inexhaustible bottle of a shop.—Aldrich.

An endless bottle from a shop.—Aldrich.

(9) Of time. Besides the phrases of old, of late, of a sudden, etc., of is used in the sense of during.

(9) Of time. Along with the phrases of old, of late, of a sudden, and so on, of is used to mean during.

I used often to linger of a morning by the high gate.—Aldrich

I often used to hang around in the morning by the high gate.—Aldrich

I delighted to loll over the quarter railing of a calm day. —Irving.

I was happy to lounge over the quarter railing on a peaceful day. —Irving.

(10) Of reference, equal to about, concerning, with regard to.

Of reference, meaning about, concerning, regarding.

The Turk lay dreaming of the hour.—Halleck.

The Turk lay dreaming of the hour. —Halleck.

Boasted of his prowess as a scalp hunter and duelist.—Bancroft.

Boasted about his skills as a scalp hunter and duelist.—Bancroft.

Sank into reverie of home and boyhood scenes.—Id.

Sank into daydreams of home and childhood scenes.—Id.

Idiomatic use with verbs.

Of is also used as an appendage of certain verbs, such as admit, accept, allow, approve, disapprove, permit, without adding to their meaning. It also accompanies the verbs tire, complain, repent, consist, avail (one's self), and others.

Of is also used as a suffix for certain verbs, like admit, accept, allow, approve, disapprove, permit, without changing their meaning. It also goes with the verbs tire, complain, repent, consist, avail (one's self), and others.

Exercise.—Find sentences with six uses of of.

Exercise.—Find sentences that use of six times.

On, Upon.

324. The general meaning of on is position or direction. On and upon are interchangeable in almost all of their applications, as shown by the sentences below:—

324. The general meaning of on is position or direction. On and upon are interchangeable in nearly all their uses, as demonstrated by the sentences below:—

(1) Place: (a) Where.

Place: (a) Location.

Cannon were heard close on the left.—Parkman.

Cannons were heard nearby on the left.—Parkman.

The Earl of Huntley gathered his army
On their home shore.
—Mrs. Sigourney.

(b) With motion.

With movement.

It was the battery at Samos firing on the boats.—Parkman.

It was the battery at Samos firing at the boats.—Parkman.

Thou didst look down upon the naked earth.—Bryant.

You looked down at the bare earth.—Bryant.

(2) Time.

Time.

The demonstration of joy or sorrow on reading their letters. —Bancroft.

The display of joy or sadness when reading their letters. —Bancroft.

On Monday evening he sent forward the Indians.—Parkman.

On Monday evening, he sent the Indians ahead.—Parkman.

Upon is seldom used to express time.

Upon is rarely used to indicate time.

(3) Reference, equal to about, concerning, etc.

(3) Reference, equal to around, about, etc.

I think that one abstains from writing on the immortality of the soul.—Emerson.

I think that people avoid writing about the immortality of the soul.—Emerson.

He pronounced a very flattering opinion upon my brother's promise of excellence.—De Quincey.

He expressed a very flattering opinion about my brother's promise of excellence.—De Quincey.

(4) In adjurations.

(4) In requests.

On my life, you are eighteen, and not a day more.—Aldrich.

In my life, you are eighteen, and not a day more.—Aldrich.

Upon my reputation and credit.—Shakespeare

Based on my reputation and credit.

(5) Idiomatic phrases: on fire, on board, on high, on the wing, on the alert, on a sudden, on view, on trial, etc.

(5) Idiomatic phrases: on fire, on board, in the air, on the move, on guard, all of a sudden, in sight, under scrutiny, etc.

Exercise.—Find sentences with three uses of on or upon.

Exercise.—Find sentences with three uses of on or upon.

To.

325. Some uses of to are the following:—

325. Some uses of to are these:—

(1) Expressing motion: (a) To a place.

(1) Expressing motion: (a) To a location.

Come to the bridal chamber, Death!—Halleck.

Come to the bridal chamber, Death!—Halleck.

Rip had scrambled to one of the highest peaks.—Irving.

Rip had scrambled to one of the highest peaks.—Irving.

(b) Referring to time.

(b) Referring to time.

Full of schemes and speculations to the last.—Parton.

Full of schemes and ideas to the very end. —Parton.

Revolutions, whose influence is felt to this hour.—Parkman.

Revolutions, whose influence is felt to this hour.—Parkman.

(2) Expressing result.

(2) Showcasing outcome.

He usually gave his draft to an aid...to be written over,—often to the loss of vigor.—Benton

He usually handed his draft to an assistant to be rewritten—often at the expense of its energy.—Benton

To our great delight, Ben Lomond was unshrouded.—B. Taylor

To our great joy, Ben Lomond was revealed.—B. Taylor

(3) Expressing comparison.

(3) Making comparisons.

But when, revealed, cheerful Comedy shows up,
It's ten to one you'll find the girl in tears.
—Aldrich

They are arrant rogues: Cacus was nothing to them.—Bulwer.

They are complete scoundrels: Cacus was nothing to them.—Bulwer.

Bolingbroke and the wicked Lord Littleton were saints to him.—Webster

Bolingbroke and the evil Lord Littleton were like saints to him.—Webster

(4) Expressing concern, interest.

(4) Showing care and interest.

To the few, it may be genuine poetry.—Bryant.

To the few, it might be real poetry.—Bryant.

His brother had died, had ceased to be, to him.—Hale.

His brother had died, had stopped existing, to him.—Hail.

Little mattered to them occasional privations—Bancroft.

Little mattered to them occasional hardships.

(5) Equivalent to according to.

Equivalent to according to.

Nor, to my taste, does the mere music...of your style fall far below the highest efforts of poetry.—Lang.

Nor, to my taste, does the mere music...of your style fall far below the highest efforts of poetry.—Lang.

We cook the dish to our own appetite.—Goldsmith.

We make the dish to suit our own taste. —Jeweler.

(6) With the infinitive (see Sec. 268).

(6) Using the infinitive (see Sec. 268).

Exercise.—Find sentences containing three uses of to.

Exercise.—Find sentences that use to three times.

With.

326. With expresses the idea of accompaniment, and hardly any of its applications vary from this general signification.

326. With conveys the idea of being together, and almost all of its uses are consistent with this general meaning.

In Old English, mid meant in company with, while wið meant against: both meanings are included in the modern with.

In Old English, mid meant in company with, while wið meant against: both meanings are included in the modern with.

The following meanings are expressed by with:—

The following meanings are expressed by with:—

(1) Personal accompaniment.

Personal support.

The advance, with Heyward at its head, had already reached the defile.—Cooper.

The group, led by Heyward, had already reached the narrow passage.—Coop.

For many weeks I had walked with this poor friendless girl.—De Quincey.

For many weeks, I had walked with this poor, friendless girl.—De Quincey.

(2) Instrumentality.

(i) Functionality.

With my crossbow I shot the albatross.—Coleridge.

With my crossbow, I shot the albatross.—Coleridge.

Either with the swingle-bar, or with the haunch of our near leader, we had struck the off-wheel of the little gig.—De Quincey.

Either with the swingle-bar or with the hind leg of our nearest leader, we had hit the off-wheel of the little gig.—De Quincey.

(3) Cause, reason, motive.

(3) Cause, reason, motive.

He was wild with delight about Texas.—Hale.

He was thrilled about Texas. —Hale.

She seemed pleased with the accident.—Howells.

She seemed pleased with the accident.—Howells.

(4) Estimation, opinion.

(4) Estimate, opinion.

How can a writer's verses be numerous if with him, as with you, "poetry is not a pursuit, but a pleasure"?—Lang.

How can a writer have a lot of verses if, for him, just like you, "poetry isn't a chore, but a joy"?—Lang.

It seemed a supreme moment with him.—Howells.

It seemed like a perfect moment with him.

(5) Opposition.

Opposition

After battling with terrific hurricanes and typhoons on every known sea.—Aldrich.

After fighting against massive hurricanes and typhoons on every known ocean.—Aldrich.

The quarrel of the sentimentalists is not with life, but with you.—Lang.

The argument of the sentimentalists isn't with life, but with you.—Lang.

(6) The equivalent of notwithstanding, in spite of.

The same as regardless, despite.

With all his sensibility, he gave millions to the sword.—Channing.

With all his sensitivity, he gave millions to the sword.—Channing.

Messala, with all his boldness, felt it unsafe to trifle further.—Wallace

Messala, with all his confidence, felt it was too risky to play around any longer.—Wallace

(7) Time.

(7) Time.

He expired with these words.—Scott.

He passed away with these words.—Scott.

With each new mind a new secret of nature transpires.—Emerson.

With every new mind, a new secret of nature is revealed.—Emerson.

Exercise.—Find sentences with four uses of with.

Exercise—Find sentences that use with four times.

HOW TO PARSE PREPOSITIONS.

327. Since a preposition introduces a phrase and shows the relation between two things, it is necessary, first of all, to find the object of the preposition, and then to find what word the prepositional phrase limits. Take this sentence:—

327. Since a preposition introduces a phrase and indicates the relationship between two things, it's important to first identify the object of the preposition and then determine which word the prepositional phrase modifies. Take this sentence:—

The rule adopted on board the ships on which I have met "the man without a country" was, I think, transmitted from the beginning.—E. E. Hale.

The rule established on the ships where I encountered "the man without a country" was, I believe, passed down from the beginning.—E.E. Hale.

The phrases are (1) on board the ships, (2) on which, (3) without a country, (4) from the beginning. The object of on board is ships; of on, which; of without, country; of from, beginning.

The phrases are (1) on board the ships, (2) on, (3) without a country, (4) from the beginning. The object of on board is ships; of on, which; of without, country; of from, beginning.

In (1), the phrase answers the question where, and has the office of an adverb in telling where the rule is adopted; hence we say, on board shows the relation between ships and the participle adopted.

In (1), the phrase answers the question where and functions as an adverb by indicating where the rule is adopted; therefore, we say that on board shows the relationship between ships and the participle adopted.

In (2), on which modifies the verb have met by telling where: hence on shows the relation between which (standing for ships) and the verb have met.

In (2), on which modifies the verb have met by indicating the location: therefore, on illustrates the connection between which (referring to ships) and the verb have met.

In (3), without a country modifies man, telling what man, or the verb was understood: hence without shows the relation between country and man, or was. And so on.

In (3), without a country describes man, indicating what man, or the verb was, implies: thus without illustrates the connection between country and man, or was. And so on.

The parsing of prepositions means merely telling between what words or word groups they show relation.

The parsing of prepositions simply involves identifying which words or groups of words they connect.

Exercises.

(a) Parse the prepositions in these paragraphs:—

(a) Break down the prepositions in these paragraphs:—

1. I remember, before the dwarf left the queen, he followed us one day into those gardens. I must needs show my wit by a silly illusion between him and the trees, which happens to hold in their language as it does in ours. Whereupon, the malicious rogue, watching his opportunity when I was walking under one of them, shook it directly over my head, by which a dozen apples, each of them near as large as a Bristol barrel, came tumbling about my ears; one of them hit me on the back as I chanced to stoop, and knocked me down flat on my face; but I received no other hurt, and the dwarf was pardoned at my desire, because I had given the provocation.—Swift

1. I remember, before the dwarf left the queen, he followed us one day into the gardens. I felt the need to show off my cleverness with a silly trick involving him and the trees, since it works in their language just like it does in ours. So, the mischievous little guy, taking his chance while I was walking under one of them, shook it over my head, causing a dozen apples, each about the size of a Bristol barrel, to tumble down around me; one of them hit me on the back when I happened to bend down and knocked me flat on my face. I didn’t get hurt otherwise, and I asked for the dwarf to be forgiven since I was the one who provoked him.—Fast

2. Be that as it will, I found myself suddenly awakened with a violent pull upon the ring, which was fastened at the top of my box for the conveniency of carriage. I felt my box raised very high in the air, and then borne forward with prodigious speed. The first jolt had like to have shaken me out of my hammock. I called out several times, but all to no purpose. I looked towards my windows, and could see nothing but the clouds and the sky. I heard a noise just over my head, like the clapping of wings, and then began to perceive the woeful condition I was in; that some eagle had got the ring of my box in his beak, with an intent to let it fall on a rock: for the sagacity and smell of this bird enabled him to discover his quarry at a great distance, though better concealed than I could be within a two-inch board.—Id.

2. That being said, I suddenly woke up with a violent tug on the ring attached to the top of my box for easy transport. I felt my box lifted high into the air and then propelled forward at an incredible speed. The initial jolt nearly threw me out of my hammock. I shouted several times, but it was fruitless. I glanced towards my windows and saw nothing but clouds and sky. I heard a noise just above me, like the sound of wings flapping, and then began to realize the terrible situation I was in; some eagle had grabbed the ring of my box in its beak, intending to drop it onto a rock. The intelligence and keen sense of smell of this bird allowed it to spot its prey from far away, even though I was better hidden than I could be behind a two-inch board.—Id.

(b) Give the exact meaning of each italicized preposition in the following sentences:—

(b) Provide the precise meaning of each italicized preposition in the sentences below:—

1. The guns were cleared of their lumber.

1. The guns were cleared of their lumber.

2. They then left for a cruise up the Indian Ocean.

2. They then left for a cruise in the Indian Ocean.

3. I speak these things from a love of justice.

3. I say these things from a love of justice.

4. To our general surprise, we met the defaulter here.

4. To our surprise, we ran into the defaulter here.

5. There was no one except a little sunbeam of a sister.

5. There was no one there except for a little ray of sunshine of a sister.

6. The great gathering in the main street was on Sundays, when, after a restful morning, though unbroken by the peal of church bells, the miners gathered from hills and ravines for miles around for marketing.

6. The big gathering in the main street happened on Sundays, when, after a relaxing morning, even without the sound of church bells, the miners came together from the hills and valleys for miles around to do their shopping.

7. The troops waited in their boats by the edge of a strand.

7. The soldiers waited in their boats by the edge of a beach.

8. His breeches were of black silk, and his hat was garnished with white and sable plumes.

8. His pants were made of black silk, and his hat was decorated with white and black feathers.

9. A suppressed but still distinct murmur of approbation ran through the crowd at this generous proposition.

9. A quiet but noticeable murmur of approval spread through the crowd at this generous proposal.

10. They were shriveled and colorless with the cold.

10. They were shriveled and colorless from the cold.

11. On every solemn occasion he was the striking figure, even to the eclipsing of the involuntary object of the ceremony.

11. At every important event, he stood out as the impressive figure, even to the overshadowing of the unintentional focus of the ceremony.

12. On all subjects known to man, he favored the world with his opinions.

12. On all topics known to humanity, he shared his thoughts with the world.

13. Our horses ran on a sandy margin of the road.

13. Our horses ran along a sandy edge of the road.

14. The hero of the poem is of a strange land and a strange parentage.

14. The hero of the poem comes from a mysterious land and has an unusual background.

15. He locked his door from mere force of habit.

15. He locked his door out of habit.

16. The lady was remarkable for energy and talent.

16. The lady was remarkable for her energy and talent.

17. Roland was acknowledged for the successor and heir.

17. Roland was recognized as the successor and heir.

18. For my part, I like to see the passing, in town.

18. For me, I enjoy watching the people go by in town.

19. A half-dollar was the smallest coin that could be tendered for any service.

19. A half-dollar was the smallest coin that could be offered for any service.

20. The mother sank and fell, grasping at the child.

20. The mother collapsed, reaching for the child.

21. The savage army was in war-paint, plumed for battle.

21. The fierce army was in war paint, feathered for battle.

22. He had lived in Paris for the last fifty years.

22. He had lived in Paris for the last fifty years.

23. The hill stretched for an immeasurable distance.

23. The hill went on for an endless stretch.

24.

24.

The baron of Smaylho'me rose with day,
He urged his horse on,
Without pausing or lingering, down the rocky path
That leads to Brotherstone.

25. With all his learning, Carteret was far from being a pedant.

25. With all his knowledge, Carteret was far from being a know-it-all.

26. An immense mountain covered with a shining green turf is nothing, in this respect, to one dark and gloomy.

26. A huge mountain covered in bright green grass is nothing compared to one that is dark and gloomy.

27. Wilt thou die for very weakness?

Will you die for weakness?

28. The name of Free Joe strikes humorously upon the ear of memory.

28. The name Free Joe humorously sticks in my memory.

29. The shout I heard was upon the arrival of this engine.

29. The shout I heard was when this engine arrived.

30. He will raise the price, not merely by the amount of the tax.

30. He will increase the price, not just by the amount of the tax.


WORDS THAT NEED WATCHING.

328. If the student has now learned fully that words must be studied in grammar according to their function or use, and not according to form, he will be able to handle some words that are used as several parts of speech. A few are discussed below,—a summary of their treatment in various places as studied heretofore.

328. If the student has now fully understood that words must be studied in grammar based on their function or use, rather than their form, he will be able to work with some words that serve as multiple parts of speech. A few are discussed below—a summary of how they have been addressed in different sections studied before.

THAT.

THAT.

329. That may be used as follows:

329. This may be used as follows:

(1) As a demonstrative adjective.

As a demonstrative adjective.

That night was a memorable one.—Stockton.

That night was unforgettable.

(2) As an adjective pronoun.

As an adjective.

That was a dreadful mistake.—Webster.

That was a huge mistake.

(3) As a relative pronoun.

(3) As a relative pronoun.

And now it sounds like an angel's song,
That makes the heavens silent.
—Coleridge.

(4) As an adverb of degree.

As an intensity adverb.

That far I hold that the Scriptures teach.—Beecher.

That much I believe the Scriptures teach.—Beecher.

(5) As a conjunction: (a) Of purpose.

(5) As a conjunction: (a) For purpose.

Has bounteously lengthened out your lives, that you might behold this joyous day.—Webster.

Has generously extended your lives, so you can witness this joyful day.—Webster.

(b) Of result.

Of result.

Gates of iron so massy that no man could without the help of engines open or shut them.—Johnson.

Gates of iron so heavy that no one could open or close them without the help of machinery.—Johnson.

(c) Substantive conjunction.

Substantial conjunction.

We wish that labor may look up here, and be proud in the midst of its toil.—Webster.

We hope that labor can look up here and take pride in the middle of its hard work. —Webster.

WHAT.

330. (1) Relative pronoun.

330. (1) Relative pronoun.

That is what I understand by scientific education.—Huxley.

That is what I understand by scientific education.—Huxley.

(a) Indefinite relative.

Indefinite relative.

Those shadowy memories,
Which they may be, You are still the source of light for all our day.
—Wordsworth.

(2) Interrogative pronoun: (a) Direct question.

Direct question.

What would be an English merchant's character after a few such transactions?—Thackeray.

What would an English merchant's character be like after a few of those transactions?—Thackeray.

(b) Indirect question.

Indirect question.

I have not allowed myself to look beyond the Union, to see what might be hidden.—Webster.

I haven't let myself look beyond the Union to see what might be hidden.—Webster.

(3) Indefinite pronoun: The saying, "I'll tell you what."

(3) Indefinite pronoun: The saying, "I'll tell you what."

(4) Relative adjective.

(4) Relative adjective.

But woe to what thing or person stood in the way.—Emerson.

But woe to what thing or person stood in the way.—Emerson.

(a) Indefinite relative adjective.

Indefinite relative adjective.

To say what good of fashion we can, it rests on reality.—Id.

To say what good fashion we can, it depends on reality.—Id.

(5) Interrogative adjective: (a) Direct question.

(5) Interrogative adjective: (a) Direct question.

What right have you to infer that this condition was caused by the action of heat?—Agassiz.

What right do you have to assume that this situation was caused by heat?—Agassiz.

(b) Indirect question.

Indirect question.

At what rate these materials would be distributed,...it is impossible to determine.—Id.

At what rate these materials would be distributed,...it is impossible to determine.—Id.

(6) Exclamatory adjective.

Exclamatory adjective.

Saint Mary! what a scene is here!—Scott.

Wow! What a scene! —Scott.

(7) Adverb of degree.

Degree adverb.

If he has [been in America], he knows what good people are to be found there.—Thackeray.

If he has been in America, he knows what good people can be found there.—Thackeray.

(8) Conjunction, nearly equivalent to partly... partly, or not only...but.

(8) Conjunction, almost the same as partly... partly, or not only...but.

What with the Maltese goats, who go tinkling by to their pasturage; what with the vocal seller of bread in the early morning;...these sounds are only to be heard...in Pera.—S.S. Cox.

With the Maltese goats that jingle as they head to their pasture; with the bread seller calling out in the early morning;...these sounds can only be heard...in Pera.—S.S. Cox.

(9) As an exclamation.

(9) As an exclamatory remark.

What, silent still, and silent all!—Byron.

What, silent still, and silent all!—Byron.

What, Adam Woodcock at court!—Scott.

What, Adam Woodcock in court!—Scott.

BUT.

331. (1) Coördinate conjunction: (a) Adversative.

331. (1) Coordinating conjunction: (a) Contrast.

His very attack was never the inspiration of courage, but the result of calculation.—Emerson.

His attack was never a source of courage, but the result of careful planning.—Emerson.

(b) Copulative, after not only.

Copulative, after not only.

Then arose not only tears, but piercing cries, on all sides. —Carlyle.

Then tears erupted, along with anguished cries, from everywhere. —Carlyle.

(2) Subordinate conjunction: (a) Result, equivalent to that ... not.

(2) Subordinate conjunction: (a) Result, equivalent to that ... not.

Nor is Nature so hard but she gives me this joy several times.—Emerson.

Nor is Nature so harsh that she doesn't give me this joy several times.—Emerson.

(b) Substantive, meaning otherwise ... than.

Substantive, meaning otherwise than.

Who knows but, like the dog, it will at length be no longer traceable to its wild original—Thoreau.

Who knows but, like the dog, it will eventually be untraceable to its wild original—Thoreau.

(3) Preposition, meaning except.

(3) Preposition, meaning but not.

Now there was nothing to be seen but fires in every direction.—Lamb.

Now, all that could be seen were fires in every direction.—Lamb.

(4) Relative pronoun, after a negative, stands for that ... not, or who ... not.

(4) Relative pronoun, after a negative, stands for that ... not, or who ... not.

There is not a man in them but is impelled withal, at all moments, towards order.—Carlyle.

There isn't a person among them who isn't constantly driven towards order.—Carlyle.

(5) Adverb, meaning only.

(5) Adverb, meaning just.

The whole twenty years had been to him but as one night.—Irving.

The entire twenty years felt to him like just one night.—Irving.

To lead but one measure.—Scott.

To lead just one way. —Scott.

AS.

332. (1) Subordinate conjunction: (a) Of time.

332. (1) Subordinate conjunction: (a) Time-related.

Rip beheld a precise counterpart of himself as he went up the mountain.—Irving.

Rip saw an exact version of himself as he went up the mountain.—Irving.

(b) Of manner.

Of manner.

Like orphans longing for their mothers,
He longed to join our patriotic groups.
—Mrs. Browning.

(c) Of degree.

Degree level.

His pale eyes Stare at the empty scene vacantly As the ocean's moon gazes at the moon in the sky. —Shelley.

(d) Of reason.

Of reason.

I shall see but little of it, as I could neither bear walking nor riding in a carriage.—Franklin.

I won’t see much of it, since I can’t handle walking or riding in a carriage.—Franklin.

(e) Introducing an appositive word.

Introducing an appositive term.

Reverenced as one of the patriarchs of the village.—Irving.

Revered as one of the patriarchs of the village.—Irving.

Doing duty as a guard.—Hawthorne.

Doing guard duty.—Hawthorne.

(2) Relative pronoun, after such, sometimes same.

(2) Relative pronoun, after such, sometimes the same.

And was there such a resemblance as the crowd had testified?—Hawthorne.

And was there really such a resemblance as the crowd had claimed?—Hawthorne.

LIKE.

Modifier of a noun or pronoun.

333. (1) An adjective.

An adjective.

The aforesaid general had been exceedingly like the majestic image.—Hawthorne.

The general mentioned earlier had been very much like the majestic image.—Hawthorne.

They look, indeed, liker a lion's mane than a Christian man's locks.-SCOTT.

They look more like a lion's mane than a Christian man's hair. -SCOTT.

No Emperor, this, like him awhile ago.—Aldrich.

No Emperor, this, like him a while ago.—Aldrich.

There is no statue like this living man.—Emerson.

There is no statue like this living man.—Emerson.

That face, like summer ocean's.—Halleck.

That face, like a summer ocean's. —Halleck.

In each case, like clearly modifies a noun or pronoun, and is followed by a dative-objective.

In each case, like clearly modifies a noun or pronoun, and is followed by a dative-objective.

Introduces a clause, but its verb is omitted.

(2) A subordinate conjunction of manner. This follows a verb or a verbal, but the verb of the clause introduced by like is regularly omitted. Note the difference between these two uses. In Old English gelic (like) was followed by the dative, and was clearly an adjective. In this second use, like introduces a shortened clause modifying a verb or a verbal, as shown in the following sentences:—

(2) A subordinate conjunction of manner. This comes after a verb or a verbal, but the verb in the clause introduced by like is regularly omitted. Note the difference between these two uses. In Old English, gelic (like) was followed by the dative and was clearly an adjective. In this second use, like introduces a shortened clause that modifies a verb or a verbal, as shown in the following sentences:—

Goodman Brown came into the street of Salem village, staring like a bewildered man.—Hawthorne.

Goodman Brown walked into the street of Salem village, staring like a confused man.—Hawthorne.

Give Ruskin space enough, and he grows frantic and beats the air like Carlyle.—Higginson.

Give Ruskin enough space, and he becomes frantic and flails about like Carlyle. —Higginson.

They conducted themselves much like the crew of a man-of-war. —Parkman.

They acted a lot like the crew of a warship. —Parkman.

[The sound] rang in his ears like the iron hoofs of the steeds of Time.—Longfellow.

[The sound] echoed in his ears like the iron hooves of the horses of Time.—Longfellow.

Stirring it vigorously, like a cook beating eggs.—Aldrich.

Stirring it vigorously, like a cook mixing eggs.—Aldrich.

If the verb is expressed, like drops out, and as or as if takes its place.

If the verb is expressed, like is removed, and as or as if replaces it.

The sturdy English moralist may talk of a Scotch supper as he pleases.—Cass.

The strong English moralist can discuss a Scottish supper however he likes.—Cass.

Mankind for the first seventy thousand ages ate their meat raw, just as they do in Abyssinia to this day.—Lamb.

For the first seventy thousand years, humans ate their meat raw, just as they do in Abyssinia today.—Lamb.

I do with my friends as I do with my books.—Emerson.

I treat my friends like I treat my books.—Emerson.

NOTE.—Very rarely like is found with a verb following, but this is not considered good usage: for example,—

NOTE.—Very rarely like is found with a verb following, but this is not considered good usage: for example,—

A timid, nervous child, like Martin was.—Mayhew.

A shy, anxious kid, like Martin was.—Mayhew.

Through which they put their heads, like the Gauchos do through their cloaks.—Darwin.

Through which they put their heads, like the Gauchos do through their cloaks.—Darwin.

Like an arrow shot From an experienced archer hits the target.
—Shakespeare.

INTERJECTIONS.

Definition.

334. Interjections are exclamations used to express emotion, and are not parts of speech in the same sense as the words we have discussed; that is, entering into the structure of a sentence.

334. Interjections are exclamations used to convey emotion and are not considered parts of speech in the same way as the words we've talked about; they don’t fit into the structure of a sentence.

Some of these are imitative sounds; as, tut! buzz! etc.

Some of these are sounds that imitate things, like tut! buzz! etc.

Humph! attempts to express a contemptuous nasal utterance that no letters of our language can really spell.

Humph! tries to convey a scornful nasal sound that can't really be spelled out with any letters from our language.

Not all exclamatory words are interjections.

Other interjections are oh! ah! alas! pshaw! hurrah! etc. But it is to be remembered that almost any word may be used as an exclamation, but it still retains its identity as noun, pronoun, verb, etc.: for example, "Books! lighthouses built on the sea of time [noun];" "Halt! the dust-brown ranks stood fast [verb]," "Up! for shame! [adverb]," "Impossible! it cannot be [adjective]."

Other interjections include oh! ah! alas! pshaw! hurrah! etc. However, it should be noted that almost any word can be used as an exclamation, but it still keeps its identity as a noun, pronoun, verb, etc.: for instance, "Books! lighthouses built on the sea of time [noun];" "Halt! the dust-brown ranks stood fast [verb]," "Up! for shame! [adverb]," "Impossible! it cannot be [adjective]."


PART II.

ANALYSIS OF SENTENCES.

CLASSIFICATION ACCORDING TO FORM.

What analysis is..

335. All discourse is made up of sentences: consequently the sentence is the unit with which we must begin. And in order to get a clear and practical idea of the structure of sentences, it is necessary to become expert in analysis; that is, in separating them into their component parts.

335. All communication is made up of sentences: therefore, the sentence is the basic unit we must start with. To gain a clear and practical understanding of how sentences are structured, it's essential to become skilled in analysis; that is, in breaking them down into their individual components.

A general idea of analysis was needed in our study of the parts of speech,—in determining case, subject and predicate, clauses introduced by conjunctions, etc.

A basic understanding of analysis was necessary in our examination of the parts of speech—specifically in identifying case, subject and predicate, clauses introduced by conjunctions, and so on.

Value of analysis.

A more thorough and accurate acquaintance with the subject is necessary for two reasons,—not only for a correct understanding of the principles of syntax, but for the study of punctuation and other topics treated in rhetoric.

A deeper and more accurate understanding of the subject is necessary for two reasons—not only for a proper grasp of the principles of syntax but also for studying punctuation and other topics covered in rhetoric.

Definition.

336. A sentence is the expression of a thought in words.

336. A sentence is the way we express a thought using words.

Kinds of sentences as to form.

337. According to the way in which a thought is put before a listener or reader, sentences may be of three kinds:—

337. Depending on how a thought is presented to a listener or reader, sentences can be classified into three types:—

(1) Declarative, which puts the thought in the form of a declaration or assertion. This is the most common one.

(1) Declarative, which expresses a thought as a statement or assertion. This is the most common type.

(2) Interrogative, which puts the thought in a question.

(2) Interrogative, which presents the idea as a question.

(3) Imperative, which expresses command, entreaty, or request.

(3) Imperative, which expresses a command, plea, or request.

Any one of these may be put in the form of an exclamation, but the sentence would still be declarative, interrogative, or imperative; hence, according to form, there are only the three kinds of sentences already named.

Any one of these can be turned into an exclamation, but the sentence would still be declarative, interrogative, or imperative; therefore, according to form, there are only the three types of sentences mentioned.

Examples of these three kinds are, declarative, "Old year, you must not die!" interrogative, "Hath he not always treasures, always friends?" imperative, "Come to the bridal chamber, Death!"

Examples of these three types are: declarative, "Old year, you must not die!" interrogative, "Doesn’t he always have treasures, always friends?" imperative, "Come to the bridal chamber, Death!"


CLASSIFICATION ACCORDING TO NUMBER OF STATEMENTS.

SIMPLE SENTENCES.

Division according to number of statements.

338. But the division of sentences most necessary to analysis is the division, not according to the form in which a thought is put, but according to how many statements there are.

338. But the most important way to break down sentences for analysis is not by how the thought is expressed, but by the number of statements contained within.

The one we shall consider first is the simple sentence.

The first one we'll look at is the simple sentence.

Definition.

339. A simple sentence is one which contains a single statement, question, or command: for example, "The quality of mercy is not strained;" "What wouldst thou do, old man?" "Be thou familiar, but by no means vulgar."

339. A simple sentence is one that contains a single statement, question, or command: for example, "The quality of mercy is not strained;" "What would you do, old man?" "Be familiar, but not vulgar."

340. Every sentence must contain two parts,—a subject and a predicate.

340. Every sentence must have two parts—a subject and a predicate.

Definition: Predicate.

The predicate of a sentence is a verb or verb phrase which says something about the subject.

The predicate of a sentence is a verb or verb phrase that describes something about the subject.

In order to get a correct definition of the subject, let us examine two specimen sentences:—

To get an accurate definition of the topic, let’s look at two example sentences:—

1. But now all is to be changed.

1. But now everything is about to change.

2. A rare old plant is the ivy green.

2. A rare old plant is the green ivy.

In the first sentence we find the subject by placing the word what before the predicate,—What is to be changed? Answer, all. Consequently, we say all is the subject of the sentence.

In the first sentence, we identify the subject by putting the word what before the predicate — What needs to be changed? The answer is all. So, we say all is the subject of the sentence.

But if we try this with the second sentence, we have some trouble,—What is the ivy green? Answer, a rare old plant. But we cannot help seeing that an assertion is made, not of a rare old plant, but about the ivy green; and the real subject is the latter. Sentences are frequently in this inverted order, especially in poetry; and our definition must be the following, to suit all cases:—

But if we try this with the second sentence, we encounter some trouble—What is the ivy green? Answer, a rare old plant. But we can’t help noticing that a statement is made, not about a rare old plant, but about the ivy green; and the real subject is the latter. Sentences often have this inverted order, especially in poetry; and our definition must be the following, to suit all cases:—

Subject.

The subject is that which answers the question who or what placed before the predicate, and which at the same time names that of which the predicate says something.

The subject is what answers the question who or what that comes before the predicate, and it also names what the predicate is referring to.

The subject in interrogative and imperative simple sentences.

341. In the interrogative sentence, the subject is frequently after the verb. Either the verb is the first word of the sentence, or an interrogative pronoun, adjective, or adverb that asks about the subject. In analyzing such sentences, always reduce them to the order of a statement. Thus,—

341. In a question, the subject often comes after the verb. Either the verb is the first word of the sentence, or it starts with a question word like who, what, when, where, why, or how that asks about the subject. When analyzing these sentences, always rearrange them into the order of a statement. So,—

(1) "When should this scientific education be commenced?"

(1) "When should this scientific education start?"

(2) "This scientific education should be commenced when?"

(2) "When should this scientific education begin?"

(3) "What wouldst thou have a good great man obtain?"

(3) "What do you want a great man to achieve?"

(4) "Thou wouldst have a good great man obtain what?"

(4) "What would you want a great man to achieve?"

In the imperative sentence, the subject (you, thou, or ye) is in most cases omitted, and is to be supplied; as, "[You] behold her single in the field."

In the imperative sentence, the subject (you) is usually left out and needs to be understood; for example, "[You] look at her alone in the field."

Exercise.

Name the subject and the predicate in each of the following sentences:—

Name the subject and the verb in each of the following sentences:—

1.

1.

The shadow of the pleasure dome
Floated halfway on the waves.

2. Hence originated their contempt for terrestrial distinctions.

2. This is where their disdain for worldly differences began.

3. Nowhere else on the Mount of Olives is there a view like this.

3. There’s no view like this anywhere else on the Mount of Olives.

4. In the sands of Africa and Arabia the camel is a sacred and precious gift.

4. In the deserts of Africa and Arabia, the camel is a sacred and valuable gift.

5. The last of all the Bards was he.

5. He was the last of all the Bards.

6. Slavery they can have anywhere.

6. They can have slavery anywhere.

7. Listen, on the other hand, to an ignorant man.

7. Listen, on the other hand, to someone who doesn't know.

8. What must have been the emotions of the Spaniards!

8. What must the emotions of the Spaniards have been!

9. Such was not the effect produced on the sanguine spirit of the general.

9. That wasn't how it affected the optimistic nature of the general.

10. What a contrast did these children of southern Europe present to the Anglo-Saxon races!

10. What a difference these children of southern Europe were compared to the Anglo-Saxon races!

ELEMENTS OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE.

342. All the elements of the simple sentence are as follows:—

342. All the elements of the simple sentence are as follows:—

(1) The subject.

The topic.

(2) The predicate.

The predicate.

(3) The object.

The item.

(4) The complements.

The accessories.

(5) Modifiers.

(5) Modifiers.

(6) Independent elements.

Independent components.

The subject and predicate have been discussed.

The topic and the main part of the sentence have been covered.

343. The object may be of two kinds:—

343. The object can be one of two types:—

Definitions. Direct Object.

(1) The DIRECT OBJECT is that word or expression which answers the question who or what placed after the verb; or the direct object names that toward which the action of the predicate is directed.

(1) The DIRECT OBJECT is the word or expression that answers the question who or what that comes after the verb; it refers to what the action of the predicate is aimed at.

It must be remembered that any verbal may have an object; but for the present we speak of the object of the verb, and by object we mean the direct object.

It should be noted that any verb can have an object; however, for now, we're discussing the object of the verb, and by object we mean the direct object.

Indirect object.

(2) The INDIRECT OBJECT is a noun or its equivalent used as the modifier of a verb or verbal to name the person or thing for whose benefit an action is performed.

(2) The INDIRECT OBJECT is a noun or something similar used to modify a verb or verbal to indicate the person or thing that benefits from an action.

Examples of direct and indirect objects are, direct, "She seldom saw her course at a glance;" indirect, "I give thee this to wear at the collar."

Examples of direct and indirect objects are, direct, "She seldom saw her course at a glance;" indirect, "I give you this to wear at the collar."

Complement:

344. A complement is a word added to a verb of incomplete predication to complete its meaning.

344. A complement is a word added to a verb that doesn’t fully convey its meaning on its own, in order to complete it.

Notice that a verb of incomplete predication may be of two kinds,—transitive and intransitive.

Notice that a verb of incomplete predication can be two types—transitive and intransitive.

Of a transitive verb.

The transitive verb often requires, in addition to the object, a word to define fully the action that is exerted upon the object; for example, "Ye call me chief." Here the verb call has an object me (if we leave out chief), and means summoned; but chief belongs to the verb, and me here is not the object simply of call, but of call chief, just as if to say, "Ye honor me." This word completing a transitive verb is sometimes called a factitive object, or second object, but it is a true complement.

The transitive verb usually needs, along with the object, an additional word to fully explain the action being performed on the object; for example, "You call me chief." In this case, the verb call has the object me (if we ignore chief), which means summoned; however, chief is connected to the verb, and me in this context is not just the object of call, but of call chief, as if to say, "You honor me." This word that completes a transitive verb is sometimes referred to as a factitive object or second object, but it is actually a true complement.

The fact that this is a complement can be more clearly seen when the verb is in the passive. See sentence 19, in exercise following Sec. 364.

The fact that this is a complement can be more clearly seen when the verb is in the passive. See sentence 19, in the exercise following Sec. 364.

Complement of an intransitive verb.

An intransitive verb, especially the forms of be, seem, appear, taste, feel, become, etc., must often have a word to complete the meaning: as, for instance, "Brow and head were round, and of massive weight;" "The good man, he was now getting old, above sixty;" "Nothing could be more copious than his talk;" "But in general he seemed deficient in laughter."

An intransitive verb, especially the forms of be, seem, appear, taste, feel, become, etc., often needs a word to complete its meaning: for example, "Brow and head were round, and of massive weight;" "The good man was now getting old, over sixty;" "Nothing could be more copious than his talk;" "But in general he seemed deficient in laughter."

All these complete intransitive verbs. The following are examples of complements of transitive verbs: "Hope deferred maketh the heart sick;" "He was termed Thomas, or, more familiarly, Thom of the Gills;" "A plentiful fortune is reckoned necessary, in the popular judgment, to the completion of this man of the world."

All these are complete intransitive verbs. Here are examples of complements of transitive verbs: "Hope delayed makes the heart sick;" "He was called Thomas, or, more casually, Thom of the Gills;" "A considerable fortune is considered necessary, in popular opinion, for the success of this worldly man."

345. The modifiers and independent elements will be discussed in detail in Secs. 351, 352, 355.

345. The modifiers and independent elements will be covered in detail in Secs. 351, 352, 355.

Phrases.

346. A phrase is a group of words, not containing a verb, but used as a single modifier.

346. A phrase is a group of words that doesn't have a verb but is used as a single modifier.

As to form, phrases are of three kinds:—

As for form, there are three kinds of phrases:—

Three kinds.

(1) PREPOSITIONAL, introduced by a preposition: for example, "Such a convulsion is the struggle of gradual suffocation, as in drowning; and, in the original Opium Confessions, I mentioned a case of that nature."

(1) PREPOSITIONAL, introduced by a preposition: for example, "Such a convulsion is the struggle of gradual suffocation, as in drowning; and, in the original Opium Confessions, I mentioned a case of that nature."

(2) PARTICIPIAL, consisting of a participle and the words dependent on it. The following are examples: "Then retreating into the warm house, and barring the door, she sat down to undress the two youngest children."

(2) PARTICIPIAL, made up of a participle and the words that rely on it. Here are some examples: "Then retreating into the warm house, and barring the door, she sat down to undress the two youngest children."

(3) INFINITIVE, consisting of an infinitive and the words dependent upon it; as in the sentence, "She left her home forever in order to present herself at the Dauphin's court."

(3) INFINITIVE, which consists of an infinitive and the words that depend on it; for example, in the sentence, "She left her home forever in order to present herself at the Dauphin's court."

Things used as Subject.

347. The subject of a simple sentence may be—

347. The subject of a simple sentence can be—

(1) Noun: "There seems to be no interval between greatness and meanness." Also an expression used as a noun; as, "A cheery, 'Ay, ay, sir!' rang out in response."

(1) Noun: "It looks like there's no gap between greatness and meanness." Also used as an expression; for example, "A cheerful, 'Yes, sir!' rang out in response."

(2) Pronoun: "We are fortified by every heroic anecdote."

(2) Pronoun: "We are strengthened by every inspiring story."

(3) Infinitive phrase: "To enumerate and analyze these relations is to teach the science of method."

(3) Infinitive phrase: "To list and examine these relationships is to teach the science of methodology."

(4) Gerund: "There will be sleeping enough in the grave;" "What signifies wishing and hoping for better things?"

(4) Gerund: "There will be sleeping plenty in the grave;" "What does it matter to wish and hope for better things?"

(5) Adjective used as noun: "The good are befriended even by weakness and defect;" "The dead are there."

(5) Adjective used as noun: "The good are befriended even by weakness and flaws;" "The dead are there."

(6) Adverb: "Then is the moment for the humming bird to secure the insects."

(6) Adverb: "Then is the time for the hummingbird to catch the insects."

348. The subject is often found after the verb

348. The subject is often found after the verb

(1) By simple inversion: as, "Therein has been, and ever will be, my deficiency,—the talent of starting the game;" "Never, from their lips, was heard one syllable to justify," etc.

(1) By simple inversion: for example, "In that regard, my shortcoming has always been, and always will be, the ability to start the game;" "Never did they utter a single word to justify," etc.

(2) In interrogative sentences, for which see Sec. 341.

(2) In questions, for which see Sec. 341.

(3) After "it introductory:" "It ought not to need to print in a reading room a caution not to read aloud."

(3) After "it introductory:" "There shouldn't have to be a sign in a reading room telling people not to read aloud."

In this sentence, it stands in the position of a grammatical subject; but the real or logical subject is to print, etc. It merely serves to throw the subject after a verb.

In this sentence, it acts as the grammatical subject; however, the true or logical subject is to print, etc. It simply helps to place the subject after a verb.

Disguised infinitive subject.

There is one kind of expression that is really an infinitive, though disguised as a prepositional phrase: "It is hard for honest men to separate their country from their party, or their religion from their sect."

There’s one type of expression that’s actually an infinitive, even though it looks like a prepositional phrase: "It is hard for honest people to separate their country from their party, or their religion from their sect."

The for did not belong there originally, but obscures the real subject,—the infinitive phrase. Compare Chaucer: "No wonder is a lewed man to ruste" (No wonder [it] is [for] a common man to rust).

The for didn’t originally belong there, but it hides the real subject—the infinitive phrase. Compare Chaucer: "No wonder is a lewed man to ruste" (No wonder [it] is [for] a common man to rust).

(4) After "there introductory," which has the same office as it in reversing the order (see Sec. 292): "There was a description of the destructive operations of time;" "There are asking eyes, asserting eyes, prowling eyes."

(4) After "there introductory," which serves the same purpose as it in changing the order (see Sec. 292): "There was a description of the damaging effects of time;" "There are curious eyes, confident eyes, sneaky eyes."

Things used as Direct Object.

349. The words used as direct object are mainly the same as those used for subject, but they will be given in detail here, for the sake of presenting examples:—

349. The words used as direct objects are mostly the same as those used for subjects, but I will detail them here to provide examples:—

(1) Noun: "Each man has his own vocation." Also expressions used as nouns: for example, "'By God, and by Saint George!' said the King."

(1) Noun: "Every man has his own calling." Also expressions used as nouns: for example, "'By God, and by Saint George!' said the King."

(2) Pronoun: "Memory greets them with the ghost of a smile."

(2) Pronoun: "Memory meets them with the ghost of a smile."

(3) Infinitive: "We like to see everything do its office."

(3) Infinitive: "We like to see everything do its job."

(4) Gerund: "She heard that sobbing of litanies, or the thundering of organs."

(4) Gerund: "She heard that sobbing of litanies, or the thundering of organs."

(5) Adjective used as a noun: "For seventy leagues through the mighty cathedral, I saw the quick and the dead."

(5) Adjective used as a noun: "For seventy leagues through the huge cathedral, I saw the living and the dead."

Things used as Complement.

Complement: Of an intransitive verb.

350. As complement of an intransitive verb,—

As a complement of an intransitive verb,—

(1) Noun: "She had been an ardent patriot."

(1) Noun: "She had been a passionate patriot."

(2) Pronoun: "Who is she in bloody coronation robes from Rheims?" "This is she, the shepherd girl."

(2) Pronoun: "Who is she in bloody coronation robes from Rheims?" "This is she, the shepherd girl."

(3) Adjective: "Innocence is ever simple and credulous."

"Innocence is always simple and gullible."

(4) Infinitive: "To enumerate and analyze these relations is to teach the science of method."

(4) Infinitive: "Listing and examining these relationships is to teach the science of method."

(5) Gerund: "Life is a pitching of this penny,—heads or tails;" "Serving others is serving us."

(5) Gerund: "Life is a toss-up with this penny,—heads or tails;" "Helping others is helping us."

(6) A prepositional phrase: "His frame is on a larger scale;" "The marks were of a kind not to be mistaken."

(6) A prepositional phrase: "His frame is on a larger scale;" "The marks were of a kind not to be mistaken."

It will be noticed that all these complements have a double office,—completing the predicate, and explaining or modifying the subject.

It can be seen that all these complements serve two purposes—completing the predicate and explaining or modifying the subject.

Of a transitive verb.

As complement of a transitive verb,—

As a complement of a transitive verb,—

(1) Noun: "I will not call you cowards."

"I won't call you cowards."

(2) Adjective: "Manners make beauty superfluous and ugly;" "Their tempers, doubtless, are rendered pliant and malleable in the fiery furnace of domestic tribulation." In this last sentence, the object is made the subject by being passive, and the words italicized are still complements. Like all the complements in this list, they are adjuncts of the object, and, at the same time, complements of the predicate.

(2) Adjective: "Good manners make beauty unnecessary and unattractive;" "Their tempers, no doubt, become flexible and shapable in the intense pressure of home challenges." In this last sentence, the object is turned into the subject by being passive, and the italicized words are still complements. Like all the complements in this list, they are additions to the object and, at the same time, complements of the predicate.

(3) Infinitive, or infinitive phrase: "That cry which made me look a thousand ways;" "I hear the echoes throng."

(3) Infinitive, or infinitive phrase: "That cry that made me look all around;" "I hear the echoes crowd in."

(4) Participle, or participial phrase: "I can imagine him pushing firmly on, trusting the hearts of his countrymen."

(4) Participle, or participial phrase: "I can imagine him pushing forward confidently, trusting the hearts of his fellow countrymen."

(5) Prepositional phrase: "My antagonist would render my poniard and my speed of no use to me."

(5) Prepositional phrase: "My enemy would make my dagger and my speed useless to me."

Modifiers.

I. Modifiers of Subject, Object, or Complement.

351. Since the subject and object are either nouns or some equivalent of a noun, the words modifying them must be adjectives or some equivalent of an adjective; and whenever the complement is a noun, or the equivalent of the noun, it is modified by the same words and word groups that modify the subject and the object.

351. Since the subject and object are either nouns or something similar to a noun, the words that modify them must be adjectives or something equivalent to an adjective; and whenever the complement is a noun, or something equivalent to a noun, it is modified by the same words and word groups that modify the subject and the object.

These modifiers are as follows:—

These modifiers include:—

(1) A possessive: "My memory assures me of this;" "She asked her father's permission."

(1) A possessive: "My memory confirms this;" "She asked for her father's permission."

(2) A word in apposition: "Theodore Wieland, the prisoner at the bar, was now called upon for his defense;" "Him, this young idolater, I have seasoned for thee."

(2) A word in apposition: "Theodore Wieland, the defendant at the bar, was now called upon for his defense;" "This young idolater, I have prepared for you."

(3) An adjective: "Great geniuses have the shortest biographies;" "Her father was a prince in Lebanon,—proud, unforgiving, austere."

(3) An adjective: "Great geniuses have the shortest biographies;" "Her father was a prince in Lebanon—proud, unforgiving, austere."

(4) Prepositional phrase: "Are the opinions of a man on right and wrong on fate and causation, at the mercy of a broken sleep or an indigestion?" "The poet needs a ground in popular tradition to work on."

(4) Prepositional phrase: "Are the opinions of a man about right and wrong regarding fate and causation, dependent on a restless sleep or an upset stomach?" "The poet needs a foundation in popular tradition to build from."

(5) Infinitive phrase: "The way to know him is to compare him, not with nature, but with other men;" "She has a new and unattempted problem to solve;" "The simplest utterances are worthiest to be written."

(5) Infinitive phrase: "The best way to get to know him is to compare him, not with nature, but with other people;" "She has a new and unexplored problem to tackle;" "The simplest expressions are the most valuable to be recorded."

(6) Participial phrase: "Another reading, given at the request of a Dutch lady, was the scene from King John;" "This was the hour already appointed for the baptism of the new Christian daughter."

(6) Participial phrase: "Another reading, requested by a Dutch lady, was the scene from King John;" "This was the hour already set for the baptism of the new Christian daughter."

Exercise.—In each sentence in Sec. 351, tell whether the subject, object, or complement is modified.

Exercise.—In each sentence in Sec. 351, indicate if the subject, object, or complement is being modified.

II. Modifiers of the Predicate.

352. Since the predicate is always a verb, the word modifying it must be an adverb or its equivalent:—

352. Since the predicate is always a verb, the word that modifies it must be an adverb or something similar:—

(1) Adverb: "Slowly and sadly we laid him down."

"Slowly and sadly we laid him down."

(2) Prepositional phrase: "The little carriage is creeping on at one mile an hour;" "In the twinkling of an eye, our horses had carried us to the termination of the umbrageous isle."

(2) Prepositional phrase: "The little carriage is creeping along at one mile per hour;" "In the blink of an eye, our horses had carried us to the end of the shady island."

In such a sentence as, "He died like a God," the word group like a God is often taken as a phrase; but it is really a contracted clause, the verb being omitted.

In a sentence like, "He died like a God," the phrase like a God is often seen as a standalone phrase; however, it is actually a shortened clause with the verb left out.

Tells how.

(3) Participial phrase: "She comes down from heaven to his help, interpreting for him the most difficult truths, and leading him from star to star."

(3) Participial phrase: "She comes down from heaven to help him, explaining the hardest truths, and guiding him from star to star."

(4) Infinitive phrase: "No imprudent, no sociable angel, ever dropped an early syllable to answer his longing."

(4) Infinitive phrase: "No reckless, no friendly angel, ever spoke an early syllable to answer his longing."

(For participial and infinitive phrases, see further Secs. 357-363.)

(For participial and infinitive phrases, see further Secs. 357-363.)

(5) Indirect object: "I gave every man a trumpet;" "Give them not only noble teachings, but noble teachers."

(5) Indirect object: "I gave every man a trumpet;" "Don't just give them noble teachings, but also noble teachers."

These are equivalent to the phrases to every man and to them, and modify the predicate in the same way.

These are similar to the phrases to every man and to them, and they change the predicate in the same way.

Retained with passive; or

When the verb is changed from active to passive, the indirect object is retained, as in these sentences: "It is left you to find out the reason why;" "All such knowledge should be given her."

When the verb is switched from active to passive, the indirect object stays the same, as seen in these sentences: "It is left you to find out the reason why;" "All such knowledge should be given her."

subject of passive verb and direct object retained.

Or sometimes the indirect object of the active voice becomes the subject of the passive, and the direct object is retained: for example, "She is to be taught to extend the limits of her sympathy;" "I was shown an immense sarcophagus."

Or sometimes the indirect object in the active voice turns into the subject in the passive voice, while the direct object stays the same: for example, "She is going to be taught to extend the limits of her sympathy;" "I was shown a huge sarcophagus."

(6) Adverbial objective. These answer the question when, or how long, how far, etc., and are consequently equivalent to adverbs in modifying a predicate: "We were now running thirteen miles an hour;" "One way lies hope;" "Four hours before midnight we approached a mighty minster."

(6) Adverbial objective. These answer the questions when, how long, how far, etc., and are therefore equivalent to adverbs in modifying a predicate: "We were now running thirteen miles an hour;" "One way lies hope;" "Four hours before midnight we approached a mighty minster."

Exercises.

(a) Pick out subject, predicate, and (direct) object:—

(a) Identify the subject, verb, and (direct) object:—

1. This, and other measures of precaution, I took.

1. I took this and other precautionary measures.

2. The pursuing the inquiry under the light of an end or final cause, gives wonderful animation, a sort of personality to the whole writing.

2. Looking into the inquiry with an end goal or purpose in mind brings a vibrant energy and a sense of personality to the entire writing.

3. Why does the horizon hold me fast, with my joy and grief, in this center?

3. Why does the horizon keep me anchored here, caught in both my happiness and sadness?

4. His books have no melody, no emotion, no humor, no relief to the dead prosaic level.

4. His books lack melody, emotion, humor, and any relief from the dull, flat quality.

5. On the voyage to Egypt, he liked, after dinner, to fix on three or four persons to support a proposition, and as many to oppose it.

5. On the trip to Egypt, he liked to choose three or four people to back a proposal after dinner, and as many to oppose it.

6. Fashion does not often caress the great, but the children of the great.

6. Fashion doesn't usually favor the elite, but rather their children.

7. No rent roll can dignify skulking and dissimulation.

7. No amount of financial reports can justify sneaking around and deceit.

8. They do not wish to be lovely, but to be loved.

8. They don't want to be beautiful; they want to be loved.

(b) Pick out the subject, predicate, and complement:

(b) Identify the subject, verb, and complement:

  • 1. Evil, according to old philosophers, is good in the making.

    1. Evil, as old philosophers said, is just good in the making.

  • 2. But anger drives a man to say anything.

    2. But anger pushes a person to say anything.

  • 3. The teachings of the High Spirit are abstemious, and, in regard to particulars, negative.

    3. The teachings of the High Spirit are self-restrained, and when it comes to specifics, they are restrictive.

  • 4. Spanish diet and youth leave the digestion undisordered and the slumbers light.

    4. The Spanish diet and youth promote good digestion and lead to lighter sleep.

  • 5. Yet they made themselves sycophantic servants of the King of Spain.

    5. Yet they became insincere servants of the King of Spain.

  • 6. A merciless oppressor hast thou been.

    6. You have been a ruthless oppressor.

  • 7. To the men of this world, to the animal strength and spirits, the man of ideas appears out of his reason.

    7. To the men of this world, to the raw strength and energy, the man of ideas seems to emerge from his intellect.

  • 8. I felt myself, for the first time, burthened with the anxieties of a man, and a member of the world.

    8. I felt, for the first time, weighed down by the worries of an adult and a part of the world.

(c) Pick out the direct and the indirect object in each:—

(c) Identify the direct and indirect objects in each:—

  • 1. Not the less I owe thee justice.

    1. I still owe you justice.

  • 2. Unhorse me, then, this imperial rider.

    2. Unseat me, then, this royal rider.

  • 3. She told the first lieutenant part of the truth.

    3. She told the first lieutenant some of the truth.

  • 4. I promised her protection against all ghosts.

    4. I promised her protection from all ghosts.

  • 5. I gave him an address to my friend, the attorney.

    5. I gave him the address of my friend, the lawyer.

  • 6. Paint me, then, a room seventeen feet by twelve.

    6. So, paint me a room that's seventeen feet by twelve.

(d) Pick out the words and phrases in apposition:—

(d) Identify the words and phrases in apposition:—

  • 1. To suffer and to do, that was thy portion in life.

    1. To experience pain and to take action, that was your lot in life.

  • 2. A river formed the boundary,—the river Meuse.

    2. A river marked the boundary—the Meuse River.

  • 3. In one feature, Lamb resembles Sir Walter Scott; viz., in the dramatic character of his mind and taste.

    3. In one aspect, Lamb is similar to Sir Walter Scott; namely, in the dramatic nature of his thoughts and preferences.

  • 4. This view was luminously expounded by Archbishop Whately, the present Archbishop of Dublin.

    4. This perspective was clearly explained by Archbishop Whately, the current Archbishop of Dublin.

  • 5. Yes, at length the warrior lady, the blooming cornet, this nun so martial, this dragoon so lovely, must visit again the home of her childhood.

    5. Yes, eventually the warrior woman, the vibrant cornet, this so-called martial nun, this beautiful dragoon, must return to the home of her childhood.

(e) Pick out the modifiers of the predicate:—

(e) Identify the modifiers of the predicate:—

  • 1. It moves from one flower to another like a gleam of light, upwards, downwards, to the right and to the left.

    1. It flits from one flower to another like a streak of light, moving up, down, right, and left.

  • 2.

    2.

  • And listen! like the roar of the waves on the shore,
    The battle cry echoes along their shifting line.
  • 3. Their intention was to have a gay, happy dinner, after their long confinement to a ship, at the chief hotel.

    3. They wanted to have a fun, enjoyable dinner at the main hotel after being cooped up on a ship for so long.

  • 4. That night, in little peaceful Easedale, six children sat by a peat fire, expecting the return of their parents.

    4. That night, in the small, peaceful Easedale, six kids sat by a peat fire, waiting for their parents to come back.

Compound Subject, Compound Predicate, etc.

Not compound sentences.

353. Frequently in a simple sentence the writer uses two or more predicates to the same subject, two or more subjects of the same predicate, several modifiers, complements, etc.; but it is to be noticed that, in all such sentences as we quote below, the writers of them purposely combined them in single statements, and they are not to be expanded into compound sentences. In a compound sentence the object is to make two or more full statements.

353. Often in a straightforward sentence, the writer uses two or more predicates for the same subject, two or more subjects for the same predicate, multiple modifiers, complements, etc. However, it's important to note that in all the sentences we quote below, the writers intentionally combined them into single statements, and they should not be broken down into compound sentences. In a compound sentence, the goal is to make two or more complete statements.

Examples of compound subjects are, "By degrees Rip's awe and apprehension subsided;" "The name of the child, the air of the mother, the tone of her voice,—all awakened a train of recollections in his mind."

Examples of compound subjects are, "Gradually, Rip's awe and apprehension faded;" "The name of the child, the demeanor of the mother, the tone of her voice,—all triggered a series of memories in his mind."

Sentences with compound predicates are, "The company broke up, and returned to the more important concerns of the election;" "He shook his head, shouldered the rusty firelock, and, with a heart full of trouble and anxiety, turned his steps homeward."

Sentences with compound predicates are, "The company broke up and returned to the more important concerns of the election;" "He shook his head, shouldered the rusty firelock, and, with a heart full of trouble and anxiety, turned his steps homeward."

Sentences with compound objects of the same verb are, "He caught his daughter and her child in his arms;" "Voyages and travels I would also have."

Sentences with compound objects of the same verb are, "He caught his daughter and her child in his arms;" "Voyages and travels I would also have."

And so with complements, modifiers, etc.

And so with compliments, modifiers, etc.

Logical Subject and Logical Predicate.

354. The logical subject is the simple or grammatical subject, together with all its modifiers.

354. The logical subject is the straightforward or grammatical subject, along with all its modifiers.

The logical predicate is the simple or grammatical predicate (that is, the verb), together with its modifiers, and its object or complement.

The logical predicate is the basic or grammatical predicate (meaning, the verb), along with its modifiers and its object or complement.

Larger view of a sentence.

It is often a help to the student to find the logical subject and predicate first, then the grammatical subject and predicate. For example, in the sentence, "The situation here contemplated exposes a dreadful ulcer, lurking far down in the depths of human nature," the logical subject is the situation here contemplated, and the rest is the logical predicate. Of this, the simple subject is situation; the predicate, exposes; the object, ulcer, etc.

It often helps students to identify the logical subject and predicate first, and then the grammatical subject and predicate. For example, in the sentence, "The situation here contemplated exposes a dreadful ulcer, lurking far down in the depths of human nature," the logical subject is the situation here contemplated, and everything else is the logical predicate. From this, the simple subject is situation; the predicate is exposes; and the object is ulcer, etc.

Independent Elements of the Sentence.

355. The following words and expressions are grammatically independent of the rest of the sentence; that is, they are not a necessary part, do not enter into its structure:—

355. The following words and expressions are grammatically independent of the rest of the sentence; that is, they are not a necessary part and do not form part of its structure:—

(1) Person or thing addressed: "But you know them, Bishop;" "Ye crags and peaks, I'm with you once again."

(1) Person or thing addressed: "But you know them, Bishop;" "You crags and peaks, I'm with you once again."

(2) Exclamatory expressions: "But the lady—! Oh, heavens! will that spectacle ever depart from my dreams?"

(2) Exclamatory expressions: "But the lady—! Oh, my gosh! will that sight ever leave my mind?"

Caution.

The exclamatory expression, however, may be the person or thing addressed, same as (1), above: thus, "Ah, young sir! what are you about?" Or it may be an imperative, forming a sentence: "Oh, hurry, hurry, my brave young man!"

The exclamatory expression can refer to the person or thing being addressed, like in (1) above: for example, "Ah, young sir! what are you doing?" Or it can be an imperative, creating a full sentence: "Oh, hurry, hurry, my brave young man!"

(3) Infinitive phrase thrown in loosely: "To make a long story short, the company broke up;" "Truth to say, he was a conscientious man."

(3) Infinitive phrase thrown in loosely: "To cut a long story short, the company split up;" "To be honest, he was a dedicated man."

(4) Prepositional phrase not modifying: "Within the railing sat, to the best of my remembrance, six quill-driving gentlemen;" "At all events, the great man of the prophecy had not yet appeared."

(4) Prepositional phrase not modifying: "Inside the railing sat, as far as I can remember, six quill-driving gentlemen;" "In any case, the great man from the prophecy had not shown up yet."

(5) Participial phrase: "But, generally speaking, he closed his literary toils at dinner;" "Considering the burnish of her French tastes, her noticing even this is creditable."

(5) Participial phrase: "But, generally speaking, he wrapped up his writing work at dinner;" "Given her refined French tastes, the fact that she noticed even this is impressive."

(6) Single words: as, "Oh, yes! everybody knew them;" "No, let him perish;" "Well, he somehow lived along;" "Why, grandma, how you're winking!" "Now, this story runs thus."

(6) Single words: as, "Oh, yes! Everyone knew them;" "No, let him go;" "Well, he somehow got by;" "Why, grandma, you're winking!" "Now, this story goes like this."

Another caution.

There are some adverbs, such as perhaps, truly, really, undoubtedly, besides, etc., and some conjunctions, such as however, then, moreover, therefore, nevertheless, etc., that have an office in the sentence, and should not be confused with the words spoken of above. The words well, now, why, and so on, are independent when they merely arrest the attention without being necessary.

There are some adverbs, like perhaps, truly, really, undoubtedly, besides, and so on, as well as some conjunctions, like however, then, moreover, therefore, nevertheless, etc., that have a specific role in the sentence and shouldn't be mixed up with the previously mentioned words. The words well, now, why, and others are independent when they simply grab attention without being essential.

PREPOSITIONAL PHRASES.

Prepositional Phrases.

356. In their use, prepositional phrases may be,

356. In their use, prepositional phrases can be,

(1) Adjectival, modifying a noun, pronoun, or word used as a noun: for example, "He took the road to King Richard's pavilion;" "I bring reports on that subject from Ascalon."

(1) Adjectival, modifying a noun, pronoun, or word used as a noun: for example, "He took the road to King Richard's pavilion;" "I bring reports on that subject from Ascalon."

(2) Adverbial, limiting in the same way an adverb limits: as, "All nature around him slept in calm moonshine or in deep shadow;" "Far from the madding crowd's ignoble strife."

(2) Adverbial, restricting in the same way an adverb restricts: as, "All nature around him slept in calm moonlight or in deep shadow;" "Far from the chaos of the crowd’s petty conflicts."

(3) Independent, not dependent on any word in the sentence (for examples, see Sec. 355, 4).

(3) Independent, not relying on any word in the sentence (for examples, see Sec. 355, 4).

PARTICIPLES AND PARTICIPIAL PHRASES.

357. It will be helpful to sum up here the results of our study of participles and participial phrases, and to set down all the uses which are of importance in analysis:—

357. It will be useful to summarize the findings of our study of participles and participial phrases, and to list all the important uses in analysis:—

(1) The adjectival use, already noticed, as follows:—

(1) The adjectival use, already mentioned, is as follows:—

  • (a) As a complement of a transitive verb, and at the same time a modifier of the object (for an example, see Sec. 350, 4).

    (a) As a complement of a transitive verb, and at the same time a modifier of the object (for an example, see Sec. 350, 4).

  • (b) As a modifier of subject, object, or complement (see Sec. 351, 6).

    (b) As a modifier of the subject, object, or complement (see Sec. 351, 6).

(2) The adverbial use, modifying the predicate, instances of which were seen in Sec. 352, 3. In these the participial phrases connect closely with the verb, and there is no difficulty in seeing that they modify.

(2) The adverbial use, which modifies the predicate, examples of which were shown in Sec. 352, 3. In these cases, the participial phrases are closely linked to the verb, making it clear that they are providing modification.

These need close watching.

There are other participial phrases which are used adverbially, but require somewhat closer attention; thus, "The letter of introduction, containing no matters of business, was speedily run through."

There are other participial phrases that are used adverbially, but need a bit more attention; for example, "The letter of introduction, containing no matters of business, was quickly reviewed."

In this sentence, the expression containing no matters of business does not describe letter, but it is equivalent to because it contained no matters of business, and hence is adverbial, modifying was speedily run through.

In this sentence, the phrase containing no matters of business doesn’t describe letter, but it means because it contained no matters of business, so it acts like an adverb, modifying was speedily run through.

Notice these additional examples:—

Notice these extra examples:—

Being a great collector of everything relating to Milton [reason, "Because I was," etc.], I had naturally possessed myself of Richardson the painter's thick octavo volumes.

As a huge collector of everything related to Milton [reason, "Because I was," etc.], I had naturally acquired the thick octavo volumes by the painter Richardson.

Neither the one nor the other writer was valued by the public, both having [since they had] a long warfare to accomplish of contumely and ridicule.

Neither writer was appreciated by the public, both having [since they had] a long battle to fight against contempt and mockery.

Wilt thou, therefore, being now wiser [as thou art] in thy thoughts, suffer God to give by seeming to refuse?

Will you, therefore, being now wiser [as you are] in your thoughts, allow God to give by pretending to refuse?

(3) Wholly independent in meaning and grammar. See Sec. 355, (5), and these additional examples:—

(3) Completely independent in meaning and grammar. See Sec. 355, (5), and these extra examples:—

Assuming the specific heat to be the same as that of water, the entire mass of the sun would cool down to 15,000° Fahrenheit in five thousand years.

Assuming the specific heat is the same as that of water, the entire mass of the sun would cool down to 15,000° Fahrenheit in five thousand years.

This case excepted, the French have the keenest possible sense of everything odious and ludicrous in posing.

This case aside, the French have an incredibly sharp sense of anything offensive and ridiculous in pretending.

INFINITIVES AND INFINITIVE PHRASES.

358. The various uses of the infinitive give considerable trouble, and they will be presented here in full, or as nearly so as the student will require.

358. The different uses of the infinitive can be quite confusing, and they will be explained here as thoroughly as the student needs.

I. The verbal use. (1) Completing an incomplete verb, but having no other office than a verbal one.

I. The verbal use. (1) Finishing an incomplete verb, but serving no other purpose than a verbal one.

  • (a) With may (might),can (could),should,would,seem, ought, etc.: "My weekly bill used invariably to be about fifty shillings;" "There, my dear, he should not have known them at all;" "He would instruct her in the white man's religion, and teach her how to be happy and good."

    (a) With may, can, should, would, seem, ought, etc.: "My weekly bill was always about fifty shillings;" "There, my dear, he shouldn't have known them at all;" "He would teach her the white man's religion and show her how to be happy and good."

  • (b) With the forms of be, being equivalent to a future with obligation, necessity, etc.: as in the sentences, "Ingenuity and cleverness are to be rewarded by State prizes;" "'The Fair Penitent' was to be acted that evening."

    (b) With forms of be, equivalent to a future with obligation, necessity, etc.: as in the sentences, "Ingenuity and cleverness are going to be rewarded with State prizes;" "'The Fair Penitent' was going to be performed that evening."

  • (c) With the definite forms of go, equivalent to a future: "I was going to repeat my remonstrances;" "I am not going to dissert on Hood's humor."

    (c) With the definite forms of go, similar to a future tense: "I was planning to repeat my objections;" "I am not planning to talk about Hood's humor."

(2) Completing an incomplete transitive verb, but also belonging to a subject or an object (see Sec. 344 for explanation of the complements of transitive verbs): "I am constrained every moment to acknowledge a higher origin for events" (retained with passive); "Do they not cause the heart to beat, and the eyes to fill?"

(2) Finishing an unfinished transitive verb, but also linking to a subject or an object (see Sec. 344 for an explanation of the complements of transitive verbs): "I feel compelled every moment to acknowledge a higher source for events" (kept in passive voice); "Don't they make the heart to beat, and the eyes to fill?"

359. II. The substantive use, already examined; but see the following examples for further illustration:—

359. II. The substantive use, already reviewed; but check the examples below for more clarification:—

(1) As the subject: "To have the wall there, was to have the foe's life at their mercy;" "To teach is to learn."

(1) Having the wall there meant they had the enemy's life in their hands; "Teaching is learning."

(2) As the object: "I like to hear them tell their old stories;" "I don't wish to detract from any gentleman's reputation."

(2) As the object: "I enjoy listening to them share their old stories;" "I don't want to take away from any gentleman's reputation."

(3) As complement: See examples under (1), above.

(3) As a complement: See examples under (1), above.

(4) In apposition, explanatory of a noun preceding: as, "She forwarded to the English leaders a touching invitation to unite with the French;" "He insisted on his right to forget her."

(4) In apposition, explaining a noun before it: for example, "She sent a heartfelt invitation to join the French to the English leaders;" "He maintained his right to forget her."

360. III. The adjectival use, modifying a noun that may be a subject, object, complement, etc.: for example, "But there was no time to be lost;" "And now Amyas had time to ask Ayacanora the meaning of this;" "I have such a desire to be well with my public" (see also Sec. 351, 5).

360. III. The adjectival use, altering a noun that can serve as a subject, object, complement, etc.: for example, "But there was no time to waste;" "And now Amyas had time to ask Ayacanora the meaning of this;" "I have such a desire to be on good terms with my audience" (see also Sec. 351, 5).

361. IV. The adverbial use, which may be to express—

361. IV. The adverbial use, which may be to express—

(1) Purpose: "The governor, Don Guzman, sailed to the eastward only yesterday to look for you;" "Isn't it enough to bring us to death, to please that poor young gentleman's fancy?"

(1) Purpose: "The governor, Don Guzman, set sail to the east just yesterday to find you;" "Isn't it enough to drive us to our doom, to satisfy that poor young guy's whims?"

(2) Result: "Don Guzman returns to the river mouth to find the ship a blackened wreck;" "What heart could be so hard as not to take pity on the poor wild thing?"

(2) Result: "Don Guzman returns to the river mouth to find the ship a burned-out wreck;" "What heart could be so hard as not to feel pity for the poor wild creature?"

(3) Reason: "I am quite sorry to part with them;" "Are you mad, to betray yourself by your own cries?" "Marry, hang the idiot, to bring me such stuff!"

(3) Reason: "I’m really sorry to part with them;" "Are you crazy, to betray yourself with your own cries?" "Honestly, screw the idiot for to bring me this nonsense!"

(4) Degree: "We have won gold enough to serve us the rest of our lives;" "But the poor lady was too sad to talk except to the boys now and again."

(4) Degree: "We've won enough gold to last us for the rest of our lives;" "But the poor lady was too upset to speak except to the boys every now and then."

(5) Condition: "You would fancy, to hear McOrator after dinner, the Scotch fighting all the battles;" "To say what good of fashion we can, it rests on reality" (the last is not a simple sentence, but it furnishes a good example of this use of the infinitive).

(5) Condition: "You would think, to hear McOrator after dinner, that the Scots are fighting all the battles;" "To say what good of fashion we can, it depends on reality" (the last is not a simple sentence, but it provides a good example of this use of the infinitive).

362. The fact that the infinitives in Sec. 361 are used adverbially, is evident from the meaning of the sentences.

362. It's clear from the meaning of the sentences that the infinitives in Sec. 361 are used as adverbs.

Whether each sentence containing an adverbial infinitive has the meaning of purpose, result, etc., may be found out by turning the infinitive into an equivalent clause, such as those studied under subordinate conjunctions.

Whether each sentence with an adverbial infinitive conveys meaning of purpose, result, etc., can be determined by rephrasing the infinitive into a corresponding clause, similar to those examined under subordinate conjunctions.

To test this, notice the following:—

To test this, check out the following:—

In (1), to look means that he might look; to please is equivalent to that he may please,—both purpose clauses.

In (1), to look means that he might look; to please is equivalent to that he may please,—both purpose clauses.

In (2), to find shows the result of the return; not to take pity is equivalent to that it would not take pity.

In (2), to find shows the result of the return; not to take pity is equivalent to that it would not take pity.

In (3), to part means because I part, etc.; and to betray and to bring express the reason, equivalent to that you betray, etc.

In (3), to part means because I part, etc.; and to betray and to bring express the reason, equivalent to that you betray, etc.

In (4), to serve and to talk are equivalent to [as much gold] as will serve us; and "too sad to talk" also shows degree.

In (4), to serve and to talk are equivalent to [as much gold] as will serve us; and "too sad to talk" also shows degree.

In (5), to hear means if you should hear, and to say is equivalent to if we say,—both expressing condition.

In (5), to hear means if you hear, and to say is equivalent to if we say,—both expressing a condition.

363. V. The independent use, which is of two kinds,—

363. V. The independent use, which comes in two types,—

(1) Thrown loosely into the sentence; as in Sec. 355, (3).

(1) Thrown loosely into the sentence; as in Sec. 355, (3).

(2) Exclamatory: "I a philosopher! I advance pretensions;" "'He to die!' resumed the bishop." (See also Sec. 268, 4.)

(2) Exclamatory: "I'm a philosopher! I make pretensions;" "'He's about to die!' the bishop continued." (See also Sec. 268, 4.)

OUTLINE OF ANALYSIS.

364. In analyzing simple sentences, give—

In analyzing simple sentences, provide—

(1) The predicate. If it is an incomplete verb, give the complement (Secs. 344 and 350) and its modifiers (Sec. 351).

(1) The predicate. If it’s an incomplete verb, provide the complement (Secs. 344 and 350) and its modifiers (Sec. 351).

(2) The object of the verb (Sec. 349).

(2) The object of the verb (Sec. 349).

(3) Modifiers of the object (Sec. 351).

(3) Modifiers of the object (Sec. 351).

(4) Modifiers of the predicate (Sec. 352).

(4) Modifiers of the predicate (Sec. 352).

(5) The subject (Sec. 347).

The topic (Sec. 347).

(6) Modifiers of the subject (Sec. 351).

(6) Subject Modifiers (Sec. 351).

(7) Independent elements (Sec. 355).

(7) Standalone elements (Sec. 355).

This is not the same order that the parts of the sentence usually have; but it is believed that the student will proceed more easily by finding the predicate with its modifiers, object, etc., and then finding the subject by placing the question who or what before it.

This isn't the usual order for the parts of a sentence; however, it's thought that the student will have an easier time by identifying the predicate with its modifiers, object, etc., and then figuring out the subject by asking the question who or what before it.

Exercise in Analyzing Simple Sentences.

Analyze the following according to the directions given:—

Analyze the following based on the provided instructions:—

1. Our life is March weather, savage and serene in one hour.

1. Our life is like March weather, wild and calm all in one hour.

2. I will try to keep the balance true.

2. I will try to keep the balance correct.

3. The questions of Whence? What? and Whither? and the solution of these, must be in a life, not in a book.

3. The questions of Where are we from? What is it? and Where are we going? and the answers to these must be found in life, not in a book.

4. The ward meetings on election days are not softened by any misgiving of the value of these ballotings.

4. The ward meetings on election days are not affected by any doubts about the importance of these votes.

5. Our English Bible is a wonderful specimen of the strength and music of the English language.

5. Our English Bible is a fantastic example of the power and beauty of the English language.

6. Through the years and the centuries, through evil agents, through toys and atoms, a great and beneficent tendency irresistibly streams.

6. Over the years and centuries, through bad influences, through gadgets and particles, a powerful and positive force flows relentlessly.

7. To be hurried away by every event, is to have no political system at all.

7. Being rushed along by every event means you have no political system at all.

8. This mysticism the ancients called ecstasy,—a getting-out of their bodies to think.

8. The ancients referred to this mysticism as ecstasy—a state of stepping out of their bodies to think.

9. He risked everything, and spared nothing, neither ammunition, nor money, nor troops, nor generals, nor himself.

9. He put everything on the line and held back nothing—no ammo, no cash, no soldiers, no leaders, and not even himself.

10. We are always in peril, always in a bad plight, just on the edge of destruction, and only to be saved by invention and courage.

10. We're constantly in danger, always in a difficult situation, right on the brink of disaster, and only rescued by creativity and bravery.

11. His opinion is always original, and to the purpose.

11. His opinion is always original and relevant.

12. To these gifts of nature, Napoleon added the advantage of having been born to a private and humble fortune.

12. To these natural gifts, Napoleon added the benefit of being born into a modest and humble background.

13.

13.

The water, like a witch's oils,
Burnt green, blue, and white.

14. We one day descried some shapeless object floating at a distance.

14. One day, we spotted some indistinct object floating in the distance.

15.

15.

Old Adam, the scavenger crow,
The ancient crow of Cairo; He sat in the shower and let the water flow. Under his tail and over his crest.

16. It costs no more for a wise soul to convey his quality to other men.

16. A wise person can share their wisdom with others without it costing them anything more.

17. It is easy to sugar to be sweet.

17. It's easy to pretend to be nice.

18. At times the black volume of clouds overhead seemed rent asunder by flashes of lightning.

18. Sometimes the dark clouds above appeared to be split apart by flashes of lightning.

19. The whole figure and air, good and amiable otherwise, might be called flabby and irresolute.

19. The overall appearance and demeanor, though generally good and friendly, could be described as soft and indecisive.

20. I have heard Coleridge talk, with eager energy, two stricken hours, and communicate no meaning whatsoever to any individual.

20. I've listened to Coleridge speak passionately for two whole hours, and he didn't convey any meaning to anyone.

21. The word conscience has become almost confined, in popular use, to the moral sphere.

21. The word conscience is now mostly limited, in common usage, to moral matters.

22. You may ramble a whole day together, and every moment discover something new.

22. You could talk for an entire day and discover something new every single moment.

23. She had grown up amidst the liberal culture of Henry's court a bold horsewoman, a good shot, a graceful dancer, a skilled musician, an accomplished scholar.

23. She had grown up in the open-minded culture of Henry's court—a daring horse rider, a good marksman, a graceful dancer, a talented musician, and a knowledgeable scholar.

24. Her aims were simple and obvious,—to preserve her throne, to keep England out of war, to restore civil and religious order.

24. Her goals were straightforward and clear— to maintain her throne, to keep England out of war, and to restore civil and religious order.

25.

25.

He could have passed on a good name,
Wiping away many marks of past wrongdoing.

26. Of the same grandeur, in less heroic and poetic form, was the patriotism of Peel in recent history.

26. Similarly impressive, but in a less heroic and poetic way, was Peel's patriotism in recent history.

27. Oxford, ancient mother! hoary with ancestral honors, time-honored, and, haply, time-shattered power—I owe thee nothing!

27. Oxford, ancient mother! Gray with ancestral honors, respected through the ages, and perhaps broken by time—I owe you nothing!

28. The villain, I hate him and myself, to be a reproach to such goodness.

28. I hate the villain and I hate myself for being a disappointment to such goodness.

29. I dare this, upon my own ground, and in my own garden, to bid you leave the place now and forever.

29. I challenge you, on my own territory and in my own garden, to leave this place now and for good.

30. Upon this shore stood, ready to receive her, in front of all this mighty crowd, the prime minister of Spain, the same Condé Olivarez.

30. On this shore stood, ready to welcome her, in front of this massive crowd, the prime minister of Spain, the same Condé Olivarez.

31. Great was their surprise to see a young officer in uniform stretched within the bushes upon the ground.

31. They were very surprised to see a young officer in uniform lying among the bushes on the ground.

32. She had made a two days' march, baggage far in the rear, and no provisions but wild berries.

32. She had marched for two days, with her baggage far behind, and no food except for wild berries.

33. This amiable relative, an elderly man, had but one foible, or perhaps one virtue, in this world.

33. This friendly relative, an older man, had just one flaw, or maybe one good quality, in this world.

34. Now, it would not have been filial or ladylike.

34. Now, that wouldn’t have been respectful or appropriate for a woman.

35. Supposing this computation to be correct, it must have been in the latitude of Boston, the present capital of New England.

35. Assuming this calculation is accurate, it must have been in the latitude of Boston, the current capital of New England.

36. The cry, "A strange vessel close aboard the frigate!" having already flown down the hatches, the ship was in an uproar.

36. The shout, "A strange ship right next to the frigate!" had already spread down the hatches, and the ship was in chaos.

37.

37.

But give in, proud enemy, your fleet
With the crews at England's feet.

38. Few in number, and that number rapidly perishing away through sickness and hardships; surrounded by a howling wilderness and savage tribes; exposed to the rigors of an almost arctic winter,—their minds were filled with doleful forebodings.

38. Few in number, and that number quickly fading due to illness and hardships; surrounded by a howling wilderness and hostile tribes; facing the harshness of an almost Arctic winter,—their minds were filled with gloomy thoughts.

39. List to the mournful tradition still sung by the pines of the forest.

39. Listen to the sad tradition still sung by the pines of the forest.

40.

40.

In the Acadian region, along the shores of the Basin of Minas,
Remote, quiet, and calm, the little village of Grand-Pré
Lie in the fruitful valley.

41. Must we in all things look for the how, and the why, and the wherefore?

41. Do we have to question everything—how it works, why it happens, and what it means?


CONTRACTED SENTENCES.

Words left out after than or as.

365. Some sentences look like simple ones in form, but have an essential part omitted that is so readily supplied by the mind as not to need expressing. Such are the following:—

365. Some sentences appear to be simple in structure, but they leave out an important part that our minds easily fill in without needing to be stated. Here are some examples:—

"There is no country more worthy of our study than England [is worthy of our study]."

"There is no country more deserving of our attention than England."

"The distinctions between them do not seem to be so marked as [they are marked] in the cities."

"The differences between them don’t seem to be as clear-cut as they are in the cities."

To show that these words are really omitted, compare with them the two following:—

To demonstrate that these words are truly missing, compare them with the two that follow:—

"The nobility and gentry are more popular among the inferior orders than they are in any other country."

"The nobility and gentry are more admired by the lower classes than they are in any other country."

"This is not so universally the case at present as it was formerly."

"This isn't as universally true now as it used to be."

Sentences with like.

366. As shown in Part I. (Sec. 333). the expressions of manner introduced by like, though often treated as phrases, are really contracted clauses; but, if they were expanded, as would be the connective instead of like; thus,—

366. As shown in Part I. (Sec. 333), the expressions of manner introduced by like, while often considered phrases, are actually shortened clauses; however, if they were fully expressed, as would be the connecting word instead of like; thus,—

"They'll shine over her sleep, like a smile from the west." "From her own beloved island of sorrow."

This must, however, be carefully discriminated from cases where like is an adjective complement; as,—

This must, however, be carefully distinguished from cases where like is an adjective complement; as,—

"She is like some tender tree, the pride and beauty of the grove;" "The ruby seemed like a spark of fire burning upon her white bosom."

"She is like some delicate tree, the pride and beauty of the grove;" "The ruby looked like a spark of fire glowing against her fair chest."

Such contracted sentences form a connecting link between our study of simple and complex sentences.

Such shortened sentences connect our study of simple and complex sentences.


COMPLEX SENTENCES.

The simple sentence the basis.

367. Our investigations have now included all the machinery of the simple sentence, which is the unit of speech.

367. Our research has now covered all the elements of the simple sentence, which is the basic unit of communication.

Our further study will be in sentences which are combinations of simple sentences, made merely for convenience and smoothness, to avoid the tiresome repetition of short ones of monotonous similarity.

Our further study will focus on sentences that are combinations of simple sentences, created solely for convenience and flow, to avoid the tedious repetition of short ones that sound too similar.

Next to the simple sentence stands the complex sentence. The basis of it is two or more simple sentences, which are so united that one member is the main one,—the backbone,—the other members subordinate to it, or dependent on it; as in this sentence,—

Next to the simple sentence is the complex sentence. It is made up of two or more simple sentences that are connected in such a way that one part is the main idea—the backbone—and the other parts are subordinate to it or rely on it; as in this sentence,—

"When such a spirit breaks forth into complaint, we are aware how great must be the suffering that extorts the murmur."

"When a spirit openly complains, we realize how deep the pain must be to provoke such a reaction."

The relation of the parts is as follows:—

The relation of the parts is as follows:—

We understand
_______ _____
|         |
__| when such a spirit breaks
|        into complaint,
|
how immense must be the suffering
|
that brings forth the murmur.

This arrangement shows to the eye the picture that the sentence forms in the mind,—how the first clause is held in suspense by the mind till the second, we are aware, is taken in; then we recognize this as the main statement; and the next one, how great ... suffering, drops into its place as subordinate to we are aware; and the last, that ... murmur, logically depends on suffering.

This layout visually displays the image that the sentence creates in our minds—how the first part keeps us in suspense until we grasp the second part, we are aware; then we identify this as the main point; and the next part, how great ... suffering, falls into its role as subordinate to we are aware; and the final part, that ... murmur, logically relies on suffering.

Hence the following definition:—

So the following definition:—

Definition.

368. A complex sentence is one containing one main or independent clause (also called the principal proposition or clause), and one or more subordinate or dependent clauses.

368. A complex sentence is one that has one main or independent clause (also known as the principal proposition or clause), and one or more subordinate or dependent clauses.

369. The elements of a complex sentence are the same as those of the simple sentence; that is, each clause has its subject, predicate, object, complements, modifiers, etc.

369. The elements of a complex sentence are the same as those of a simple sentence; that is, each clause has its subject, verb, object, complements, modifiers, etc.

But there is this difference: whereas the simple sentence always has a word or a phrase for subject, object, complement, and modifier, the complex sentence has statements or clauses for these places.

But there is this difference: while the simple sentence always has a word or a phrase for subject, object, complement, and modifier, the complex sentence has statements or clauses for these roles.

CLAUSES.

Definition.

370. A clause is a division of a sentence, containing a verb with its subject.

370. A clause is a part of a sentence that includes a verb along with its subject.

Hence the term clause may refer to the main division of the complex sentence, or it may be applied to the others,—the dependent or subordinate clauses.

Hence the term clause may refer to the main part of the complex sentence, or it may also apply to the other parts—the dependent or subordinate clauses.

Independent clause.

371. A principal, main, or independent clause is one making a statement without the help of any other clause.

371. A principal, main, or independent clause is one that makes a statement on its own without the support of any other clause.

Dependent clause.

A subordinate or dependent clause is one which makes a statement depending upon or modifying some word in the principal clause.

A subordinate or dependent clause is one that makes a statement that relies on or modifies a word in the main clause.

Kinds.

372. As to their office in the sentence, clauses are divided into NOUN, ADJECTIVE, and ADVERB clauses, according as they are equivalent in use to nouns, adjectives, or adverbs.

372. In terms of their role in a sentence, clauses are categorized as NOUN, ADJECTIVE, and ADVERB clauses, depending on whether they function like nouns, adjectives, or adverbs.

Noun Clauses.

Noun Clauses.

373. Noun clauses have the following uses:—

Noun clauses have these uses:—

(1) Subject: "That such men should give prejudiced views of America is not a matter of surprise."

(1) Subject: "It's not surprising that those men have biased views of America."

(2) Object of a verb, verbal, or the equivalent of a verb: (a) "I confess these stories, for a time, put an end to my fancies;" (b) "I am aware [I know] that a skillful illustrator of the immortal bard would have swelled the materials."

(2) Object of a verb, verbal, or the equivalent of a verb: (a) "I admit these stories, for a while, ended my daydreams;" (b) "I know that a talented illustrator of the timeless bard would have expanded the content."

Just as the object noun, pronoun, infinitive, etc., is retained after a passive verb (Sec. 352, 5), so the object clause is retained, and should not be called an adjunct of the subject; for example, "We are persuaded that a thread runs through all things;" "I was told that the house had not been shut, night or day, for a hundred years."

Just like how the object noun, pronoun, infinitive, etc., is kept after a passive verb (Sec. 352, 5), the object clause is also kept and should not be considered an addition to the subject; for example, "We are convinced that a thread runs through all things;" "I was informed that the house hadn't been closed, day or night, for a hundred years."

(3) Complement: "The terms of admission to this spectacle are, that he have a certain solid and intelligible way of living."

(3) Complement: "To be part of this experience, it’s required that he has a clear and sensible way of living."

(4) Apposition. (a) Ordinary apposition, explanatory of some noun or its equivalent: "Cecil's saying of Sir Walter Raleigh, 'I know that he can toil terribly,' is an electric touch."

(4) Apposition. (a) Ordinary apposition, which explains a noun or its equivalent: "Cecil's remark about Sir Walter Raleigh, 'I know that he can toil terribly,' is electrifying."

(b) After "it introductory" (logically this is a subject clause, but it is often treated as in apposition with it): "It was the opinion of some, that this might be the wild huntsman famous in German legend."

(b) After "it introductory" (logically this is a subject clause, but it is often treated as if in apposition with it): "It was the opinion of some, that this might be the wild huntsman famous in German legend."

(5) Object of a preposition: "At length he reached to where the ravine had opened through the cliffs."

(5) Object of a preposition: "Eventually, he arrived at the spot where the ravine had cut through the cliffs."

Notice that frequently only the introductory word is the object of the preposition, and the whole clause is not; thus, "The rocks presented a high impenetrable wall, over which the torrent came tumbling."

Notice that often just the introductory word is the object of the preposition, not the entire clause; for example, "The rocks formed a high impenetrable wall, over which the torrent came tumbling."

374. Here are to be noticed certain sentences seemingly complex, with a noun clause in apposition with it; but logically they are nothing but simple sentences. But since they are complex in form, attention is called to them here; for example,—

374. Here, we need to pay attention to certain sentences that appear complex because they have a noun clause that goes with it; however, logically, they are just simple sentences. But since they are complex in form, we’ll highlight them here; for example,—

"Alas! it is we ourselves that are getting buried alive under this avalanche of earthly impertinences."

"Sadly, it's us who are getting buried alive under this avalanche of earthly nonsense."

To divide this into two clauses—(a) It is we ourselves, (b) that are ... impertinences—would be grammatical; but logically the sentence is, We ourselves are getting ... impertinences, and it is ... that is merely a framework used to effect emphasis. The sentence shows how it may lose its pronominal force.

To break this into two parts—(a) It is us, (b) who are ... impertinences—would be grammatically correct; but logically the sentence is, We ourselves are getting ... impertinences, and it is ... that is just a structure used for emphasis. The sentence illustrates how it can lose its pronominal impact.

Other examples of this construction are,—

Other examples of this construction are,—

"It is on the understanding, and not on the sentiment, of a nation, that all safe legislation must be based."

"It is on the understanding, not on the feelings, of a nation that all effective legislation must be based."

"Then it is that deliberative Eloquence lays aside the plain attire of her daily occupation."

"That's when eloquence in debate puts aside the simple clothes of her everyday work."

Exercise.

Tell how each noun clause is used in these sentences:—

Tell how each noun clause is used in these sentences:—

1. I felt that I breathed an atmosphere of sorrow.

1. I felt like I was surrounded by a heavy atmosphere of sadness.

2. But the fact is, I was napping.

2. But the truth is, I was taking a nap.

3. Shaking off from my spirit what must have been a dream, I scanned more narrowly the aspect of the building.

3. Shaking off what must have been a dream, I looked more closely at the appearance of the building.

4. Except by what he could see for himself, he could know nothing.

4. Other than what he could see for himself, he couldn't know anything.

5. Whatever he looks upon discloses a second sense.

5. Everything he looks at reveals a deeper meaning.

6. It will not be pretended that a success in either of these kinds is quite coincident with what is best and inmost in his mind.

6. It shouldn’t be assumed that a success in either of these areas perfectly aligns with what is truly the best and deepest in his mind.

7. The reply of Socrates, to him who asked whether he should choose a wife, still remains reasonable, that, whether he should choose one or not, he would repent it.

7. Socrates' response to the person who asked whether he should choose a wife still makes sense: whether he chooses one or not, he would end up regretting it.

8. What history it had, how it changed from shape to shape, no man will ever know.

8. What history it had and how it transformed over time, no one will ever know.

9. Such a man is what we call an original man.

9. Such a person is what we call an original individual.

10. Our current hypothesis about Mohammed, that he was a scheming impostor, a falsehood incarnate, that his religion is a mere mass of quackery and fatuity, begins really to be no longer tenable to any one.

10. Our current belief about Mohammed, that he was a manipulative fraud, a living lie, and that his religion is just a bunch of nonsense and foolishness, is starting to become untenable for anyone.

Adjective Clauses.

375. As the office of an adjective is to modify, the only use of an adjective clause is to limit or describe some noun, or equivalent of a noun: consequently the adjective may modify any noun, or equivalent of a noun, in the sentence.

375. Just like an adjective modifies a noun, an adjective clause is used to limit or describe a noun or something that acts like a noun. Therefore, an adjective can modify any noun or something equivalent to a noun in the sentence.

The adjective clause may be introduced by the relative pronouns who, which, that, but, as; sometimes by the conjunctions when, where, whither, whence, wherein, whereby, etc.

The adjective clause can be introduced by the relative pronouns who, which, that, but, as; and sometimes by the conjunctions when, where, whither, whence, wherein, whereby, etc.

Frequently there is no connecting word, a relative pronoun being understood.

Frequently, there isn't a connecting word, as a relative pronoun is implied.

Examples of adjective clauses.

376. Adjective clauses may modify—

Adjective clauses can modify—

(1) The subject: "The themes it offers for contemplation are too vast for their capacities;" "Those who see the Englishman only in town, are apt to form an unfavorable opinion of his social character."

(1) The subject: "The themes it presents for reflection are too extensive for their understanding;" "Those who only see the Englishman in the city, tend to form a negative impression of his social character."

(2) The object: "From this piazza Ichabod entered the hall, which formed the center of the mansion."

(2) The object: "From this square, Ichabod entered the hall, which was the heart of the mansion."

(3) The complement: "The animal he bestrode was a broken-down plow-horse, that had outlived almost everything but his usefulness;" "It was such an apparition as is seldom to be met with in broad daylight."

(3) The complement: "The animal he rode was a worn-out plow horse, that had outlived almost everything except its usefulness;" "It was the kind of sight that’s rarely seen in broad daylight."

(4) Other words: "He rode with short stirrups, which brought his knees nearly up to the pommel of the saddle;" "No whit anticipating the oblivion which awaited their names and feats, the champions advanced through the lists;" "Charity covereth a multitude of sins, in another sense than that in which it is said to do so in Scripture."

(4) Other words: "He rode with short stirrups, which brought his knees up almost to the front of the saddle;" "Not at all thinking about the oblivion that awaited their names and accomplishments, the champions moved forward through the lists;" "Charity covers a lot of faults, in a different way than it is said to do so in Scripture."

Exercise.

Pick out the adjective clauses, and tell what each one modifies; i.e., whether subject, object, etc.

Pick out the adjective clauses and indicate what each one modifies; for example, whether it's the subject, object, etc.

1. There were passages that reminded me perhaps too much of Massillon.

1. There were parts that reminded me maybe too much of Massillon.

2. I walked home with Calhoun, who said that the principles which I had avowed were just and noble.

2. I walked home with Calhoun, who said that the principles I had shared were fair and admirable.

3. Other men are lenses through which we read our own minds.

3. Other guys are like mirrors that help us understand our own thoughts.

4. In one of those celestial days when heaven and earth meet and adorn each other, it seems a pity that we can only spend it once.

4. On one of those heavenly days when sky and earth come together and enhance each other, it's a shame we can only experience it once.

5. One of the maidens presented a silver cup, containing a rich mixture of wine and spice, which Rowena tasted.

5. One of the women offered a silver cup filled with a rich blend of wine and spices, which Rowena sampled.

6. No man is reason or illumination, or that essence we were looking for.

6. No one is the reason or the light, or that essence we were searching for.

7. In the moment when he ceases to help us as a cause, he begins to help us more as an effect.

7. When he stops assisting us as a cause, he starts to support us more as an effect.

8. Socrates took away all ignominy from the place, which could not be a prison whilst he was there.

8. Socrates removed all disgrace from the place, which couldn't be a prison as long as he was there.

9. This is perhaps the reason why we so seldom hear ghosts except in our long-established Dutch settlements.

9. This might be why we rarely hear about ghosts except in our well-established Dutch communities.

10. From the moment you lose sight of the land you have left, all is vacancy.

10. Once you can no longer see the land you've departed from, it all feels empty.

11. Nature waited tranquilly for the hour to be struck when man should arrive.

11. Nature waited calmly for the moment when man would arrive.

Adverbial Clauses.

Adverbial Clauses

377. The adverb clause takes the place of an adverb in modifying a verb, a verbal, an adjective, or an adverb. The student has met with many adverb clauses in his study of the subjunctive mood and of subordinate conjunctions; but they require careful study, and will be given in detail, with examples.

377. An adverb clause acts like an adverb by modifying a verb, a verbal, an adjective, or another adverb. The student has encountered many adverb clauses while studying the subjunctive mood and subordinate conjunctions; however, they need careful attention and will be explained in detail, along with examples.

378. Adverb clauses are of the following kinds:

378. Adverb clauses come in these types:

(1) TIME: "As we go, the milestones are grave-stones;" "He had gone but a little way before he espied a foul fiend coming;" "When he was come up to Christian, he beheld him with a disdainful countenance."

(1) TIME: "As we continue, the milestones are gravestones;" "He had only traveled a short distance before he spotted an evil spirit coming;" "When he reached Christian, he looked at him with a scornful expression."

(2) PLACE: "Wherever the sentiment of right comes in, it takes precedence of everything else;" "He went several times to England, where he does not seem to have attracted any attention."

(2) PLACE: "Wherever the feeling of what’s right comes into play, it takes priority over everything else;" "He visited England several times, where he apparently didn’t draw any attention."

(3) REASON, or CAUSE: "His English editor lays no stress on his discoveries, since he was too great to care to be original;" "I give you joy that truth is altogether wholesome."

(3) REASON, or CAUSE: "His English editor doesn’t emphasize his discoveries, because he was too significant to worry about being original;" "I congratulate you that truth is completely healthy."

(4) MANNER: "The knowledge of the past is valuable only as it leads us to form just calculations with respect to the future;" "After leaving the whole party under the table, he goes away as if nothing had happened."

(4) MANNER: "Knowing about the past is only useful if it helps us make accurate predictions about the future;" "After leaving everyone passed out under the table, he walks away like nothing happened."

(5) DEGREE, or COMPARISON: "They all become wiser than they were;" "The right conclusion is, that we should try, so far as we can, to make up our shortcomings;" "Master Simon was in as chirping a humor as a grasshopper filled with dew [is];" "The broader their education is, the wider is the horizon of their thought." The first clause in the last sentence is dependent, expressing the degree in which the horizon, etc., is wider.

(5) DEGREE, or COMPARISON: "They all become wiser than they were;" "The right conclusion is that we should try, as much as we can, to make up for our shortcomings;" "Master Simon was as cheerful as a dew-filled grasshopper;" "The broader their education is, the wider their thinking becomes." The first part of the last sentence depends on the second, showing how much wider the horizon, etc., is.

(6) PURPOSE: "Nature took us in hand, shaping our actions, so that we might not be ended untimely by too gross disobedience."

(6) PURPOSE: "Nature took us under its wing, guiding our actions, so that we wouldn't meet an early end due to severe disobedience."

(7) RESULT, or CONSEQUENCE: "He wrote on the scale of the mind itself, so that all things have symmetry in his tablet;" "The window was so far superior to every other in the church, that the vanquished artist killed himself from mortification."

(7) RESULT, or CONSEQUENCE: "He wrote on the level of the mind itself, so that everything has balance in his work;" "The window was so much better than every other one in the church, that the defeated artist took his own life out of humiliation."

(8) CONDITION: "If we tire of the saints, Shakespeare is our city of refuge;" "Who cares for that, so thou gain aught wider and nobler?" "You can die grandly, and as goddesses would die were goddesses mortal."

(8) CONDITION: "If we get tired of the saints, Shakespeare is our safe place;" "Who cares about that, ?" "You can die magnificently, just like goddesses would die if goddesses were mortal."

(9) CONCESSION, introduced by indefinite relatives, adverbs, and adverbial conjunctions,—whoever, whatever, however, etc.: "But still, however good she may be as a witness, Joanna is better;" "Whatever there may remain of illiberal in discussion, there is always something illiberal in the severer aspects of study."

(9) CONCESSION, introduced by indefinite relatives, adverbs, and adverbial conjunctions—whoever, whatever, however, etc.: "But still, no matter how good she is as a witness, Joanna is better;" "No matter what there is left of being closed-minded in discussion, there's always something closed-minded in the stricter aspects of study."

These mean no matter how good, no matter what remains, etc.

These mean no matter how good, no matter what’s left, etc.

Exercise.

Workout.

Pick out the adverbial clauses in the following sentences; tell what kind each is, and what it modifies:—

Pick out the adverbial clauses in the following sentences; identify what kind each one is and what it modifies:—

1. As I was clearing away the weeds from this epitaph, the little sexton drew me on one side with a mysterious air, and informed me in a low voice that once upon a time, on a dark wintry night, when the wind was unruly, howling and whistling, banging about doors and windows, and twirling weathercocks, so that the living were frightened out of their beds, and even the dead could not sleep quietly in their graves, the ghost of honest Preston was attracted by the well-known call of "waiter," and made its sudden appearance just as the parish clerk was singing a stave from the "mirrie garland of Captain Death."

1. As I was pulling weeds from this gravestone, the little sexton pulled me aside with a knowing look and told me quietly that once, on a dark winter night when the wind was wild—howling, whistling, banging on doors and windows, and spinning weather vanes—causing the living to jump out of bed and even the dead to toss in their graves, the ghost of honest Preston showed up in response to the familiar call of "waiter." It appeared just as the parish clerk was singing a line from the "merry garland of Captain Death."

2. If the children gathered about her, as they sometimes did, Pearl would grow positively terrible in her puny wrath, snatching up stones to fling at them, with shrill, incoherent exclamations, that made her mother tremble because they had so much the sound of a witch's anathemas.

2. If the kids gathered around her, like they sometimes did, Pearl would get really furious in her tiny rage, grabbing stones to throw at them, shouting shrill, jumbled phrases that made her mom nervous because they sounded so much like a witch's curses.

3. The spell of life went forth from her ever-creative spirit, and communicated itself to a thousand objects, as a torch kindles a flame wherever it may be applied.

3. The power of life flowed from her endlessly creative spirit and spread to a thousand things, just like a torch ignites a flame wherever it touches.

ANALYZING COMPLEX SENTENCES.

379. These suggestions will be found helpful:—

You’ll find these tips helpful:—

(1) See that the sentence and all its parts are placed in the natural order of subject, predicate, object, and modifiers.

(1) Make sure that the sentence and all its parts are arranged in the natural order of subject, predicate, object, and modifiers.

(2) First take the sentence as a whole; find the principal subject and principal predicate; then treat noun clauses as nouns, adjective clauses as adjectives modifying certain words, and adverb clauses as single modifying adverbs.

(2) First look at the sentence as a whole; identify the main subject and main predicate; then consider noun clauses as nouns, adjective clauses as adjectives that modify specific words, and adverb clauses as single modifying adverbs.

(3) Analyze each clause as a simple sentence. For example, in the sentence, "Cannot we conceive that Odin was a reality?" we is the principal subject; cannot conceive is the principal predicate; its object is that Odin was a reality, of which clause Odin is the subject, etc.

(3) Analyze each clause as a simple sentence. For example, in the sentence, "Can't we imagine that Odin was real?" we is the principal subject; can't imagine is the principal predicate; its object is that Odin was real, of which clause Odin is the subject, etc.

380. It is sometimes of great advantage to map out a sentence after analyzing it, so as to picture the parts and their relations. To take a sentence:—

380. It can be really helpful to break down a sentence after analyzing it, so you can visualize the parts and how they connect. For example, let’s look at a sentence:—

"I cannot help thinking that the fault is in themselves, and that if the church and the cataract were in the habit of giving away their thoughts with that rash generosity which characterizes tourists, they might perhaps say of their visitors, 'Well, if you are those men of whom we have heard so much, we are a little disappointed, to tell the truth.'"

"I can't help but think the fault lies with them, and that if the church and the waterfall were as generous with their thoughts as tourists often are, they might say to their visitors, 'Well, if you're the people we’ve heard so much about, we’re a bit disappointed, to be honest.'"

This may be represented as follows:—

This can be shown like this:—

I can’t help but think
____________________
                                |
         _______________________|
        |
        |        (a) THAT THE PROBLEM IS WITH THEMSELVES, AND
        |
        |        (b) [THAT] THEY MIGHT (MAYBE) SAY OF THEIR GUESTS
        |                        ___________________
        |                                  |
        |     _____________________________|_________________________________
        |    |                                                               |
        |    |        (a) We are (a bit) disappointed                     |
        |   O|               ___________________________                     |
       O|   b|   ________________________|                                   |
       b|   j| M|                                                            |
       j|   e| o|         (b) If you are those guys                           |
       e|   c| d|                              ___                           |
       c|   t| i|      _________________________|                            |
       t|    | f|    M|                                                      |
        |    | i|    o| Of whom we have heard so much.                       |
        |    | e|    d.                                                      |
        |    \ r\     \                                                      |
        |               _____________________________________________________|
        |         M|
        |         o|           (a) If the church and ... that reckless generosity
        |         d|                                               __________
        |         i|                                                   |
        |         f|    _______________________________________________|
        |         i|   |
        |         e|   |        (b) Which is typical of tourists.
        |         r|   |
        \          \   \

OUTLINE

381. (1) Find the principal clause.

381. (1) Identify the main clause.

(2) Analyze it according to Sec. 364.

(2) Analyze it according to Sec. 364.

(3) Analyze the dependent clauses according to Sec. 364. This of course includes dependent clauses that depend on other dependent clauses, as seen in the "map" (Sec. 380).

(3) Analyze the dependent clauses according to Sec. 364. This obviously includes dependent clauses that rely on other dependent clauses, as shown in the "map" (Sec. 380).

Exercises.

(a) Analyze the following complex sentences:—

Analyze these complex sentences:—

1. Take the place and attitude which belong to you.

1. Take the position and attitude that are rightfully yours.

2. That mood into which a friend brings us is his dominion over us.

2. The mood that a friend puts us in is his control over us.

3. True art is only possible on the condition that every talent has its apotheosis somewhere.

3. True art can only exist if every talent has its peak expression somewhere.

4. The deep eyes, of a light hazel, were as full of sorrow as of inspiration.

4. The deep light hazel eyes were filled with both sorrow and inspiration.

5. She is the only church that has been loyal to the heart and soul of man, that has clung to her faith in the imagination.

5. She is the only church that has stayed true to the heart and soul of humanity, that has held on to her belief in imagination.

6. She has never lost sight of the truth that the product human nature is composed of the sum of flesh and spirit.

6. She has never forgotten that human nature is made up of both body and soul.

7. But now that she has become an establishment, she begins to perceive that she made a blunder in trusting herself to the intellect alone.

7. But now that she has become a fixture, she starts to realize that she made a mistake by relying only on her intellect.

8. Before long his talk would wander into all the universe, where it was uncertain what game you would catch, or whether any.

8. Before long, his conversation would drift across the entire universe, and it was unclear what kind of topic you'd stumble upon, if any at all.

9. The night proved unusually dark, so that the two principals had to tie white handkerchiefs round their elbows in order to descry each other.

9. The night was unusually dark, so the two main characters had to tie white handkerchiefs around their elbows to see each other.

10. Whether she would ever awake seemed to depend upon an accident.

10. It seemed like whether she would ever wake up depended on chance.

11. Here lay two great roads, not so much for travelers that were few, as for armies that were too many by half.

11. Here were two major roads, not so much for the few travelers, but for the countless armies.

12. It was haunted to that degree by fairies, that the parish priest was obliged to read mass there once a year.

12. It was so haunted by fairies that the parish priest had to hold a mass there once a year.

13. More than one military plan was entered upon which she did not approve.

13. More than one military plan was put into action that she didn’t approve of.

14. As surely as the wolf retires before cities, does the fairy sequester herself from the haunts of the licensed victualer.

14. Just as the wolf retreats from cities, the fairy keeps herself away from the spots where licensed food vendors gather.

15. M. Michelet is anxious to keep us in mind that this bishop was but an agent of the English.

15. M. Michelet wants us to remember that this bishop was just an agent of the English.

16. Next came a wretched Dominican, that pressed her with an objection, which, if applied to the Bible, would tax every miracle with unsoundness.

16. Next came a miserable Dominican, who challenged her with an argument that, if used against the Bible, would call every miracle into question.

17. The reader ought to be reminded that Joanna D'Arc was subject to an unusually unfair trial.

17. Readers should remember that Joanna D'Arc faced an especially unjust trial.

18. Now, had she really testified this willingness on the scaffold, it would have argued nothing at all but the weakness of a genial nature.

18. Now, if she had truly shown this willingness on the scaffold, it would have only indicated the fragility of a good-hearted nature.

19. And those will often pity that weakness most, who would yield to it least.

19. Those who would give in to weakness the least often feel the most pity for it.

20. Whether she said the word is uncertain.

20. It's unclear if she actually said the word.

21. This is she, the shepherd girl, counselor that had none for herself, whom I choose, bishop, for yours.

21. This is her, the shepherd girl, who had no one to advise her, and I choose her, bishop, for you.

22. Had they been better chemists, had we been worse, the mixed result, namely, that, dying for them, the flower should revive for us, could not have been effected.

22. If they had been better chemists, and if we had been worse, the mixed outcome—that by dying for them, the flower could come back to life for us—would not have happened.

23. I like that representation they have of the tree.

23. I like the way they depict the tree.

24. He was what our country people call an old one.

24. He was what people in the countryside refer to as an old one.

25. He thought not any evil happened to men of such magnitude as false opinion.

25. He believed that no harm could be as great to people as having a false opinion.

26. These things we are forced to say, if we must consider the effort of Plato to dispose of Nature,—which will not be disposed of.

26. We have to say these things if we consider Plato's attempt to explain Nature, which refuses to be explained.

27. He showed one who was afraid to go on foot to Olympia, that it was no more than his daily walk, if continuously extended, would easily reach.

27. He demonstrated to someone who was afraid to walk to Olympia that it was just a simple extension of his daily walk that could easily be managed.

28. What can we see or acquire but what we are?

28. What can we see or get other than what we already are?

29. Our eyes are holden that we cannot see things that stare us in the face, until the hour arrives when the mind is ripened.

29. Our eyes are held back so we can't see what's right in front of us until the time comes when our minds are ready.

30. There is good reason why we should prize this liberation.

30. There’s a solid reason why we should value this freedom.

(b) First analyze, then map out as in Sec. 380, the following complex sentences:—

(b) First analyze, then outline as in Sec. 380, the following complex sentences:—

1. The way to speak and write what shall not go out of fashion, is to speak and write sincerely.

1. The key to speaking and writing in a way that won't go out of style is to be sincere.

2. The writer who takes his subject from his ear, and not from his heart, should know that he has lost as much as he has gained.

2. The writer who draws their subject from their ear and not from their heart should realize that they have lost just as much as they have gained.

3. "No book," said Bentley, "was ever written down by any but itself."

3. "No book," Bentley said, "was ever written by anyone other than itself."

4. That which we do not believe, we cannot adequately say, though we may repeat the words never so often.

4. We can't truly express what we don't believe, no matter how many times we say the words.

5. We say so because we feel that what we love is not in your will, but above it.

5. We say this because we believe that what we love is not determined by your will, but exists beyond it.

6. It makes no difference how many friends I have, and what content I can find in conversing with each, if there be one to whom I am not equal.

6. It doesn't matter how many friends I have or what I can enjoy discussing with each of them if there’s one person I can’t measure up to.

7. In every troop of boys that whoop and run in each yard and square, a new-comer is as well and accurately weighed in the course of a few days, and stamped with his right number, as if he had undergone a formal trial of his strength, speed, and temper.

7. In every group of boys who shout and run in each yard and square, a newcomer is quickly and thoroughly judged within a few days, and assigned his place, as if he had gone through a formal test of his strength, speed, and temperament.


COMPOUND SENTENCES.

How formed.

382. The compound sentence is a combination of two or more simple or complex sentences. While the complex sentence has only one main clause, the compound has two or more independent clauses making statements, questions, or commands. Hence the definition,—

382. A compound sentence is a mix of two or more simple or complex sentences. While a complex sentence has just one main clause, a compound sentence has two or more independent clauses that provide statements, questions, or commands. So, here's the definition,—

Definition.

383. A compound sentence is one which contains two or more independent clauses.

383. A compound sentence consists of two or more independent clauses.

This leaves room for any number of subordinate clauses in a compound sentence: the requirement is simply that it have at least two independent clauses.

This allows for any number of subordinate clauses in a compound sentence: the only requirement is that it contains at least two independent clauses.

Examples of compound sentences:—

Examples of compound sentences:

Examples.

(1) Simple sentences united: "He is a palace of sweet sounds and sights; he dilates; he is twice a man; he walks with arms akimbo; he soliloquizes."

(1) Simple sentences united: "He is a palace of sweet sounds and sights; he expands; he is twice the man; he walks with his arms crossed; he talks to himself."

(2) Simple with complex: "The trees of the forest, the waving grass, and the peeping flowers have grown intelligent; and he almost fears to trust them with the secret which they seem to invite."

(2) Simple with complex: "The trees in the forest, the swaying grass, and the blooming flowers have become so aware; and he almost hesitates to share the secret that they seem to want him to."

(3) Complex with complex: "The power which resides in him is new in nature, and none but he knows what that is which he can do, nor does he know until he has tried."

(3) Complex with complex: "The power he has is unique, and only he knows what he can truly do; he won't know until he gives it a shot."

384. From this it is evident that nothing new is added to the work of analysis already done.

384. From this, it's clear that nothing new has been added to the analysis that's already been completed.

The same analysis of simple sentences is repeated in (1) and (2) above, and what was done in complex sentences is repeated in (2) and (3).

The same analysis of simple sentences is repeated in (1) and (2) above, and what was done in complex sentences is repeated in (2) and (3).

The division into members will be easier, for the coördinate independent statements are readily taken apart with the subordinate clauses attached, if there are any.

The division into members will be easier, as the coordinate independent statements can easily be separated with the subordinate clauses added, if there are any.

Thus in (1), the semicolons cut apart the independent members, which are simple statements; in (2), the semicolon separates the first, a simple member, from the second, a complex member; in (3), and connects the first and second complex members, and nor the second and third complex members.

Thus in (1), the semicolons divide the independent parts, which are simple statements; in (2), the semicolon separates the first, a simple part, from the second, a complex part; in (3), and connects the first and second complex parts, and nor connects the second and third complex parts.

Connectives.

385. The coördinate conjunctions and, nor, or but, etc., introduce independent clauses (see Sec. 297).

385. The coordinating conjunctions and, nor, or, but, etc., connect independent clauses (see Sec. 297).

But the conjunction is often omitted in copulative and adversative clauses, as in Sec. 383 (1). Another example is, "Only the star dazzles; the planet has a faint, moon-like ray" (adversative).

But the conjunction is often left out in connecting and contrasting clauses, as seen in Sec. 383 (1). Another example is, "Only the star dazzles; the planet has a weak, moon-like glow" (contrasting).

Study the thought.

386. The one point that will give trouble is the variable use of some connectives; as but, for, yet, while (whilst), however, whereas, etc. Some of these are now conjunctions, now adverbs or prepositions; others sometimes coördinate, sometimes subordinate conjunctions.

386. The one thing that will cause confusion is the variable use of some connectors like but, for, yet, while (whilst), however, whereas, and so on. Some of these are currently conjunctions, adverbs, or prepositions at times; others can be coordinating or subordinating conjunctions.

The student must watch the logical connection of the members of the sentence, and not the form of the connective.

The student needs to pay attention to the logical connection between the parts of the sentence, rather than focusing on the form of the connector.

Exercise.

Of the following illustrative sentences, tell which are compound, and which complex:—

Of the following examples, identify which ones are compound and which ones are complex:—

1. Speak your latent conviction, and it shall be the universal sense; for the inmost in due time becomes the outmost.

1. Share your true beliefs, and it will resonate with everyone; because what’s deepest inside will eventually show on the outside.

2. I no longer wish to meet a good I do not earn, for example, to find a pot of buried gold.

2. I don't want to come across a good fortune that I haven't worked for, like finding a hidden pot of gold.

3. Your goodness must have some edge to it—else it is none.

3. Your kindness needs to have some strength to it—otherwise, it’s not real.

4. Man does not stand in awe of man, nor is his genius admonished to stay at home, but it goes abroad to beg a cup of water of the urns of other men.

4. People don't stand in awe of each other, nor is their talent discouraged from venturing out; instead, it travels to seek a cup of water from the resources of others.

5. A man cannot speak but he judges himself.

5. A person can't speak without judging themselves.

6. In your metaphysics you have denied personality to the Deity, yet when the devout motions of the soul come, yield to them heart and life.

6. In your beliefs about the nature of reality, you've denied that God has a personality, yet when the sincere feelings of the soul arise, give in to them wholeheartedly.

7. I thought that it was a Sunday morning in May; that it was Easter Sunday, and as yet very early in the morning.

7. I thought it was a Sunday morning in May; that it was Easter Sunday, and it was still very early in the morning.

8. We denote the primary wisdom as intuition, whilst all later teachings are tuitions.

8. We refer to the main form of knowledge as intuition, while all subsequent teachings are considered tuitions.

9. Whilst the world is thus dual, so is every one of its parts.

9. Just as the world is dual, so is every part of it.

10. They measure the esteem of each other by what each has, and not by what each is.

10. They judge each other's worth by what each person has, not by who each person is.

11. For everything you have missed, you have gained something else; and for everything you gain, you lose something.

11. For everything you've missed, you've gained something else; and for everything you gain, you lose something.

12. I sometimes seemed to have lived for seventy or one hundred years in one night; nay, I sometimes had feelings representative of a millennium, passed in that time, or, however, of a duration far beyond the limits of experience.

12. There were times when it felt like I had lived for seventy or even a hundred years in a single night; at times, I had feelings that captured a millennium, or at least a duration far beyond anything I had ever experienced.

13. However some may think him wanting in zeal, the most fanatical can find no taint of apostasy in any measure of his.

13. However, while some may think he lacks enthusiasm, even the most extreme can find no hint of disloyalty in anything he does.

14. In this manner, from a happy yet often pensive child, he grew up to be a mild, quiet, unobtrusive boy, and sun-browned with labor in the fields, but with more intelligence than is seen in many lads from the schools.

14. In this way, from a happy but often thoughtful child, he grew up to be a gentle, quiet, unassuming boy, tanned from working in the fields, but with more intelligence than many boys from school.

OUTLINE FOR ANALYZING COMPOUND SENTENCES.

387. (i) Separate it into its main members. (2) Analyze each complex member as in Sec. 381. (3) Analyze each simple member as in Sec. 364.

387. (i) Break it down into its main parts. (2) Examine each complex part as described in Sec. 381. (3) Examine each simple part as described in Sec. 364.

Exercise.

Analyze the following compound sentences:—

Analyze these compound sentences:—

1. The gain is apparent; the tax is certain.

1. The benefit is clear; the tax is guaranteed.

2. If I feel overshadowed and outdone by great neighbors, I can yet love; I can still receive; and he that loveth maketh his own the grandeur that he loves.

2. If I feel overshadowed and outdone by impressive neighbors, I can still love; I can still accept; and whoever loves takes on the greatness that they admire.

3. Love, and thou shalt be loved.

3. Love, and you will be loved.

4. All loss, all pain, is particular; the universe remains to the heart unhurt.

4. Every loss, every pain, is personal; the universe stays untouched by the heart.

5. Place yourself in the middle of the stream of power and wisdom which animates all whom it floats, and you are without effort impelled to truth.

5. Position yourself in the heart of the flow of power and wisdom that energizes everyone it carries, and you'll be effortlessly driven toward the truth.

6. He teaches who gives, and he learns who receives.

6. He teaches by giving, and he learns by receiving.

7. Whatever he knows and thinks, whatever in his apprehension is worth doing, that let him communicate, or men will never know and honor him aright.

7. Whatever he knows and thinks, whatever he believes is worth doing, he should share; otherwise, people will never truly know and appreciate him.

8. Stand aside; give those merits room; let them mount and expand.

8. Step aside; make space for those qualities; allow them to rise and grow.

9. We see the noble afar off, and they repel us; why should we intrude?

9. We see the noble from a distance, and they push us away; why should we interfere?

10. We go to Europe, or we pursue persons, or we read books, in the instinctive faith that these will call it out and reveal us to ourselves.

10. We travel to Europe, seek out people, or read books, believing that these experiences will bring out our true selves and help us understand who we are.

11. A gay and pleasant sound is the whetting of the scythe in the mornings of June, yet what is more lonesome and sad than the sound of a whetstone or mower's rifle when it is too late in the season to make hay?

11. A cheerful and pleasant sound is the sharpening of the scythe on June mornings, yet what is lonelier and sadder than the sound of a whetstone or mower's rifle when it's too late in the season to make hay?

12. "Strike," says the smith, "the iron is white;" "keep the rake," says the haymaker, "as nigh the scythe as you can, and the cart as nigh the rake."

12. "Hit it," says the blacksmith, "the iron is hot;" "keep the rake," says the haymaker, "as close to the scythe as you can, and the cart as close to the rake."

13. Trust men, and they will be true to you; treat them greatly, and they will show themselves great, though they make an exception in your favor to all their rules of trade.

13. Trust people, and they'll be loyal to you; treat them well, and they'll rise to the occasion, even if it means bending their usual business rules for you.

14. On the most profitable lie the course of events presently lays a destructive tax; whilst frankness invites frankness, puts the parties on a convenient footing, and makes their business a friendship.

14. The most profitable lie currently comes with a heavy cost; meanwhile, honesty encourages honesty, puts everyone on equal ground, and turns their business into a friendship.

15. The sturdiest offender of your peace and of the neighborhood, if you rip up his claims, is as thin and timid as any; and the peace of society is often kept, because, as children, one is afraid, and the other dares not.

15. The toughest troublemaker in your life and in the neighborhood, if you challenge his demands, is just as weak and fearful as anyone; and the calm of society is often maintained because one person is scared, and the other doesn't dare.

16. They will shuffle and crow, crook and hide, feign to confess here, only that they may brag and conquer there, and not a thought has enriched either party, and not an emotion of bravery, modesty, or hope.

16. They will shuffle and boast, twist the truth and play coy, pretend to confess here, just so they can brag and win there, and neither side has gained any real insight, nor have they felt any true bravery, humility, or hope.

17. The magic they used was the ideal tendencies, which always make the Actual ridiculous; but the tough world had its revenge the moment they put their horses of the sun to plow in its furrow.

17. The magic they used was the perfect tendencies, which always make the Actual seem ridiculous; but the harsh reality took its revenge the moment they put their sun horses to work in its field.

18. Come into port greatly, or sail with God the seas.

18. Arrive at the harbor in style, or set sail with God across the waters.

19. When you have chosen your part, abide by it, and do not weakly try to reconcile yourself with the world.

19. Once you've picked your role, stick to it, and don't weakly try to fit in with the world.

20. Times of heroism are generally times of terror, but the day never shines in which this element may not work.

20. Times of heroism are usually times of fear, but there’s never a day when this element isn’t at play.

21. Life is a train of moods like a string of beads, and as we pass through them they prove to be many-colored lenses which paint the world their own hue, and each shows only what lies at its focus.

21. Life is a series of moods like a string of beads, and as we move through them, they turn into colorful lenses that color the world in their own way, showing only what’s in their focus.

22. We see young men who owe us a new world, so readily and lavishly they promise, but they never acquit the debt; they die young, and dodge the account; or, if they live, they lose themselves in the crowd.

22. We see young men who owe us a new world, making promises so quickly and generously, yet they never fulfill that debt; they die young and avoid facing it; or, if they do live, they get lost in the crowd.

23. So does culture with us; it ends in headache.

23. The same goes for culture with us; it results in a headache.

24. Do not craze yourself with thinking, but go about your business anywhere.

24. Don't overwhelm yourself with overthinking; just go about your business wherever.

25. Thus journeys the mighty Ideal before us; it never was known to fall into the rear.

25. And so the great Ideal moves ahead of us; it has never been known to lag behind.


PART III.

SYNTAX.

INTRODUCTORY.

By way of introduction.

388. Syntax is from a Greek word meaning order or arrangement.

388. Syntax comes from a Greek word that means order or arrangement.

Syntax deals with the relation of words to each other as component parts of a sentence, and with their proper arrangement to express clearly the intended meaning.

Syntax is about how words relate to one another as parts of a sentence and how to arrange them correctly to clearly convey the intended meaning.

Ground covered by syntax.

380. Following the Latin method, writers on English grammar usually divide syntax into the two general heads,—agreement and government.

380. Using the Latin approach, writers on English grammar typically categorize syntax into two main areas: agreement and government.

Agreement is concerned with the following relations of words: words in apposition, verb and subject, pronoun and antecedent, adjective and noun.

Agreement deals with the following relationships between words: words in apposition, verb and subject, pronoun and antecedent, adjective and noun.

Government has to do with verbs and prepositions, both of which are said to govern words by having them in the objective case.

Government is about verbs and prepositions, both of which are said to govern words by putting them in the objective case.

390. Considering the scarcity of inflections in English, it is clear that if we merely follow the Latin treatment, the department of syntax will be a small affair. But there is a good deal else to watch in addition to the few forms; for there is an important and marked difference between Latin and English syntax. It is this:—

390. Given the limited inflections in English, it's obvious that if we only stick to the Latin approach, syntax will be a minor topic. However, there’s a lot more to consider beyond just a few forms; there’s a significant and noticeable difference between Latin and English syntax. This difference is:—

Latin syntax depends upon fixed rules governing the use of inflected forms: hence the position of words in a sentence is of little grammatical importance.

Latin syntax relies on established rules that dictate the use of inflected forms; therefore, the position of words in a sentence is not very important grammatically.

Essential point in English syntax.

English syntax follows the Latin to a limited extent; but its leading characteristic is, that English syntax is founded upon the meaning and the logical connection of words rather than upon their form: consequently it is quite as necessary to place words properly, and to think clearly of the meaning of words, as to study inflected forms.

English syntax is somewhat based on Latin, but its main feature is that it relies on meaning and logical connections between words rather than their form. As a result, it’s just as important to organize words correctly and to think clearly about their meanings as it is to study inflected forms.

For example, the sentence, "The savage here the settler slew," is ambiguous. Savage may be the subject, following the regular order of subject; or settler may be the subject, the order being inverted. In Latin, distinct forms would be used, and it would not matter which one stood first.

For example, the sentence, "The savage here the settler killed," is unclear. Savage could be the subject, following the usual subject order; or settler could be the subject, with the order flipped. In Latin, different forms would be used, so it wouldn't matter which one came first.

Why study syntax?

391. There is, then, a double reason for not omitting syntax as a department of grammar,—

391. There are, then, two reasons for not leaving out syntax as a part of grammar,—

First, To study the rules regarding the use of inflected forms, some of which conform to classical grammar, while some are idiomatic (peculiar to our own language).

First, to learn the rules about using inflected forms, some of which follow traditional grammar while others are idiomatic (specific to our language).

Second, To find out the logical methods which control us in the arrangement of words; and particularly when the grammatical and the logical conception of a sentence do not agree, or when they exist side by side in good usage.

Second, to discover the reasoning methods that govern us in how we arrange words; especially when the grammatical structure and the logical idea of a sentence don’t align, or when they coexist in standard usage.

As an illustration of the last remark, take the sentence, "Besides these famous books of Scott's and Johnson's, there is a copious 'Life' by Sheridan." In this there is a possessive form, and added to it the preposition of, also expressing a possessive relation. This is not logical; it is not consistent with the general rules of grammar: but none the less it is good English.

As an example of the last point, consider the sentence, "In addition to these famous books by Scott and Johnson, there is a detailed 'Life' by Sheridan." Here, there's a possessive form along with the preposition of, which also shows a possessive relationship. This isn't logical; it doesn't align with general grammar rules: but nonetheless, it's considered good English.

Also in the sentence, "None remained but he," grammatical rules would require him instead of he after the preposition; yet the expression is sustained by good authority.

Also in the sentence, "None remained but he," grammatical rules would require him instead of he after the preposition; yet the expression is supported by good authority.

Some rules not rigid.

392. In some cases, authorities—that is, standard writers—differ as to which of two constructions should be used, or the same writer will use both indifferently. Instances will be found in treating of the pronoun or noun with a gerund, pronoun and antecedent, sometimes verb and subject, etc.

392. In some cases, authorities—meaning standard writers—disagree on which of two constructions should be used, or the same writer will use both interchangeably. You'll find examples of this when discussing the pronoun or noun with a gerund, pronoun and antecedent, and sometimes verb and subject, etc.

When usage varies as to a given construction, both forms will be given in the following pages.

When usage differs for a specific construction, both forms will be provided in the following pages.

The basis of syntax.

393. Our treatment of syntax will be an endeavor to record the best usage of the present time on important points; and nothing but important points will be considered, for it is easy to confuse a student with too many obtrusive don'ts.

393. Our approach to syntax will aim to capture the best current practices on key issues; and we will focus only on important issues, as it's easy to overwhelm a student with too many noticeable don'ts.

The constructions presented as general will be justified by quotations from modern writers of English who are regarded as "standard;" that is, writers whose style is generally acknowledged as superior, and whose judgment, therefore, will be accepted by those in quest of authoritative opinion.

The general ideas listed will be supported by quotes from modern English writers who are considered "standard;" meaning, writers whose style is widely seen as excellent, and whose opinions will be trusted by those seeking authoritative views.

Reference will also be made to spoken English when its constructions differ from those of the literary language, and to vulgar English when it preserves forms which were once, but are not now, good English.

Reference will also be made to spoken English when its structures differ from those of written language, and to colloquial English when it keeps forms that were once considered proper but aren't anymore.

It may be suggested to the student that the only way to acquire correctness is to watch good usage everywhere, and imitate it.

It might be advised to the student that the only way to gain correctness is to observe good usage everywhere and copy it.


NOUNS.

394. Nouns have no distinct forms for the nominative and objective cases: hence no mistake can be made in using them. But some remarks are required concerning the use of the possessive case.

394. Nouns don't have different forms for the nominative and objective cases, so there’s no chance of making mistakes when using them. However, some comments are needed about using the possessive case.

Use of the possessive. Joint possession.

395. When two or more possessives modify the same noun, or indicate joint ownership or possession, the possessive sign is added to the last noun only; for example,—

395. When two or more possessives modify the same noun or show joint ownership, the possessive sign is added only to the last noun; for example,—

Live your king and country's best support.—Rowe.

Live your best support for your country.—Rowe.

Woman, sense and nature's easy fool.—Byron.

Woman, sense and nature's easy fool.—Byron.

Oliver and Boyd's printing office.—Mcculloch.

Oliver and Boyd's printing shop.—Mcculloch.

Adam and Eve's morning hymn.—Milton.

Adam and Eve's morning song.—Milton.

In Beaumont and Fletcher's "Sea Voyage," Juletta tells, etc.—Emerson.

In Beaumont and Fletcher's "Sea Voyage," Juletta tells, etc.—Emerson.

Separate possession.

396. When two or more possessives stand before the same noun, but imply separate possession or ownership, the possessive sign is used with each noun; as,—

396. When two or more possessive forms appear before the same noun but indicate separate ownership, the possessive marker is used with each noun; as,—

He lands us on a grassy stage, Safe from the storm's and prelate's rage.—Marvell

He brings us down on a grassy stage, safe from the storm and the preacher's fury. —Marvell

Where were the sons of Peers and Members of Parliament in Anne's and George's time?—Thackeray.

Where were the sons of Peers and Members of Parliament during Anne's and George's time?—Thackeray.

Levi's station in life was the receipt of custom; and Peter's, the shore of Galilee; and Paul's, the antechamber of the High Priest.—Ruskin.

Levi's position in life was to collect taxes; and Peter's was at the shores of Galilee; and Paul's was in the courtyard of the High Priest.—Ruskin.

Swift did not keep Stella's letters. He kept Bolingbroke's, and Pope's, and Harley's, and Peterborough's.—Thackeray.

Swift didn't keep Stella's letters. He kept Bolingbroke's, and Pope's, and Harley's, and Peterborough's.—Thackeray.

An actor in one of Morton's or Kotzebue's plays.—Macaulay.

An actor in one of Morton's or Kotzebue's plays. —Macaulay.

Putting Mr. Mill's and Mr. Bentham's principles together. —Id.

Combining Mr. Mill's and Mr. Bentham's principles. —Id.

397. The possessive preceding the gerund will be considered under the possessive of pronouns (Sec. 408).

397. The possessive before the gerund will be discussed under the possessive of pronouns (Sec. 408).


PRONOUNS.

PERSONAL PRONOUNS.

I. NOMINATIVE AND OBJECTIVE FORMS.

398. Since most of the personal pronouns, together with the relative who, have separate forms for nominative and objective use, there are two general rules that require attention.

398. Since most personal pronouns, along with the relative who, have different forms for nominative and objective use, there are two main rules that need to be considered.

General rules.

(1) The nominative use is usually marked by the nominative form of the pronoun.

(1) The nominative use is typically indicated by the nominative form of the pronoun.

(2) The objective use is usually marked by the objective form of the pronoun.

(2) The objective use is typically indicated by the objective form of the pronoun.

These simple rules are sometimes violated in spoken and in literary English. Some of the violations are universally condemned; others are generally, if not universally, sanctioned.

These simple rules are sometimes broken in both spoken and written English. Some of these violations are widely disapproved of, while others are accepted, if not embraced, by many.

Objective for the nominative.

399. The objective is sometimes found instead of the nominative in the following instances:—

399. The objective is sometimes used instead of the nominative in the following cases:—

(1) By a common vulgarism of ignorance or carelessness, no notice is taken of the proper form to be used as subject; as,—

(1) Due to a common mistake from ignorance or carelessness, people often overlook the correct form to use as the subject; as,—

He and me once went in the dead of winter in a one-hoss shay out to Boonville.—Whitcher, Bedott Papers.

He and I once went in the dead of winter in a one-horse shay out to Boonville.—Whitcher, Bedott Papers.

It seems strange to me that them that preach up the doctrine don't admire one who carrys it out.—Josiah Allens Wife.

It seems odd to me that those who preach the doctrine don't appreciate someone who puts it into action.—Josiah Allen's Wife.

(2) By faulty analysis of the sentence, the true relation of the words is misunderstood; for example, "Whom think ye that I am?" (In this, whom is the complement after the verb am, and should be the nominative form, who.) "The young Harper, whom they agree was rather nice-looking" (whom is the subject of the verb was).

(2) By misanalyzing the sentence, the real relationship of the words gets misunderstood; for example, "Whom do you think I am?" (Here, whom is the complement after the verb am, and it should be the nominative form, who.) "The young Harper, whom they all agree was quite attractive" (whom is the subject of the verb was).

Especially is this fault to be noticed after an ellipsis with than or as, the real thought being forgotten; thus,—

Especially is this mistake noticeable after an ellipsis with than or as, the actual thought being overlooked; thus,—

But the consolation coming from devotion did not go far with such a one as her.—Trollope.

But the comfort that came from devotion didn’t resonate much with someone like her.—Trollope.

This should be "as she," because the full expression would be "such a one as she is."

This should be "as she," because the full expression would be "someone like she is."

400. Still, the last expression has the support of many good writers, as shown in the following examples:—

400. Still, many respected writers back the last expression, as demonstrated by the following examples:—

She was neither better bred nor wiser than you or me.—Thackeray.

She wasn't better raised or wiser than you or me.—Thackeray.

No mightier than thyself or me.—Shakespeare.

No mightier than yourself or me.—Shakespeare.

Lin'd with Giants deadlier than 'em all.—Pope.

Linked with giants deadlier than them all. —Pope.

But he must be a stronger than thee.—Southey.

But he must be stronger than you.—Southey.

Not to render up my soul to such as thee.—Byron.

Not to give my soul to someone like you.—Byron.

I shall not learn my duty from such as thee.—Fielding.

I won't learn my duty from someone like you.—Fielding.

A safe rule.

It will be safer for the student to follow the general rule, as illustrated in the following sentences:—

It will be safer for the student to stick to the general rule, as shown in the following sentences:—

If so, they are yet holier than we.—Ruskin.

If that's the case, they're even holier than we.—Ruskin.

Who would suppose it is the game of such as he?—Dickens.

Who would think it's the game of someone like him?—Dickens.

Do we see The robber and the murderer weak as we?
—Milton.

I have no other saint than thou to pray to.—Longfellow.

I have no other saint than you to pray to.—Longfellow.

"Than whom."

401. One exception is to be noted. The expression than whom seems to be used universally instead of "than who." There is no special reason for this, but such is the fact; for example,—

401. One exception is worth mentioning. The phrase than whom is commonly used instead of "than who." There's no particular reason for this, but that's just how it is; for example,—

One I remember especially,—one than whom I never met a bandit more gallant.—Thackeray.

One I remember especially—one than whom I never met a bandit more gallant.—Thackeray.

The camp of Richard of England, than whom none knows better how to do honor to a noble foe.—Scott.

The camp of Richard of England, than whom no one knows better how to honor a worthy opponent.—Scott.

She had a companion who had been ever agreeable, and her estate a steward than whom no one living was supposed to be more competent.—Parton.

She had a companion who was always agreeable, and her estate had a steward who was believed to be the most competent person alive. —Parton.

"It was he" or "It was him"?

402. And there is one question about which grammarians are not agreed, namely, whether the nominative or the objective form should be used in the predicate after was, is, are, and the other forms of the verb be.

402. There’s one question that grammarians don’t agree on: should you use the nominative or the objective form in the predicate after was, is, are, and other forms of the verb be?

It may be stated with assurance that the literary language prefers the nominative in this instance, as,—

It can confidently be said that the literary language prefers the nominative in this case, as,—

For there was little doubt that it was he.—Kingsley.

For there was little doubt that it was him.—Kingsley.

But still it is not she.—Macaulay.

But it's still not her.—Macaulay.

And it was him
That caused the ship to move. —Coleridge.

In spoken English, on the other hand, both in England and America, the objective form is regularly found, unless a special, careful effort is made to adopt the standard usage. The following are examples of spoken English from conversations:—

In spoken English, however, both in England and America, the objective form is commonly used unless there's a specific, deliberate effort to follow the standard usage. Here are some examples of spoken English from conversations:—

"Rose Satterne, the mayor's daughter?"—"That's her."—Kingsley.

"Rose Satterne, the mayor's daughter?"—"That's her."—Kingsley.

"Who's there?"—"Me, Patrick the Porter."—Winthrop.

"Who's there?"—"It's, Patrick the Porter."—Winthrop.

"If there is any one embarrassed, it will not be me."—Wm. Black.

"If anyone's embarrassed, it won't be me."—Wm. Black.

The usage is too common to need further examples.

The usage is so common that it doesn't require any more examples.

Exercise.

Correct the italicized pronouns in the following sentences, giving reasons from the analysis of the sentence:—

Correct the italicized pronouns in the following sentences, providing reasons based on the sentence analysis:—

1. Whom they were I really cannot specify.

1. Who they were, I can't really say.

2. Truth is mightier than us all.

Truth is stronger than us all.

3. If there ever was a rogue in the world, it is me.

3. If there’s ever been a rogue in the world, it’s me.

4. They were the very two individuals whom we thought were far away.

4. They were the exact two people who we thought were far away.

5. "Seems to me as if them as writes must hev a kinder gift fur it, now."

5. "It seems to me that those who write must have a special talent for it, now."

6. The sign of the Good Samaritan is written on the face of whomsoever opens to the stranger.

6. The sign of the Good Samaritan is visible on the face of whoever opens the door to the stranger.

7. It is not me you are in love with.

7. It’s not me that you’re in love with.

8. You know whom it is that you thus charge.

8. You know who it is that you’re accusing.

9. The same affinity will exert its influence on whomsoever is as noble as these men and women.

9. The same connection will affect anyone who is as noble as these men and women.

10. It was him that Horace Walpole called a man who never made a bad figure but as an author.

10. It was him that Horace Walpole described as a man who never looked bad except when he was writing.

11. We shall soon see which is the fittest object of scorn, you or me.

11. We'll soon find out who deserves scorn more, you or me.

Me in exclamations.

403. It is to be remembered that the objective form is used in exclamations which turn the attention upon a person; as,—

403. It’s important to remember that the objective form is used in exclamations that focus on a person; as,—

Unhappy me! That I cannot risk my own worthless life.—Kingsley

Unhappy me! That I can’t risk my own worthless life.—Kingsley

Alas! miserable me! Alas! unhappy Señors!—Id.

Alas! miserable me! Alas! unhappy Señors!—Id.

Ay me! I fondly dream—had ye been there.—Milton.

Ay me! I fondly dream—if only you had been there.—Milton.

Nominative for the objective.

404. The rule for the objective form is wrongly departed from—

404 Not Found. The rule for the objective form has been incorrectly ignored—

(1) When the object is far removed from the verb, verbal, or preposition which governs it; as, "He that can doubt whether he be anything or no, I speak not to" (he should be him, the object of to); "I saw men very like him at each of the places mentioned, but not he" (he should be him, object of saw).

(1) When the object is far from the verb, verbal, or preposition that governs it; for example, "He who can doubt whether he is anything or not, I am not speaking to" (he should be him, the object of to); "I saw men who looked a lot like him at each of the places mentioned, but not he" (he should be him, the object of saw).

(2) In the case of certain pairs of pronouns, used after verbs, verbals, and prepositions, as this from Shakespeare, "All debts are cleared between you and I" (for you and me); or this, "Let thou and I the battle try" (for thee and me, or us).

(2) In some cases with certain pairs of pronouns that follow verbs, verbals, and prepositions, like this quote from Shakespeare, "All debts are cleared between you and I" (instead of "you and me"); or this one, "Let you and I try the battle" (instead of "you and me," or "us").

(3) By forgetting the construction, in the case of words used in apposition with the object; as, "Ask the murderer, he who has steeped his hands in the blood of another" (instead of "him who," the word being in apposition with murderer).

(3) By forgetting the structure, in terms of words used in apposition with the object; for example, "Ask the murderer, he who has steeped his hands in the blood of another" (instead of "him who," the word being in apposition with murderer).

Exception 1, who interrogative.

405. The interrogative pronoun who may be said to have no objective form in spoken English. We regularly say, "Who did you see?" or, "Who were they talking to?" etc. The more formal "To whom were they talking?" sounds stilted in conversation, and is usually avoided.

405. The interrogative pronoun who doesn’t have an objective form in spoken English. We often say, "Who did you see?" or, "Who were they talking to?" etc. The more formal "To whom were they talking?" feels awkward in conversation and is typically avoided.

In literary English the objective form whom is preferred for objective use; as,—

In literary English, the objective form whom is preferred for objective use; as,—

Knows he now to whom he lies under obligation?—Scott.

Knows he now to whom he is obligated?—Scott.

What doth she look on? Whom doth she behold?—Wordsworth.

What does she look at? Whom does she see?—Wordsworth.

Yet the nominative form is found quite frequently to divide the work of the objective use; for example,—

Yet the nominative form is often used to handle the work of the objective case; for example,—

My son is going to be married to I don't know who.—Goldsmith.

My son is getting married to I don't know who.—Goldsmith.

Who have we here?—Id.

Who do we have here?—Id.

Who should I meet the other day but my old friend.—Steele.

Who should I run into the other day but my old friend.—Steele.

He hath given away half his fortune to the Lord knows who.—Kingsley.

He's given away half his fortune to the Lord knows who.—Kingsley.

Who have we got here?—Smollett.

Who do we have here?—Smollett.

Who should we find there but Eustache?—Marrvat.

Who should we find there but Eustace?—Marrvat.

Who the devil is he talking to?—Sheridan.

Who the heck is he talking to?—Sheridan.

Exception 2, but he, etc.

406. It is a well-established usage to put the nominative form, as well as the objective, after the preposition but (sometimes save); as,—

406. It is a common practice to place the nominative form, alongside the objective, after the preposition but (sometimes save); for example,—

All were knocked down but us two.—Kingsley.

All were knocked down but us two.

Thy shores are empires, changed in all save thee.—Byron.

Your shores are empires, altered in every way except you.—Byron.

Rich are the sea gods:—who gives gifts but they?—Emerson.

Rich are the sea gods:—who gives gifts but they?—Emerson.

The Chieftains then Returned rejoicing, everyone but him.
—Southey

No man strikes him but I.—Kingsley.

No one hits him but I.—Kingsley.

None, except you and yours, I've sworn,
Will be left in the morning.
—Byron.

Exercise.

Correct the italicized pronouns in the following, giving reasons from the analysis of the quotation:—

Correct the italicized pronouns in the following, giving reasons from the analysis of the quotation:—

1. Thou, Nature, partial Nature, I arraign.

1. You, Nature, partial Nature, I accuse.

2. Let you and I look at these, for they say there are none such in the world.

2. Let you and me check these out, because they say there aren't any like them in the world.

3. "Nonsense!" said Amyas, "we could kill every soul of them in half an hour, and they know that as well as me."

3. "Nonsense!" said Amyas, "we could kill every one of them in half an hour, and they know that just as well as I do."

4. Markland, who, with Jortin and Thirlby, Johnson calls three contemporaries of great eminence.

4. Markland, who, along with Jortin and Thirlby, Johnson refers to as three notable contemporaries.

5. They are coming for a visit to she and I.

5. They are coming to visit her and me.

6.

6.

They crowned him long ago;
But who did they get to put it on
Nobody seems to know.

7. I experienced little difficulty in distinguishing among the pedestrians they who had business with St. Bartholomew.

7. I had little trouble telling apart the pedestrians they who had matters to attend to at St. Bartholomew.

8. The great difference lies between the laborer who moves to Yorkshire and he who moves to Canada.

8. The big difference is between the worker who moves to Yorkshire and him who moves to Canada.

9. Besides my father and Uncle Haddock—he of the silver plates.

9. Besides my dad and Uncle Haddock—he of the silver plates.

10.

10.

You, whose familiar names are not yet The fatal mark of death is set,
I salute you.

11. It can't be worth much to they that hasn't larning.

11. It can't be worth much to them that hasn't been learned.

12. To send me away for a whole year—I who had never crept from under the parental wing—was a startling idea.

12. Sending me away for an entire year—I who had never stepped out from under my parents' care—was a shocking thought.

II. POSSESSIVE FORMS.

As antecedent of a relative.

407. The possessive forms of personal pronouns and also of nouns are sometimes found as antecedents of relatives. This usage is not frequent. The antecedent is usually nominative or objective, as the use of the possessive is less likely to be clear.

407. The possessive forms of personal pronouns and nouns can sometimes act as the antecedents of relative clauses. This isn’t very common. Typically, the antecedent is in the nominative or objective case, as using the possessive can create confusion.

We should augur ill of any gentleman's property to whom this happened every other day in his drawing room.—Ruskin.

We should expect the worst of any gentleman's property if this happened every other day in his living room.—Ruskin.

For their sakes whose distance disabled them from knowing me.—C. B. Brown.

For their sake, since their distance kept them from knowing me.—C. B. Brown.

Now by His name that I most reverence in Heaven, and by hers whom I most worship on earth.—Scott.

Now by His name that I respect the most in Heaven, and by hers whom I admire the most on earth.—Scott.

He saw her smile and slip money into the man's hand who was ordered to ride behind the coach.—Thackeray.

He saw her smile and slide cash into the man's hand who was told to ride behind the coach.—Thackeray.

He doubted whether his signature whose expectations were so much more bounded would avail.—De Quincey.

He doubted whether his signature, which had so many more limitations, would be effective.—De Quincey.

For boys with courageous hearts
As his who maintained the bridge so well.
—Macaulay.
Preceding a gerund,—possessive, or objective?

408. Another point on which there is some variance in usage is such a construction as this: "We heard of Brown studying law," or "We heard of Brown's studying law."

408. Another point where there is some difference in usage is constructions like this: "We heard of Brown studying law," or "We heard of Brown's studying law."

That is, should the possessive case of a noun or pronoun always be used with the gerund to indicate the active agent? Closely scrutinizing these two sentences quoted, we might find a difference between them: saying that in the first one studying is a participle, and the meaning is, We heard of Brown, [who was] studying law; and that in the second, studying is a gerund, object of heard of, and modified by the possessive case as any other substantive would be.

That is, should the possessive form of a noun or pronoun always be used with the gerund to show the active agent? If we closely examine these two sentences, we might notice a difference between them: in the first one, studying acts as a participle, meaning We heard of Brown, [who was] studying law; while in the second, studying functions as a gerund, which is the object of heard of, modified by the possessive form just like any other noun would be.

Why both are found.

But in common use there is no such distinction. Both types of sentences are found; both are gerunds; sometimes the gerund has the possessive form before it, sometimes it has the objective. The use of the objective is older, and in keeping with the old way of regarding the person as the chief object before the mind: the possessive use is more modern, in keeping with the disposition to proceed from the material thing to the abstract idea, and to make the action substantive the chief idea before the mind.

But in everyday language, there’s no such distinction. Both types of sentences appear; both are gerunds; sometimes the gerund has a possessive form before it, and sometimes it has an objective form. The use of the objective form is older and aligns with the traditional view of the person as the main focus of thought: the possessive use is more modern, reflecting the tendency to move from the material thing to the abstract idea, and to treat the action as the main concept in mind.

In the examples quoted, it will be noticed that the possessive of the pronoun is more common than that of the noun.

In the examples mentioned, you'll notice that the possessive form of the pronoun is more common than that of the noun.

Objective.

The last incident which I recollect, was my learned and worthy patron falling from a chair.—Scott.

The last thing I remember is my knowledgeable and esteemed patron falling off a chair.—Scott.

He spoke of some one coming to drink tea with him, and asked why it was not made.—Thackeray.

He mentioned that someone was coming to have tea with him and asked why it wasn't made.—Thackeray.

The old sexton even expressed a doubt as to Shakespeare having been born in her house.—Irving.

The old sexton even questioned whether Shakespeare was really born in her house.—Irving.

The fact of the Romans not burying their dead within the city walls proper is a strong reason, etc.—Brewer.

The fact that the Romans didn't bury their dead inside the city walls is a strong reason, etc.—Brewmaster.

I remember Wordsworth once laughingly reporting to me a little personal anecdote.—De Quincey.

I remember Wordsworth once jokingly sharing a little personal story with me.—De Quincey.

Here I state them only in brief, to prevent the reader casting about in alarm for my ultimate meaning.—Ruskin.

Here I mention them briefly, so the reader doesn't get anxious about my final point.—Ruskin.

We think with far less pleasure of Cato tearing out his entrails than of Russell saying, as he turned away from his wife, that the bitterness of death was past.—Macaulay.

We feel much less pleasure thinking of Cato ripping out his own guts than we do about Russell saying, as he walked away from his wife, that the worst part of dying was over.—Macaulay.

There is actually a kind of sacredness in the fact of such a man being sent into this earth.—Carlyle.

There’s something sacred about the existence of such a man being sent to this earth.—Carlyle.

Possessive.

There is no use for any man's taking up his abode in a house built of glass.—Carlyle.

There’s no point for any man to live in a house made of glass.—Carlyle.

As to his having good grounds on which to rest an action for life.—Dickens.

As for his having solid reasons to pursue a legal action for life.—Dickens.

The case was made known to me by a man's holding out the little creature dead.—De Quincey.

I learned about the case when a man presented me with the little creature, lifeless.—De Quincey.

There may be reason for a savage's preferring many kinds of food which the civilized man rejects.—Thoreau.

There might be a good reason for a savage to prefer many types of food that a civilized person turns down.—Thoreau.

It informs me of the previous circumstances of my laying aside my clothes.—C. Brockden Brown.

It tells me about the earlier situation of my taking off my clothes.—C. Brockden Brown.

The two strangers gave me an account of their once having been themselves in a somewhat similar condition.—Audubon.

The two strangers told me about how they had once been in a similar situation.—Audubon.

There was a chance of their being sent to a new school, where there were examinations.—Ruskin

There was a possibility of their being sent to a new school, where there were tests.—Ruskin

This can only be by his preferring truth to his past apprehension of truth.—Emerson

This can only be by his choosing truth over his previous understanding of truth.—Emerson

III. PERSONAL PRONOUNS AND THEIR ANTECEDENTS.

III. PERSONAL PRONOUNS AND THEIR ANTECEDENTS.

409. The pronouns of the third person usually refer back to some preceding noun or pronoun, and ought to agree with them in person, number, and gender.

409. Third-person pronouns usually refer back to a previous noun or pronoun, and should agree with them in person, number, and gender.

Watch for the real antecedent.

There are two constructions in which the student will need to watch the pronoun,—when the antecedent, in one person, is followed by a phrase containing a pronoun of a different person; and when the antecedent is of such a form that the pronoun following cannot indicate exactly the gender. Examples of these constructions are,—

There are two situations where the student needs to pay attention to the pronoun: when the antecedent, in one person, is followed by a phrase that includes a pronoun of a different person; and when the antecedent is in a form that doesn’t clearly indicate the gender of the following pronoun. Examples of these situations are,—

Those of us who can only maintain themselves by continuing in some business or salaried office.—Ruskin.

Those of us who can only support themselves by staying in some job or salaried position.—Ruskin.

Suppose the life and fortune of every one of us would depend on his winning or losing a game of chess.—Huxley.

Suppose the life and fortune of everyone of us would depend on their winning or losing a game of chess.—Huxley.

If any one did not know it, it was his own fault.—Cable.

If anyone didn’t know it, it was his own fault.—Cable.

Everybody had his own life to think of.—Defoe.

Everybody had their own life to think of.

410. In such a case as the last three sentences,—when the antecedent includes both masculine and feminine, or is a distributive word, taking in each of many persons,—the preferred method is to put the pronoun following in the masculine singular; if the antecedent is neuter, preceded by a distributive, the pronoun will be neuter singular.

410. In a situation like the last three sentences—when the subject includes both male and female or is a term that refers to each person individually—the preferred approach is to use the pronoun that follows in the masculine singular. If the subject is neutral and is preceded by a distributive, the pronoun will be in the neuter singular.

The following are additional examples:—

The following are more examples:—

The next correspondent wants you to mark out a whole course of life for him.—Holmes.

The next correspondent wants you to outline an entire life plan for him.—Holmes.

Every city threw open its gates.—De Quincey.

Every city opened its gates.

Every person who turns this page has his own little diary.—Thackeray.

Every person who turns this page has their own little diary.—Thackeray.

The pale areas of shadow, where everyone will take
His room in the quiet halls of death.
—Bryant.
Avoided: By using both pronouns.

Sometimes this is avoided by using both the masculine and the feminine pronoun; for example,—

Sometimes this is avoided by using both the he and she pronouns; for example,—

Not the feeblest grandame, not a mowing idiot, but uses what spark of perception and faculty is left, to chuckle and triumph in his or her opinion.—Emerson.

Not the weakest old person, not a clueless idiot, but uses whatever spark of awareness and ability remains to take pleasure and pride in his or her own opinion.—Emerson.

It is a game which has been played for untold ages, every man and woman of us being one of the two players in a game of his or her own.—Huxley.

It’s a game that’s been played for countless ages, with each of us being one of the two players in a game of our own.—Huxley.

By using the plural pronoun.

Using the plural pronoun.

411. Another way of referring to an antecedent which is a distributive pronoun or a noun modified by a distributive adjective, is to use the plural of the pronoun following. This is not considered the best usage, the logical analysis requiring the singular pronoun in each case; but the construction is frequently found when the antecedent includes or implies both genders. The masculine does not really represent a feminine antecedent, and the expression his or her is avoided as being cumbrous.

411 Another way to refer to an antecedent that is a distributive pronoun or a noun modified by a distributive adjective is to use the plural of the pronoun that follows. This isn't considered the best usage, as logical analysis requires a singular pronoun in each case; however, this construction is often used when the antecedent includes or implies both genders. The masculine form doesn’t truly represent a feminine antecedent, and the phrase his or her is avoided because it feels cumbersome.

Notice the following examples of the plural:—

Notice the following examples of the plural:—

Neither of the sisters were very much deceived.—Thackeray.

Neither of the sisters were very fooled.

Every one must judge of their own feelings.—Byron.

Everyone must judge their own feelings. —Byron.

Had the doctor been contented to take my dining tables, as anybody in their senses would have done.—Austen.

If the doctor had been satisfied to take my dining tables, like anyone in their right mind would have done.—Austen.

If the part deserve any comment, every considering Christian will make it themselves as they go.—Defoe.

If the part deserves any comment, every thoughtful Christian will make it themselves as they read.—Defoe.

Every person's happiness depends in part upon the respect they meet in the world.—Paley.

Everyone's happiness partly depends on the respect they receive in the world.—Paley.

Every nation have their refinements—Sterne.

Every nation has its refinements—Sterne.

Neither gave vent to their feelings in words.—Scott.

Neither expressed their feelings in words.

Each of the nations acted according to their national custom.—Palgrave.

Each of the nations acted according to their national customs.—Palgrave.

The sun, which pleases everybody with it and with themselves.—Ruskin.

The sun makes everyone happy with itself and with them.—Ruskin.

Urging every one within reach of your influence to be neat, and giving them means of being so.—Id.

Urge everyone you can influence to be tidy, and provide them with the resources to do so. —See above.

Everybody will become of use in their own fittest way.—Id.

Everyone will find a way to be useful in their own best way.—Id.

Everybody said they thought it was the newest thing there.—Wendell Phillips.

Everyone said they thought it was the latest thing around.—Wendell Phillips.

Struggling for life, each almost bursting their sinews to force the other off.—Paulding.

Struggling for survival, each nearly breaking their muscles to push the other away.—Paulding.

Whosoever hath any gold, let them break it off.—Bible.

Whoever has any gold, let them break it off.—Bible.

Nobody knows what it is to lose a friend, till they have lost him.—Fielding.

No one knows what it feels like to lose a friend until they have lost them.—Fielding.

Where she was gone, or what was become of her, no one could take upon them to say.—Sheridan.

Where she had gone or what had happened to her, no one could claim to know.—Sheridan.

I do not mean that I think any one to blame for taking due care of their health.—Addison.

I don't mean to suggest that I believe anyone is at fault for looking after their health. —Addison.

Exercise.—In the above sentences, unless both genders are implied, change the pronoun to agree with its antecedent.

Exercise.—In the above sentences, unless both genders are implied, change the pronoun to match its antecedent.

RELATIVE PRONOUNS.

I. RESTRICTIVE AND UNRESTRICTIVE RELATIVES.

What these terms mean.

412. As to their conjunctive use, the definite relatives who, which, and that may be coördinating or restrictive.

412. Regarding their combined use, the definite relatives who, which, and that can be coordinating or restrictive.

A relative, when coördinating, or unrestrictive, is equivalent to a conjunction (and, but, because, etc.) and a personal pronoun. It adds a new statement to what precedes, that being considered already clear; as, "I gave it to the beggar, who went away." This means, "I gave it to the beggar [we know which one], and he went away."

A relative, when coordinating or non-restrictive, is equivalent to a conjunction (and, but, because, etc.) and a personal pronoun. It adds a new statement to what has already been made clear, as in, "I gave it to the beggar, who went away." This means, "I gave it to the beggar [we know which one], and he went away."

A relative, when restrictive, introduces a clause to limit and make clear some preceding word. The clause is restricted to the antecedent, and does not add a new statement; it merely couples a thought necessary to define the antecedent: as, "I gave it to a beggar who stood at the gate." It defines beggar.

A relative clause, when restrictive, adds a clause to limit and clarify a word that came before it. The clause is tied to the antecedent and doesn’t introduce a new idea; it simply provides a necessary detail to define the antecedent: for example, "I gave it to a beggar who stood at the gate." This specifies beggar.

413. It is sometimes contended that who and which should always be coördinating, and that always restrictive; but, according to the practice of every modern writer, the usage must be stated as follows:—

413. It's sometimes argued that who and which should always coordinate, and that should always be restrictive; however, based on the practice of every contemporary writer, the usage should be stated as follows:—

A loose rule the only one to be formulated.

Who and which are either coördinating or restrictive, the taste of the writer and regard for euphony being the guide.

Who and which can either be coordinating or restrictive, depending on the writer's style and attention to flow.

That is in most cases restrictive, the coördinating use not being often found among careful writers.

That is usually limiting; the coordinated use isn't often seen among careful writers.

Exercise.

In the following examples, tell whether who, which, and that are restrictive or not, in each instance:—

In the following examples, indicate whether who, which, and that are restrictive or not in each case:—

Who.

1. "Here he is now!" cried those who stood near Ernest.—Hawthorne.

1. "Here he is now!" shouted those who were standing close to Ernest.—Hawthorne.

2. He could overhear the remarks of various individuals, who were comparing the features with the face on the mountain side.—Id.

2. He could hear what different people were saying as they compared the features with the face on the mountainside.—Id.

3. The particular recording angel who heard it pretended not to understand, or it might have gone hard with the tutor.—Holmes.

3. The specific recording angel who heard it acted like he didn't understand, or it could have been tough for the tutor.—Holmes.

4. Yet how many are there who up, down, and over England are saying, etc.—H. W. Beecher

4. Yet how many are there who across England are saying, etc.—H. W. Beecher

5. A grizzly-looking man appeared, whom we took to be sixty or seventy years old.—Thoreau.

5. A rough-looking man appeared, and we guessed he was about sixty or seventy years old.—Thoreau.

Which.

6. The volume which I am just about terminating is almost as much English history as Dutch.—Motley.

6. The book I'm finishing up is almost as much about English history as it is about Dutch history.—Diverse.

7. On hearing their plan, which was to go over the Cordilleras, she agreed to join the party.—De Quincey.

7. After hearing their plan to cross the Cordilleras, she agreed to join the group.—De Quincey.

8. Even the wild story of the incident which had immediately occasioned the explosion of this madness fell in with the universal prostration of mind.—Id.

8. Even the crazy story of the incident that immediately triggered this madness matched the widespread state of mind. —Id.

9. Their colloquies are all gone to the fire except this first, which Mr. Hare has printed.—Carlyle.

9. All their conversations have been lost to the fire except for this first one, which Mr. Hare has published.—Carlyle.

10. There is a particular science which takes these matters in hand, and it is called logic.—Newman.

10. There’s a specific discipline that deals with these topics, and it’s called logic.—Newman.

That.

11. So different from the wild, hard-mouthed horses at Westport, that were often vicious.—De Quincey.

11. So different from the wild, hard-mouthed horses at Westport, which were often aggressive.—De Quincey.

12. He was often tempted to pluck the flowers that rose everywhere about him in the greatest variety.—Addison.

12. He was frequently tempted to pick the flowers that grew all around him in a wide variety.—Addison.

13. He felt a gale of perfumes breathing upon him, that grew stronger and sweeter in proportion as he advanced.—Id.

13. He felt a rush of fragrances surrounding him, that became stronger and sweeter the closer he got.—Same.

14. With narrow shoulders, long arms and legs, hands that dangled a mile out of his sleeves.—Irving.

14. With narrow shoulders, long arms and legs, and hands that hung way down from his sleeves.—Irving.

II. RELATIVE AND ANTECEDENT.

The rule.

414. The general rule is, that the relative pronoun agrees with its antecedent in person and number.

414. The general rule is that the relative pronoun agrees with its antecedent in person and number.

In what sense true.

This cannot be true as to the form of the pronoun, as that does not vary for person or number. We say I, you, he, they, etc., who; these or that which, etc. However, the relative carries over the agreement from the antecedent before to the verb following, so far as the verb has forms to show its agreement with a substantive. For example, in the sentence, "He that writes to himself writes to an eternal public," that is invariable as to person and number, but, because of its antecedent, it makes the verb third person singular.

This can't be true regarding the form of the pronoun, as it doesn't change based on person or number. We say I, you, he, they, etc., who; these or that which, etc. However, the relative carries over the agreement from the antecedent before it to the verb after it, as long as the verb has forms to show its agreement with a noun. For example, in the sentence, "He that writes to himself writes to an eternal public," that remains unchanged regarding person and number, but because of its antecedent, it makes the verb third person singular.

Notice the agreement in the following sentences:—

Notice the agreement in the following sentences:—

There is not one of the company, but myself, who rarely speak at all, but speaks of him as that sort, etc.—Addison.

There isn't one person in the company, just me, who hardly speak at all, but speaks of him in that way, etc.—Addison.

O Time! who know'st a lenient hand to lay Softest on sorrow's wound.—Bowles.

O Time! who knows a gentle touch to place softly on sorrow's wound.—Bowles.

Let us be of good cheer, remembering that the misfortunes hardest to bear are those which never come.—Lowell.

Let’s stay positive, remembering that the toughest misfortunes to handle are the ones that never happen.—Lowell.

A disputed point.

415. This prepares the way for the consideration of one of the vexed questions,—whether we should say, "one of the finest books that has been published," or, "one of the finest books that have been published."

415. This sets the stage for discussing a debated question—should we say, "one of the finest books that has been published," or, "one of the finest books that have been published?"

One of ... [plural] that who, or which ... [singular or plural.]

Both constructions are frequently found, the reason being a difference of opinion as to the antecedent. Some consider it to be one [book] of the finest books, with one as the principal word, the true antecedent; others regard books as the antecedent, and write the verb in the plural. The latter is rather more frequent, but the former has good authority.

Both constructions are commonly used because of differing opinions about the subject. Some people think it refers to one [book] of the finest books, with one being the main word and the actual subject; others see books as the subject and use the verb in the plural form. The latter is somewhat more common, but the former has solid support.

The following quotations show both sides:—

The following quotes show both sides:—

Plural.

He was one of the very few commanders who appear to have shown equal skill in directing a campaign, in winning a battle, and in improving a victory.—Lecky.

He was one of the very few commanders who seem to have shown equal skill in leading a campaign, winning a battle, and capitalizing on a victory.—Lecky.

He was one of the most distinguished scientists who have ever lived.—J. T. Morse, Jr., Franklin.

He was one of the most distinguished scientists who have ever lived.—J. T. Morse, Jr.., Franklin.

It is one of those periods which shine with an unnatural and delusive splendor.—Macaulay.

It’s one of those times that shine with an unnatural and deceptive brilliance.—Macaulay.

A very little encouragement brought back one of those overflows which make one more ashamed, etc.—Holmes.

A little encouragement led to one of those overflow moments that make you feel even more ashamed, etc.—Holmes.

I am one of those who believe that the real will never find an irremovable basis till it rests on the ideal.—Lowell.

I’m one of those who believe that reality will never find a solid foundation until it’s built on ideals.—Lowell.

French literature of the eighteenth century, one of the most powerful agencies that have ever existed.—M. Arnold.

French literature of the eighteenth century, one of the most powerful influences that have ever existed.—M. Arnold.

What man's life is not overtaken by one or more of those tornadoes that send us out of our course?—Thackeray.

What man's life isn’t disrupted by one or more of those tornadoes that steer us off our path?—Thackeray.

He is one of those that deserve very well.—Addison.

He is one of those who deserve it very much.—Addison.

Singular.

The fiery youth ... struck down one of those who was pressing hardest.—Scott.

The fiery young man ... took down one of those who was pushing the hardest.—Scott.

He appeared to me one of the noblest creatures that ever was, when he derided the shams of society.—Howells.

He seemed to me like one of the most admirable beings ever when he mocked the pretenses of society.—Howells.

A rare Roundabout performance,—one of the very best that has ever appeared in this series.—Thackeray.

A rare Roundabout performance—one of the very best that has ever been seen in this series.—Thackeray.

Valancourt was the hero of one of the most famous romances which ever was published in this country.—Id.

Valancourt was the hero of one of the most famous romances ever published in this country.—Id.

It is one of the errors which has been diligently propagated by designing writers.—Irving.

It’s one of the mistakes that has been carefully spread by clever writers.—Irving.

"I am going to breakfast with one of these fellows who is at the Piazza Hotel."—Dickens.

"I am going to have breakfast with one of these guys who is at the Piazza Hotel."—Dickens.

The "Economy of the Animal Kingdom" is one of those books which is an honor to the human race.—Emerson.

The "Economy of the Animal Kingdom" is one of those books that is an honor to humanity.—Emerson.

Tom Puzzle is one of the most eminent immethodical disputants of any that has fallen under my observation.—Addison.

Tom Puzzle is one of the most notable disorganized debaters I've ever seen.—Addison.

The richly canopied monument of one of the most earnest souls that ever gave itself to the arts.—Ruskin.

The beautifully adorned monument of one of the most dedicated individuals who ever devoted themselves to the arts.—Ruskin.

III. OMISSION OF THE RELATIVE.

416. Although the omission of the relative is common when it would be the object of the verb or preposition expressed, there is an omission which is not frequently found in careful writers; that is, when the relative word is a pronoun, object of a preposition understood, or is equivalent to the conjunction when, where, whence, and such like: as, "He returned by the same route [by which] he came;" "India is the place [in which, or where] he died." Notice these sentences:—

416. While it’s common to leave out the relative pronoun when it acts as the object of the verb or a preposition that’s clearly stated, there’s another kind of omission that careful writers don't often use. This happens when the relative word is a pronoun that serves as the object of an understood preposition or is similar to the conjunctions “when,” “where,” “whence,” and the like: for example, “He returned by the same route [by which] he came;” “India is the place [in which, or where] he died.” Consider these sentences:—

In the posture I lay, I could see nothing except the sky.—Swift.

In the position I lay, I could see nothing but the sky.—Fast.

This is he that should marshal us the way we were going.—Emerson.

This is the one who should guide us on the path we were taking.—Emerson.

But I would move by taking steps back;
And when this dust settles into the urn,
In that same state I arrived, return.
—Vaughan.
Welcome the time my old limbs Are laid to rest with you.
—Burns.

The night was concluded in the manner we began the morning.—Goldsmith.

The night ended the same way we started the morning.—Goldsmith.

The same day I went aboard we set sail.—Defoe.

The same day I boarded, we set off.—Defoe.

The vulgar historian of a Cromwell fancies that he had determined on being Protector of England, at the time he was plowing the marsh lands of Cambridgeshire.—Carlyle.

The crude historian of Cromwell thinks that he had decided to become the Protector of England while he was farming the marshes of Cambridgeshire.—Carlyle.

To pass under the canvas in the manner he had entered required time and attention.—Scott.

To go underneath the canvas the way he came in took time and focus.—Scott.

Exercise.—In the above sentences, insert the omitted conjunction or phrase, and see if the sentence is made clearer.

Exercise.—In the sentences above, add the missing conjunction or phrase, and see if the sentence becomes clearer.

IV. THE RELATIVE AS AFTER SAME.

417. It is very rarely that we find such sentences as,—

417. It's very rare to come across sentences like—

He considered...me as his apprentice, and accordingly expected the same service from me as he would from another.—Franklin.

He saw...me as his apprentice and expected the same work from me as he would from anyone else.—Franklin.

This has the same effect in natural faults as maiming and mutilation produce from accidents.—Burke.

This has the same effect in natural faults as harm and injury cause from accidents.—Burke.

The regular construction.
Caution.

The usual way is to use the relative as after same if no verb follows as; but, if same is followed by a complete clause, as is not used, but we find the relative who, which, or that. Remember this applies only to as when used as a relative.

The usual way is to use the relative as after same if no verb follows as; but, if same is followed by a complete clause, as is not used, and instead, we use the relative who, which, or that. Remember this applies only to as when used as a relative.

Examples of the use of as in a contracted clause:—

Examples of using as in a contracted clause:—

Looking to the same end as Turner, and working in the same spirit, he, with Turner, was a discoverer, etc.—R. W. Church.

Looking towards the same goal as Turner and working in the same spirit, he, along with Turner, was a discoverer, etc.—R.W. Church.

They believe the same of all the works of art, as of knives, boats, looking-glasses.—Addison.

They think the same about all artworks as they do about knives, boats, and mirrors.—Addison.

Examples of relatives following same in full clauses:—

Examples of relatives following same in full clauses:—

Who.

This is the very same rogue who sold us the spectacles. —Goldsmith.

This is the same crook who sold us the glasses. —Goldsmith.

The same person who had clapped his thrilling hands at the first representation of the Tempest.—Macaulay.

The same person who had clapped his exciting hands at the first performance of the Tempest.—Macaulay.

That.

I rubbed on some of the same ointment that was given me at my first arrival.—Swift.

I applied some of the same ointment that I was given when I first arrived.—Quick.

Which.
For the same sound is in my ears. Which I heard back then.
—Wordsworth.

With the same minuteness which her predecessor had exhibited, she passed the lamp over her face and person.—Scott.

With the same attention to detail that her predecessor had shown, she held the lamp up to her face and body.—Scott.

V. MISUSE OF RELATIVE PRONOUNS.

Anacoluthic use of which.

418. There is now and then found in the pages of literature a construction which imitates the Latin, but which is usually carefully avoided. It is a use of the relative which so as to make an anacoluthon, or lack of proper connection between the clauses; for example,—

418. Occasionally, you’ll come across a construction in literature that mimics Latin, but it’s generally avoided. This involves using the relative which in a way that creates an anacoluthon, or a disconnect between the clauses; for example,—

Which, if I had resolved to go on with, I might as well have staid at home.—Defoe

If I had decided to continue with that, I might as well have stayed at home.—Defoe

Which if he attempted to do, Mr. Billings vowed that he would follow him to Jerusalem.—Thackeray.

Which if he tried to do, Mr. Billings promised that he would follow him to Jerusalem.—Thackeray.

We know not the incantation of the heart that would wake them;—which if they once heard, they would start up to meet us in the power of long ago.—Ruskin.

We don't know the magic words of the heart that could wake them;—which if they ever heard, they would jump up to greet us with the strength of the past.—Ruskin.

He delivered the letter, which when Mr. Thornhill had read, he said that all submission was now too late.—Goldsmith.

He handed over the letter, which after Mr. Thornhill read, he said that any submission was now too late.—Goldsmith.

But still, the household matters would pull her away;
Whichever she could quickly handle,
She was back again.
—Shakespeare.

As the sentences stand, which really has no office in the sentence: it should be changed to a demonstrative or a personal pronoun, and this be placed in the proper clause.

As the sentences are, which doesn't really belong in the sentence: it should be replaced with a demonstrative or personal pronoun, and this should be positioned in the correct clause.

Exercise.—Rewrite the above five sentences so as to make the proper grammatical connection in each.

Exercise.—Rewrite the five sentences above to create the correct grammatical connection in each one.

And who, and which, etc.

419. There is another kind of expression which slips into the lines of even standard authors, but which is always regarded as an oversight and a blemish.

419. There’s another type of expression that sneaks into the writings of even well-known authors, but it’s always seen as a mistake and a flaw.

The following sentence affords an example: "The rich are now engaged in distributing what remains among the poorer sort, and who are now thrown upon their compassion." The trouble is that such conjunctions as and, but, or, etc., should connect expressions of the same kind: and who makes us look for a preceding who, but none is expressed. There are three ways to remedy the sentence quoted: thus, (1) "Among those who are poor, and who are now," etc.; (2) "Among the poorer sort, who are now thrown," etc.; (3) "Among the poorer sort, now thrown upon their," etc. That is,—

The following sentence provides an example: "The rich are now sharing what’s left with the poorer people, and who are now relying on their compassion." The issue is that conjunctions like and, but, or, etc., should link similar expressions: and who makes us expect a previous who, but none is given. There are three ways to fix the sentence quoted: (1) "Among those who are poor, and who are now," etc.; (2) "Among the poorer people, who are now thrown," etc.; (3) "Among the poorer people, now thrown upon their," etc. That is,—

Direction for rewriting.

Express both relatives, or omit the conjunction, or leave out both connective and relative.

Express both relatives, or drop the conjunction, or leave out both the connective and the relative.

Exercise.

Rewrite the following examples according to the direction just given:—

Rewrite the following examples according to the instructions provided:—

And who.

1. Hester bestowed all her means on wretches less miserable than herself, and who not unfrequently insulted the hand that fed them.—Hawthorne.

1. Hester gave all her resources to those who were less unfortunate than she was, and who often disrespected the hand that supported them.—Hawthorne.

2. With an albatross perched on his shoulder, and who might be introduced to the congregation as the immediate organ of his conversion.—De Quincey.

2. With an albatross sitting on his shoulder, and who could be presented to the congregation as the direct cause of his conversion.—De Quincey.

3. After this came Elizabeth herself, then in the full glow of what in a sovereign was called beauty, and who would in the lowest walk of life have been truly judged to possess a noble figure.—Scott.

3. Then Elizabeth appeared, radiating what people called beauty in a queen, and she would have been considered strikingly beautiful even in the most ordinary circumstances.—Scott.

4. This was a gentleman, once a great favorite of M. le Conte, and in whom I myself was not a little interested.—Thackeray.

4. This was a man who used to be a favorite of M. le Conte, and I myself was quite interested in him.—Thackeray.

But who.

5. Yonder woman was the wife of a certain learned man, English by name, but who had long dwelt in Amsterdam.—Hawthorne.

5. That woman was the wife of a certain learned man, called English, but who had lived in Amsterdam for a long time.—Hawthorne.

6. Dr. Ferguson considered him as a man of a powerful capacity, but whose mind was thrown off its just bias.—Scott.

6. Dr. Ferguson saw him as a man of great ability, but whose mind was distracted from its true focus.—Scott.

Or who.

7. "What knight so craven, then," exclaims the chivalrous Venetian, "that he would not have been more than a match for the stoutest adversary; or who would not have lost his life a thousand times sooner than return dishonored by the lady of his love?"—Prescott.

7. "What cowardly knight, then," exclaims the noble Venetian, "wouldn’t have been able to face the toughest opponent; or who would rather die a thousand times than come back dishonored in the eyes of the lady he loves?"—Prescott.

And which.

8. There are peculiar quavers still to be heard in that church, and which may even be heard a mile off.—Irving.

8. There are strange echoes still to be heard in that church, and they can even be heard a mile away.—Irving.

9. The old British tongue was replaced by a debased Latin, like that spoken in the towns, and in which inscriptions are found in the western counties.—Pearson.

9. The old British language was replaced by a corrupted form of Latin, similar to what was spoken in the towns, and in which inscriptions can be found in the western counties.—Pearson.

10. I shall have complete copies, one of signal interest, and which has never been described.—Motley.

10. I will have full copies, one of particular interest, that has never been described.—Varied.

But which.

11. "A mockery, indeed, but in which the soul trifled with itself!"—Hawthorne.

11. "A joke, for sure, but one where the soul messed around with itself!"—Hawthorne.

12. I saw upon the left a scene far different, but which yet the power of dreams had reconciled into harmony.—De Quincey.

12. I saw a very different scene on the left, but the power of dreams had somehow brought it all together in harmony.—De Quincey.

Or which.

13. He accounted the fair-spoken courtesy, which the Scotch had learned, either from imitation of their frequent allies, the French, or which might have arisen from their own proud and reserved character, as a false and astucious mark, etc.—Scott.

13. He considered the polite courtesy that the Scots had adopted, either from mimicking their frequent allies, the French, or possibly stemming from their own proud and reserved nature, to be a deceptive and crafty trait, etc.—Scott.

That ... and which, etc.

420. Akin to the above is another fault, which is likewise a variation from the best usage. Two different relatives are sometimes found referring back to the same antecedent in one sentence; whereas the better practice is to choose one relative, and repeat this for any further reference.

420. Similar to the above is another mistake, which is also a deviation from proper usage. It's not uncommon for two different relatives to refer back to the same subject in one sentence; however, a better practice is to choose one relative and use it again for any additional references.

Exercise.

Rewrite the following quotations by repeating one relative instead of using two for the same antecedent:—

Rewrite the following quotations by using one relative instead of two for the same antecedent:—

That ... who.

1. Still in the confidence of children that tread without fear every chamber in their father's house, and to whom no door is closed.—De Quincey.

1. Still in the trust of children who walk fearlessly into every room in their father's house, and to whom no door is locked.—De Quincey.

2. Those renowned men that were our ancestors as much as yours, and whose examples and principles we inherit.—Beecher.

2. Those famous men who were our ancestors just as much as they were yours, and whose examples and principles we carry on.—Beecher.

3. The Tree Igdrasil, that has its roots down in the kingdoms of Hela and Death, and whose boughs overspread the highest heaven!—Carlyle.

3. The Tree Igdrasil, whose roots reach into the realms of Hela and Death, and whose branches spread across the highest heaven!—Carlyle.

That ... which.

4. Christianity is a religion that reveals men as the object of God's infinite love, and which commends him to the unbounded love of his brethren.—W. E. Channing.

4. Christianity is a religion that shows people as the focus of God's endless love and encourages them to share that love with their fellow human beings.—W.E. Channing.

5. He flung into literature, in his Mephistopheles, the first organic figure that has been added for some ages, and which will remain as long as the Prometheus.—Emerson.

5. He threw himself into literature with his Mephistopheles, the first organic figure added in ages, which will endure just like Prometheus.—Emerson.

6. Gutenburg might also have struck out an idea that surely did not require any extraordinary ingenuity, and which left the most important difficulties to be surmounted.—Hallam.

6. Gutenberg might also have come up with an idea that really didn’t need any exceptional creativity, and which left the most important challenges to be overcome.—Hallam.

7. Do me the justice to tell me what I have a title to be acquainted with, and which I am certain to know more truly from you than from others.—Scott.

7. Please do me the favor of telling me what I have the right to know, and I’m sure I’ll learn it more accurately from you than from anyone else.—Scott.

8. He will do this amiable little service out of what one may say old civilization has established in place of goodness of heart, but which is perhaps not so different from it.—Howells.

8. He will do this kind little favor based on what we might call the norms of old civilization instead of true kindness, but which is probably not so different from it.—Howells.

9. In my native town of Salem, at the head of what, half a century ago, was a bustling wharf,—but which is now burdened with decayed wooden warehouses.—Hawthorne.

9. In my hometown of Salem, at the site of what, half a century ago, was a busy wharf—but which is now filled with decaying wooden warehouses.—Hawthorne.

10. His recollection of what he considered as extreme presumption in the Knight of the Leopard, even when he stood high in the roles of chivalry, but which, in his present condition, appeared an insult sufficient to drive the fiery monarch into a frenzy of passion.—Scott

10. He remembered what he thought was extreme arrogance in the Knight of the Leopard, even when he was well-regarded in the chivalrous ranks, but which, in his current state, seemed like an insult strong enough to send the fiery king into a rage.—Scott

That which ... what.

11. He, now without any effort but that which he derived from the sill, and what little his feet could secure the irregular crevices, was hung in air.—W. G. Simms.

11. He, now with no effort except what he got from the ledge and the little support his feet could find in the uneven cracks, was hanging in midair. —W.G. Simms.

Such as ... which.

12. It rose into a thrilling passion, such as my heart had always dimly craved and hungered after, but which now first interpreted itself to my ear.—De Quincey.

12. It grew into an exciting passion that my heart had always vaguely desired and longed for, but which now finally made sense to me.—De Quincey.

13. I recommend some honest manual calling, such as they have very probably been bred to, and which will at least give them a chance of becoming President.—Holmes.

13. I suggest some honest manual labor, like they probably grew up with, which will at least give them a shot at becoming President.—Holmes.

Such as ... whom.

14. I grudge the dollar, the dime, the cent, I give to such men as do not belong to me, and to whom I do not belong.—Emerson.

14. I resent the dollar, the dime, the cent, I give to people who don’t belong to me, and to whom I don’t belong.—Emerson.

Which ... that ... that.

15. That evil influence which carried me first away from my father's house, that hurried me into the wild and undigested notion of making my fortune, and that impressed these conceits so forcibly upon me.—Defoe.

15. That negative influence that first drove me away from my father's home, that pushed me into the chaotic idea of trying to get rich, and that made these thoughts stick in my mind so strongly.—Defoe.

ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS.

Each other, one another.

421. The student is sometimes troubled whether to use each other or one another in expressing reciprocal relation or action. Whether either one refers to a certain number of persons or objects, whether or not the two are equivalent, may be gathered from a study of the following sentences:—

421. Students often wonder whether to use each other or one another when talking about a mutual relationship or action. To figure out if either term refers to a specific number of people or things, and whether the two are interchangeable, we can look at the following sentences:—

They [Ernest and the poet] led one another, as it were, into the high pavilion of their thoughts.—Hawthorne.

They [Ernest and the poet] guided each other, in a sense, into the grand pavilion of their ideas.—Hawthorne.

Men take each other's measure when they meet for the first time.—Emerson.

Men assess each other when they meet for the first time.—Emerson.

You ruffian! do you fancy I forget that we were fond of each other?—Thackeray.

You wild person! Do you really think I would forget that we cared for each other?—Thackeray.

England was then divided between kings and Druids, always at war with one another, carrying off each other's cattle and wives.—Brewer

England was then split between kings and Druids, constantly at war with one another, raiding each other's cattle and wives.—Brewer

The topics follow each other in the happiest order.—Macaulay.

The topics follow each other in the best order.—Macaulay.

The Peers at a conference begin to pommel each other.—Id.

The Peers at a conference start to hit each other.—Id.

We call ourselves a rich nation, and we are filthy and foolish enough to thumb each other's books out of circulating libraries.—Ruskin.

We call ourselves a wealthy nation, and we are so dirty and foolish that we pull each other's books out of public libraries.—Ruskin.

The real hardships of life are now coming fast upon us; let us not increase them by dissension among each other.—Goldsmith.

The real challenges of life are now hitting us hard; let's not make them worse by arguing with each other.—Goldsmith.

In a moment we were all shaking hands with one another.—Dickens.

In a moment, we were all shaking hands with each other.—Dickens.

The unjust purchaser forces the two to bid against each other.—Ruskin.

The unfair buyer makes the two compete against one another.—Ruskin.

Distributives either and neither.

422. By their original meaning, either and neither refer to only two persons or objects; as, for example,—

422. By their original meaning, either and neither refer to just two people or things; for example,—

Some one must be poor, and in want of his gold—or his corn. Assume that no one is in want of either.—Ruskin

Someone must be poor and in need of his gold—or his corn. Assume that no one is in need of either.—Ruskin

Their [Ernest's and the poet's] minds accorded into one strain, and made delightful music which neither could have claimed as all his own.—Hawthorne.

Their minds came together in harmony, creating beautiful music that neither could claim as entirely their own.—Hawthorne.

Use of any.

Sometimes these are made to refer to several objects, in which case any should be used instead; as,—

Sometimes these are used to refer to several objects, in which case any should be used instead; as,—

Was it the winter's storm? was it hard labor and spare meals? was it disease? was it the tomahawk? Is it possible that neither of these causes, that not all combined, were able to blast this bud of hope?—Everett.

Was it the winter storm? Was it hard work and little food? Was it illness? Was it the tomahawk? Is it possible that none of these causes, that not all combined, could ruin this bud of hope?—Everett.

Once I took such delight in Montaigne ...; before that, in Shakespeare; then in Plutarch; then in Plotinus; at one time in Bacon; afterwards in Goethe; even in Bettine; but now I turn the pages of either of them languidly, whilst I still cherish their genius.—Emerson.

Once I used to really enjoy Montaigne...; before that, Shakespeare; then Plutarch; then Plotinus; at one point Bacon; later Goethe; even Bettine; but now I flip through the pages of either of them tiredly, even though I still appreciate their genius.—Emerson.

Any usually plural.

423. The adjective pronoun any is nearly always regarded as plural, as shown in the following sentences:—

423. The adjective pronoun any is almost always considered plural, as demonstrated in the following sentences:—

If any of you have been accustomed to look upon these hours as mere visionary hours, I beseech you, etc.—Beecher

If any of you have gotten used to seeing these hours as just imaginary times, I urge you, etc.—Beecher

Whenever, during his stay at Yuste, any of his friends had died, he had been punctual in doing honor to their memory.—Stirling.

Whenever, during his time at Yuste, any of his friends had died, he had promptly paid tribute to their memory.—Stirling.

But I enjoy the company and conversation of its inhabitants, when any of them are so good as to visit me.—Franklin.

But I enjoy the company and conversation of its residents, when any of them are kind enough to visit me.—Franklin.

Do you think, when I spoke anon of the ghosts of Pryor's children, I mean that any of them are dead?—Thackeray.

Do you think that when I mentioned the ghosts of Pryor's children, I meant that any of them are dead?—Thackeray.

In earlier Modern English, any was often singular; as,—

In earlier Modern English, any was often singular; as,—

If any, speak; for him have I offended.—Shakespeare.

If anyone, speak; for him have I offended. —Shakespeare.

If any of you lack wisdom, let him ask of God.—Bible.

If any of you need wisdom, ask God for it.—Bible.

Very rarely the singular is met with in later times; as,—

Very rarely do we encounter the singular in later times; as,—

Here is a poet doubtless as much affected by his own descriptions as any that reads them can be.—Burke.

Here is a poet who is certainly as moved by his own descriptions as any that reads them can be.—Burke.

Caution.

The above instances are to be distinguished from the adjective any, which is plural as often as singular.

The above examples are different from the adjective any, which can be both plural and singular.

None usually plural.

424. The adjective pronoun none is, in the prose of the present day, usually plural, although it is historically a contraction of ne ān (not one). Examples of its use are,—

424. The adjective pronoun none is generally treated as plural in today's writing, even though it originally comes from ne ān (not one). Examples of its use are,—

In earnest, if ever man was; as none of the French philosophers were.—Carlyle.

In truth, if anyone was; as none of the French philosophers were.—Carlyle.

None of Nature's powers do better service.—Prof. Dana

None of Nature's powers do better service. —Prof. Dana

One man answers some question which none of his contemporaries put, and is isolated.—Emerson.

One man answers a question that none of his contemporaries asked, and he is alone.—Emerson.

None obey the command of duty so well as those who are free from the observance of slavish bondage.—Scott.

No one obeys the command of duty as well as those who are free from the constraints of slavery.—Scott.

Do you think, when I spoke anon of the ghosts of Pryor's children, I mean that any of them are dead? None are, that I know of.—Thackeray.

Do you think that when I mentioned the ghosts of Pryor's children, I meant that any of them are dead? None are, that I know of.—Thackeray.

Early apples begin to be ripe about the first of August; but I think none of them are so good to eat as some to smell.—Thoreau.

Early apples start to ripen around the beginning of August, but I believe none of them taste as good as some smell.—Thoreau.

The singular use of none is often found in the Bible; as,—

The unique use of none is often seen in the Bible; as,—

None of them was cleansed, saving Naaman the Syrian.—Luke iv 27

None of them was cleansed, except for Naaman the Syrian.—Luke 4:27

Also the singular is sometimes found in present-day English in prose, and less rarely in poetry; for example,—

Also, the singular is sometimes seen in modern English in prose and is less common in poetry; for example,—

Perhaps none of our Presidents since Washington has stood so firm in the confidence of the people.—Lowell

Perhaps none of our Presidents since Washington has stood so firmly in the confidence of the people.—Lowell

In signal none his steed should spare.—Scott

In signal none his steed should spare.—Scott

Like the use of any, the pronoun none should be distinguished from the adjective none, which is used absolutely, and hence is more likely to confuse the student.

Like the use of any, the pronoun none should be distinguished from the adjective none, which is used absolutely, and therefore is more likely to confuse the student.

Compare with the above the following sentences having the adjective none:—

Compare with the sentences above the following sentences that use the adjective none:—

Reflecting a summer evening sky in its bosom, though none [no sky] was visible overhead.—Thoreau

Reflecting a summer evening sky in its embrace, even though none [no sky] was visible overhead.—Thoreau

The holy fires were suffered to go out in the temples, and none [no fires] were lighted in their own dwellings.—Prescott

The sacred fires were allowed to extinguish in the temples, and none were lit in their own homes.—Prescott

All singular and plural.

425. The pronoun all has the singular construction when it means everything; the plural, when it means all persons: for example,—

425. The pronoun all is singular when it refers to everything; it’s plural when it means all people: for example,—

Singular.

The light troops thought ... that all was lost.—Palgrave

The light troops thought ... that everything was lost.—Palgrave

All was won on the one side, and all was lost on the other.—Bayne

Everything was won on one side, and everything was lost on the other.—Bayne

Having done all that was just toward others.—Napier

Having done all that was just toward others. —Napier

Plural.

But the King's treatment of the great lords will be judged leniently by all who remember, etc.—Pearson.

But the King's treatment of the great lords will be viewed kindly by everyone who remembers, etc.—Pearson.

When all were gone, fixing his eyes on the mace, etc.—Lingard

When everyone had left, staring at the mace, etc.—Lingard

All who did not understand French were compelled, etc.—Mcmaster.

All who didn’t understand French were compelled, etc.—Mcmaster.

Somebody's else, or somebody else's?

426. The compounds somebody else, any one else, nobody else, etc., are treated as units, and the apostrophe is regularly added to the final word else instead of the first. Thackeray has the expression somebody's else, and Ford has nobody's else, but the regular usage is shown in the following selections:—

426. The phrases somebody else, anyone else, nobody else, etc., are considered as single units, and the apostrophe is typically added to the last word else instead of the first. Thackeray uses the expression somebody's else, and Ford has nobody's else, but the regular usage is illustrated in the following examples:—

A boy who is fond of somebody else's pencil case.—G. Eliot.

A boy who likes someone else's pencil case.—George Eliot.

A suit of clothes like somebody else's.—Thackeray.

A suit of clothes like someone else's.—Thackeray.

Drawing off his gloves and warming his hands before the fire as benevolently as if they were somebody else's.—Dickens.

Taking off his gloves and warming his hands by the fire as kindly as if they were someone else's.—Dickens.

Certainly not! nor any one else's ropes.—Ruskin.

Certainly not! nor anyone else's ropes.—Ruskin.

Again, my pronunciation—like everyone else's—is in some cases more archaic.—Sweet.

Again, my pronunciation—like everyone else's—is sometimes more old-fashioned.—Awesome.

Then everybody wanted some of somebody else's.—Ruskin.

Then everybody wanted some of somebody else's.—Ruskin.

His hair...curled once all over it in long tendrils, unlike anybody else's in the world.—N. P. Willis.

His hair...was curled all over in long tendrils, different from anybody else's in the world.—N.P. Willis.

"Ye see, there ain't nothin' wakes folks up like somebody else's wantin' what you've got."—Mrs. Stowe.

"You see, there’s nothing that wakes people up like someone else wanting what you have."—Mrs. Stowe.


ADJECTIVES.

AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES WITH NOUNS.

These sort, all manner of, etc.

427. The statement that adjectives agree with their nouns in number is restricted to the words this and that (with these and those), as these are the only adjectives that have separate forms for singular and plural; and it is only in one set of expressions that the concord seems to be violated,—in such as "these sort of books," "those kind of trees," "all manner of men;" the nouns being singular, the adjectives plural. These expressions are all but universal in spoken English, and may be found not infrequently in literary English; for example,—

427. The idea that adjectives agree with their nouns in number only applies to the words this and that (along with these and those), since these are the only adjectives that have different forms for singular and plural. There is one situation where this agreement seems off—in phrases like "these sort of books," "those kind of trees," "all manner of men;" where the nouns are singular and the adjectives are plural. These phrases are quite common in spoken English, and can also be found often in written English; for example,—

I know these types of tricksters, who in this straightforwardness Harbor more skills, etc.
—Shakespeare

All these sort of things.—Sheridan.

All these kinds of things. —Sheridan.

I hoped we had done with those sort of things.—Muloch.

I hoped we were done with that kind of stuff.—Muloch.

You have been so used to those sort of impertinences.Sydney Smith.

You have been so accustomed to that kind of rudeness.Sydney Smith.

Whitefield or Wesley, or some other such great man as a bishop, or those sort of people.—Fielding.

Whitefield or Wesley, or some other great figure like a bishop, or those kinds of people.—Fielding.

I always delight in overthrowing those kind of schemes.—Austen.

I always enjoy ruining those kinds of schemes.—Austen.

There are women as well as men who can thoroughly enjoy those sort of romantic spots.—Saturday Review, London.

There are women as well as men who can fully enjoy those sort of romantic places.—Saturday Review, London.

The library was open, with all manner of amusing books.—Ruskin.

The library was open, with all kinds of entertaining books.—Ruskin.

According to the approved usage of Modern English, each one of the above adjectives would have to be changed to the singular, or the nouns to the plural.

According to the accepted use of Modern English, each of the adjectives listed above would need to be changed to the singular form, or the nouns to the plural form.

History of this construction.

The reason for the prevalence of these expressions must be sought in the history of the language: it cannot be found in the statement that the adjective is made plural by the attraction of a noun following.

The reason these expressions are so common lies in the history of the language; it's not just because the adjective becomes plural due to the influence of a following noun.

At the source.

In Old and Middle English, in keeping with the custom of looking at things concretely rather than in the abstract, they said, not "all kinds of wild animals," but "alles cunnes wilde deor" (wild animals of-every-kind). This the modern expression reverses.

In Old and Middle English, following the custom of viewing things concretely rather than abstractly, they said, not "all kinds of wild animals," but "alles cunnes wilde deor" (wild animals of-every-kind). This modern expression flips that around.

Later form.

But in early Middle English the modern way of regarding such expressions also appeared, gradually displacing the old.

But in early Middle English, the modern way of understanding such expressions also emerged, gradually replacing the old.

The result.

Consequently we have a confused expression. We keep the form of logical agreement in standard English, such as, "This sort of trees should be planted;" but at the same time the noun following kind of is felt to be the real subject, and the adjective is, in spoken English, made to agree with it, which accounts for the construction, "These kind of trees are best."

As a result, we have a mixed-up expression. We maintain the form of logical agreement in standard English, like, "This sort of trees should be planted;" but at the same time, the noun after kind of is understood to be the actual subject, and the adjective is, in spoken English, adjusted to agree with it, leading to the construction, "These kind of trees are best."

A question.

The inconvenience of the logical construction is seen when we wish to use a predicate with number forms. Should we say, "This kind of rules are the best," or "This kind of rules is the best?" Kind or sort may be treated as a collective noun, and in this way may take a plural verb; for example, Burke's sentence, "A sort of uncertain sounds are, when the necessary dispositions concur, more alarming than a total silence."

The confusion in logical structure arises when we try to use a predicate with number forms. Should we say, "This kind of rules are the best," or "This kind of rules is the best?" Kind or sort can be treated as a collective noun, allowing it to take a plural verb; for instance, Burke's sentence, "A sort of uncertain sounds are, when the necessary conditions align, more alarming than complete silence."

COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE FORMS.

Use of the comparative degree.

428. The comparative degree of the adjective (or adverb) is used when we wish to compare two objects or sets of objects, or one object with a class of objects, to express a higher degree of quality; as,—

428. The comparative form of an adjective (or adverb) is used when we want to compare two objects or groups of objects, or one object with a category of objects, to indicate a greater degree of quality; for example,—

Which is the better able to defend himself,—a strong man with nothing but his fists, or a paralytic cripple encumbered with a sword which he cannot lift?—Macaulay.

Which is better at defending himself—a strong man with just his fists or a paralyzed person weighed down by a sword he can't lift?—Macaulay.

Of two lessons like these, why forget? The better and the stronger one? —Byron.

We may well doubt which has the stronger claim to civilization, the victor or the vanquished.—Prescott.

We might genuinely question who has the stronger claim to civilization, the victor or the vanquished.—Prescott.

A braver ne'er to battle rode.—Scott.

A braver never rode into battle. —Scott.

He is taller, by almost the breadth of my nail, than any of his court.—Swift.

He is taller, by almost the width of my nail, than anyone in his court.—Fast.

Other after the comparative form.

429. When an object is compared with the class to which it belongs, it is regularly excluded from that class by the word other; if not, the object would really be compared with itself: thus,—

429. When an object is compared to the group it fits into, it's usually set apart from that group using the word other; otherwise, the object would just be compared to itself: so,—

The character of Lady Castlewood has required more delicacy in its manipulation than perhaps any other which Thackeray has drawn.—Trollope.

The character of Lady Castlewood has needed more careful handling than maybe any other that Thackeray has created.—Trollope.

I used to watch this patriarchal personage with livelier curiosity than any other form of humanity.—Hawthorne.

I used to watch this patriarchal figure with more curiosity than any other kind of person.—Hawthorne.

Exercise.

See if the word other should be inserted in the following sentences:—

See if the word other should be added in the following sentences:—

1. There was no man who could make a more graceful bow than Mr. Henry.—Wirt.

1. There was no guy who could make a more graceful bow than Mr. Henry.—Wirt.

2. I am concerned to see that Mr. Gary, to whom Dante owes more than ever poet owed to translator, has sanctioned, etc.—Macaulay.

2. I’m worried to see that Mr. Gary, to whom Dante owes more than any poet has ever owed to a translator, has approved, etc.—Macaulay.

3. There is no country in which wealth is so sensible of its obligations as our own.—Lowell.

3. There is no country where wealth is more aware of its responsibilities than ours.—Lowell.

4. This is more sincerely done in the Scandinavian than in any mythology I know.—Carlyle.

4. This is done more sincerely in the Scandinavian mythologies than in any others I know.—Carlyle.

5. In "Thaddeus of Warsaw" there is more crying than in any novel I remember to have read.—Thackeray.

5. In "Thaddeus of Warsaw," there's more crying than in any novel I can remember reading.—Thackeray.

6. The heroes of another writer [Cooper] are quite the equals of Scott's men; perhaps Leather-stocking is better than any one in "Scott's lot."—Id.

6. The heroes from another writer [Cooper] are definitely on par with Scott's characters; maybe Leather-stocking is even better than anyone in "Scott's lot."—Same here.

Use of the superlative degree.

430. The superlative degree of the adjective (or adverb) is used regularly in comparing more than two things, but is also frequently used in comparing only two things.

430. The superlative degree of the adjective (or adverb) is usually used when comparing more than two things, but it's also often used for comparing just two things.

Examples of superlative with several objects:—

Examples of superlative with several objects:—

It is a case of which the simplest statement is the strongest.—Macaulay.

It’s a case where the simplest statement is the strongest.—Macaulay.

Even Dodd himself, who was one of the greatest humbugs who ever lived, would not have had the face.—Thackeray.

Even Dodd himself, who was one of the greatest frauds who ever lived, wouldn't have had the nerve.—Thackeray.

To the man who plays well, the highest stakes are paid.—Huxley.

To the man who plays well, the highest stakes are paid.—Huxley.

Superlative with two objects.

Compare the first three sentences in Sec. 428 with the following:—

Compare the first three sentences in Sec. 428 with the following:—

Which do you love best to behold, the lamb or the lion? —Thackeray.

Which do you love most to see, the lamb or the lion? —Thackeray.

Which of these methods has the best effect? Both of them are the same to the sense, and differ only in form.—Dr Blair.

Which of these methods has the best effect? Both of them are the same in essence and differ only in form.—Dr. Blair.

Rip was one of those ... who eat white bread or brown, whichever can be got easiest.—Irving.

Rip was one of those people who eat white bread or brown, whichever is easiest to get. —Irving.

It is hard to say whether the man of wisdom or the man of folly contributed most to the amusement of the party.—Scott.

It's tough to determine if the wise man or the foolish man brought the most entertainment to the gathering.—Scott.

There was an interval of three years between Mary and Anne. The eldest, Mary, was like the Stuarts—the younger was a fair English child.—Mrs. Oliphant.

There was a three-year gap between Mary and Anne. The eldest, Mary, resembled the Stuarts—the younger was a fair English child.—Mrs. Oliphant.

Of the two great parties which at this hour almost share the nation between them, I should say that one has the best cause, and the other contains the best men.—Emerson.

Of the two major parties that currently almost divide the nation, I would argue that one has the better cause, while the other has the better people.—Emerson.

In all disputes between States, though the strongest is nearly always mainly in the wrong, the weaker is often so in a minor degree.—Ruskin.

In all conflicts between countries, even though the stronger is usually mostly at fault, the weaker is often somewhat at fault too.—Ruskin.

She thought him and Olivia extremely of a size, and would bid both to stand up to see which was the tallest.—Goldsmith.

She thought he and Olivia were about the same height, and would ask both of them to stand up to see who was the tallest.—Jeweler.

These two properties seem essential to wit, more particularly the last of them.—Addison.

These two qualities seem crucial to wit, especially the last one.—Addison.

"Ha, ha, ha!" roared Goodman Brown when the wind laughed at him. "Let us see which will laugh loudest."—Hawthorne.

"Ha, ha, ha!" laughed Goodman Brown when the wind mocked him. "Let's see which one of us will laugh loudest." —Hawthorne.

Double comparative and superlative.

431. In Shakespeare's time it was quite common to use a double comparative and superlative by using more or most before the word already having -er or -est. Examples from Shakespeare are,—

431. In Shakespeare's time, it was pretty common to use a double comparative and superlative by placing more or most before words that already had -er or -est. Examples from Shakespeare are,—

How much more elder art thou than thy looks!—Merchant of Venice.

How much older are you than you look!—Merchant of Venice.

Nor that I am more better than Prospero.—Tempest.

Nor am I better than Prospero.—The Tempest.

Come you more nearer.—Hamlet.

Come closer. — Hamlet.

With the most boldest and best hearts of Rome.—J. Cæsar.

With the bravest and best hearts of Rome.—J. Caesar.

Also from the same period,—

Also from the same time—

Imitating the manner of the most ancientest and finest Grecians.—Ben Jonson.

Imitating the style of the oldest and greatest Greeks.—Ben Jonson.

After the most straitest sect of our religion.—Bible, 1611.

After the strictest sect of our religion.—Bible, 1611.

Such expressions are now heard only in vulgar English. The following examples are used purposely, to represent the characters as ignorant persons:—

Such expressions are now only heard in slang English. The following examples are deliberately used to portray the characters as uneducated individuals:—

The artful saddler persuaded the young traveler to look at "the most convenientest and handsomest saddle that ever was seen."—Bulwer.

The skilled saddler convinced the young traveler to check out "the most convenient and handsome saddle that anyone has ever seen."—Bulwer.

"There's nothing comes out but the most lowest stuff in nature; not a bit of high life among them."—Goldsmith.

"Nothing comes out but the lowest stuff in nature; not a bit of high life among them."—Jeweler.

THREE FIRST OR FIRST THREE?

FIRST THREE OR THREE FIRST?

432. As to these two expressions, over which a little war has so long been buzzing, we think it not necessary to say more than that both are in good use; not only so in popular speech, but in literary English. Instances of both are given below.

432. Regarding these two phrases, which have sparked a lot of debate for quite some time, we believe it’s sufficient to state that both are commonly used; this applies not only to everyday conversation but also to literary English. Examples of both are provided below.

The meaning intended is the same, and the reader gets the same idea from both: hence there is properly a perfect liberty in the use of either or both.

The intended meaning is the same, and the reader receives the same idea from both: therefore, there is actually complete freedom in using either or both.

First three, etc.

For Carlyle, and Secretary Walsingham also, have been helping them heart and soul for the last two years.—Kingsley.

For Carlyle and Secretary Walsingham have been wholeheartedly supporting them for the last two years.—Kingsley.

The delay in the first three lines, and conceit in the last, jar upon us constantly.—Ruskin.

The holdup in the first three lines and the arrogance in the last keep bothering us all the time.—Ruskin.

The last dozen miles before you reach the suburbs.—De Quincey.

The last twelve miles before you get to the suburbs.—De Quincey.

Mankind for the first seventy thousand ages ate their meat raw.—Lamb.

Mankind for the first seventy thousand ages ate their meat raw.—Lamb.

The first twenty numbers were expressed by a corresponding number of dots. The first five had specific names.—Prescott.

The first twenty numbers were represented by an equal number of dots. The first five had unique names.—Prescott.

Three first, etc.

These are the three first needs of civilized life.—Ruskin.

These are the three primary needs of civilized life.—Ruskin.

He has already finished the three first sticks of it.—Addison.

He has already finished the first three sticks of it.—Addison.

In my two last you had so much of Lismahago that I suppose you are glad he is gone.—Smollett.

In my last two you had so much of Lismahago that I guess you're glad he's gone.—Smollett.

I have not numbered the lines except of the four first books. —Cowper.

I haven't numbered the lines except for the first four books. —Cowper.

The seven first centuries were filled with a succession of triumphs.—Gibbon.

The seven first centuries were filled with a series of victories.—Gibbon.


ARTICLES.

Definite article.

433. The definite article is repeated before each of two modifiers of the same noun, when the purpose is to call attention to the noun expressed and the one understood. In such a case two or more separate objects are usually indicated by the separation of the modifiers. Examples of this construction are,—

433. The definite article is repeated before each of two modifiers of the same noun when the goal is to highlight both the noun that's stated and the one that's implied. In this case, two or more different objects are typically shown by separating the modifiers. Examples of this construction are,—

With a singular noun.

The merit of the Barb, the Spanish, and the English breed is derived from a mixture of Arabian blood.—Gibbon.

The value of the Barb, the Spanish, and the English breed comes from a blend of Arabian blood.—Gibbon.

The righteous man is distinguished from the unrighteous by his desire and hope of justice.—Ruskin.

The righteous person is set apart from the unrighteous by their desire and hope for justice.—Ruskin.

He seemed deficient in sympathy for concrete human things either on the sunny or the stormy side.—Carlyle.

He seemed lacking in empathy for real human experiences, whether on the sunny or the stormy side.—Carlyle.

It is difficult to imagine a greater contrast than that between the first and the second part of the volume.—The Nation, No. 1508.

It’s hard to think of a bigger contrast than that between the first and the second part of the volume.—The Nation, No. 1508.

With a plural noun.

There was also a fundamental difference of opinion as to whether the earliest cleavage was between the Northern and the Southern languages.—Taylor, Origin of the Aryans.

There was also a basic difference of opinion about whether the earliest split was between the Northern and the Southern languages.—Taylor, Origin of the Aryans.

434. The same repetition of the article is sometimes found before nouns alone, to distinguish clearly, or to emphasize the meaning; as,—

434. The same repetition of the article is sometimes found before nouns alone, to distinguish clearly, or to emphasize the meaning; as,—

In every line of the Philip and the Saul, the greatest poems, I think, of the eighteenth century.—Macaulay.

In every line of the Philip and the Saul, the greatest poems, I think, of the eighteenth century.—Macaulay.

He is master of the two-fold Logos, the thought and the word, distinct, but inseparable from each other.—Newman.

He is the master of the two-fold Logos, the thought and the word, distinct yet inseparable from each other.—Newman.

The flowers, and the presents, and the trunks and bonnet boxes ... having been arranged, the hour of parting came.—Thackeray.

The flowers, and the gifts, and the suitcases and hat boxes ... once everything was set up, the time to say goodbye arrived.—Thackeray.

The not repeated. One object and several modifiers, with a singular noun.

435. Frequently, however, the article is not repeated before each of two or more adjectives, as in Sec. 433, but is used with one only; as,—

435. However, it's common for the article not to be repeated before each of two or more adjectives, as mentioned in Sec. 433, but to be used with just one; for example,—

Or fanciest thou the red and yellow Clothes-screen yonder is but of To-day, without a Yesterday or a To-morrow?—Carlyle.

Or do you think the red and yellow clothes screen over there is just from today, with no past or future?—Carlyle.

The lofty, melodious, and flexible language.—Scott.

The high, melodic, and versatile language. —Scott.

The fairest and most loving wife in Greece.—Tennyson.

The most beautiful and loving wife in Greece.—Tennyson.

Meaning same as in Sec. 433, with a plural noun.

Neither can there be a much greater resemblance between the ancient and modern general views of the town.—Halliwell-phillipps.

Neither can there be a much greater resemblance between the ancient and modern general views of the town.—Halliwell-Phillipps.

At Talavera the English and French troops for a moment suspended their conflict.—Macaulay.

At Talavera, the English and French troops briefly paused their fighting. —Macaulay.

The Crusades brought to the rising commonwealths of the Adriatic and Tyrrhene seas a large increase of wealth.—Id.

The Crusades brought a significant increase in wealth to the emerging commonwealths of the Adriatic and Tyrrhene seas.—Id.

Here the youth of both sexes, of the higher and middling orders, were placed at a very tender age.—Prescott.

Here, young people of both genders, from the upper and middle classes, were put in position at a very young age.—Prescott.

Indefinite article.

436. The indefinite article is used, like the definite article, to limit two or more modified nouns, only one of which is expressed. The article is repeated for the purpose of separating or emphasizing the modified nouns. Examples of this use are,—

436. The indefinite article is used, like the definite article, to limit two or more modified nouns, with only one being stated. The article is repeated to separate or emphasize the modified nouns. Examples of this use are,—

We shall live a better and a higher and a nobler life.—Beecher.

We will live a better and a higher and a nobler life.—Beecher.

The difference between the products of a well-disciplined and those of an uncultivated understanding is often and admirably exhibited by our great dramatist.—S. T. Coleridge.

The difference between the outcomes of a well-disciplined mind and those of a rough understanding is often and impressively shown by our great playwright.—S. T. Coleridge.

Let us suppose that the pillars succeed each other, a round and a square one alternately.—Burke.

Let’s assume that the pillars alternate between round and square ones.—Burke.

As if the difference between an accurate and an inaccurate statement was not worth the trouble of looking into the most common book of reference.—Macaulay.

As if figuring out the difference between an accurate and an inaccurate statement wasn't worth the effort of checking the most popular reference book.—Macaulay.

To every room there was an open and a secret passage.—Johnson.

To every room, there was a public and a hidden passage.—Johnson.

Notice that in the above sentences (except the first) the noun expressed is in contrast with the modified noun omitted.

Notice that in the sentences above (except the first), the noun mentioned contrasts with the modified noun that is left out.

One article with several adjectives.

437. Usually the article is not repeated when the several adjectives unite in describing one and the same noun. In the sentences of Secs. 433 and 436, one noun is expressed; yet the same word understood with the other adjectives has a different meaning (except in the first sentence of Sec. 436). But in the following sentences, as in the first three of Sec. 435, the adjectives assist each other in describing the same noun. It is easy to see the difference between the expressions "a red-and-white geranium," and "a red and a white geranium."

437. Usually, the article isn't repeated when several adjectives work together to describe one noun. In the sentences in Sections 433 and 436, one noun is mentioned; however, the same word understood with the other adjectives has a different meaning (except in the first sentence of Section 436). But in the following sentences, like the first three in Section 435, the adjectives support each other in describing the same noun. It's easy to see the difference between the phrases "a red-and-white geranium" and "a red and a white geranium."

Examples of several adjectives describing the same object:—

Examples of several adjectives describing the same object:—

To inspire us with a free and quiet mind.—B. Jonson.

To inspire us with a free and calm mind.—B. Jonson.

Here and there a desolate and uninhabited house.—Dickens.

Here and there a barren and empty house.—Dickens.

James was declared a mortal and bloody enemy.—Macaulay.

James was declared a mortal and bloody enemy.—Macaulay.

You were born into a musical line,
An early, rich, and untapped vein.
—Dryden.
For rhetorical effect.

438. The indefinite article (compare Sec. 434) is used to lend special emphasis, interest, or clearness to each of several nouns; as,—

438. The indefinite article (compare Sec. 434) is used to give special emphasis, interest, or clarity to each of several nouns; for example,—

James was declared a mortal and bloody enemy, a tyrant, a murderer, and a usurper.—Macaulay.

James was labeled a mortal and bloody enemy, a tyrant, a murderer, and a usurper.—Macaulay.

Thou hast spoken as a patriot and a Christian.—Bulwer.

You have spoken like a patriot and a Christian.—Bulwer.

He saw him in his mind's eye, a collegian, a parliament man—a Baronet perhaps.—Thackeray.

He saw him in his imagination, a college student, a member of parliament—a Baronet maybe.—Thackeray.


VERBS.

CONCORD OF VERB AND SUBJECT IN NUMBER.

A broad and loose rule.

439. In English, the number of the verb follows the meaning rather than the form of its subject.

439. In English, the number of the verb depends on the meaning rather than the form of its subject.

It will not do to state as a general rule that the verb agrees with its subject in person and number. This was spoken of in Part I., Sec. 276, and the following illustrations prove it.

It’s not accurate to say that the verb always agrees with its subject in person and number. This was discussed in Part I., Sec. 276, and the examples that follow demonstrate this.

The statements and illustrations of course refer to such verbs as have separate forms for singular and plural number.

The statements and illustrations obviously refer to verbs that have different forms for singular and plural.

Singular verb.

440. The singular form of the verb is used—

440. The singular form of the verb is used—

Subject of singular form.

(1) When the subject has a singular form and a singular meaning.

(1) When the subject is singular and has a singular meaning.

Such, then, was the earliest American land.—Agassiz.

Such, then, was the earliest American land. —Agassiz.

He was certainly a happy fellow at this time.—G. Eliot.

He was definitely a happy guy at this time.—George Eliot.

He sees that it is better to live in peace.—Cooper.

He sees that it's better to live in peace.—Cooper.

Collective noun of singular meaning.

(2) When the subject is a collective noun which represents a number of persons or things taken as one unit; as,—

(2) When the subject is a collective noun that represents a group of people or things considered as one unit; as,—

The larger breed [of camels] is capable of transporting a weight of a thousand pounds.—Gibbon.

The larger breed [of camels] can carry a weight of a thousand pounds.—Gibbon.

Another school professes entirely opposite principles.—The Nation.

Another school promotes entirely opposite principles.—The Nation.

In this work there was grouped around him a score of men.—W. Phillips

In this work, there was a group of around twenty men surrounding him.—W. Phillips

A number of jeweled paternosters was attached to her girdle.—Froude.

A number of jeweled rosaries were attached to her belt.—Froude.

Something like a horse load of books has been written to prove that it was the beauty who blew up the booby.—Carlyle

Something like a ton of books has been written to prove that it was the beauty who blew up the fool.—Carlyle

This usage, like some others in this series, depends mostly on the writer's own judgment. Another writer might, for example, prefer a plural verb after number in Froude's sentence above.

This usage, like some others in this series, relies mainly on the writer's own judgment. Another writer might, for example, choose a plural verb after number in Froude's sentence above.

Singulars connected by or or nor.

(3) When the subject consists of two or more singular nouns connected by or or nor; as,—

(3) When the subject is made up of two or more singular nouns linked by or or nor; as,—

It is by no means sure that either our literature, or the great intellectual life of our nation, has got already, without academies, all that academies can give.—M. Arnold.

It’s not at all certain that either our literature or the great intellectual life of our nation has already achieved everything that academies can offer without their presence.—M. Arnold.

Jesus is not dead, nor John, nor Paul, nor Mahomet. —Emerson.

Jesus is not dead, nor John, nor Paul, nor Muhammad. —Emerson.

Plural form and singular meaning.

(4) When the subject is plural in form, but represents a number of things to be taken together as forming one unit; for example,—

(4) When the subject is plural in form, but represents a number of things to be considered together as forming one unit; for example,—

Thirty-four years affects one's remembrance of some circumstances.—De Quincey.

Thirty-four years affects how one remembers certain situations.—De Quincey.

Between ourselves, three pounds five shillings and two pence is no bad day's work.—Goldsmith.

Between us, three pounds five shillings and two pence is not a bad day's work.—Goldsmith.

Every twenty paces gives you the prospect of some villa; and every four hours, that of a large town.—Montague

Every twenty steps offers you the view of some villa; and every four hours, that of a big town.—Montague

Two thirds of this is mine by right.—Sheridan

Two-thirds of this belongs to me by right.—Sheridan

The singular form is also used with book titles, other names, and other singulars of plural form; as,—

The singular form is also used with book titles, other names, and other singulars of plural form; as,—

Politics is the only field now open for me.—Whittier.

Politics is the only field available to me now.—Whittier.

"Sesame and Lilies" is Ruskin's creed for young girls.—Critic, No. 674

"Sesame and Lilies" is Ruskin's guide for young girls.—Reviewer, No. 674

The Three Pigeons expects me down every moment.—Goldsmith.

The Three Pigeons is waiting for me any moment now.—Goldsmith.

Several singular subjects to one singular verb.

(5) With several singular subjects not disjoined by or or nor, in the following cases:—

(5) With several singular subjects not separated by or or nor, in the following cases:—

(a) Joined by and, but considered as meaning about the same thing, or as making up one general idea; as,—

(a) Joined by and, but regarded as conveying roughly the same idea, or as forming one overall concept; as,—

In a word, all his conversation and knowledge has been in the female world—Addison.

In a word, all his conversation and knowledge has been in the female world—Addison.

The strength and glare of each [color] is considerably abated.—Burke

The intensity and brightness of each [color] is significantly reduced.—Burke

To imagine that debating and logic is the triumph.—Carlyle

To think that debating and logic are the victory.—Carlyle

In a world where even to fold and seal a letter adroitly is not the least of accomplishments.—De Quincey

In a world where even folding and sealing a letter skillfully is one of the great achievements. —De Quincey

The genius and merit of a rising poet was celebrated.—Gibbon.

The talent and brilliance of an emerging poet were recognized.—Gibbon.

When the cause of ages and the fate of nations hangs upon the thread of a debate.—J. Q. Adams.

When the destiny of generations and the fate of countries depends on a single debate.—J.Q. Adams.

(b) Not joined by a conjunction, but each one emphatic, or considered as appositional; for example,—

(b) Not connected by a conjunction, but each one emphatic, or seen as appositional; for example,—

The unbought grace of life, the cheap defense of nations, the nurse of manly sentiment and heroic enterprise, is gone.—Burke.

The free gift of life, the easy protection of countries, the source of strong feelings and brave actions, is gone.—Burke.

A fever, a mutilation, a cruel disappointment, a loss of wealth, a loss of friends, seems at the moment unpaid loss.—Emerson

A fever, an injury, a harsh disappointment, a loss of money, a loss of friends, seems at that moment like an unresolved loss.—Emerson

The author, the wit, the partisan, the fine gentleman, does not take the place of the man.—Id.

The author, the clever one, the supporter, the classy guy, does not replace the man.—Same.

To receive presents or a bribe, to be guilty of collusion in any way with a suitor, was punished, in a judge, with death.—Prescott.

To accept gifts or a bribe, to be involved in any way with a suitor, was punished, in a judge, with death.—Prescott.

Subjects after the verb.

This use of several subjects with a singular verb is especially frequent when the subjects are after the verb; as,—

This use of multiple subjects with a singular verb is particularly common when the subjects come after the verb; for example,—

There is a right and a wrong in them.—M Arnold.

There is a right and a wrong in them.—M Arnold.

There is a moving tone of voice, an impassioned countenance, an agitated gesture.—Burke

There is an emotional tone of voice, a passionate expression, an anxious gesture.—Burke

There was a steel headpiece, a cuirass, a gorget, and greaves, with a pair of gauntlets and a sword hanging beneath.—Hawthorne.

There was a steel helmet, a breastplate, a neck guard, and leg armor, with a pair of gloves and a sword hanging below.—Hawthorne.

Then comes the "Why, sir!" and the "What then, sir?" and the "No, sir!"—Macaulay.

Then comes the "Why, sir!" and the "What then, sir?" and the "No, sir!"—Macaulay.

For widely is heard the thundering fray, The defeat, the destruction, the disappointment.
—SCOTT.

(c) Joined by as well as (in this case the verb agrees with the first of the two, no matter if the second is plural); thus,—

(c) Joined by as well as (in this case, the verb agrees with the first of the two, regardless of whether the second is plural); thus,—

Asia, as well as Europe, was dazzled.—Macaulay.

Asia and Europe were dazzled.—Macaulay.

The oldest and the newest, wine
Starts to wake up.
—LONGFELLOW.

Her back, as well as sides, was like to crack.—Butler.

Her back and sides felt like they were about to crack.—Butler.

The Epic, as well as the Drama, is divided into tragedy and Comedy.—Fielding

The Epic and the Drama are divided into Tragedy and Comedy. —Fielding

(d) When each of two or more singular subjects is preceded by every, each, no, many a, and such like adjectives.

(d) When each of two or more singular subjects is preceded by every, each, no, many a, and similar adjectives.

Every fop, every boor, every valet, is a man of wit.—Macaulay.

Every dandy, every rude person, every servant, is a person of intelligence.—Macaulay.

Every sound, every echo, was listened to for five hours.—De Quincey

Every sound, every echo, was listened to for five hours.—De Quincey

Every dome and hollow has the figure of Christ.—Ruskin.

Every dome and hollow features the figure of Christ.—Ruskin.

Each particular hue and tint stands by itself.—Newman.

Each specific color and shade exists independently. —Newman.

Every law and usage was a man's expedient.—Emerson.

Every law and custom is a man's strategy.—Emerson.

Here is no ruin, no discontinuity, no spent ball.—Id.

Here is no ruin, no break, no wasted ball.—Id.

Every week, nay, almost every day, was set down in their calendar for some appropriate celebration.—Prescott.

Every week, no, almost every day, was scheduled in their calendar for some fitting celebration.—Prescott.

Plural verb.

441. The plural form of the verb is used—

441. The plural form of the verb is used—

(1) When the subject is plural in form and in meaning; as,—

(1) When the subject is plural in form and in meaning; as,—

These bits of wood were covered on every square.—Swift.

These pieces of wood were covered on every square.

Far, far away thy children leave the land.—Goldsmith.

Far, far away your children leave the land.—Goldsmith.

The Arabian poets were the historians and moralists.—Gibbon.

The Arabian poets were the historians and moralists.—Gibbon.

(2) When the subject is a collective noun in which the individuals of the collection are thought of; as,—

(2) When the subject is a collective noun that refers to the individuals within the group; as,—

A multitude go mad about it.—Emerson.

A lot go crazy about it.—Emerson.

A great number of people were collected at a vendue.—Franklin.

A large crowd was gathered at an auction.—Franklin.

All our household are at rest.—Coleridge.

All our household is at rest.—Coleridge.

A party of workmen were removing the horses.—Lew Wallace

A group of workers was removing the horses.—Lew Wallace

The fraternity were inclined to claim for him the honors of canonization.—Scott.

The fraternity was inclined to claim for him the honors of canonization.—Scott.

The travelers, of whom there were a number.—B. Taylor.

The travelers, among whom there were a number.—B. Taylor.

(3) When the subject consists of several singulars connected by and, making up a plural subject, for example,—

(3) When the subject is made up of several singulars connected by and, forming a plural subject, for example,—

Only Vice and Misery are abroad.—Carlyle

Only Vice and Misery are out. —Carlyle

But its authorship, its date, and its history are alike a mystery to us.—Froude.

But its authorship, date, and history are all a mystery to us.—Froude.

His clothes, shirt, and skin were all of the same color—Swift.

His clothes, shirt, and skin were all the same color—Swift.

Aristotle and Longinus are better understood by him than Littleton or Coke.—Addison.

Aristotle and Longinus are easier for him to understand than Littleton or Coke.—Addison.

Conjunction omitted.

The conjunction may be omitted, as in Sec. 440 (5, b), but the verb is plural, as with a subject of plural form.

The conjunction can be left out, like in Sec. 440 (5, b), but the verb is plural, just like with a plural subject.

A shady grove, a green pasture, a stream of fresh water, are sufficient to attract a colony.—Gibbon.

A shady grove, a green pasture, and a stream of fresh water are enough to draw a colony. —Gibbon.

The Dauphin, the Duke of Berri, Philip of Anjou, were men of insignificant characters.—Macaulay

The Dauphin, the Duke of Berri, and Philip of Anjou were men of unremarkable character. —Macaulay

(4) When a singular is joined with a plural by a disjunctive word, the verb agrees with the one nearest it; as,—

(4) When a singular and a plural are connected by a disjunctive word, the verb agrees with the one closest to it; as,—

One or two of these perhaps survive.—Thoreau.

One or two of these might still survive.—Thoreau.

One or two persons in the crowd were insolent.—Froude.

One or two people in the crowd were disrespectful.—Froude.

One or two of the ladies were going to leave.—Addison

One or two of the ladies were going to leave.—Addison

One or two of these old Cromwellian soldiers were still alive in the village.—Thackeray

One or two of these old Cromwellian soldiers were still alive in the village.—Thackeray

One or two of whom were more entertaining.—De Quincey.

One or two of whom were more entertaining.—De Quincey.

But notice the construction of this,—

But notice how this is constructed—

A ray or two wanders into the darkness.—Ruskin.

A ray or two wanders into the darkness.—Ruskin.

AGREEMENT OF VERB AND SUBJECT IN PERSON.

General usage.

442. If there is only one person in the subject, the ending of the verb indicates the person of its subject; that is, in those few cases where there are forms for different persons: as,—

442. If there is just one person in the subject, the ending of the verb shows who the subject is; that is, in those few cases where there are forms for different people: as,—

Never once didst thou revel in the vision.—De Quincey.

Never once did you indulge in the vision.—De Quincey.

Romanism wisely provides for the childish in men.—Lowell.

Romanism wisely caters to the childish side in men.—Lowell.

It hath been said my Lord would never take the oath.—Thackeray.

It has been said my Lord would never take the oath.—Thackeray.

Second or third and first person in the subject.

443. If the subject is made up of the first person joined with the second or third by and, the verb takes the construction of the first person, the subject being really equivalent to we; as,—

443. If the subject consists of the first person combined with the second or third person using and, the verb will follow the first person form, since the subject essentially equates to we; for example,—

I flatter myself you and I shall meet again.—Smollett.

I think you and I will meet again.—Smollett.

You and I are farmers; we never talk politics.—D. Webster.

You and I are farmers; we never discuss politics.—D. Webster.

Oh, brother! It's just you and me. Are to the left of that entire circle now.
—Whittier.

You and I are tolerably modest people.—Thackeray.

You and I are pretty humble people.—Thackeray.

Cocke and I have felt it in our bones—Gammer Gurton's Needle

Cocke and I have felt it in our bones—Gammer Gurton's Needle

With adversative or disjunctive connectives.

444. When the subjects, of different persons, are connected by adversative or disjunctive conjunctions, the verb usually agrees with the pronoun nearest to it; for example,—

444. When the subjects of different people are joined by contrasting or alternative conjunctions, the verb typically agrees with the pronoun closest to it; for example,—

Neither you nor I should be a bit the better or wiser.—Ruskin.

Neither you nor I should be any better or wiser.—Ruskin.

If she or you are resolved to be miserable.—Goldsmith.

If she or you are determined to be unhappy.—Goldsmith.

Nothing which Mr. Pattison or I have said.—M. Arnold.

Nothing that Mr. Pattison or I have said.—M. Arnold.

Not Altamont, but thou, hadst been my lord.—Rowe.

Not Altamont, but you were my lord. —Rowe.

Not I, but thou, his blood dost shed.—Byron.

Not me, but you, his blood does shed.—Byron.

This construction is at the best a little awkward. It is avoided either by using a verb which has no forms for person (as, "He or I can go," "She or you may be sure," etc.), or by rearranging the sentence so as to throw each subject before its proper person form (as, "You would not be wiser, nor should I;" or, "I have never said so, nor has she").

This construction is, at best, a bit awkward. It's avoided either by using a verb that has no forms for person (like, "He or I can go," "She or you may be sure," etc.), or by rearranging the sentence to put each subject before its proper verb form (like, "You would not be wiser, nor should I;" or, "I have never said so, nor has she").

Exceptional examples.

445. The following illustrate exceptional usage, which it is proper to mention; but the student is cautioned to follow the regular usage rather than the unusual and irregular.

445. The following examples show exceptional usage, which should be mentioned; however, students are advised to stick to the standard usage instead of the uncommon and irregular.

Exercise.

Change each of the following sentences to accord with standard usage, as illustrated above (Secs. 440-444):—

Change each of the following sentences to match standard usage, as shown above (Secs. 440-444):—

1.
And tough challenges will finally teach us in the end.
Man—and, if we’re lucky—maybe the devil,
That neither of their minds is very sharp.
—Byron.

2. Neither of them, in my opinion, give so accurate an idea of the man as a statuette in bronze.—Trollope.

2. Neither of them, in my opinion, gives such an accurate idea of the man as a bronze statuette.—Trollope.

3. How each of these professions are crowded.—Addison.

3. How crowded each of these professions is.—Addison.

4. Neither of their counselors were to be present.—Id.

4. Neither of their counselors was to be present.—Id.

5. Either of them are equally good to the person to whom they are significant.—Emerson.

5. Either of them is equally good to the person for whom they are meaningful.—Emerson.

6. Neither the red nor the white are strong and glaring.—Burke.

6. Neither the red nor the white is strong and glaring.—Burke.

7. A lampoon or a satire do not carry in them robbery or murder.—Addison.

7. A lampoon or a satire doesn't involve robbery or murder.—Addison.

8. Neither of the sisters were very much deceived.—Thackeray.

8. Neither of the sisters was really fooled.—Thackeray.

9.
There isn't any wood, tree, or bush there,
Her path to intercept. —Scott.

10. Both death and I am found eternal.—Milton.

10. Both death and I will be found forever. —Milton.

11. In ascending the Mississippi the party was often obliged to wade through morasses; at last they came upon the district of Little Prairie.—G. Bancroft.

11. While traveling up the Mississippi, the group often had to wade through swamps; eventually, they arrived at the area known as Little Prairie.—G. Bancroft.

12. In a word, the whole nation seems to be running out of their wits.—Smollett.

12. In short, the entire country seems to be losing its mind.—Smollett.

SEQUENCE OF TENSES (VERBS AND VERBALS).

SEQUENCE OF TENSES (VERBS AND VERBALS).

Lack of logical sequence in verbs.

446. If one or more verbs depend on some leading verb, each should be in the tense that will convey the meaning intended by the writer.

446. If one or more verbs rely on a main verb, each should be in the tense that clearly expresses the writer's intended meaning.

In this sentence from Defoe, "I expected every wave would have swallowed us up," the verb expected looks forward to something in the future, while would have swallowed represents something completed in past time: hence the meaning intended was, "I expected every wave would swallow" etc.

In this sentence from Defoe, "I expected every wave would have swallowed us up," the verb expected looks ahead to something in the future, while would have swallowed indicates something that was completed in the past: so the intended meaning was, "I expected every wave would swallow" etc.

Also in verbals.

In the following sentence, the infinitive also fails to express the exact thought:—

In the following sentence, the infinitive also doesn't convey the exact thought:—

I had hoped never to have seen the statues again.—Macaulay.

I had hoped to never see the statues again.—Macaulay.

The trouble is the same as in the previous sentence; to have seen should be changed to to see, for exact connection. Of course, if the purpose were to represent a prior fact or completed action, the perfect infinitive would be the very thing.

The problem is similar to what was mentioned before; to have seen should be changed to to see for a direct connection. Naturally, if the goal were to indicate something that happened earlier or a completed action, the perfect infinitive would be the right choice.

It should be remarked, however, that such sentences as those just quoted are in keeping with the older idea of the unity of the sentence. The present rule is recent.

It should be noted, however, that sentences like the ones just quoted align with the older concept of sentence unity. The current rule is recent.

Exercise.

Workout.

Explain whether the verbs and infinitives in the following sentences convey the right meaning; if not, change them to a better form:—

Explain whether the verbs and infinitives in the following sentences convey the correct meaning; if not, change them to a better form:—

1. I gave one quarter to Ann, meaning, on my return, to have divided with her whatever might remain.—De Quincey

1. I gave a quarter to Ann, intending to share whatever was left when I got back.—De Quincey

2. I can't sketch "The Five Drapers," ... but can look and be thankful to have seen such a masterpiece.—Thackeray.

2. I can't draw "The Five Drapers," ... but I can look at it and be grateful to have witnessed such a masterpiece.—Thackeray.

3. He would have done more wisely to have left them to find their own apology than to have given reasons which seemed paradoxes.—R. W. Church.

3. He would have been smarter to let them come up with their own apology rather than giving reasons that sounded like paradoxes.—R.W. Church.

4. The propositions of William are stated to have contained a proposition for a compromise.—Palgrave

4. William's proposals are said to have included a suggestion for a compromise.—Palgrave

5. But I found I wanted a stock of words, which I thought I should have acquired before that time.—Franklin

5. But I realized I wanted a vocabulary that I thought I should have picked up by that point.—Franklin

6. I could even have suffered them to have broken Everet Ducking's head.—Irving.

6. I could have even let them break Everet Ducking's head.—Irving.


INDIRECT DISCOURSE.

Definitions.

447. Direct discourse—that is, a direct quotation or a direct question—means the identical words the writer or speaker used; as,—

447. Direct discourse—that is, a direct quotation or a direct question—refers to the exact words the writer or speaker used; for example,—

"I hope you have not killed him?" said Amyas.—Kingsley.

"I hope you haven't killed him?" said Amyas.—Kingsley.

Indirect discourse means reported speech,—the thoughts of a writer or speaker put in the words of the one reporting them.

Indirect discourse refers to reported speech—the thoughts of a writer or speaker expressed in the words of the person relaying them.

Two samples of indirect discourse.

448. Indirect discourse may be of two kinds:—

448. Indirect speech can be of two types:—

(1) Following the thoughts and also the exact words as far as consistent with the rules of logical sequence of verbs.

(1) Following the ideas and the exact words as long as they are consistent with the rules of logical verb sequence.

(2) Merely a concise representation of the original words, not attempting to follow the entire quotation.

(2) Just a brief summary of the original words, not trying to follow the complete quotation.

The following examples of both are from De Quincey:—

The following examples of both are from De Quincey:—

Indirect.

1. Reyes remarked that it was not in his power to oblige the clerk as to that, but that he could oblige him by cutting his throat.

1. Reyes stated that he couldn't fulfill the clerk's request, but he could help him by cutting his throat.

Direct.

His exact words were, "I cannot oblige you ..., but I can oblige you by cutting your throat."

His exact words were, "I can’t help you ..., but I can help you by cutting your throat."

Indirect.

Her prudence whispered eternally, that safety there was none for her until she had laid the Atlantic between herself and St. Sebastian's.

Her caution constantly reminded her that she wouldn't be safe until she had put the Atlantic Ocean between herself and St. Sebastian's.

Direct.

She thought to herself, "Safety there is none for me until I have laid," etc.

She thought to herself, "There’s no safety for me until I have laid," etc.

Summary of the expressions.

2. Then he laid bare the unparalleled ingratitude of such a step. Oh, the unseen treasure that had been spent upon that girl! Oh, the untold sums of money that he had sunk in that unhappy speculation!

2. Then he exposed the incredible ingratitude of such a move. Oh, the hidden value that had been spent on that girl! Oh, the countless amounts of money that he had thrown into that unfortunate gamble!

Direct synopsis.

The substance of his lamentation was, "Oh, unseen treasure has been spent upon that girl! Untold sums of money have I sunk," etc.

The essence of his complaint was, "Oh, hidden wealth has been wasted on that girl! I have poured in countless amounts of money," etc.

449. From these illustrations will be readily seen the grammatical changes made in transferring from direct to indirect discourse. Remember the following facts:—

449. These examples clearly show the grammatical changes that occur when shifting from direct to indirect speech. Keep the following points in mind:—

(1) Usually the main, introductory verb is in the past tense.

(1) Typically, the main introductory verb is in the past tense.

(2) The indirect quotation is usually introduced by that, and the indirect question by whether or if, or regular interrogatives.

(2) An indirect quote is typically introduced by that, and an indirect question by whether, if, or standard question words.

(3) Verbs in the present-tense form are changed to the past-tense form. This includes the auxiliaries be, have, will, etc. The past tense is sometimes changed to the past perfect.

(3) Present-tense verbs are changed to past-tense verbs. This includes the auxiliary verbs be, have, will, and so on. The past tense is sometimes shifted to the past perfect.

(4) The pronouns of the first and second persons are all changed to the third person. Sometimes it is clearer to introduce the antecedent of the pronoun instead.

(4) The pronouns for the first and second persons are all switched to the third person. Sometimes, it’s clearer to introduce the antecedent of the pronoun instead.

Other examples of indirect discourse have been given in Part I., under interrogative pronouns, interrogative adverbs, and the subjunctive mood of verbs.

Other examples of indirect discourse have been provided in Part I., under question words, question adverbs, and the subjunctive form of verbs.

Exercise.

Rewrite the following extract from Irving's "Sketch Book," and change it to a direct quotation:—

Rewrite the following extract from Irving's "Sketch Book," and change it to a direct quotation:—

He assured the company that it was a fact, handed down from his ancestor the historian, that the Catskill Mountains had always been haunted by strange beings; that it was affirmed that the great Hendrick Hudson, the first discoverer of the river and country, kept a kind of vigil there every twenty years, with his crew of the Half-moon, being permitted in this way to revisit the scenes of his enterprise, and keep a guardian eye upon the river and the great city called by his name; that his father had once seen them in their old Dutch dresses playing at ninepins in a hollow of the mountain; and that he himself had heard, one summer afternoon, the sound of their balls, like distant peals of thunder.

He assured the company that it was a fact, passed down from his ancestor the historian, that the Catskill Mountains had always been haunted by strange beings; that it was said that the great Hendrick Hudson, the first discoverer of the river and country, held a kind of vigil there every twenty years with his crew of the Half-moon, being allowed to revisit the scenes of his venture and keep a watchful eye on the river and the great city named after him; that his father had once seen them in their old Dutch outfits playing ninepins in a hollow of the mountain; and that he himself had heard, one summer afternoon, the sound of their balls, like distant rumbles of thunder.


VERBALS.

PARTICIPLES.

PARTICIPLES.

Careless use of the participial phrase.

450. The following sentences illustrate a misuse of the participial phrase:—

450. The following sentences illustrate a misuse of the participial phrase:—

Pleased with the "Pilgrim's Progress," my first collection was of John Bunyan's works.—B. Franklin.

Pleased with "Pilgrim's Progress," my first collection was of John Bunyan's works.—Ben Franklin.

My farm consisted of about twenty acres of excellent land, having given a hundred pounds for my predecessor's goodwill.—Goldsmith.

My farm was around twenty acres of great land, and I paid a hundred pounds for my predecessor's goodwill.—Goldsmith.

Upon asking how he had been taught the art of a cognoscente so suddenly, he assured me that nothing was more easy.—Id.

Upon asking how he had learned the art of being knowledgeable so suddenly, he assured me that nothing was easier.—Id.

Having thus run through the causes of the sublime, my first observation will be found nearly true.—Burke

Having covered the reasons for the sublime, my first observation will be found to be mostly accurate.—Burke

He therefore remained silent till he had repeated a paternoster, being the course which his confessor had enjoined.—Scott

He stayed silent until he had repeated a prayer, as his confessor had instructed him.—Scott

Compare with these the following:—

Compare with these:—

A correct example.

Going yesterday to dine with an old acquaintance, I had the misfortune to find his whole family very much dejected.—Addison.

Going to dinner yesterday with an old friend, I unfortunately found his whole family very down. —Addison.

Notice this.

The trouble is, in the sentences first quoted, that the main subject of the sentence is not the same word that would be the subject of the participle, if this were expanded into a verb.

The issue is that, in the initial sentences quoted, the main subject of the sentence isn't the same word that would serve as the subject of the participle if it were turned into a verb.

Correction.

Consequently one of two courses must be taken,—either change the participle to a verb with its appropriate subject, leaving the principal statement as it is; or change the principal proposition so it shall make logical connection with the participial phrase.

Consequently, one of two options must be taken—either change the participle to a verb with its appropriate subject, keeping the main statement unchanged; or modify the main proposition so that it logically connects with the participial phrase.

For example, the first sentence would be, either "As I was pleased, ... my first collection was," etc., or "Pleased with the 'Pilgrim's Progress,' I made my first collection John Bunyan's works."

For example, the first sentence could be, either "Since I was happy, ... my first collection was," etc., or "Happy with 'Pilgrim's Progress,' I put together my first collection of John Bunyan's works."

Exercise.—Rewrite the other four sentences so as to correct the careless use of the participial phrase.

Exercise.—Rewrite the other four sentences to fix the careless use of the participial phrase.


INFINITIVES.

Adverb between to and the infinitive.

451. There is a construction which is becoming more and more common among good writers,—the placing an adverb between to of the infinitive and the infinitive itself. The practice is condemned by many grammarians, while defended or excused by others. Standard writers often use it, and often, purposely or not, avoid it.

451. There's a style that’s becoming increasingly popular among good writers—putting an adverb between to and the infinitive. Many grammarians criticize this practice, while others defend or excuse it. Acclaimed writers often use it, and sometimes, whether intentionally or not, they steer clear of it.

The following two examples show the adverb before the infinitive:—

The following two examples show the adverb before the infinitive:—

The more common usage.

He handled it with such nicety of address as sufficiently to show that he fully understood the business.—Scott.

He managed it with such skillful communication that it clearly showed he fully understood the situation.—Scott.

It is a solemn, universal assertion, deeply to be kept in mind by all sects.—Ruskin.

It is a serious, universal statement that should be remembered by all groups.—Ruskin.

This is the more common arrangement; yet frequently the desire seems to be to get the adverb snugly against the infinitive, to modify it as closely and clearly as possible.

This is the more common setup; however, often the aim appears to be to place the adverb right next to the infinitive, to modify it as closely and clearly as possible.

Exercise.

In the following citations, see if the adverbs can be placed before or after the infinitive and still modify it as clearly as they now do:—

In the following citations, check if the adverbs can be placed before or after the infinitive and still modify it as clearly as they do now:—

1. There are, then, many things to be carefully considered, if a strike is to succeed.—Laughlin.

1. There are a lot of things to be carefully considered if a strike is going to be successful.—Laughlin.

2. That the mind may not have to go backwards and forwards in order to rightly connect them.—Herbert Spencer.

2. So the mind doesn't have to keep going back and forth to properly connect them.—Herbert Spencer.

3. It may be easier to bear along all the qualifications of an idea ... than to first imperfectly conceive such idea.—Id.

3. It might be simpler to deal with all the details of an idea ... than to imperfectly grasp that idea in the first place.—See above.

4. In works of art, this kind of grandeur, which consists in multitude, is to be very cautiously admitted.—Burke.

4. In art, this kind of grandeur, based on multitude, should be very carefully acknowledged.—Burke.

5. That virtue which requires to be ever guarded is scarcely worth the sentinel.—Goldsmith.

5. That virtue that needs to be constantly protected isn't really worth the watchman. —Goldsmith.

6. Burke said that such "little arts and devices" were not to be wholly condemned.—The Nation, No. 1533.

6. Burke said that such "little arts and devices" should not be completely condemned.—The Nation, No. 1533.

7. I wish the reader to clearly understand.—Ruskin.

I want the reader to clearly understand. —Ruskin.

8. Transactions which seem to be most widely separated from one another.—Dr. Blair.

8. Transactions that seem to be most widely separated from one another.—Dr. Blair.

9. Would earnestly advise them for their good to order this paper to be punctually served up.—Addison.

9. Would sincerely recommend that they ensure this paper is served up on time.—Addison.

10. A little sketch of his, in which a cannon ball is supposed to have just carried off the head of an aide-de-camp.—Trollope.

10. A small drawing of his, where a cannonball is supposed to have just taken off the head of an aide-de-camp.—Trollope.

11. The ladies seem to have been expressly created to form helps meet for such gentlemen.—Macaulay.

11. The ladies seem to have been expressly created to be companions suited for such gentlemen.—Macaulay.

12. Sufficient to disgust a people whose manners were beginning to be strongly tinctured with austerity.—Id.

12. Enough to turn off a people whose behavior was starting to be heavily influenced by seriousness.—See above.

13. The spirits, therefore, of those opposed to them seemed to be considerably damped by their continued success.—Scott.

13. The spirits of those against them seemed considerably dampened by their ongoing success.—Scott.


ADVERBS.

Position of only, even, etc.

452.A very careful writer will so place the modifiers of a verb that the reader will not mistake the meaning.

452.A careful writer will arrange the modifiers of a verb in a way that the reader clearly understands the meaning.

The rigid rule in such a case would be, to put the modifier in such a position that the reader not only can understand the meaning intended, but cannot misunderstand the thought. Now, when such adverbs as only, even, etc., are used, they are usually placed in a strictly correct position, if they modify single words; but they are often removed from the exact position, if they modify phrases or clauses: for example, from Irving, "The site is only to be traced by fragments of bricks, china, and earthenware." Here only modifies the phrase by fragments of bricks, etc., but it is placed before the infinitive. This misplacement of the adverb can be detected only by analysis of the sentence.

The strict rule in this situation is to place the modifier in a way that ensures the reader can not only grasp the intended meaning but also cannot misunderstand the thought. When using adverbs like only, even, etc., they are typically positioned correctly when modifying single words; however, they are often moved away from their exact position when modifying phrases or clauses. For example, in Irving's sentence, "The site is only to be traced by fragments of bricks, china, and earthenware," here only modifies the phrase by fragments of bricks, etc., but it appears before the infinitive. This misplacement of the adverb can only be identified through analysis of the sentence.

Exercise.

Tell what the adverb modifies in each quotation, and see if it is placed in the proper position:—

Tell what the adverb modifies in each quote, and check if it's in the right position:—

1. Only the name of one obscure epigrammatist has been embalmed for us in the verses of his rival.—Palgrave.

1. Only the name of one little-known epigram writer has been preserved for us in the lines of his competitor.—Palgrave.

2. Do you remember pea shooters? I think we only had them on going home for holidays.—Thackeray.

2. Do you remember pea shooters? I think we only had them when we were going home for the holidays.—Thackeray.

3. Irving could only live very modestly. He could only afford to keep one old horse.—Id.

3. Irving could only live very simply. He could only afford to keep one old horse.—Id.

4. The arrangement of this machinery could only be accounted for by supposing the motive power to have been steam.—Wendell Phillips.

4. The setup of this machinery can only be explained by assuming that the driving force was steam.—Wendell Phillips.

5. Such disputes can only be settled by arms.—Id.

5. Such disputes can only be resolved through conflict.—Id.

6. I have only noted one or two topics which I thought most likely to interest an American reader.—N. P. Willis.

6. I have only mentioned one or two topics that I thought would be most interesting to an American reader.—N.P. Willis.

7. The silence of the first night at the farmhouse,—stillness broken only by two whippoorwills.—Higginson.

7. The quiet of the first night at the farmhouse—stillness interrupted only by two whippoorwills.—Higginson.

8. My master, to avoid a crowd, would suffer only thirty people at a time to see me.—Swift.

8. My master, to avoid a crowd, would allow only thirty people at a time to see me.—Quick.

9. In relating these and the following laws, I would only be understood to mean the original institutions.—Id.

9. When discussing these and the following laws, I simply mean the original institutions.—Id.

10. The perfect loveliness of a woman's countenance can only consist in that majestic peace which is founded in the memory of happy and useful years.—Ruskin.

10. The true beauty of a woman's face can only come from the serene calm that is rooted in the recollection of joyful and meaningful years.—Ruskin.

11. In one of those celestial days it seems a poverty that we can only spend it once.—Emerson.

11. On one of those heavenly days, it feels like a shame that we can only experience it once.—Emerson.

12. My lord was only anxious as long as his wife's anxious face or behavior seemed to upbraid him.—Thackeray.

12. My lord only felt anxious as long as his wife's worried expression or actions seemed to blame him.—Thackeray.

13. He shouted in those clear, piercing tones that could be even heard among the roaring of the cannon.—Cooper.

13. He shouted in those clear, sharp tones that could be heard even over the booming of the cannons.—Cooper.

14. His suspicions were not even excited by the ominous face of Gérard.—Motley.

14. His suspicions weren't even stirred by Gérard's threatening expression.—Mixed.

15. During the whole course of his administration, he scarcely befriended a single man of genius.—Macaulay.

15. Throughout his entire time in office, he hardly made friends with any talented individuals.—Macaulay.

16. I never remember to have felt an event more deeply than his death.—Sydney Smith.

16. I don't think I've ever felt something as deeply as I did when he died.—Sydney Smith.

17. His last journey to Cannes, whence he was never destined to return.—Mrs. Grote.

17. His final trip to Cannes, from which he was never meant to return.—Mrs. Grote.

USE OF DOUBLE NEGATIVES.

The old usage.

453. In Old and Middle English, two negatives strengthened a negative idea; for example,—

453. In Old and Middle English, two negatives emphasized a negative idea; for example,—

He never yet no vile eye he said, In his entire life, to no one at all.
—Chaucer.

No sonne, were he never so old of yeares, might not marry. —Ascham.

No son, no matter how old he is, might not marry. —Ascham.

The first of these is equivalent to "He didn't never say no villainy in all his life to no manner of man,"—four negatives.

The first of these is equivalent to "He never said no to any wrongdoing in his life to any man,"—four negatives.

This idiom was common in the older stages of the language, and is still kept in vulgar English; as,—

This phrase was common in the earlier forms of the language and is still used in casual English; like,—

I tell you she ain' been nowhar ef she don' know we all.Page, in Ole Virginia.

I tell you she hasn't been anywhere if she doesn't know we all.Page, in Old Virginia.

There weren't no pies to equal hers.—Mrs. Stowe.

There were no pies that could match hers.—Mrs. Stowe.

Exceptional use.

There are sometimes found two negatives in modern English with a negative effect, when one of the negatives is a connective. This, however, is not common.

There are sometimes two negatives in modern English that create a negative effect when one of the negatives is a connector. However, this isn't common.

I never did see him again, nor never shall.—De Quincey.

I never saw him again, nor will I.—De Quincey.

However, I did not act so hastily, neither.—Defoe.

However, I did not act so hastily, neither. —Defoe.

The prosperity of no empire, nor the grandeur of no king, can so agreeably affect, etc.—Burke.

The wealth of no empire, nor the greatness of no king, can have such a pleasing impact, etc.—Burke.

Regular law of negative in modern English.

But, under the influence of Latin syntax, the usual way of regarding the question now is, that two negatives are equivalent to an affirmative, denying each other.

But, influenced by Latin syntax, the common view on the issue now is that two negatives are equivalent to an affirmative, canceling each other out.

Therefore, if two negatives are found together, it is a sign of ignorance or carelessness, or else a purpose to make an affirmative effect. In the latter case, one of the negatives is often a prefix; as infrequent, uncommon.

Therefore, if two negatives are found together, it's a sign of ignorance or carelessness, or maybe a way to create an affirmative effect. In the latter case, one of the negatives is often a prefix; like infrequent, uncommon.

Exercise.

Tell whether the two or more negatives are properly used in each of the following sentences, and why:—

Tell if the two or more negatives are used correctly in each of the following sentences, and explain why:—

1. The red men were not so infrequent visitors of the English settlements.—Hawthorne.

1. The Native Americans were common visitors to the English settlements.—Hawthorne.

2. "Huldy was so up to everything about the house, that the doctor didn't miss nothin' in a temporal way."—Mrs. Stowe.

2. "Huldy was so on top of everything around the house that the doctor didn't miss anything in a timely manner."—Mrs. Stowe.

3. Her younger sister was a wide-awake girl, who hadn't been to school for nothing.—Holmes.

3. Her younger sister was a sharp girl who hadn't gone to school for no reason.—Holmes.

4. You will find no battle which does not exhibit the most cautious circumspection.—Bayne.

4. You won't find any battle that doesn't show the utmost care and caution.—Bayne.

5. Not only could man not acquire such information, but ought not to labor after it.—Grote.

5. Not only should a person not try to gain such knowledge, but they shouldn't even strive for it.—Big.

6. There is no thoughtful man in America who would not consider a war with England the greatest of calamities.—Lowell.

6. There isn’t a reasonable person in America who wouldn’t view a war with England as the worst disaster.—Lowell.

7. In the execution of this task, there is no man who would not find it an arduous effort.—Hamilton.

7. While completing this task, there isn't anyone who wouldn't find it a tough effort.—Hamilton.

8. "A weapon," said the King, "well worthy to confer honor, nor has it been laid on an undeserving shoulder."—Scott.

8. "A weapon," said the King, "truly worthy of bringing honor, and it hasn't been placed on an unworthy person."—Scott.


CONJUNCTIONS.

And who, and which.

454. The sentences given in Secs. 419 and 420 on the connecting of pronouns with different expressions may again be referred to here, as the use of the conjunction, as well as of the pronoun, should be scrutinized.

454. The sentences mentioned in Secs. 419 and 420 about connecting pronouns with different expressions can be referred to again here, as the use of the conjunction and the pronoun should be examined closely.

Choice and proper position of correlatives.

455. The most frequent mistakes in using conjunctions are in handling correlatives, especially both ... and, neither ... nor, either ... or, not only ... but, not merely ... but (also).

455. The most common mistakes in using conjunctions happen when dealing with correlatives, especially both ... and, neither ... nor, either ... or, not only ... but, not merely ... but (also).

The following examples illustrate the correct use of correlatives as to both choice of words and position:—

The following examples show the proper use of correlatives in terms of word choice and placement:—

Whether at war or at peace, there we were, a standing menace to all earthly paradises of that kind.—Lowell.

Whether in war or in peace, there we were, a constant threat to all worldly paradises of that sort.—Lowell.

These idols of wood can neither hear nor feel.—Prescott.

These wooden idols can't hear or feel. —Prescott.

Both the common soldiery and their leaders and commanders lowered on each other as if their union had not been more essential than ever, not only to the success of their common cause, but to their own safety.—Scott.

Both the regular soldiers and their leaders and commanders looked down on each other as if their unity was not more vital than ever, not only for the success of their shared mission, but for their own safety.—Scott.

Things to be watched.

In these examples it will be noticed that nor, not or is the proper correlative of neither; and that all correlatives in a sentence ought to have corresponding positions: that is, if the last precedes a verb, the first ought to be placed before a verb; if the second precedes a phrase, the first should also. This is necessary to make the sentence clear and symmetrical.

In these examples, you'll notice that nor, not or, is the correct match for neither; and that all correlatives in a sentence should have corresponding positions: that is, if the last one comes before a verb, the first should also be placed before a verb; if the second one comes before a phrase, the first should do the same. This is necessary to make the sentence clear and balanced.

Correction.

In the sentence, "I am neither in spirits to enjoy it, or to reply to it," both of the above requirements are violated. The word neither in such a case had better be changed to not ... either,—"I am not in spirits either to enjoy it, or to reply to it."

In the sentence, "I am neither in the mood to enjoy it, or to reply to it," both of the above requirements are violated. The word neither in this case should be changed to not ... either,—"I am not in the mood either to enjoy it, or to reply to it."

Besides neither ... or, even neither ... nor is often changed to noteither ... or with advantage, as the negation is sometimes too far from the verb to which it belongs.

Besides neither ... or, even neither ... nor is often changed to noteither ... or with advantage, as the negation is sometimes too far from the verb to which it belongs.

A noun may be preceded by one of the correlatives, and an equivalent pronoun by the other. The sentence, "This loose and inaccurate manner of speaking has misled us both in the theory of taste and of morals," may be changed to "This loose ... misled us both in the theory of taste and in that of morals."

A noun can be preceded by one of the correlatives, and an equivalent pronoun by the other. The sentence, "This loose and inaccurate way of speaking has misled us both in the theory of taste and of morals," can be changed to "This loose ... misled us both in the theory of taste and in that of morals."

Exercise.

Correct the following sentences:—

Correct the following sentences:—

1. An ordinary man would neither have incurred the danger of succoring Essex, nor the disgrace of assailing him.—Macaulay.

1. An average person would not have put themselves at risk by helping Essex or faced the shame of attacking him.—Macaulay.

2. Those ogres will stab about and kill not only strangers, but they will outrage, murder, and chop up their own kin.—Thackeray.

2. Those ogres will stab around and kill not just strangers, but they will also assault, murder, and dismember their own family.—Thackeray.

3. In the course of his reading (which was neither pursued with that seriousness or that devout mind which such a study requires) the youth found himself, etc.—Id.

3. While he was reading (which he didn't do with the seriousness or focused mindset that this kind of study needs), the young man found himself, etc.—Same.

4. I could neither bear walking nor riding in a carriage over its pebbled streets.—Franklin.

4. I couldn’t stand walking or riding in a carriage on its pebbled streets.—Franklin.

5. Some exceptions, that can neither be dissembled nor eluded, render this mode of reasoning as indiscreet as it is superfluous.—Gibbon.

5. Some exceptions, which can neither be hidden nor avoided, make this way of reasoning as reckless as it is unnecessary.—Gibbon.

6. They will, too, not merely interest children, but grown-up persons.—Westminster Review.

6. They will not only interest children, but also adults.—Westminster Review.

7. I had even the satisfaction to see her lavish some kind looks upon my unfortunate son, which the other could neither extort by his fortune nor assiduity.—Goldsmith.

7. I even felt satisfied to see her give some kind looks to my unfortunate son, something that the other guy couldn't win with his wealth or persistence.—Goldsmith.

8. This was done probably to show that he was neither ashamed of his name or family.—Addison.

8. This was probably done to show that he wasn't ashamed of his name or family.—Addison.

Try and for try to.

456. Occasionally there is found the expression try and instead of the better authorized try to; as,—

456. Sometimes the phrase try and is used instead of the more accepted try to; as,—

We will try and avoid personalities altogether.—Thackeray.

We will try to avoid personalities altogether.—Thackeray.

Did any of you ever try and read "Blackmore's Poems"?—Id.

Did any of you ever try to read "Blackmore's Poems"?—Id.

Try and avoid the pronoun.—Bain.

Try to avoid the pronoun.—Bain.

We will try and get a clearer notion of them.—Ruskin.

We will try and get a clearer understanding of them.—Ruskin.

But what.

457. Instead of the subordinate conjunction that, but, or but that, or the negative relative but, we sometimes find the bulky and needless but what. Now, it is possible to use but what when what is a relative pronoun, as, "He never had any money but what he absolutely needed;" but in the following sentences what usurps the place of a conjunction.

457. Instead of using the conjunctions that, but, or but that, or the negative relative but, we sometimes see the awkward and unnecessary but what. It’s fine to use but what when what is a relative pronoun, like in the sentence, "He never had any money but what he absolutely needed;" but in the following sentences, what takes the place of a conjunction.

Exercise.

In the following sentences, substitute that, but, or but that for the words but what:—

In the following sentences, substitute that, but, or but that for the words but what:—

1. The doctor used to say 'twas her young heart, and I don't know but what he was right.—S. O. Jewett.

1. The doctor used to say it was her young heart, and I don't know but what he was right.—S. O. Jewett.

2. At the first stroke of the pickax it is ten to one but what you are taken up for a trespass.—Bulwer.

2. At the first swing of the pickaxe, there's a high chance you’ll be accused of trespassing.—Bulwer.

3. There are few persons of distinction but what can hold conversation in both languages.—Swift.

3. There are few distinguished people who can't hold a conversation in both languages.—Quick.

4. Who knows but what there might be English among those sun-browned half-naked masses of panting wretches?—Kingsley.

4. Who knows but what there might be English among those sun-browned half-naked masses of panting wretches?—Kingsley.

5. No little wound of the kind ever came to him but what he disclosed it at once.—Trollope.

5. No small wound of that kind ever came to him without him disclosing it right away.—Trollope.

6. They are not so distant from the camp of Saladin but what they might be in a moment surprised.—Scott.

6. They are not far from Saladin's camp that they couldn't be surprised at any moment.—Scott.


PREPOSITIONS.

458. As to the placing of a preposition after its object in certain cases, see Sec. 305.

458. For information on placing a preposition after its object in certain situations, refer to Sec. 305.

Between and among.

459. In the primary meaning of between and among there is a sharp distinction, as already seen in Sec. 313; but in Modern English the difference is not so marked.

459. In the basic meanings of between and among, there is a clear distinction, as already noted in Sec. 313; however, in Modern English, the difference is not as pronounced.

Between is used most often with two things only, but still it is frequently used in speaking of several objects, some relation or connection between two at a time being implied.

Between is usually used with just two things, but it's often used when talking about multiple objects, implying some connection or relationship between two at a time.

Among is used in the same way as amid (though not with exactly the same meaning), several objects being spoken of in the aggregate, no separation or division by twos being implied.

Among is used similarly to amid (though not with exactly the same meaning), referring to several objects collectively, without suggesting any separation or division into pairs.

Examples of the distinctive use of the two words:—

Examples of the unique use of the two words:—

Two things.

The contentions that arise between the parson and the squire.—Addison.

The arguments that come up between the priest and the landowner.—Addison.

We reckoned the improvements of the art of war among the triumphs of science.—Emerson.

We considered the advancements in warfare alongside the achievements of science.—Emerson.

Examples of the looser use of between:—

Examples of the more relaxed use of between:—

A number of things.

Natural objects affect us by the laws of that connection which Providence has established between certain motions of bodies.—Burke.

Natural objects influence us based on the laws of the connections that Providence has set up between certain movements of bodies.—Burke.

Hence the differences between men in natural endowment are insignificant in comparison with their common wealth.—Emerson.

Hence the differences between men in natural abilities are minor compared to their shared strengths.—Emerson.

They maintain a good correspondence between those wealthy societies of men that are divided from one another by seas and oceans.—Addison.

They keep in touch between those rich communities of people that are separated by seas and oceans.—Addison.

Looking up at its deep-pointed porches and the dark places between their pillars where there were statues once.—Ruskin

Looking up at its sharply pointed porches and the shadowy spots between their pillars where statues used to stand.—Ruskin

What have I, a soldier of the Cross, to do with recollections of war betwixt Christian nations?—Scott.

What do I, a soldier of the Cross, have to do with memories of war between Christian nations?—Scott.

Two groups or one and a group.

Also between may express relation or connection in speaking of two groups of objects, or one object and a group; as,—

Also between can show a relationship or connection when talking about two groups of objects, or one object and a group; for example,—

A council of war is going on beside the watch fire, between the three adventurers and the faithful Yeo.—Kingsley.

A war council is happening next to the campfire, between the three adventurers and their loyal companion Yeo.—Kingsley.

The great distinction between teachers sacred or literary,—between poets like Herbert and poets like Pope,—between philosophers like Spinoza, Kant, and Coleridge, and philosophers like Locke, Paley, Mackintosh, and Stewart, etc. —Emerson.

The big difference between teachers of religion and those of literature—between poets like Herbert and those like Pope—between philosophers like Spinoza, Kant, and Coleridge, and philosophers like Locke, Paley, Mackintosh, and Stewart, etc. —Emerson.

460. Certain words are followed by particular prepositions.

460. Some words are followed by specific prepositions.

Some of these words show by their composition what preposition should follow. Such are absolve, involve, different.

Some of these words indicate by their structure which preposition should follow. Such are absolve, involve, different.

Some of them have, by custom, come to take prepositions not in keeping with the original meaning of the words. Such are derogatory, averse.

Some of them have, by tradition, started using prepositions that don't align with the original meaning of the words. Such are derogatory, averse.

Many words take one preposition to express one meaning, and another to convey a different meaning; as, correspond, confer.

Many words require one preposition to express one meaning and a different one to convey another meaning; for example, correspond, confer.

And yet others may take several prepositions indifferently to express the same meaning.

And some people might use different prepositions interchangeably to convey the same meaning.

List I.: Words with particular prepositions.

461.

461.

LIST I.

  • Absolve from.
  • Abhorrent to.
  • Accord with.
  • Acquit of.
  • Affinity between.
  • Averse to.
  • Bestow on (upon).
  • Conform to.
  • Comply with.
  • Conversant with.
  • Dependent on (upon).
  • Different from.
  • Dissent from.
  • Derogatory to.
  • Deprive of.
  • Independent of.
  • Involve in.

"Different to" is frequently heard in spoken English in England, and sometimes creeps into standard books, but it is not good usage.

"Different to" is often heard in spoken English in England, and sometimes appears in standard books, but it's not considered proper usage.

List II.: Words taking different prepositions for different meanings.

462.

462.

LIST II.

  • Agree with (a person).
  • Agree to (a proposal).
  • Change for (a thing).
  • Change with (a person).
  • Change to (become).
  • Confer with (talk with).
  • Confer on (upon) (give to).
  • Confide in (trust in).
  • Confide to (intrust to).
  • Correspond with (write to).
  • Correspond to (a thing).
  • Differ from (note below).
  • Differ with (note below).
  • Disappointed in (a thing obtained).
  • Disappointed of (a thing not obtained).
  • Reconcile to (note below).
  • Reconcile with (note below).
  • A taste of (food).
  • A taste for (art, etc.).

"Correspond with" is sometimes used of things, as meaning to be in keeping with.

"Correspond with" is sometimes used regarding things, meaning to be in line with.

"Differ from" is used in speaking of unlikeness between things or persons; "differ from" and "differ with" are both used in speaking of persons disagreeing as to opinions.

"Differ from" is used when talking about how things or people are not the same; "differ from" and "differ with" are both used when discussing people who have disagreements about their opinions.

"Reconcile to" is used with the meaning of resigned to, as, "The exile became reconciled to his fate;" also of persons, in the sense of making friends with, as, "The king is reconciled to his minister." "Reconcile with" is used with the meaning of make to agree with, as, "The statement must be reconciled with his previous conduct."

"Reconcile to" is used to mean resigned to, as in, "The exile accepted his fate;" it can also refer to people becoming friends again, as in, "The king has made peace with his minister." "Reconcile with" is used to mean make compatible with, as in, "The statement must be aligned with his previous actions."

List III.: Words taking anyone of several prepositions for the same meaning.

463.

463.

LIST III.

  • Die by, die for, die from, die of, die with.
  • Expect of, expect from.
  • Part from, part with.

Illustrations of "die of," "die from," etc.:—

Illustrations of "die of," "die from," etc.:—

"Die of."

The author died of a fit of apoplexy.—Boswell.

The author died from a stroke.—Boswell.

People do not die of trifling little colds.—Austen

People don’t die from minor colds.—Austen

Fifteen officers died of fever in a day.—Macaulay.

Fifteen officers died from fever in one day.—Macaulay.

It would take me long to die of hunger.—G. Eliot.

It would take me a long time to die of hunger.—George Eliot.

She died of hard work, privation, and ill treatment.—Burnett.

She died from hard work, deprivation, and mistreatment.—Burnett.

"Die from."

She saw her husband at last literally die from hunger.—Bulwer.

She finally saw her husband literally die from hunger.—Bulwer.

He died at last without disease, simply from old age. —Athenæum.

He finally passed away without illness, just from old age. —Athenæum.

No one died from want at Longfeld.—Chambers' Journal.

No one died from lack of resources at Longfeld.—Chambers' Journal.

"Die with."

She would have been ready to die with shame.—G. Eliot.

She would have been ready to die from shame.—George Eliot.

I am positively dying with hunger.—Scott.

I'm completely starving. —Scott.

I thought the two Miss Flamboroughs would have died with laughing.—Goldsmith.

I thought the two Miss Flamboroughs would have died laughing.—Goldsmith.

I wish that the happiest here may not die with envy.—Pope.

I hope that those who are the happiest here don’t die with envy.—Pope.

"Die for." (in behalf of).

Take thought and die for Cæsar.—Shakespeare.

Consider and sacrifice for Cæsar.—Shakespeare.

One of them said he would die for her.—Goldsmith.

One of them said he would die for her.—Goldsmith.

It is a man of quality who dies for her.—Addison.

It is a man of quality who dies for her.—Addison.

"Die for." (because of).

Who, as Cervantes informs us, died for love of the fair Marcella.—Fielding.

Who, as Cervantes tells us, died for love of the beautiful Marcella.—Fielding.

Some officers had died for want of a morsel of bread.—Macaulay.

Some officers had died for lack of a bite of bread.—Macaulay.

"Die by." (material cause, instrument).

If I meet with any of 'em, they shall die by this hand. —Thackeray.

If I run into any of them, they will die by this hand. —Thackeray.

He must purge himself to the satisfaction of a vigilant tribunal or die by fire.—Macaulay.

He has to cleanse himself to satisfy a watchful court or face death by fire.—Macaulay.

He died by suicide before he completed his eighteenth year.—Shaw.

He died by suicide before he turned eighteen.—Shaw.

464. Illustrations of "expect of," "expect from:"—

464. Illustrations of "expecting of," "expecting from:"—

"Expect of."

What do I expect of Dublin?—Punch.

What do I expect from Dublin?—Punch.

That is more than I expected of you.—Scott.

That is more than I expected from you.—Scott.

Of Doctor P. nothing better was to be expected.—Poe.

Of Doctor P. nothing better was to be expected.—Poe

Not knowing what might be expected of men in general.—G. ELIOT.

Not knowing what might be expected of men in general.—G. ELIOT.

"Expect from."

She will expect more attention from you, as my friend.—Walpole.

She will expect more attention from you, as my friend.—Walpole.

There was a certain grace and decorum hardly to be expected from a man.—Macaulay.

There was a certain elegance and politeness that you wouldn't usually expect from a man.—Macaulay.

I have long expected something remarkable from you.—G. Eliot.

I have long expected something amazing from you.—George Eliot.

465. "Part with" is used with both persons and things, but "part from" is less often found in speaking of things.

465. "Part with" is used for both people and things, but "part from" is used less frequently when talking about things.

Illustrations of "part with," "part from:"—

Illustrations of "part with," "part from:"—

"Part with."

He was fond of everybody that he was used to, and hated to part with them.—Austen.

He liked everyone he was familiar with and hated to say goodbye to them.—Austen.

Cleveland was sorry to part with him.—Bulwer.

Cleveland was sad to lose him.—Bulwer.

I can part with my children for their good.—Dickens.

I can separate from my children for their benefit.—Dickens.

I part with all that grew so near my heart.—Waller.

I let go of everything that was so close to my heart.—Waller.

"Part from."

To part from you would be misery.—Marryat.

To part from you would be misery.—Marryat.

I have just seen her, just parted from her.—Bulwer.

I just saw her, just said goodbye to her.—Bulwer.

Burke parted from him with deep emotion.—Macaulay.

Burke separated from him with deep emotion.—Macaulay.

His precious bag, which he would by no means part from.—G. ELIOT.

His precious bag, which he would never part with. —G. ELIOT.

Kind in you, kind of you.

466. With words implying behavior or disposition, either of or in is used indifferently, as shown in the following quotations:—

466. With words suggesting behavior or attitude, either of or in can be used interchangeably, as illustrated in the following quotes:—

Of.

It was a little bad of you.—Trollope.

It was a bit bad of you.—Trollope.

How cruel of me!—Collins.

How cruel of me!—Collins.

He did not think it handsome of you.—Bulwer.

He didn’t think it was nice of you.—Bulwer.

But this is idle of you.—Tennyson.

But this is idle of you.

In.

Very natural in Mr. Hampden.—Carlyle.

Very natural in Mr. Hampden. —Carlyle.

It will be anything but shrewd in you.—Dickens.

It will be anything but smart in you. —Dickens.

That is very unreasonable in a person so young.—Beaconsfield.

That is very unreasonable in a person so young.—Beaconsfield.

I am wasting your whole morning—too bad in me.—Bulwer.

I’m wasting your entire morning—too bad for me.—Bulwer.

Miscellaneous Examples for Correction.

1. Can you imagine Indians or a semi-civilized people engaged on a work like the canal connecting the Mediterranean and the Red seas?

1. Can you picture Indians or a semi-civilized group working on something like the canal that connects the Mediterranean and the Red seas?

2. In the friction between an employer and workman, it is commonly said that his profits are high.

2. In the conflict between an employer and an employee, it's often said that their profits are high.

3. None of them are in any wise willing to give his life for the life of his chief.

3. None of them are at all willing to give their life for their leader's.

4. That which can be done with perfect convenience and without loss, is not always the thing that most needs to be done, or which we are most imperatively required to do.

4. Just because something can be done easily and without any cost doesn't mean it's the most necessary thing to do or the one we urgently have to do.

5. Art is neither to be achieved by effort of thinking, nor explained by accuracy of speaking.

5. Art can't be created just by thinking hard or explained perfectly with words.

6. To such as thee the fathers owe their fame.

6. The fathers owe their fame to people like you.

7. We tread upon the ancient granite that first divided the waters into a northern and southern ocean.

7. We walk on the ancient granite that first split the waters into a northern and southern ocean.

8. Thou tread'st, with seraphims, the vast abyss.

8. You walk, with angels, the vast emptiness.

9. Eustace had slipped off his long cloak, thrown it over Amyas's head, and ran up the alley.

9. Eustace had taken off his long cloak, thrown it over Amyas's head, and dashed up the alley.

10. This narrative, tedious perhaps, but which the story renders necessary, may serve to explain the state of intelligence betwixt the lovers.

10. This story, which might be a bit dull but is essential for understanding, can help explain the level of understanding between the lovers.

11. To the shame and eternal infamy of whomsoever shall turn back from the plow on which he hath laid his hand!

11. It’s a shame and a lasting disgrace for anyone who turns away from the work they’ve committed to!

12. The noise of vast cataracts, raging storms, thunder, or artillery, awake a great and awful sensation in the mind.

12. The sound of massive waterfalls, intense storms, thunder, or gunfire creates an overwhelming and deeply intense feeling in the mind.

13. The materials and ornaments ought neither to be white, nor green, nor yellow, nor blue, nor of a pale red.

13. The materials and decorations shouldn’t be white, green, yellow, blue, or a light red.

14. This does not prove that an idea of use and beauty are the same thing, or that they are any way dependent on each other.

14. This doesn’t prove that the idea of usefulness and beauty are the same thing or that they are in any way reliant on each other.

15.

15.

If I were anything other than what I am,
I would only wish for him.

16. But every man may know, and most of us do know, what is a just and unjust act.

16. But everyone can tell, and most of us do know, what is a fair and unfair action.

17. You have seen Cassio and she together.

17. You’ve seen Cassio and her together.

18. We shall shortly see which is the fittest object of scorn, you or me.

18. We’ll soon find out who deserves scorn more, you or me.

19. Richard glared round him with an eye that seemed to seek an enemy, and from which the angry nobles shrunk appalled.

19. Richard glared around him with a gaze that seemed to look for an enemy, making the frightened nobles shrink back in shock.

20. It comes to whomsoever will put off what is foreign and proud.

20. It goes to anyone who will let go of what's foreign and arrogant.

21. The difference between the just and unjust procedure does not lie in the number of men hired, but in the price paid to them.

21. The difference between a fair and unfair process isn't about how many people are hired, but rather about the amount of money paid to them.

22. The effect of proportion and fitness, so far at least as they proceed from a mere consideration of the work itself, produce approbation, the acquiescence of the understanding.

22. The impact of proportion and suitability, at least as they arise from simply examining the work itself, create approval, the acceptance of the mind.

23. When the glass or liquor are transparent, the light is sometimes softened in the passage.

23. When the glass or liquor is clear, the light is sometimes softened as it passes through.

24. For there nor yew nor cypress spread their gloom.

24. For there neither yew nor cypress spreads their gloom.

25. Every one of these letters are in my name.

25. All these letters are in my name.

26. Neither of them are remarkable for precision.

26. Neither of them is known for being precise.

27. Squares, triangles, and other angular figures, are neither beautiful to the sight nor feeling.

27. Squares, triangles, and other angular shapes aren’t pleasing to the eye or to the touch.

28. There is not one in a thousand of these human souls that cares to think where this estate is, or how beautiful it is, or what kind of life they are to lead in it.

28. There isn’t even one in a thousand of these human souls who cares to think about where this place is, how beautiful it is, or what kind of life they will lead here.

29. Dryden and Rowe's manner are quite out of fashion.

29. Dryden and Rowe's style is totally outdated.

30. We were only permitted to stop for refreshment once.

30. We were only allowed to take a break for refreshments once.

31. The sight of the manner in which the meals were served were enough to turn our stomach.

31. The way the meals were served was enough to make us feel sick.

32. The moody and savage state of mind of the sullen and ambitious man are admirably drawn.

32. The moody and aggressive mindset of the gloomy yet driven man is portrayed excellently.

33. Surely none of our readers are so unfortunate as not to know some man or woman who carry this atmosphere of peace and good-will about with them. (Sec. 411.)

33. Surely none of our readers are so unfortunate as not to know some man or woman who carries this vibe of peace and goodwill with them. (Sec. 411.)

34. Friday, whom he thinks would be better than a dog, and almost as good as a pony.

34. Friday, who he thinks would be better than a dog, and almost as good as a pony.

35. That night every man of the boat's crew, save Amyas, were down with raging fever.

35. That night, every member of the boat's crew, except for Amyas, was suffering from a severe fever.

36. These kind of books fill up the long tapestry of history with little bits of detail which give human interest to it.

36. These kinds of books fill the long tapestry of history with little details that add human interest to it.

37. I never remember the heather so rich and abundant.

37. I don’t remember the heather being so vibrant and plentiful.

38. These are scattered along the coast for several hundred miles, in conditions of life that seem forbidding enough, but which are accepted without complaint by the inhabitants themselves.

38. These are spread along the coast for several hundred miles, in conditions that seem pretty harsh, but which the locals accept without any complaints.

39. Between each was an interval where lay a musket.

39. In between each one was a gap where a musket rested.

40. He had four children, and it was confidently expected that they would receive a fortune of at least $200,000 between them.

40. He had four kids, and everyone was sure they would inherit at least $200,000 total.

FOOTNOTES:

FOOTNOTES:

[1] More for convenience than for absolute accuracy, the stages of our language have been roughly divided into three:—

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ For convenience rather than precise accuracy, we can generally break down the stages of our language into three:—

(1) Old English (with Anglo-Saxon) down to the twelfth century.

(1) Old English (including Anglo-Saxon) until the twelfth century.

(2) Middle English, from about the twelfth century to the sixteenth century.

(2) Middle English, from about the twelfth century to the sixteenth century.

(3) Modern English, from about 1500 to the present time.

(3) Modern English, from around 1500 to the present.


INDEX.

THE NUMBERS REFER TO PAGES.

PAGE NUMBERS.

A, origin of, 119.
syntax of, 310.
uses of, 124.

Absolute, nominative, 47.

Abstract nouns, 20.
with article, 25, 124.

Active voice, 133.

Address, nominative of, 47.

Adjective clauses, 260.

Adjective pronouns, demonstrative, 90.
distinguished from adjectives, 89.
distributive, 91.
numeral, 92.

Adjectives, adverbs used as, 116.
as complements, 239.
comparison of, 107.
definition of, 98.
demonstrative, 102.
from nouns, used as nouns, 27.
function of, 97.
how to parse, 115, 116.
in predicate, 239.
not compared, 109.
of quality, 99.
of quantity, 101.
ordinal, 103.
plural of, 106.
pronominal, 104.
syntax of, 303.

Adverbial clauses, 262.

Adverbial objective, 48, 242.

Adverbs, between to and infinitive, 323.
classes of, 185, 187.
definition of, 184.
distinguished from adjectives, 190.
how to parse, 191.
position of, in sentence, 325.
same form as adjectives, 190.
syntax of, 325.
used as adjectives, 116.
used as nouns, 27.
what they modify, 183.

Adversative conjunction, 194.

After, uses of, 114, 195, 207.

Against, uses of, 207.

Agreement, kinds of, 275.
of adjective with noun, 303.
of personal pronoun with antecedent, 287.
of relative pronoun with antecedent, 291.
of verb with subject, 148, 316.

All, syntax of, 302.

Alms, 42.

Alternative conjunctions, 194, 328.

Among, between, 207, 331.

An. See A.

Anacoluthon with which, 295.

Analysis, definition of, 231.
of complex sentences, 264.
of compound sentences, 271.
of simple sentences, 252.

And who, and which, 296.

Antecedent, agreement of pronoun and. See Agreement.
definition of, 74.
of it, 67.
of personal pronouns, 74, 287.
of which, 79.

Any, as adjective, 101.
as pronoun, 90.
syntax of, 300.

Apostrophe in possessive, 51.

Apposition, words in, 47, 49, 67, 240.

Are, derivation of, 150.

Arrangement in syntax, 275.

Articles, definite, 120.
definition of, 120.
how to parse, 127.
indefinite, 124.
syntax of, 309.

As, after same, 294.
uses of, 84, 225.

As if, as though, 198.

At, uses of, 208.

Auxiliary verbs, 148.


Bad, comparison of, 110.

Be, conjugation of, 149.
uses of, 150.

Better, best, 110, 111.

Between. See Among.

Brethren, 39.

Bridegroom, 37.

But, uses of, 84, 224.
with nominative of pronoun, 283.

But what, 330.

By, uses of, 210.


Can, could, 161.

Case, definition of, 46.

Case, double possessive, of nouns, 54.
of pronouns, 64.
forms, number of, in Old and Modern English, 46.
nominative, of nouns, 47.
of pronouns, 62, 279.
objective, of nouns, 48.
of pronouns, 66, 279.
possessive, of nouns, 49, 278.
of pronouns, 63.
syntax of, 278.

Cause, clauses of, 262.
conjunctions of, 194, 195.

Cherub, plurals of, 45.

Children, 39.

Clause, adjective, 260.
adverb, 262.
definition of, 257.
kinds of, 257.
noun, 258.

Cleave, forms of, 158.

Clomb, 157.

Cloths, clothes, 43.

Collective nouns, 18.
syntax of, and verb, 312, 315.

Colloquial English, 12.

Common nouns, 18.
derived from material, 24.
derived from proper, 23.

Comparative and superlative, double, 113, 307.
syntax of, 307.

Comparison, defective, 111.
definition of, 108.
degrees of, 108.
irregular, 110.
of adjectives, 107.
of adverbs, 189.
syntax of, 305.

Complement of predicate, 239.

Complementary infinitive, 248.

Complex sentence, analysis of, 264.
definition of, 257.

Compound nouns, plural of, 43.
possessive of, 53.

Compound predicate and subject, 244.

Compound sentence, 268.
analysis of, 271.

Concessive clause, in analysis, 263.
with subjunctive, 143.

Concord. See Agreement.

Conditional clause, in analysis, 263.
with subjunctive, 138.

Conditional conjunctions, 196.

Conditional sentences, 139.

Conjugation, definition of, 149.
of be, 149.
of other verbs, 151.

Conjunctions, and other parts of speech, same words, 195, 207.
coördinate, 194.
correlative, 194.
definition of, 193.
how to parse, 199.
subordinate, 195.
syntax of, 328.

Conjunctive adverbs, 188.

Conjunctive pronoun. See Relative pronoun.

Contracted sentences, analysis of, 255.

Coördinate clauses, 269.

Coördinate conjunctions. See Conjunctions.

Coördinating vs. restrictive use of relative pronouns, 289.

Copulative conjunction, 194.

Could. See Can.


Dative case, in Old English, replaced by objective, 66.

Declarative sentence, 231.

Declension of interrogative pronouns, 73.

Declension, of nouns, 51.
of personal pronouns, 60.
of relative pronouns, 80.

Defective verbs, 160.

Definite article. See Articles.

Definite tenses, 148, 152.

Degree, adverbs of, 185.

Degrees. See Comparison.

Demonstrative adjectives, 102.
syntax of, 303.

Demonstrative pronouns, 90.

Dependent clause. See Subordinate clause.

Descriptive adjectives, 99.

Descriptive use of nouns, 26.

Dice, dies, 43.

Die by, for, from, of, with, 333.

Direct discourse, 320.

Direct object, vs. indirect, 48, 242.
retained with passive verb, 242.

Distributive adjectives, 102.
syntax of, 287, 315.

Distributive pronouns, 91.
syntax of, 288, 300.

Double comparative. See Comparative.

Double possessive. See Case.

Drake, duck, 35.

Drank, drunk, 158.


Each, adjective, 102.
pronoun, 90, 92.
syntax of, 287.

Each other, one another, 92, 299.

Eat (ĕt), 158.

Eaves, 42.

Either, as adjective, 102.
syntax of, 287.
as conjunction, 194.
syntax of, 328.
as pronoun, 90, 92.
syntax of, 300.

Elder, older, 110, 112.

Elements of the sentence, 234, 257.

Ellipsis, a source of error in pronouns, 280.
in complex sentence, 255.

'Em, origin of, 62.

Empress, 34.

-En, added to plural, 39.
feminine suffix, 32.
plural suffix, original, 38.

English, literary, spoken, vulgar, 12.
periods of, 33.

Enlargement of predicate, 241.
of subject, object, complement, 240.

-Es original of possessive ending, 51.
plural suffix, 40.

-Ess, feminine suffix, 33.

Every, adjective, 102.
syntax of, 287.

Expect of, expect from, 334.

Expected to have gone, etc., 319.


Factitive object, 48, 235.

Farther, further, 110, 112, 189.

Feminine, 30.

Few, a few, 126.

First, 103, 112.

First two, two first, etc., 308.

Fish, fishes, 43.

For, redundant, with infinitive, used as a noun, 212, 238.
uses of, 211.

Foreign plurals, 45.

Former, the, adjective, 102.
pronoun, 91.

From, uses of, 212.

Further. See Farther.

Future tense, 147, 152.

Future perfect, 148, 152.


Gander, goose, 36.

Gender, "common gender," 31.
definition of, 30.
distinguished from sex, 30.
in English, as compared with other languages, 29.
modes of marking, in nouns, 32.
of personal pronouns, 60.
of relative pronouns, 80.

Genii, geniuses, 43.

Gerund, distinguished from participle and verbal noun, 177.
forms of, 176.
in syntax, possessive case with, 285.

Girl, 35.

Got, 159.

Government, definition of, kinds of, 275.

Grammar, basis of, 12.
definition of, 12.
divisions of, 13.
opinions on, 9.
province of, 10.


H, an before, 120.

Had better, had rather, 175.

Hanged, hung, 159.

He, she, it, 61.

His for its, 61.

Husband, 36.


I, personal pronoun, 60.

Imperative mood, 144.
of first person, 145.

Imperative sentence, 231.

Imperfect participle, 173.

Indefinite adjective, 101.

Indefinite article. See Articles.

Indefinite pronoun, 93.

Indefinite use of you, your, 67.

Independent clause, 257.

Independent elements, 245.

Indexes, indices, 43.

Indicative mood, uses of, 136.

Indirect discourse, 320.

Indirect object. See Direct object.

Indirect questions. See Questions.

Infinitive, active, with passive meaning, 176.
not a mood, 153.
syntax of, 319, 323.
uses of, 248.

-Ing words, summary of, 178.

Interjections, 227.

Interrogative adjectives, 105.

Interrogative adverbs, 188.

Interrogative pronouns, 72.
declension of, 73.
in indirect questions, 85.
syntax of, 283.

Interrogative sentence, 231, 233.

Intransitive verbs, 131.
made transitive, 131.

Irregularities in syntax, 276.

Irregularly compared adjectives, 110.
adverbs, 189.

It, uses of, 67.

"It was me," etc., 63, 281.

Its, history of, 61.


Kind, these kind, etc., 303.

Kine, double plural, 39.

King, queen, 36.


Lady, lord, 36.

Last, latest, 110, 113.

Latter, the, adjective, 102, 113.
pronoun, 91.

Lay, lie, 170.

Less, lesser, 110.

Lie. See Lay.

Like, syntax of, 227.
uses of, 226.

Literary English, 12.

Little, a little, 126.

Logic vs. form, in syntax, 276.

Logical subject and predicate, 245.

Lord. See Lady.

-Ly, words in, 190.


Madam, 36.

Manner, adverbs of, 185, 188.
conjunctions of, 195.

Many, comparison of, 110, 112.

Many a, 126.

Mapping out sentences, 256, 265.

Mare, 36.

Master, mistress, 34.

May, might, 160.

Means, construction of, 41.

Mighty as adverb, 187.

Mine, of mine, 64.

Modifier, adverb, position of, 325.

Modifiers. See Enlargement.

Mood, definition of, 135.
imperative, 144.
indicative, 136, 137.
subjunctive, 137-144.

-Most, in superlatives, 113, 114, 189.

Much, comparison of, 110, 112, 189.

Must, 161.


Near, nearer, nigh, etc., 110, 112.

Negative, double, 326.

Neither, adjective, 102.
syntax of, 287.
conjunction, 194.
syntax of, 328.
pronoun, 90, 92.
syntax of, 300.

Neuter nouns, definition of, 30.
or gender nouns, according to use, 30.
two kinds of, 32.

News, 41.

No in analysis, 246.

Nominative. See Case.

None, syntax of, 301.

Nor, 194, 328.

Not a, etc. 126.

Noun clause, 258.

Nouns, 17.
abstract, 20.
become half abstract, 25, 124.
become proper, 25.
formation of, 21.
case of, 46.
collective, 19.
common, 18.
definition of, 17.
descriptive, 26.
gender of, 29.
how to parse, 56.
kinds of, 17
material, 19.
become class nouns, 24, 125.
neuter, used as gender nouns, 30.
number in, 38.
once singular, now plural, 42.
other words used as, 27.
plural, how formed, 38-41.
of abstract, 41
of compound, etc. 43.
of foreign, 45.
of letters and figures, 46.
of material, 41.
of proper, 41.
same as singular, 39.
two forms of, 42
with titles, 44.
proper, 18.
become common, 23.
syntax of, 278.
use of possessive form of, 278, 285.
with definite article, 121.
with different meaning in plural, 42.
with indefinite article, 124.

Nouns, with no singular, 42.
with one plural, two meanings, 43.
with plural form, singular meaning, 41.
with singular or plural construction, plural form, 41.

Now as conjunction, 195, 196.

Number, definition of, etc., in nouns.
See Nouns.
in adjectives, 106.
in pronouns, personal, 60.
in verbs, 148.

Numeral adjectives, definite, 101.
distributive, 102.
indefinite, 101.

Numeral pronouns, 92.


Object, adverbial, 48.
definition of, 48.
direct and indirect, 48.
in analysis, 235.
of preposition. See Preposition.
modifiers of, 240.
retained with passive verb, 242.

Objective case, adverbial, dative, 48, 242.
in spoken English, 281.
instead of nominative, 279.
nominative instead of, 282.
of nouns, 48.
of pronouns, 66.
syntax of, 279.

Of, uses of, 213.

Older. See Elder.

Omission of relative pronoun, 87, 293.

On, upon, uses of, 216.

One, definite numeral adjective, 101.
indefinite pronoun, 94.
possessive of, 93

One another. See Each other.

One (the), the other, as adjective, 103.
as pronoun, 91.

Only, as conjunction, 194.
position of, as adverb, 325

Order, a part of syntax, 275.
inverted, in analysis, 233, 237.

Ordinal adjectives, treatment of, 103.

Other with comparatives, 306.

Ought, 161.

Our, ours, 64.

Ourself, 69.

Oxen, 38.


Pains, 41.

Parsing, models for, 56, 117.
of adjectives, 115, 116.
of adverbs, 191.
of articles, 127.
of conjunctions, 199.
of nouns, 56.
of prepositions, 219.
of pronouns, 95.
of relatives, 80.
of verb phrases, 180.
of verbals, 181.
of verbs, 179.
some idioms not parsed, 56.
what it is, 56.

Part from, part with, 335.

Participial adjective, 100.

Participial phrase, 247.

Participle, definition of, 172.
distinguished from other -ing words, 177.
forms of, 174.
kinds of, 173.
syntax of, 322.
uses of, 150, 172.

Parts of speech, article included in, 119.
words used as various, 27, 28.

Passive voice, 134.

Peas, pease, 43.

Pence, pennies, 43.

Person, agreement of verb and subject in, 317.
of nouns, 59.
of pronouns, 59.
of verbs, 148.

Personal pronoun, absolute use of, 63.
agreement of, with antecedent, 287.
as predicate nominative, 281.
case of, 62.
compound, or reflexive, 69.
uses of, 70.
definition of, 59.
double possessive of, 64.
'em and them, 62.
history of, 61.
objective of, for nominative in spoken English, 63, 281.
syntax of, 281.
table of, 60.
triple possessive of, 64.
uses of it, 67.

Personification, of abstract nouns, 25.
of other nouns, 37.

Phrase, definition of, 236.
kinds of, 236.
infinitive, 248.
participial, 247.
prepositional, 247.

Place, adverbs of, 185, 188.
conjunctions of, 195.
prepositions of, 206.

Plural, of adjectives, 106.
syntax of, 303.
of nouns. See Nouns.
of pronouns, 60, 61.

Politics, singular or plural, 41.

Positive degree. See Comparison.

Possessive, appositional, of nouns, 49.
as antecedent of relative, 285.
double, of nouns, 54.
double, of pronouns. See Personal pronoun.
objective and subjective, 50.
of compound nouns, 53.
of indefinite pronoun, 303.
omission of s in singular, 52.
origin of 's, 51.
syntax of, 278.
with modified noun omitted, 53.
with two objects, 278.

Predicate, complement of, 235.
complete, 245.
definition of, 232.
logical vs. simple, 245.
modifiers of, 241.

Prefixes, gender shown by, 32.

Prepositions, certain, with certain words, 332.
classification of, 206.
definition of, 203.
followed by possessive case, 54, 64.
by nominative case, 283.
how to parse, 219.
objects of, 203.
position of, 202.
relations expressed by certain, 208.
same words as other parts of speech, 187, 195, 207.
syntax of, 331.
uses of, 129, 132, 205.
various, with same meaning, 333.

Present tense used as future, 147.

Pretty as adverb, 186.

Pronominal adjectives, interrogative, 105.
relative, 104.
what, exclamatory, 105.

Pronouns, 58.
adjective, 89.
all, singular and plural, 302.
any, usually plural, 300.
each other, one another, 299.
either, neither, with verbs, 300.
none, usually plural, 301.
somebody else's, 303.
definition of, 58.
how to parse, 95.
indefinite, 93.
interrogative, 72.
who as objective, 283.
personal, 59.
after than, as, 280.
antecedents of, 287.
nominative and objective, forms of, 279.
nominative form of, after but, 284.
objective form of, for predicate nominative, 281.
objective form of, in exclamations, 282.
possessive form of, as antecedent of relative, 285.
possessive form of, with gerund, 286.
relative, 74.
agreement of, with antecedent, 291.
anacoluthon with which, 295.
and who, and which, 296.
as, that, who, and which after same, 295.
how to parse, 80.
omission of, 87, 293.
restrictive and unrestrictive, 289.
two relatives, same antecedent, 297.
syntax of, 279.
usefulness of, 58.

Proper nouns. See Nouns.

Purpose, clauses of, 263.
conjunctions of, 195.

Quality, adjectives of, 99.

Quantity, adjectives of, 101.

Questions, direct and indirect, adverbs in, 188.
pronominal adjectives in, 105.
pronouns in, 85.
indirect, subjunctive in, 142.

Quotations. See Direct discourse.


Rank, adjectives of same and different, 115.

Rather, 189.

Reflexive pronouns, history of, 69.
how formed, 69.

Reflexive use of personal pronoun, 68.

Relative pronoun, 74.
but and as, 84.
distinguished from interrogative, in indirect questions, 85.
function of, 74.
indefinite or compound, 83.
omission of, 87, 293.
restrictive use of, 289.
syntax of, 289.
use of, 74.

Result, clauses of, 263.
conjunctions of, 196.

Retained object, 242.

Riches, 42.


S, plural suffix, 40.

'S, possessive ending, 51.

Same as, that, who, which, 294.

Sat, sate, 159.

Seeing, conjunction, 195, 196.

Self in reflexive pronoun, 69.

Sentences, analysis of complex, 26
of compound, 271.
of elliptical, 255.
of simple, 252.
complex in form, simple in effect, 259.

Sentences, definition of, 231.
kinds of, 231.

Sequence of tenses, 319.

Set, sit, 170.

Sex and gender, 29.

Shall, should, will, would, 162.

Shear, forms of, 159.

Shot, shots, 43.

Simple sentence. See Sentences.

Singular number, 38.

Sir, 36.

Somebody else's, etc., 303.

Sort, these sort, 303.

Spelling becoming phonetic in verbs, 169.

Spinster, 33.

Split infinitive, 323.

Spoken English, 12.

-Ster, feminine suffix, use of, in Middle English, 32.
in Modern English, 33.

Subject, complete, 245.
definition of, 233.
grammatical vs. logical, 67, 245, 258.
modifiers of, 240.
things used as, 237, 258.

Subjunctive mood, definition of, 137.
gradual disuse of, 144.
uses of, in literary English, 138.
in spoken English, 144.

Subordinate clause, 257.
adjective, 260.
adverb, 262.
definition of, 257.
how to distinguish, 270.
kinds of, 257.
noun, 258.
other names for, 257.

Such as adverb, 186.

Such a, 126.

Suffix -en. See -En.
-s, -es, 38.

Suffixes, foreign, 33.

Superlative degree, double, 307.
in meaning, not in form, 107.
not suggesting comparison, 109.
of adjectives, 108.
of adverbs, 189.
syntax of, 306.
with two objects, 306.

Syntax, basis of, 277.
definition of, 275.
in English not same as in classical languages, 275.

Tense, definition of, 147.

Tenses, definite, meaning of, 148.
in Modern English, made up of auxiliaries, 147.
number of, in Old English, 147.
sequence of, 319.
table of, 152.

Than me, than whom, 280.

That, omission of, when subject, 88.
when object, 87.
relative, restrictive, and coördinating, 289, 290.
that ... and which, 297.
uses of, 222.

That, this, as adjectives, 106.
as adverbs, 186.
history of plural of, 106.

The, as article, 120.
as adverb, 123, 186.
history of, 119.
syntax of, 309.

Their, they, 61.

Then, "the then king," etc., 116.

There introductory, 191.

These kind, syntax of. See Kind.

These, this, those. See That, history of.

Thou, thy, thee, uses of, 61.

Time, adverbs of, 185, 188.
conjunctions of, 195.
prepositions of, 207.

To, before infinitive, 175.
in exclamations, 175.
omitted with certain verbs, 175.
uses of, as preposition, 217.

T'other, the tother, 119.

-Trix, feminine suffix, 33.

Try and, try to, 330.

Two first, first two, etc., 308.

Under, adjective, 114.

Upon, uses of. See On.

Upper, 114.

Utter, uttermost, 111, 114.

Verb phrases, 128.
parsing of, 180.

Verbal noun, 20.
distinguished from other -ing words, 21, 173.

Verbals, cleft infinitive, 323.
gerund, 176.
how to parse, 181.
infinitive, 174, 248.
kinds of, 172.
participle, 172.
carelessly used, 322.
uses of, in analysis, 247.
syntax of, 322.

Verbs, agreement of, with subject in number, 312-316.
in person, 317.
auxiliary, 148.
conjugation of, 149.
defective, 160.
definition of, 129.
how to parse, 179.
in indirect discourse, 320.
intransitive, made transitive, 131.
mood of, 135.
of incomplete predication, 150, 236.
passive form, active meaning, 151.
person and number of, 148.
retained object with passive, 242.
strong, definition of, 154.
remarks on certain, 157.
table of, 155.
syntax of, 312.
tense of, 147.
sequence of, 319.
transitive and intransitive, 130.
voice of, 133.
weak, definition of, 154.
spelling of, 169.
table of irregular, 167.

Vixen, 33.

Vocative nominative, 47.
in analysis, 245.

Voice, active, 133.
passive, 134.

Vowel change, past tense of verbs formed by, 154.
plural formed by, 39.

Vulgar English, 12.

Weak verbs, regular, irregular, 167.
spelling of, becoming phonetic, 169.

Went, 159.

What, uses of, 223.
but what, 330.
what a, 105. 126.

Whereby, whereto, etc., 85.

Whether, conjunction, 194.
interrogative pronoun, 72.

Which, antecedent of, 79.
as adjective, 104, 105.
as relative pronoun, 75.
in indirect questions, 85.
indefinite relative, 83.
interrogative pronoun in direct questions, 72.
syntax of, 295-299.
whose, possessive of, 78.

Who, as relative, 75.
in direct questions, 72.
in indirect questions, 85.
indefinite relative, 83.
objective, in spoken English, 73.
referring to animals, 77.
syntax of, 296, 299.

Widower, 37.

Wife, 36.

Will, would. See Shall.

Witch, wizard, 36.

With, uses of, 218.

Woman, 32.

Words in -ing, 178.
in -ly, 190.

Worse, worser, 111.


Y, plural of nouns ending in. 40.

Yes in analysis, 246.

Yon, yonder, 103.

You, singular and plural, 61.

Yours, of yours, 64.

Yourself, yourselves, 70.

A, origin of, 119.
syntax of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
uses of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Absolute, nominative, 47.

Abstract nouns, 20.
with article, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Active voice, 133.

Address, nominative of, 47.

Adjective clauses, 260.

Adjective pronouns, demonstrative, 90.
distinguished from adjectives, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
distributive, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
numeral, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Adjectives, adverbs used as, 116.
as additions, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
comparison of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
definition of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
demonstrative, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
from nouns, used as nouns, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
function of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
how to interpret, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
in predicate, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
not compared, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
of quality, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
of quantity, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
ordinal, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
plural of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
pronominal, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
syntax of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Adverbial clauses, 262.

Adverbial objective, 48, 242.

Adverbs, between to and infinitive, 323.
classes of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
definition of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
distinguished from adjectives, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
how to analyze, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
position in sentence, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
same form as adjectives, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
syntax of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
used as adjectives, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
used as nouns, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
what they change, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Adversative conjunction, 194.

After, uses of, 114, 195, 207.

Against, uses of, 207.

Agreement, kinds of, 275.
of adjective with noun, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
of personal pronoun with antecedent, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
of relative pronoun with antecedent, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
of verb with subject, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

All, syntax of, 302.

Alms, 42.

Alternative conjunctions, 194, 328.

Among, between, 207, 331.

An. See A.

Anacoluthon with which, 295.

Analysis, definition of, 231.
of complex sentences, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
of compound sentences, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
of simple sentences, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

And who, and which, 296.

Antecedent, agreement of pronoun and. See Agreement.
definition of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
of it, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
of personal pronouns, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
of which, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Any, as adjective, 101.
as pronoun, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
syntax of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Apostrophe in possessive, 51.

Apposition, words in, 47, 49, 67, 240.

Are, derivation of, 150.

Arrangement in syntax, 275.

Articles, definite, 120.
definition of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
how to analyze, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
indefinite, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
syntax of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

As, after same, 294.
uses of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

As if, as though, 198.

At, uses of, 208.

Auxiliary verbs, 148.


Bad, comparison of, 110.

Be, conjugation of, 149.
uses of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Better, best, 110, 111.

Between. See Among.

Brethren, 39.

Bridegroom, 37.

But, uses of, 84, 224.
with nominative pronoun, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

But what, 330.

By, uses of, 210.


Can, could, 161.

Case, definition of, 46.

Case, double possessive, of nouns, 54.
of pronouns, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
forms, quantity of, in Old and Modern English, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
nominative case of nouns, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
of pronouns, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
objective, of nouns, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
of pronouns, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
possessive nouns, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
of pronouns, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
syntax of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Cause, clauses of, 262.
conjunctions of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Cherub, plurals of, 45.

Children, 39.

Clause, adjective, 260.
adverb, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
definition of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
types of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
noun, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Cleave, forms of, 158.

Clomb, 157.

Cloths, clothes, 43.

Collective nouns, 18.
syntax of, and verb, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Colloquial English, 12.

Common nouns, 18.
made from material, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
derived from proper, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Comparative and superlative, double, 113, 307.
syntax of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Comparison, defective, 111.
definition of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
degrees of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
irregular, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
of adjectives, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
of adverbs, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
syntax of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Complement of predicate, 239.

Complementary infinitive, 248.

Complex sentence, analysis of, 264.
definition of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Compound nouns, plural of, 43.
possessive of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Compound predicate and subject, 244.

Compound sentence, 268.
analysis of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Concessive clause, in analysis, 263.
with subjunctive, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Concord. See Agreement.

Conditional clause, in analysis, 263.
with subjunctive, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Conditional conjunctions, 196.

Conditional sentences, 139.

Conjugation, definition of, 149.
of be, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
of other verbs, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Conjunctions, and other parts of speech, same words, 195, 207.
coordinate, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
correlative, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
definition of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
how to analyze, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
employee, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
syntax of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Conjunctive adverbs, 188.

Conjunctive pronoun. See Relative pronoun.

Contracted sentences, analysis of, 255.

Coördinate clauses, 269.

Coördinate conjunctions. See Conjunctions.

Coördinating vs. restrictive use of relative pronouns, 289.

Copulative conjunction, 194.

Could. See Can.


Dative case, in Old English, replaced by objective, 66.

Declarative sentence, 231.

Declension of interrogative pronouns, 73.

Declension, of nouns, 51.
of personal pronouns, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
of relative pronouns, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Defective verbs, 160.

Definite article. See Articles.

Definite tenses, 148, 152.

Degree, adverbs of, 185.

Degrees. See Comparison.

Demonstrative adjectives, 102.
syntax of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Demonstrative pronouns, 90.

Dependent clause. See Subordinate clause.

Descriptive adjectives, 99.

Descriptive use of nouns, 26.

Dice, dies, 43.

Die by, for, from, of, with, 333.

Direct discourse, 320.

Direct object, vs. indirect, 48, 242.
retained with passive voice, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Distributive adjectives, 102.
syntax of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Distributive pronouns, 91.
syntax of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Double comparative. See Comparative.

Double possessive. See Case.

Drake, duck, 35.

Drank, drunk, 158.


Each, adjective, 102.
pronoun, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
syntax of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Each other, one another, 92, 299.

Eat (ĕt), 158.

Eaves, 42.

Either, as adjective, 102.
syntax of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
as a conjunction, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
syntax of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
as pronoun, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
syntax of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Elder, older, 110, 112.

Elements of the sentence, 234, 257.

Ellipsis, a source of error in pronouns, 280.
in a complex sentence, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

'Em, origin of, 62.

Empress, 34.

-En, added to plural, 39.
feminine suffix, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
plural suffix, original, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

English, literary, spoken, vulgar, 12.
periods of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Enlargement of predicate, 241.
of subject, object, complement, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

-Es original of possessive ending, 51.
plural suffix, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

-Ess, feminine suffix, 33.

Every, adjective, 102.
syntax of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Expect of, expect from, 334.

Expected to have gone, etc., 319.


Factitive object, 48, 235.

Farther, further, 110, 112, 189.

Feminine, 30.

Few, a few, 126.

First, 103, 112.

First two, two first, etc., 308.

Fish, fishes, 43.

For, redundant, with infinitive, used as a noun, 212, 238.
uses of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Foreign plurals, 45.

Former, the, adjective, 102.
pronoun, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

From, uses of, 212.

Further. See Farther.

Future tense, 147, 152.

Future perfect, 148, 152.


Gander, goose, 36.

Gender, "common gender," 31.
definition of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
distinct from sex, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
In English, compared to other languages, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
modes of marking in nouns, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
of personal pronouns, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
of relative pronouns, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Genii, geniuses, 43.

Gerund, distinguished from participle and verbal noun, 177.
types of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
in syntax, possessive case with, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Girl, 35.

Got, 159.

Government, definition of, kinds of, 275.

Grammar, basis of, 12.
definition of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
divisions of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
opinions about, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
province of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__


H, an before, 120.

Had better, had rather, 175.

Hanged, hung, 159.

He, she, it, 61.

His for its, 61.

Husband, 36.


I, personal pronoun, 60.

Imperative mood, 144.
of first person, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Imperative sentence, 231.

Imperfect participle, 173.

Indefinite adjective, 101.

Indefinite article. See Articles.

Indefinite pronoun, 93.

Indefinite use of you, your, 67.

Independent clause, 257.

Independent elements, 245.

Indexes, indices, 43.

Indicative mood, uses of, 136.

Indirect discourse, 320.

Indirect object. See Direct object.

Indirect questions. See Questions.

Infinitive, active, with passive meaning, 176.
not a vibe, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
syntax of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
uses of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

-Ing words, summary of, 178.

Interjections, 227.

Interrogative adjectives, 105.

Interrogative adverbs, 188.

Interrogative pronouns, 72.
declension of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
in indirect questions, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
syntax of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Interrogative sentence, 231, 233.

Intransitive verbs, 131.
made transitive, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Irregularities in syntax, 276.

Irregularly compared adjectives, 110.
adverbs, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

It, uses of, 67.

"It was me," etc., 63, 281.

Its, history of, 61.


Kind, these kind, etc., 303.

Kine, double plural, 39.

King, queen, 36.


Lady, lord, 36.

Last, latest, 110, 113.

Latter, the, adjective, 102, 113.
pronoun, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Lay, lie, 170.

Less, lesser, 110.

Lie. See Lay.

Like, syntax of, 227.
uses of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Literary English, 12.

Little, a little, 126.

Logic vs. form, in syntax, 276.

Logical subject and predicate, 245.

Lord. See Lady.

-Ly, words in, 190.


Madam, 36.

Manner, adverbs of, 185, 188.
conjunctions of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Many, comparison of, 110, 112.

Many a, 126.

Mapping out sentences, 256, 265.

Mare, 36.

Master, mistress, 34.

May, might, 160.

Means, construction of, 41.

Mighty as adverb, 187.

Mine, of mine, 64.

Modifier, adverb, position of, 325.

Modifiers. See Enlargement.

Mood, definition of, 135.
essential, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
indicative, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
subjunctive, 137-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

-Most, in superlatives, 113, 114, 189.

Much, comparison of, 110, 112, 189.

Must, 161.


Near, nearer, nigh, etc., 110, 112.

Negative, double, 326.

Neither, adjective, 102.
syntax of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
conjunction, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
syntax of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
pronoun, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
syntax of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Neuter nouns, definition of, 30.
or gender nouns, based on usage, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
two types of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

News, 41.

No in analysis, 246.

Nominative. See Case.

None, syntax of, 301.

Nor, 194, 328.

Not a, etc. 126.

Noun clause, 258.

Nouns, 17.
abstract, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
become partially abstract, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
become legit, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
formation of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
case of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
group, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
common, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
definition of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
descriptive, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
gender of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
how to analyze, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
types of, 17
material, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
become class terms, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
neuter, used as gender terms, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
number in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
once singular, now plural, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
other words used as, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
plural, how formed, 38-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
of abstract, 41
of compound, etc. __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
of foreign, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
of letters and numbers, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
of material, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
of proper, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
same as singular, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
two types of, 42
with titles, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
proper, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
become mainstream, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
syntax of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
use of possessive form of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
with the article, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
with different meanings in plural, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
with an indefinite article, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Nouns, with no singular, 42.
with one plural, two meanings, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
with plural form, singular meaning, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
with singular or plural construction, plural form, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Now as conjunction, 195, 196.

Number, definition of, etc., in nouns.
See Nouns.
in adjectives, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
in personal pronouns, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
in verbs, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Numeral adjectives, definite, 101.
distributive, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
indefinite, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Numeral pronouns, 92.


Object, adverbial, 48.
definition of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
direct and indirect, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
in analysis, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
of preposition. See Preposition.
modifiers of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
retained using a passive verb, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Objective case, adverbial, dative, 48, 242.
in casual speech, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
instead of subject, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
nominative instead of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
of nouns, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
of pronouns, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
syntax of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Of, uses of, 213.

Older. See Elder.

Omission of relative pronoun, 87, 293.

On, upon, uses of, 216.

One, definite numeral adjective, 101.
indefinite pronoun, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
possessive of, 93

One another. See Each other.

One (the), the other, as adjective, 103.
as pronoun, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Only, as conjunction, 194.
position of, as an adverb, 325

Order, a part of syntax, 275.
inverted, in analysis, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Ordinal adjectives, treatment of, 103.

Other with comparatives, 306.

Ought, 161.

Our, ours, 64.

Ourself, 69.

Oxen, 38.


Pains, 41.

Parsing, models for, 56, 117.
of adjectives, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
of adverbs, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
of articles, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
of conjunctions, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
of nouns, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
of prepositions, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
of pronouns, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
of relatives, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
of verb phrases, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
of verbals, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
of verbs, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
some idioms not parsed, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
what it is, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Part from, part with, 335.

Participial adjective, 100.

Participial phrase, 247.

Participle, definition of, 172.
different from other -ing words, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
types of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
types of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
syntax of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
uses of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Parts of speech, article included in, 119.
words used as different, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Passive voice, 134.

Peas, pease, 43.

Pence, pennies, 43.

Person, agreement of verb and subject in, 317.
of nouns, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
of pronouns, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
of verbs, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Personal pronoun, absolute use of, 63.
agreement of, with antecedent, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
as predicate nominative, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
case of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
compound, or reflexive, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
uses of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
definition of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
double possessive of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
'em and them, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
history of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
The goal of, for nominative in spoken English, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
syntax of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
table of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
triple possessive of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
uses of it, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Personification, of abstract nouns, 25.
of other nouns, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Phrase, definition of, 236.
types of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
infinitive, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
participial, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
prepositional, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Place, adverbs of, 185, 188.
conjunctions of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
prepositions of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Plural, of adjectives, 106.
syntax of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
of nouns. See Nouns.
of pronouns, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Politics, singular or plural, 41.

Positive degree. See Comparison.

Possessive, appositional, of nouns, 49.
as the antecedent of relative, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
double nouns, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
double, of pronouns. See Personal pronoun.
objective and subjective, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
of compound nouns, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
of indefinite pronoun, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
omission of s in singular, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
origin of 's, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
syntax of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
with modified noun omitted, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
with two items, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Predicate, complement of, 235.
complete, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
definition of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
logical vs. simple, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
modifiers of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Prefixes, gender shown by, 32.

Prepositions, certain, with certain words, 332.
classification of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
definition of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
followed by possessive form, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
by nominative case, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
how to analyze, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
objects of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
position of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
relations expressed by certain, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
the same words as other parts of speech, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__
syntax of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
uses of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__
various, meaning the same, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Present tense used as future, 147.

Pretty as adverb, 186.

Pronominal adjectives, interrogative, 105.
relative, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
what, exclamatory, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Pronouns, 58.
adjective, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
all, singular and plural, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
any
each other, one another, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
either, neither, with verbs, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
none, usually plural, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
someone else's, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
definition of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
how to analyze, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
indefinite, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
question, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
who as objective, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
personal, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
after than, as, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
antecedents of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
nominative and objective forms, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
nominative form of, after but, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
objective form of, for predicate nominative, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
objective form of, in exclamations, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
the possessive form of, as the antecedent of a relative, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
possessive form with gerund, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
relative, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
agreement of, with antecedent, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
anacoluthon with which, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
and who, and which, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
as, that, who, and which after same, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
how to analyze, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
omission of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
restrictive and non-restrictive, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
two relatives, same ancestry, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
syntax of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
usefulness of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Proper nouns. See Nouns.

Purpose, clauses of, 263.
conjunctions of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Quality, adjectives of, 99.

Quantity, adjectives of, 101.

Questions, direct and indirect, adverbs in, 188.
pronominal adjectives in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
pronouns included, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
indirect, subjunctive in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Quotations. See Direct discourse.


Rank, adjectives of same and different, 115.

Rather, 189.

Reflexive pronouns, history of, 69.
how it was formed, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Reflexive use of personal pronoun, 68.

Relative pronoun, 74.
but and as, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
different from interrogative, in indirect questions, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
function of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
indefinite or compound, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
omission of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
restricted use of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
syntax of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
use of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Result, clauses of, 263.
conjunctions of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Retained object, 242.

Riches, 42.


S, plural suffix


Download ePUB

If you like this ebook, consider a donation!